tpu dnp version 1 1 - abb group...tg 7.11.1.7-60 version 1.0 12/01 tpu2000/2000r dnp 3.0 automation...

TPU2000/2000R DNP 3.0 Automation Technical Guide

i

TPU2000/2000R DNP 3.0 AUTOMATION TECHNICALGUIDE

TG 7.11.1.7-60

Version 1.0

12/01


ii

ContentsSection 1 – IntroductionIntroduction....................................................................................................................................................................... 1

Section 2 – Communication Card Identification and Physical Port CharacteristicsCommunication Card Identification and Physical Port Characteristics ............................................................................ 4Communication Card Part Number Options..................................................................................................................... 6Unit Communication Card Verification ........................................................................................................................... 10

Section 3 – TPU2000 and TPU2000R Device ConnectivityTPU2000 and TPU2000R Device Connectivity.............................................................................................................. 12RS232 Interface Connectivity......................................................................................................................................... 12Port Isolation .................................................................................................................................................................. 12RS232 Handshaking Defined......................................................................................................................................... 13RS232 Cable Connectivity ............................................................................................................................................. 14RS485 Device Connectivity with the TPU2000 and TPU2000R.................................................................................... 15

Section 4 – TPU2000 and TPU2000R Device ParameterizationTPU2000 and TPU2000R Device Parameterization...................................................................................................... 19COM 0 Port (Front Port Configuration) .......................................................................................................................... 19COM Port 1 Option Settings (TPU2000R Only) [Catalog 588XXX00-XXX0 or 588XXX50-XXX0] ............................... 21COM Port 2 Option Settings (TPU2000R Only) [Catalog 588XXXX0-XXX0 or 588XXXX6-XXX4] .............................. 22COM Port 3 and AUX COM Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 23DNP 3.0 Configuration of COM 3 and AUX COM Port .................................................................................................. 24

Section 5 – DNP 3.0 Profile DescriptionDNP 3.0 Profile Description............................................................................................................................................ 30DNP V3.0 Implementation Table.................................................................................................................................... 33Cold and Warm Restart Capabilities .............................................................................................................................. 35Internal Indication (IIN) Field Data Returns.................................................................................................................... 35Binary Input Points (129 Indices Defined)...................................................................................................................... 37DNP Control Explained .................................................................................................................................................. 41Control Functions and Objects Defined ......................................................................................................................... 42Single Control Point Configuration ................................................................................................................................. 42Control Code Configuration............................................................................................................................................ 42Paired Point Operation ................................................................................................................................................... 43Physical Output Test Control (Index 0 Through 9)......................................................................................................... 44Trip Operate Control (Index 10-11) ................................................................................................................................ 44Reset Element Control (Index 12 Through 13) .............................................................................................................. 45ULO “Soft Point” Control (Index 14 Through 22) ........................................................................................................... 45Force Logical Input Configuration .................................................................................................................................. 46Point Forcing Control Functionality (Index 32 Through 127) ......................................................................................... 47Counter Access (6 Elements Defined) ........................................................................................................................... 52Analog Input Index Designation (168 Elements Defined) .............................................................................................. 53Metering Data (Index 0 Through 118, 351 Through 354 and 319 Through 350)........................................................... 53Demand Data (Index 119 Through 130) ........................................................................................................................ 53Fault Records (Differential Fault Index 131 Through 202, Through 240) and Operation Record (Index 316Through 318) Retrieval................................................................................................................................................... 54User Definable Registers (Indices 319 Through 350) ................................................................................................... 58Analog Data Index Definition ......................................................................................................................................... 58Class Data Parameterization.......................................................................................................................................... 66Class 3 Data Masking .................................................................................................................................................... 69DNP Event Masking Worksheet (sample)...................................................................................................................... 73DNP Event Masking Worksheet..................................................................................................................................... 74


iii

Time Synchronization..................................................................................................................................................... 74Rapid Analog Reporting ................................................................................................................................................ 75Register Scaling and Re-Mapping and User Definable Register (UDR) Configuration Process ................................... 78TPU2000 and TPU2000R Internal Operation ................................................................................................................ 79ABB Data Type Definitions............................................................................................................................................. 80Register Scaling Investigated......................................................................................................................................... 81Scaling Option and Destination Register Length Options Explained............................................................................. 83Destination Register Length Justification Options Explained......................................................................................... 84Source Register Address and Source Register Type Explained ................................................................................... 84Source Scale Range and Source Scale Type Selections Explained ............................................................................. 99TPU2000 and 2000R User Definable Register Defaults.............................................................................................. 100

Section 6 – DNP 3.0 Communication TroubleshootingDNP 3.0 Communication Troubleshooting................................................................................................................... 103Appendix A - Revision History...................................................................................................................................... 104Appendix B – TPU Standard 10 Byte Protocol Document ........................................................................................... 107Appendix C - Revision History ..................................................................................................................................... 198Appendix D - Modem Connectivity............................................................................................................................... 200Appendix E - Telebyte Converter ................................................................................................................................. 244Appendix F - B&B Converter ........................................................................................................................................ 251

The following are trademarks of AEG Schneider Automation Inc.Modbus , Modbus Plus , ModiconIBM , OS 2 , and IBM PC are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.The following are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation:Windows NT Windows 3.1Windows 95 Windows 98Hyperterminal MS-DOSMicrosoft USDATA is a registered trademark of the USDATA Corporation.

INCOM and Standard Ten Byte Protocol are registered trademarks of Asea Brown Boveri Incorporated.


iv

Tables

Section 1 – IntroductionTable 1-1. Protocol Capabilities Listed by Product Type ................................................................................................ 2

Section 2 – Communication Card Identification and Physical Port CharacteristicsTable 2-1. TPU2000 Communication Options ................................................................................................................ 7Table 2-2. TPU2000 Communication Card Matrix for Unit 488 M R X D C – Z SSSQ................................................... 8Table 2-3. TPU2000R Communication Options.............................................................................................................. 8Table 2-4. TPU2000R Communication Card Matrix for Unit X X X Y Z – X X X X Q .................................................... 9Table 2-5. TPU2000R Communication Card Matrix for Unit 588 X X X Y Z – X X X X Q .............................................. 9

Section 3 – TPU2000 and TPU2000R Device ConnectivityTable 3-1. Physical Interface Options ........................................................................................................................... 12

Section 4 – TPU2000 and TPU2000R Device ParameterizationTable 4-1. TPU2000 and TPU2000R COM Port 0 Front Panel Interface Parameters ................................................. 19Table 4-2. WinECP Communication Port Settings........................................................................................................ 21Table 4-3. COM Port 1 and COM Port 2 WinECP Port Settings................................................................................... 22Table 4-4. Valid Parameter Selection for Standard Ten Byte and DNP 3.0 Protocols ................................................. 24Table 4-5. Class Masking Table for DNP 3.0................................................................................................................ 25

Section 5 – DNP 3.0 Profile DescriptionTable 5-1. DNP 3.0 Object/Variations Supported for the TPU2000/2000R .................................................................. 33Table 5-2. Trouble Bit 6 Instance Occurrence Definitions ............................................................................................ 36Table 5-3. Binary Input Index Definition Table.............................................................................................................. 37Table 5-4. Binary Output Control Indices ...................................................................................................................... 48Table 5-5. Counter Index Assignment........................................................................................................................... 52Table 5-6. Event Record Definition Type ...................................................................................................................... 55Table 5-7. Analog Data Index Definition ....................................................................................................................... 58Table 5-8. Class 3 Event Masking Settings .................................................................................................................. 71Table 5-9. Register Scaling Queries ............................................................................................................................. 82Table 5-10. Min/Max Ranges for Scaled Numbers Depending Upon Scale Option and Bit Length Selected.............. 83Table 5-11. Register Scaling and Remapping Quantities and Associated Indexes...................................................... 85Table 5-12. Default Scaling and Remapping Register Assignments .......................................................................... 100


v

FiguresSection 1 – IntroductionFigure 1-1. Transformer Protection Unit Product Family ................................................................................................ 2

Section 2 – Communication Card Identification and Physical Port CharacteristicsFigure 2-1. COM 0 Port Location .................................................................................................................................... 4Figure 2-2. Physical Optional Communication Card Port Locations............................................................................... 4Figure 2-3. TPU2000 and TPU2000R Communication Cards ........................................................................................ 5Figure 2-4. Physical Communication Card Location for the TPU2000 ........................................................................... 5Figure 2-5. Physical Communication Card Location for the TPU2000R......................................................................... 6

Section 3 – DPU2000, DPU1500R and DPU2000R Device ConnectivityFigure 3-1. Point to Point Architecture Using RS232.................................................................................................... 13Figure 3-2. Multi-Drop Topology Using RS232 ............................................................................................................. 14Figure 3-3. DPU2000(R), TPU2000(R), or GPU2000(R) to PC Cable 9 Pin to 9 Pin-out ............................................ 14Figure 3-4. Connection of a DB 25 Connector to a TPU2000 or TPU2000R ............................................................... 15Figure 3-5. RS485 2 Wire Connection Diagram............................................................................................................ 16Figure 3-6. RS485 Terminator Resistor Diagram ......................................................................................................... 17Figure 3-7. Location of RS485 Resistor Configuration Jumpers in the TPU2000R...................................................... 17

Section 4 – TPU2000 and TPU2000R Device ParameterizationFigure 4-1. Initial WinECP Communication Configuration Screen................................................................................ 20Figure 4-2. Communication Port Setup Screen ............................................................................................................ 21Figure 4-3. COM Port 1 WinECP Setting Screen ......................................................................................................... 22Figure 4-4. WinECP COM Port 2 Communication Screen........................................................................................... 23Figure 4-5. TPU2000R Communication Capability Chart ............................................................................................. 23Figure 4-6. TPU2000 Communication Capability Chart................................................................................................ 24

Section 5 – DNP 3.0 Profile DescriptionFigure 5-1. DNP 3.0 Device IIN Bit Definition Assignment ........................................................................................... 36Figure 5-2. DNP Control Field Bit Designation.............................................................................................................. 43Figure 5-3. WinECP Forced Logical Input Mapping Screen ......................................................................................... 46Figure 5-4. Differential and Event Record Layout......................................................................................................... 54Figure 5-5. Through Fault and Harmonic Restraint Fault Layout.................................................................................. 55Figure 5-6. Parameter 5 DNP 3.0 Group Mask............................................................................................................. 67Figure 5-7. Parameter 6 Group Mask ........................................................................................................................... 67Figure 5-8. Parameter 7 Group Mask ........................................................................................................................... 68Figure 5-9. Parameter 8 Group Mask ........................................................................................................................... 68Figure 5-10. Settings Menu Access Screen for the TPU2000/2000R .......................................................................... 69Figure 5-11. Settings Screen ........................................................................................................................................ 70Figure 5-12. Miscellaneous Settings Submenu Screen ................................................................................................ 70Figure 5-13. 32 Parameter Configuration Screen ......................................................................................................... 71Figure 5-14. Time Synchronization Parameterization Requirements ........................................................................... 75Figure 5-14A. Miscellaneous Settings Screen .............................................................................................................. 76Figure 5-14B. Miscellaneous Parameter Configuration Subscreens ............................................................................ 77Figure 5-14C. Miscellaneous Parameter 17 Setting ..................................................................................................... 77Figure 5-14D. Miscellaneous Parameter 18 Setting ..................................................................................................... 78Figure 5-15. Register Scaling Methodology .................................................................................................................. 80Figure 5-16. Change Configuration Settings Menu Illustrating CT and VT Configuration ............................................ 80Figure 5-17. User DefinableRegister Configuration Screen.......................................................................................... 81Figure 5-18. Popup Menu Configuration Screen for Data Type Register Selections ................................................... 82Figure 5-19. Relationship Between Scaled and Unscaled Formats for Offset Bipolar, Bipolar, Unipolar andNegative Unipolar Scaling Selection in the TPU2000 and 2000R ................................................................................. 83Figure 5-20. Bit Justification Notation ........................................................................................................................... 84Figure 5-21. Register Scaling Default Example .......................................................................................................... 101Figure 5-22. Scaling Example for Voltage Mapped Registers .................................................................................... 102


vi


1

Section 1 - Introduction

With the introduction of a microprocessor based protective relay, today’s relay protection engineer must befamiliar with topics outside of traditional relaying schemes. It is intended that the production of this manual willenable the relay engineer to understand the principles of a microprocessor-based relay’s inclusion in a substationautomation project.

Substation automation is heavily dependent upon integration of the appropriate components to allow reporting ofmetering and event data. The foundation of a successful automation solution is thorough engineering of acommunication system. The Transmission Protection Unit (TPU) is the culmination of intensive design efforts andrelaying experience, which combine protective relaying and communication capabilities at an economical price.Through the evolution of protective relays, it was decided that a special manual needed to serve today’s powerautomation specialist.

This manual is intended to give the reader an in-depth explanation of the communication interfaces available withthe Transmission Protection Unit. Successful integration of microprocessor based relays like the TPU dependson not just understanding the bits and bytes of a particular protocol. It is the inherent understanding andapplication of such esoteric topics as physical interfaces, real time control, manufacturer independent deviceintegration, throughput vs. speed of communication, … which influences the success of an automation project.

In many cases the individual performing the SCADA integration is not a relay protection engineer. This manualdeparts from the standard type of relay manual in that each data type is explained and each bit, byte and wordmeaning is explained. Several application examples are given within each section. A description of each protocolcommand is illustrated for the benefit of the user. Appendices are included detailing application notes, whichaugment the text. An explanation of the product’s physical interfaces and the connectivity required is explored indepth. Explanations of register’s uses to increase overall throughput are also explored. Throughput is always anissue when the system is commissioned. Understanding ways to improve the system data update is explained.

Several steps are required to permit successful communication between devices:1. Identification of the hardware components (Section 2)2. Correct physical connection between devices (Section 3).3. Correct device configuration of port protocol and operation parameters (Section 4).4. Generation and interpretation of the protocol command strings (Section 5).

The following sections shall explore the following procedures in depth when establishing a communicationautomation system, utilizing the TPU2000 and TPU2000R.

The TPU2000 and TPU2000R all have networking capabilities. Figure 1-1 shows the general look of the units asviewed from the front.


2

CC EE

STATUS

TARGETS

XXXXXXX XXXXX XX XXXXX XXXXX


XXXX XX XX XX XX

XXXXXXX XXXXX XX XXXXX XXXXXXXXX X

XXXXX XXXXX XXXX XXXXXXX XXXX XXX XXXXXX XX XXXX XXX XXXXX XXXXX

DPU2000

E

C

ABCNRST

XX XXXXX XXXX XX XXXXXXXXXXX XXXX XXXXX XXXXXXX

STATUS TARGETS

TPU 2000

TPU 2000R

Figure 1–1. Transformer Protection Unit Product Family

The products differentiate themselves as listed in Table 1-1. Table 1-1 lists the available protocols within therelays. Standard Ten Byte is an ABB protocol which is within each of the protective relays. Standard Ten Byte isan asynchronous byte oriented protocol. The programming software (ECP [DOS External CommunicationProgram] and WIN ECP [Windows External Communication Program]) allows configuration of the relay through aport on the units. Standard Ten Byte is available through an RS232 or RS485 port on the DPU.

INCOM is an ABB protocol, which is a derivative of Standard Ten Byte. It is a modulated synchronous bit streamusing the same commands as in the Standard Ten Byte protocol. INCOM is available on each of the protectiverelays as indicated within Table 1-1. Its physical interface is proprietary in that a modulated signal is expected bythe TPU node.

Modbus is an industrial de-facto standard protocol which has been widely embraced by the utility industry.Modbus has two emulation’s, RTU, which is a synchronous protocol and ASCII which is an asynchronousprotocol. Modbus uses only one command set, but two emulation’s. Modbus strengths are that it uses astandard RS232 or RS485 interface to interconnect nodes on a network.

Modbus Plus is a hybrid protocol refinement of Modbus. Modbus Plus has a proprietary physical interface whichis available to device manufacturers through a connectivity program with Groupe Schneider. The interface offersgreater speed and communication features than Modbus.

DNP 3.0 is a protocol, which has its roots deep in the utility industry. It is an asynchronous protocol that allowsconnectivity through a standard RS232 or RS485 port. It includes such defined capabilities as file transfer, andtimestamping as part of the protocol, which makes it desirable for a utility implementation.

Table 1–1. Protocol Capabilities Listed by Product Type

PRODUCT PROTOCOL NOTESTPU2000 Standard Ten Byte Addressable Front Com, Com 1 and Aux Com

INCOM 2 Wire (AND SHIELD) Current Injection Physical InterfaceModbus RS232 or RS485DNP 3.0 RS232 or RS485

TPU2000R Standard Ten Byte RS232 or RS485INCOM 2 Wire (AND SHIELD) Current Injection Physical InterfaceModbus RS232 or RS485Modbus Plus Proprietary Current Injection Physical InterfaceDNP 3.0 RS232 or RS485


3

Within this document, only DNP 3.0 protocol shall be covered in depth. Standard 10 Byte, INCOM Modbus, and Modbus Plus shall be explained superficially. If one would need to reference the specific details of Standard TenByte or INCOM protocols, please reference the engineering specifications concerning these topics in Appendix Bof this document.


4

Section 2 - Communication Card Identification and Physical PortCharacteristics

The communication connector at the front of the unit (near the target LED’s) communicates to the ECP or WINECP configuration program. This communication port is referred to as COM 0 and is common to both theTPU2000 and TPU2000R.The protocol emulated through this front port is an addressable emulation of STANDARD 10 BYTE PROTOCOL. With the addition of a communication card option, the unit emulates theprotocols described in Table 1-1. The inclusion of optional communication boards enables the rear ports (asshown in Figure 2-2) of their respective units.

CC EE

STATUS

TARGETS



XXXX XX XX XX XX

XXXXXXX XXXXX XX XXXXX XXXXXXXXX X

XXXXX XXXXX XXXX XXXXXXX XXXX XXX XXXXXX XX XXXX XXX XXXXX XXXXX

DPU2000

E

C

ABCNRST

XX XXXXX XXXX XX XXXXXXXXXXX XXXX XXXXX XXXXXXX

STATUS TARGETS

TPU 2000

TPU 2000R

COM PORT 0- STANDARD 10 BYTE

Product Identification Label

Figure 2-1. COM 0 Port Location

Com 3Com 1 Com 2

AUX COM

TPU 2000RChassis(Rear View)Horizontal Mounting

RS 232C

TPU 2000Chassis(Rear View)Horizontal Mounting

AU

X C

OM

Model xxxxct xx pt xx

Model xxxxct xx pt xx

Unit Identification Label

Unit Identification Label

Figure 2-2. Physical Optional Communication Card Port Locations

The TPU2000 and TPU2000R differ in physical appearance. The communication cards inserted within the unitalso differ in form, fit and construction. A typical TPU2000 and TPU2000R’s communication card is illustrated inFigure 2-3 of this document. As shown, the TPU2000R has two physical interface connectors built onto the card.The form factor of these connectors are industry common DB 9 and “PHOENIX 10 POSITION” connectors. The“PHOENIX 10 POSITION” connector has a capacity to land two 18 wire gauge conductors at each position. TheTPU2000 has the communication port connectors fixed as part of the chassis. The physical card slot for housing


5

the communication card is marked on the chassis as “COM”. The communication card mates with internalconnectors allowing electrical and physical connections for the communication card and chassis mountedphysical connectors.

AUX/COM3.0

AUX/COM3.0

12345

TPU 2000 R COMMUNICATION CARD (TYPICAL)

TPU 2000 COMMUNICATION CARD (TYPICAL)

Figure 2-3. TPU2000 and TPU2000R Communication Cards

The TPU2000 Communication card is housed within a removable chassis. The communication card mates withedge card connectors located at the front and bottom of the removable chassis. Figure 2-3 illustrates themounting location of the TPU2000 Communication card. Figure 2-4 illustrates the communication port locationsof the TPU2000, which may be configured to communicate with the protocols described in section 1 of thisdocument.

The TPU2000R mates with the unit’s main board to enable/disable Com Ports 1,2,3,and AUX COM. Thecommunication cards physical interfaces protrude through the sheet metal back plate housing of the unit andallow for access to the physical connection ports. Figure 2-5 illustrates the location of the communication boardassembly.

AUX/COM3.0

STATUS

TARGETS



XXXX XX XX XX XX

XXXXXXX XXXXX XX XXXXX XXXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXX XXXXX

XX XXXX XXX XXXXXX XX XXXX XXX XXXXX XXXXX

DPU2000

CC EE

TPU 2000 Draw OutChassis (SIDE VIEW)

Draw Out Case ( Rear View) TPU 2000

COM I/O AUX

TPU 2000 COMMUNICATION CARD

Card CageCover

TPU 2000 ( FRONT VIEW)

Figure 2-4. Physical Communication Card Location for the TPU2000


6

TPU 2000R COMMUNICATION CARD

TPU 2000R

DRAW OUT CHASSIS

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATIONLABELS

AUX/COM3.0

12345

SIDE VIEW

TPU 2000R

TOP VIEW

Figure 2-5. Physical Communication Card Location for the TPU2000R

CAUTION: REMOVAL OF THE DRAW OUT CHASSIS COMPONENTS WILL DE-ENERGIZE THEELECTRONICS OF THE UNIT THEREBY PREVENTING SYSTEM PROTECTION. EXTREME CARE MUST BETAKEN WHEN REMOVING THE ELECTRONIC DRAWER. FROM THE CHASSIS SINCE ALL PROTECTIVERELAY FUNCTIONALITY WILL BE TERMINATED.

CAUTION: IF THE UNIT IS UNDER POWER- THE CT’s ARE SHORTED INTERNALLY THROUGH THECHASSIS INERTNAL CONNECTORS. HOWEVER, EXTREME CAUTION MUST BE EXERCIZED WHENREMOVING THE DRAW OUT CASE FROM AN ENERGIZED UNIT. ABB TAKES NO RESPONSIBILITY FORACTIONS RESULTING FROM AVOIDANCE OF THIS WARNING AND CAUTION NOTICE.

CAUTION: SENSITIVE ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS ARE CONTAINED WITHIN THE TPU 2000 AND TPU2000R UNITS. THE INDIVIDUAL REMOVING THE COMPONENT BOARDS FROM THE FIXED CHASSISMUST BE GROUNDED TO THE SAME POTENTIAL AS THE UNIT. IF THE OPERATOR AND THE CASE ARENOT CONNECTED TO THE SAME GROUND POTENTIAL, STATIC ELECTRICITY MAY BE CONDUCTEDFROM THE OPERATOR TO THE INTERNAL COMPONENTS RESULTING IN DAMAGE TO THE UNIT.

Communication Card Part Number Options

The TPU2000 and TPU2000R may be ordered with a variety of communication options as listed in Table 2-1.The communication option card installed in the unit is identified by the part number located on the unit or identifiedthrough the ECP, WIN ECP or Front Panel (LCD) interfaces.The protocols available are:

� STANDARD TEN BYTE – This is an ABB specific ASCII encoded (asynchronous) 10 bytecommunication protocol. It allows attainment of all relay parameters. It is the base unit protocol in whichconfiguration programs such as ECP, and WinECP communicate to the TPU2000 or TPU2000R. It isthe protocol standard for the COM 0 communication port of the TPU2000 and TPU2000R. Standard 10Byte does not utilize a proprietary hardware physical interface. Appendix B includes the TPU2000 andTPU2000R Standard 10 Byte Protocol Document.

� INCOM – This is an ABB Specific bit oriented (synchronous) protocol. INCOM uses the samecommands as Standard Ten Byte, but its inherent bandwidth utilization is far greater than Standard TenByte is in that no data encoding is required. INCOM only defined two baud rates 9600 and 1200.INCOM is a proprietary interface in that its physical presentation to the communication medium isdependent upon the baud rate selected. 1200 Baud uses current injection baseband signalpresentation, whereas 9600-Baud implements a phase shift frequency in its representation of digital 1


7

and 0 values. Appendix B includes the TPU2000 and TPU2000R Standard Ten Byte Protocoldocument which describes INCOM in further detail.

� DNP 3.0 – This is a Utility industry standard protocol allowing communication between a host andslave devices. DNP 3.0 is a byte oriented (asynchronous) protocol which is physical interface deviceindependent. The protocol allows for time synchronization, and unsolicited event reporting. It is a verypopular protocol in utility installations. The discussion of DNP 3.0 protocol is included in this document.

� SPACOM – This is an ABB Specific byte oriented (asynchronous) protocol common in Europe. It is aMaster-Slave protocol which is implemented on a variety of physical interfaces. SPACOM protocol isnot covered within this document.

� MODBUS – This is an Industrial standard. The protocol allows a single master device tocommunicate with several slave devices. It has gained wide acceptance in that a great majority of utilitydevices incorporate Modbus protocol. Modbus Protocol is physical interface independent. ModbusProtocol has two emulation’s RTU (a synchronous bit oriented emulation) and ASCII (an asynchronousbyte oriented emulation). The TPU2000 and TPU2000R may be configured for both emulations. Thediscussion of Modbus protocol is included in this document. Please reference the TPU2000 andTPU2000R Modbus/Modbus Plus Automation Technical Guide TG 7.11.1.7-61 for a discussion of thisprotocol.

� MODBUS PLUS – This protocol is also and industrial standard. Modbus Plus allows up to 64 devicesto communicate among each using token passing techniques. The Modbus Plus protocol is fast (1megabaud) and uses several advanced techniques to maximize bandwidth. The physical interface toModbus Plus is proprietary and regulated by Groupe Schneider. Modbus Plus is the incorporation ofModbus commands on a HDLC - like protocol using a current injection interface. The discussion ofModbus Plus protocol is not included in this document. Please reference the TPU2000 and TPU2000RModbus/Modbus Plus Automation Technical Guide TG 7.11.1.7-61 for a discussion of this protocol.(AVAILABLE ON THE TPU2000R ONLY).

� PG&E – This protocol is a bit oriented asynchronous protocol allowing a Master Device tocommunicate with several slave devices. PG&E protocol is a Utility protocol. The protocol is notdescribed in this document (AVAILABLE ON THE TPU2000R ONLY).

The device configuration for the TPU2000 is illustrated in Tables 2-1 and 2-2 illustrating the configuration options.The generic part number for the TPU2000 is 488 M R X D C – Z SSS Q Deciphering the part numbers: found onthe labels of the unit or obtained through ECP or the FRONT PANEL LCD INTERFACE, allows easy identificationof the communication options found on the unit.

Table 2-1. TPU2000 Communication Options

IF PARTNUMBER

POSITION “Z” IS

THE TPU2000 HAS AN INSTALLED OPTIONFor unit 488 M R X D C – Z SSS Q(COMMUNICATION PHYSICAL INTERFACE OPTION)

1 RS232 (COM 3) Isolated Port Enabled2 RS485 (AUX COM PORT) and RS 232 (COM 3) Ports Enabled.3 INCOM (AUX COM PORT). Enabled4 RS485 (AUX COM PORT) Ports Enabled.

IF PARTNUMBER

POSITION “Q” IS

THE TPU2000 HAS AN INSTALLED OPTIONFor unit 488 M R X D C – Z SSS Q(COMMUNICATION PHYSICAL INTERFACE OPTION)

0 STANDARD TEN BYTE1 DNP 3.02 SPACOM4 MODBUS


8

Table 2-2. TPU2000 Communication Card Matrix for Unit 488 M R X D C – Z SSS Q

“Q”Digit

COM 3 AUX COMRS485

INCOM IRIG B

1 0 Standard 10 ByteRS232


Standard 10 Byte AVAILABLE

2 1 Standard 10 Byte or DNP 3.0 RS232

Standard 10 Byteor DNP 3.0


SPACOM

2 4 Standard 10 Byte orModbus RS232

Standard 10 Byteor Modbus

AVAILABLE

3 0 AVAILABLE AVAILABLE4 0 Standard 10 Byte AVAILABLE AVAILABLE4 1 DNP 3.0 AVAILABLE4 2 SPACOM4 4 Modbus AVAILABLE AVAILABLE5 0 Standard 10 Byte

The device configuration for the TPU2000R is illustrated in Tables 2-3 and 2-4 illustrating the configurationoptions. The generic part number for the TPU2000 is 588 X X X Y Z – X X X X Q. Deciphering the part numbers:found on the labels of the unit or obtained through ECP or the FRONT PANEL LCD INTERFACE, allows easyidentification of the communication options found on the unit.

Table 2-3. TPU2000R Communication Options

IF PARTNUMBERPOSITION

“Y” IS

THE TPU2000R HAS AN INSTALLED OPTIONFor unit 588 X X X Y Z – X X X X Q (X = Don’t Care) (FRONT PANEL INTERFACE OPTION)

0 Horizontal Unit Mounting – NO FRONT PANEL LCD INTERFACE1 Horizontal Unit Mounting – FRONT PANEL LCD INTERFACE IS INCLUDED5 Vertical Unit Mounting – NO FRONT PANEL LCD INTERFACE6 Vertical Unit Mounting – FRONT PANEL LCD INTERFACE IS INCLUDED


“Z” IS

THE TPU2000R HAS AN INSTALLED OPTIONFor unit 588 X X X Y Z – X X X X Q ( X = Don’t Care) (COMMUNICATION PHYSICAL INTERFACE OPTION)

0 RS232 (COM 1) Non-isolated Port is active on the unit..1 RS232 (COM 2) Isolated Port Only is active on the unit (SEE NOTE).2 RS485 (AUX COM PORT) and RS232 (COM 3) Ports on Option Card.3 INCOM (AUX COM PORT) and RS485 (AUX COM PORT) Ports on Option Card.4 INCOM (AUX COM PORT) and RS485 (AUX COM PORT) Ports on Option Card.5 RS485 (AUX COM PORT) Port On Option Card.6 Modbus Plus Port (COM 3) on the Option Card.7 Modbus Plus (COM 3) and RS485 (AUX COM PORT) on the Option Card.8 RS485 (COM 3) and RS485 (AUX COM PORT) Ports on the Option Card.

NOTE: * = If the option denoted in part number position “Y” is a 0 or 5, the COM 2port is enabled, If the option denoted in part number position “Y” is a 2 or 6 theCOM 2 Port is disabled.


“Q” IS

THE TPU2000R HAS AN INSTALLED OPTIONFor unit 588 X X X Y Z – X X X X Q (X = Don’t Care) (COMMUNICATION PHYSICAL INTERFACE OPTION)


9

0 STANDARD TEN BYTE1 DNP 3.02 SPACOM3 PG&E4 MODBUS /Modbus Plus(Depending on hardware interface selected in Position Z)

Table 2-4. TPU2000R Communication Card Matrix for Unit 588 X X X Y Z – X X X X Q

“Z”Digit

“Q”Digit

COM 1RS232

COM 2RS232

COM 3 AUX COMRS485

INCOM IRIG B

0 0 Note 1 Standard10 Byte

1 0 Note 1 Standard 10 ByteRS232


Standard 10 Byte AVAILABLE

2 1 Note 1 Standard 10 Byteor DNP 3.0 RS232



SPACOM

2 4 Note 1 Standard 10 Byteor Modbus RS232


AVAILABLE

3 0 Note 1 AVAILABLE AVAILABLE4 0 Note 1 Standard 10 Byte AVAILABLE AVAILABLE4 1 Note 1 DNP 3.0 AVAILABLE4 2 Note 1 SPACOM4 4 Note 1 Modbus AVAILABLE AVAILABLE5 0 Note 1 Standard 10 Byte6 4 Note 1 Standard

10 ByteModbus Plus

7 4 Note 1 Modbus Plus Standard 10 Byte8 0 Note 1 Standard 10 Byte

RS 485Standard 10 Byte AVAILABLE

8 1 Note 1 Standard 10 Byteor DNP 3.0 RS485


8 4 Note 1 Standard 10 Byteor Modbus RS 485


AVAILABLE

NOTE 1- Available if Digit “Y” is 0 or 5. Front Panel Interface not included. Unavailable if Digit “Y” is 1 or 6.

The visual identification of a TPU2000R communication card is completed through visual inspection of the cardcomponent location and of the part number of the base printed circuit board as illustrated in Table 2.

Table 2-5. TPU2000R Communication Card Matrix for Unit 588 X X X Y Z – X X X X Q

“Z”Digit

Raw Circuit Board PartNumber

Components To Look For

1 COMM 485 PCB613709-005 REV0

Parts near black 9 pin 232 connector are populated

2 2000R AUX COM613708-005 REV0

Parts in middle of board are not populated -2 DC/DCConverters (U1 & U8)

3 AUX COM613708-005 REV0

Only parts in middle of board - no DC/DCConverters, has Transformer T2

4 AUX COM613708-005 REV0

Parts near black 9 pin 232 connector are notpopulated - only 1 DC/DC Converter (U1)

5 COMM 485 PCB613709-005 REV0

Parts near green connector are populated


10

6 MODBUS COMM PCB613720-002 REV1

RS-485 option parts NOT populated (area insidedotted border)

7 MODBUS COMM PCB613720-002 REV1

Fully populated

8 AUX & AUX613755-002 REV0

Fully populated

Unit Communication Card Verification

There are several ways to identify the communication cards inserted in the TPU2000 or TPU2000R units. Someof the methods require the unit to be powered up. Other methods require the unit to be taken out of service.

To identify the unit part number of the present TPU2000 or TPU2000R, the following steps may be executed tofacilitate unit identification.

1. With the unit energized:

� If the unit has a Front Panel LCD (Refer to Tables 2-1 through 2-4 inclusive for identification)Interface1. Depress the “E” Key.2. Depress the Arrow Down Key “↓ ” once to highlight the SETTINGS field. Depress the “E”

Key.3. Depress the Arrow Down Key “↓ ” twice to highlight the UNIT INFORMATION field.

Depress the “E” key.4. The Serial Number and Catalog Number shall be displayed. Fill in Table 1 with the

required data.

� If the Unit does not have a Front Panel LCD Interface (Refer to Tables 2-1 through 2-4inclusive for identification) and the user has DOS ECP or if the user wishes not to use theunit’s Front Panel LCD Interface.1. Start ECP.2. Select the appropriate communication parameters so that the personal computer

attached to the TPU2000 or TPU2000(R) will communicate via the null modem cableconnection. ( See Figures 4-1 and 4-2 in Section 4 )

3. Depress enter to allow attachment of the unit.4. The Serial Number and Catalog Number shall be displayed. Fill in Table 1 with the

required data.

� If the Unit does not have a Front Panel LCD (Refer to Tables 2-1 through 2-4 inclusive foridentification) Interface and the user has WIN ECP or if the user wishes not to use the unit’sFront Panel Interface.1. Start WIN ECP.2. Depress the “DIRECT ACCESS” selection button presented in the pop-up window.3. Depress the “CONNECT” option selection presented within the pop-up window.4. Select the “HELP” menu option at the top right-hand section of the menu bar.5. Select the Drag-Down menu item “UNIT INFORMATION”.6. A pop-up window shall appear with the Serial Number and Catalog Number. Fill in Table

1 with the required data.

2. At the back of the TPU2000 or the TPU2000R chassis, in the left-hand lower section of the unit, a label shallappear indicating the serial number and model number of the unit. It should match the data presented in theECP, WIN ECP or Front Panel Interface (FPI) menus. If it does not, please contact the factory.

3. As a final check, if the TPU2000 or TPU2000R can be powered-down or if protection can be interrupted,loosen the front panel screws at the front of the unit. Remove the product component drawer from thechassis. Face the front panel interface, and rotate the board so that the semiconductor components aredirectly visible. On the backside of the metal panel supporting the Front Panel Interface, a label shall be


11

available indicating the serial number and model number. These numbers should match those obtained insteps 1 and 2. If they do not, please contact the factory.


12

Section 3 - TPU2000 and TPU2000R Device Connectivity

Communication between devices is only possible through connectivity of the units through a physical mediainterface. There are two physical interface types on a TPU2000R and a TPU2000. Those physical interfaces are:

� RS232 (isolated and non-isolated)� RS485 (isolated).

Table 3-1 lists the characteristics for each of the port types.

Table 3-1. Physical Interface Options

TPU2000R TPU2000 NotesCOM 0 RS232 NON

ISOLATEDRS232 ISOLATED Front Port Standard 10 Byte

COM 1 RS232 NONISOLATED

Standard 10 Byte Only

COM 2 RS232 NONISOLATED

Standard 10 Byte Only

COM 3 RS232 Isolated/RS485Isolated or ModbusPlus

RS232 Isolated TPU2000R – Communication OptionCard Determines Physical Interface

AUXCOM

RS 485 (Isolated)and/or INCOM

RS485 (Isolated) and/orINCOM

Physical Interface Dependent onCommunication Option Card InterfaceSelected

RS232 Interface Connectivity

RS232 is perhaps the most utilized and least understood communication interface in use. RS232 is sometimesmisinterpreted to be a protocol; it is in fact a physical interface. A physical interface is the hardware and networkphysical media used to propagate a signal between devices. Examples of physical interfaces are RS232 seriallink, printer parallel port, current loop, V. 24, IEEE Bus… Examples of network media are, twisted copper pair,coaxial cable, free air…

RS232 gained widespread acceptance due to its ability to connect to another RS232 device or modem. A modemis a device, which takes a communication signal and modulates it into another form. Common forms of modemsinclude telephone, fiber optic, microwave, and radio frequency. Modem connectivity allows attachment ofmultiple devices on a communication network or allows extension of communication distances in a network withtwo nodes. Physical connection of two devices or more than two devices require differing approaches. Figure 3-1illustrates a topology using two devices (point to point topology). Figure 3-2 illustrates a multi-drop topologybetween many nodes. RS232 was designed to allow two devices to communicate without using intermediatedevices.

Port Isolation

Network installation within a substation requires special considerations. A substation environment is harsh in thathigh levels of electromagnetic interference are present. Additional ground currents are present in suchinstallations. RS232 is an unbalanced network in that all signals are referenced to a common ground. Onlonger cable runs, the potential of the signals at the sending device can be significantly lower than at the receivingend due to electrical interference and induced ground current. This increases with long runs of cable and use ofunshielded cable. ABB’s Substation Automation and Protection Division recommends the length of RS232 cablebe less than 10 feet (3 meters) for an un-isolated port and that the cable be shielded. Internal to a typical device,the RS 232 transceivers are referenced to the electronic components internal ground. Any electrical interferencecould be coupled through the chip set and fed back to the device. Typical isolation ratings of a non-isolated portcould be as low as 1 volt. Such a port could allow electrical feedback of noise to the electronics for any signalinterference over 1 volt.


13

Coms 0 through 2 on DPU/TPU/GPU units are non–isolated. However an RS232 implementation on Com 3 usesopto-isolation technology which increases electrical isolation from the port to the devices internal circuitry to 2.3kV. It is highly desirable to utilize this port in connection to devices in longer cable runs and dedicatedcommunication networks. RS232 isolated ports are limited in connection distance for a maximum of fifty feet.

EC

Point to PointTopology

TPU 2000R

Personal Computer

WINECP or ECP Software

Com 0

Figure 3-1. Point to Point Architecture Using RS232

RS 232 Handshaking Defined

Handshaking is the ability of the device to control the flow of data between devices. There are two types of“handshaking”, hardware and software. Hardware handshaking involves the manipulation of the RTS (Request toSend) and CTS (Clear to Send) card control signal lines allowing data communication direction and data flowrates to be controlled by the DTE device. Also the flow is controlled by the DTR (Data Terminal Ready) signalwhich allows the DCE operation.

Software handshaking involves the data flow control by sending specific characters in the data streams. Toenable transmission, the XON character is transmitted. To disable reception of data, the transmitting devicesends an XOFF character. If the XOFF character is imbedded within the data stream as information, the receivingnode automatically turns off. This is the main weakness of software handshaking, inadvertent operation due tocontrol characters being imbedded within data streams. Software handshaking is usually used in printer control.

The DPU/TPU/GPU devices do not incorporate handshaking, therefore, the control lines may be ignored asillustrated in Figure 3-3. However, some PC software utilizes handshaking, thus the port on the personalcomputer may require a special hardware configuration of the cable to the port. Consult with the software vendorto determine RS232 control and buffering requirements and the need for signal jumpers required in RS232cabling.

The ports on the DPU/TPU.GPU have been tested for operation up to a speed of 19,200 baud. 19,200 baud isthe typical data rate applicable for the operation of an asynchronous communication connection over RS232without the use of additional timing lines.


14

Ho st E xe cut ing

HM I So ftw ar e

or E C P

or W IN E C P

F igu re 2 . M u lt i-D ro p To p olog y

T PU 2000

EC

EC

T PU 2000R

T he C loud.

T PU 2000R

STA TUS

CC EE

Figure 3-2. Multi-Drop Topology Using RS232

RS 232 Cable Connectivity

A cable diagram is illustrated in Figure 3-3 and 3-4. Figure 3-3 shows the direction of communication signaltransmission and the gender of the connectors used in constructing a communication cable.

Protective Relay PC

2 Receive Data 2 Transmit Data3 Transmit Data 3 Receive Data5 Ground 5 Ground

1 Data Carrier Detect6 Data Set Ready

4 Data Terminal Ready7 Request To Send8 Clear To Send

-No connection 9 Ring Indicator

9 pin D shellMale Connector

9 pin D shellFemale Connector

DTEDTE

Figure 3-3. DPU2000(R), TPU2000(R), or GPU2000R to PC Cable 9 to 9 Pin-out

A RS232 interface was designed to simplify the interconnection of devices. Definition of terms may demystifyissues concerning RS232 interconnection. Two types of RS232 devices are available, DTE and DCE. DTEstands for Data Terminal Equipment whereas DCE stands for Data Communication Equipment. These definitionscategorize whether the device originates/receives the data (DTE) or electrically modifies and transfers data fromlocation to location (DCE). Personal Computers are generally DTE devices while line drivers/ modems/ convertersare DCE devices. DPU/TPU/GPU devices have RS232 DTE implementation. Generally, with a few exceptions, a“straight through cable”(a cable with each pin being passed through the cable without jumping or modification) willallow a DTE device to communicate to a DCE device. If one wishes to install modem connectivity between a hostdevice and a TPU2000 or TPU2000R, please consult the modem application note presented in APPENDIX F ofthis document.

Connection of a PC to a TPU2000 or TPU2000R requires cable modification since the interconnected devices areboth DTE. The same cabling would be utilized if one would connect two DCE devices. The classifications ofDTE/DCE devices allow the implementers to determine which device generates the signal and which devicereceives the signal. Studying Figure 3-3, Pins 2 and 3 are data signals, pin 5 is ground whereas pins 1,6,7,8,9


15

are control signals. The arrows illustrate signal direction in a DTE device. The TPU2000 and TPU2000R seriesof protective devices do not incorporate hardware or software “handshaking”.

If a host device has an RS232 physical interface with a DB 25 connector, reference Figure 3-5 for the correctwiring interconnection.

Protective Relay PC

2 Receive Data 3 Transm it Data3 Transm it Data 2 Receive Data5 Ground 5 Ground

8 Data Carrier Detect6 Data Set Ready

20 Data Term inal Ready4 Request To Send5 Clear To Send

-No connection 22 Ring Indicator



DTE DTE

Figure 3-4. Connection of a DB 25 Connector to a TPU2000 or TPU2000R

RS485 Device Connectivity With the TPU2000 and TPU2000R

RS485 is one of the more popular physical interfaces in use today. It was developed as an enhancement of theRS422 physical interface. Its inherent strength is its ability to transmit a message over a twisted pair coppermedium of 3000 feet in length. An RS485 interface is able to transmit and receive a message over such adistance because it is a balanced interface. That is, it does not reference the signal to the system’s electricalground, as is the case in an RS232 interface. RS485 references the communication voltage levels to a pair ofwires isolated from system ground. Depending on the manufacturer’s implementation, isolation may be optical orelectronic. RS485 has two variants, two wires and four wire. In the two wire format, communication occurs overone single wire pair. In four-wire format, communication occurs over two wire pairs, transmit and receive. Thetwo-wire format is the most common in use. The TPU2000 and TPU2000R supports half duplex two-wire formatonly. The RS 485 port is also optically isolated to provide for 3000 V of isolation.

The RS485 network supported and recommended by ABB requires the use of three conductor shielded cable.Suggested RS485 cable and the respective manufacturer’s wire numbers are:

• ALPHA 58902• Belden 9729• Belden 9829• Carol 58902

ABB does not support deviations from the specified cables. The selected cable types listed are of the type whichhave the appropriate physical and electrical characteristics for installation in substation environments.

A multi-drop RS 485 connection is illustrated in Figure 3-6. Three wires, Positive (Terminal 9), Negative (Terminal8) and Ground (Terminal 10). RS485 requires a termination resistor at each end of the communication cable.The resistance shall be from 90 to 120 ohms. Additionally, depending upon the RS485 physical interfaceconverter used, a pull-up and pull-down resistor may be added to bias the line to decrease the amount of inducednoise coupled onto the line when no communications are occurring. Internal to the TPU2000 AND TPU2000R arejumpers which when inserted in the proper position (as referenced in Figure 3), bias the line by inserting theproper pull-up, pull-down, and termination resistors. To configure the Jumpers J6, J7, and J8, execute thefollowing procedure:


16

• Face the front of the TPU2000 and TPU2000R and loosen the two knurled screws at the front of the unit.• Grasp the two handles at the front of the unit and pull it towards you. The TPU2000 and TPU2000R has

make before break contacts in the CT connectors. Powering down the unit need not be done whenperforming this step.

• Refer to Figure 3-5 illustrating the placement of J6, J7 and J8. J6 inserts a 120 ohm resistor betweentransmit and receive lines. J7 and J8 inserts a pull-up and pull-down resistor. The IN position inserts theassociated resistor in to the circuit. The OUT position removes the resistor from the circuit.

• Insert the TPU2000 or TPU2000R unit into the chassis.• Tighten the knurled screws at the front of the unit.• IT IS advisable to place a sticker on the front of TPU2000 or TPU2000R indicating that it is a terminated end

of line unit.

TX

+R

X +

TX

-R

X -

GN

D

3

55 56 57 58 59 60 61 -----

RS 485 Isolated Port

Shield is isolatedShield is Frame Grounded

at one point

3

55 56 57 58 59 60 61 -----


3

55 56 57 58 59 60 61 -----


End Unit Inline Unit End Unit

Shield Isolated

Shield isisolated

Cable “B” RS 485 Connection

*SeeNote

*Note - Reference the Topology Drawing for Termination configuration if internal or external termination is selected.

Figure 3-5. RS485 2 Wire Connection Diagram


17

Unicom Physical Interface Converter Switch Settings:- DTE- RS232-RS485- 19200 Baud- HD

Cable “A”See Attached Diagram

ECEC EC

32 Devices and 4000 Feet Maximum loading and distance.

EC

Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 31 Unit 32

Three-wire cable withshield. Cable “B” - See Attached Diagram.

End Unit Inline Unit Inline Unit End UnitJumpersJ6, J7, J8 “OUT”

+ 5 V

120 Ohms

470 Ohms

470 Ohms

Jumper J8 “IN

Jumper J 7 “IN”

Jumper J6 “IN”TX/RX +

TX/RX -

* See Note A.

* Note A - Following Cable Recommended Alpha # 58902 Belden # 9729, # 9829 Carol #58902

120 Ohms

Jumper J8 “Out”


TX/RX -

Jumper J 7 “Out”

Figure 3-6. RS485 Terminator Resistor Resistor Diagram

Jumper OUT Jumper IN Top View

Component Location with Unit Removed From The Case ( Top View)

J8

J7

J6

OUT IN

OUT IN

Option 8Board

Option 4 or 8Board

J18

J17

J

16

OUT IN

OUT IN

Option 8Board

Figure 3 –7. Location of RS485 Resistor Configuration Jumpers in the TPU2000R

The following example illustrates an interconnection of the TPU2000 and TPU2000R with a host device through aUNICOM physical interface connection using a 3-wire connection method. It should be noted that the RS485design on ABB relay products incorporates isolation. That is, the RS485 ground is electrically isolated from theinternal circuitry thereby assuring minimal interference from the extreme noise environments found in asubstation. Care should be used when installing an RS485 communication network. The recommendedconfiguration must be followed as shown in Figure 3. Jumpers J6, J7, and J8 should be inserted to providetermination and pull-up at the TPU2000 and TPU2000R end. Although not shown, a 120 ohm resistor should beinserted between the TX/RX + and TX/RX- pairs to provide for termination at the transmission end.


18

There are many manufacturers of RS232 to RS485 converters. Included in Appendicies D and E YYY areadditional application notes for using TELEBYTE and B& B physical interface converters with ABB protectiverelays. Although many 232/485 converter devices operate well using DNP 3.0 and ABB relays, the appendedapplication notes are intended to convey to the reader that knowledge of interconnecting devices is importantwhen implementing various vendors equipment.

The TPU2000R Type 8 card allows for an RS 485 connection on COM 3. ABB offers an accessory affording easyconnection to a TPU2000R for an inline connection on an RS 485 network. The connector 602133-009 whenattached to a COM 3 port on an TYPE 8 card converts the DB 9 female connector to a 9 conductor PHOENIXconnector allowing easy connection to inline multidrop RS 485 nodes. Please contact your local ABB Distributoror Representative for additional product and pricing information.


19

Section 4 - TPU2000 and TPU2000R Device Parameterization

Establishing TPU2000 and TPU2000R communication depends upon correct parameterization of thecommunication menus within the unit. Parameterization may occur via the unit’s front panel interface of throughECP (External Communication Program) or WIN ECP (WINdows External Communication Program). Modbus,Modbus Plus and DNP require certain parameterizations. Even COM 0 requires certain parameterization tocommunication with the configuration program.

COM 0 Port (Front Port Configuration)

In order to attach a configuration program to the TPU2000 or TPU2000R, the correct parameters must be set upwithin the unit. The supported parameters are listed in Table 4-1 below. The protocol for the unit is addressableStandard 10 Byte. To view the communication port parameters it is advised that they should be veiwed via theunit’s front panel interface. If the TPU2000 or TPU2000R does not have a front panel interface, the parametersshould be marked on the front panel sticker with the port’s parameters.

The keystrokes required for visualizing the communication port parameters from the metering display are:

1. Depress the “E” pushbutton.

2. Depress the “↓ ” key once to select the SETTINGS menu and then depress the “E” pushbutton.

3. Depress the “E” pushbutton to select the SHOW SETTINGS menu selection.

4. Depress the “↓ ” key six times to select the COMMUNICATIONS menu and then depress the “E” pushbutton.

5. Under the SHOW COM SETTINGS MENU, the following shall be displayed for the Front Panel RS232 port(FP).

� Unit Node Address (Address displayed in HEX)� FP RS232 Baud� FP RS232 Frame

Other parameters shall be shown. The parameters listed shall vary in accordance with the communication cardinserted within the unit. However, the FP displayed parameters must match with the parameters configured inthe Standard Ten Byte section of the ECP package.

One may change parameters via the front panel interface. The selections for each parameter required in FrontPanel Port configuration is shown in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1. TPU2000 and TPU2000R Com Port 0 Front Panel Interface Parameters

Option Selection NotesUnit Node Address 1 to FFF ( 1 = default setting) 1 to 2048 decimal node addressFP RS232 Baud 300

1200240048009600 (default setting)

Selectable Baud Rates for theStandard Ten Byte Front PanelPort.

FP RS232 Frame N – 8 – 1 (default setting) No Parity 8 Data Bits 1 Stop BitN – 8 – 2 No Parity 8 Data Bits 2 Stop Bits

Modification of the Front Panel Parameter settings is accomplished via the following keystrokes:

1. From the metering menu depress the “E” key.2. Depress the “↓ ” key once to select the SETTINGS menu and then depress the “E” pushbutton.

3. Depress the “↓ ” key once to select the SHOW SETTINGS menu selection. Depress the “E” pushbutton.


20

4. Depress the “↓ ” key seven times to select the COMMUNICATIONS menu and then depress the “E” pushbutton.

5. Enter the unit’s password, one digit at a time. The default password is four spaces. Depress the “E”pushbutton once.

6. The CHANGE COMMUNICATION SETTINGS menu shall be displayed. With the cursor at the Unit Address field, depress “E”. The unit address can be modified. The address selected in this field will configure theaddress for the entire node. Use the “↓ ” and “↑ ” arrow keys to select the password digit entry. Use the “→”and “←” keys to select the digit to configure. Depress “E” to save the digits. Depress “C” to return to the rootmenu.

7. Once returned to the main menu, depress the “↓ ” key once to select the FRONT RS232 BAUD RATE menu and then depress the “E” pushbutton. The selections for the menu are listed in Table 4-1. Use the “→” and“←” keys to select the baud rates for the port. Depress “E” to select the entry. Depress “C” to return to theroot menu.

8. Once returned to the main menu, depress the “↓ ” key once to select the FRONT RS232 FRAME menu and then depress the “E” pushbutton. The selections for the menu are listed in Table 4-1. Use the “→” and “←”keys to select the baud rates for the port. Depress “E” to select the entry. Depress “C” to return to the rootmenu.

9. To Save the selections configured in the previous steps depress the “C” pushbutton. A query will bepresented to the operator “Enter YES to save settings <NO>”. Use the “→” and “←” keys to select the optionYES and depress “E” to save the settings.

If the unit does not have a front panel interface, it is advisable that the communication port parameters be markedon the front of the unit. If the parameters are not known, please contact ABB Technical Support to obtain theprocedure to determine the parameters or take the unit out of service and reset the port parameters.

Figure 4-1 illustrates the parameterization screen in WIN ECP which must be parameterized allowingcommunication between the configuration unit and the TPU2000 or TPU2000R.

Figure 4-1. Initial WIN ECP Communication Configuration Screen

A direct connect is selected in this instance allowing retrieval and configuration of the relay parameters. Once theOK button is depressed, the screen shown in Figure 4-1 is presented to the operator.


21

Figure 4-2. Communication Port Setup Screen

The selections in WIN ECP are illustrated in Table 4-2. The settings must agree with those configured in theTPU2000 and TPU2000R.

Table 4-2. WIN ECP Communication Port Settings

COM PORT COM 1COM 2COM 3COM 4

Personal Computer Port Selection forWINECP or ECP to TPU2000 andTPU2000R connection.

BAUD RATE 300

1200

240048009600 (default setting)19200

Baud Rates Offered for TPU2000/2000Rconnection to the WIN ECP RS232 portconnection

Frame None – 8 – 1 (default setting) No Parity 8 Data Bits 1 Stop BitNone– 8 – 2 No Parity 8 Data Bits 2 Stop BitsEven – 8 – 1 Even Parity 8 Data Bits 1 Stop BitOdd – 8 - 1 Odd Parity 8 Data Bits 1 Stop BitEven – 7- 1 Even Parity 7 Data Bits 1 Stop BitNone – 7 – 2 Even Parity 7 Data Bits 2 Stop BitsOdd – 7 - 1 Odd Parity 7 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit

Unit Address 1 – FFF ( 1 = Default) Unit Address in HEXNOTE : Bold indicates Selections Supported by WIN ECP and TPU2000/TPU2000R

COM PORT 1 Option Settings (TPU2000R ONLY) [Catalog 588 XXX00-XXX0 or 588XXX50-XXX0]

If the unit does not have a front panel interface, the rear port is on the TPU2000R is active. The Configurationscreens through WIN ECP are shown in Figure 4-3 for reference. The communication options may not beconfigured via the front panel interface since this port is only active if the unit does not have a front panelcommunication port interface (see Section 3 of this document for further information). The communicationprotocol supported on this port is Standard Ten Byte Only.

Table 4-3 illustrates the port configuration options available for this COM PORT 1. Figure 4-3 illustrates the WINECP screen used to configure Communication Port 1 in the TPU2000R.


22

Table 4-3. COM PORT 1 and COM PORT 2 WIN ECP Port Settings

Option Selection Notes

BAUD RATE 3001200240048009600 (default setting)1920038400

Com Port Baud Rate SelectionsVia WIN ECP

Frame None – 8 – 1 (default setting) No Parity 8 Data Bits 1 Stop BitNone– 8 – 2 No Parity 8 Data Bits 2 Stop BitsEven – 8 – 1 Even Parity 8 Data Bits 1 Stop BitOdd – 8 - 1 Odd Parity 8 Data Bits 1 Stop BitEven – 7- 1 Even Parity 7 Data Bits 1 Stop BitNone – 7 – 2 Even Parity 7 Data Bits 2 Stop BitsOdd – 7 - 1 Odd Parity 7 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit

Figure 4-3. COM PORT 1 WIN ECP Setting Screen

COM PORT 2 Option Settings (TPU2000R ONLY) Catalog 588 XXXX0-XXX0 or 588XXXX6-XXX4]

There are two option boards, which enable communication port 2 for the TPU2000R. Figure 4-4 illustrates theconfiguration screen for the COM PORT 2 options when viewed on WIN ECP.


23

Figure 4-4. WIN ECP Com Port 2 Communication Screen

The options for configuration are listed in Table 4-3.

Com Port 3 and AUX COM Configuration

The TPU2000 and TPU2000R share the same commonality in that two rear ports may be available dependingupon the hardware inserted in the units. The configuration techniques vary in that the configuration dependsupon the protocol included on the board itself. Figure 4-5 lists the combinations for the TPU2000R. Figure 4-6lists the communication option combinations for the TPU2000. Some boards have the capability of IRIG B and orINCOM. The configuration of these options shall be covered in the following sections.

Figure 4-5. TPU 2000R Communication Capability Chart.

ABB Ten Byte

587R041[ ] - 6101[ ]

2 4 ABB Ten Byte

2 1ABB Ten Byte

ABB Ten ByteDNP 3.0

Catalog Number

0

1

2

0

0

0

ABB Ten Byte ABB Ten Byte

ABB Ten Byte

ABB Ten Byte

ABB Ten Byte

ABB Ten Byte ABB Ten Byte

Select Option

4

4

5

6

7

8

8

1

4

0

4

4

0

4

ABB Ten Byte

ABB Ten Byte

ABB Ten Byte

ABB Ten Byte

ABB Ten Byte

ABB Ten Byte

ABB Ten Byte ABB Ten Byte (RS 485)

INCOM

INCOMModbus

ABB Ten Byte

ABB Ten Byte

DNP 3.0

ABB Ten Byte

IRIG-B

IRIG-B

3 0 ABB Ten Byte INCOM IRIG-B

4 0 ABB Ten Byte INCOMABB Ten Byte IRIG-B

IRIG-B

IRIG-B

IRIG-B

Modbus PlusTM

Modbus PlusTM

DNP 3.0 ABB Ten Byte

or ABB Ten ByteModbus

See Note #

or ABB Ten ByteModbus

See Note #

or ABB Ten ByteModbus®�

(RS-485) See Note #or ABB Ten ByteModbus

See Note #

With

DisplayWithout

Display*

8 1 ABB Ten ByteABB Ten Byte (RS 485)

DNP 3.0 (RS 485)

DNP 3.0 (RS 485)

ABB Ten Byte (RS 485)

®�

®�

®� ®�

COM 3COM 2COM 1

REAR PORT ASSIGNMENTS

IRIG- B

57

56

55

58 60

59

AUX.PORTS

61

62 64

63

RS-485

ISOLATED

NON

ISOLATED

NON

ISOLATED

INCOM

ISOLATED

ISOLATED

RS-232unlessnoted

RS-232RS-232


24

IRIG BModbus or StandardModbus or StandardRS 485

487V0041 6101

Figure 4-6. TPU 2000 Communication Capability Chart

DNP 3.0 Configuration of COM 3 and AUX COM PORT

The TPU2000R and TPU2000 allow one of the available communication ports to be configured as DNP 3.0. If theunit has more than one port, it is configured as Standard Ten Byte. The configuration parameters supported forBaud Rate and Frame configuration as listed in Table 4-6.

Table 4-4. Valid Parameter Selections for Standard Ten Byte and DNP 3.0 Protocols

PROTOCOLSELECTED

BAUD RATE SELECTIONS FRAME SELECTIONS

DNP 3.0 300,1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 • Even Parity, 8 Data Bits, One Stop Bits• No Parity, 8 Data Bits, One Stop Bit• Odd Parity, 8 Data Bits, One Stop Bits• No Parity, 8 Data Bits, Two Stop Bit

Standard Ten Byte 300,1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 • Odd Parity, 7 Data Bits, One Stop Bit• Odd Parity , 7 Data Bits, Two Stop Bits• Even Parity, 7 Data Bits, One Stop Bit• Even Parity, 7 Data Bits, Two Stop Bits• Even Parity, 8 Data Bits, One Stop Bits• No Parity, 8 Data Bits, One Stop Bit• Odd Parity, 8 Data Bits, One Stop Bits• No Parity, 8 Data Bits, Two Stop Bit

TPU2000 and TPU2000R Parameters and Mode Parameters must be configured correctly to allowcommunication with a host unit connected with it. The host parameters must match with the DNP 3.0 parametersconfigured in the TPU2000 or TPU2000R. Failure to do so will result in erratic or no communication between thehost device and the attached nodes. The definition of the parameters follows:

Parameter 1" is the inter-character gap timeout in milli-seconds. Must be greater than 0 and less than 255 milli-seconds. If the default value of zero is specified for this parameter, then a value of 10 milli-seconds is used. Ifan inter-character gap timeout occurs during a frame read, then the frame will be deemed corrupted, anddiscarded. This timeout value must be large enough to accommodate the maximum expected inter-characterdelays generated by the host computer, yet as small as possible to maximize throughput.

"Parameter 2" is the data link layer primary timeout in deci-seconds (tenth’s of seconds). This timeout is activatedwhenever the TPU2000 or TPU2000R is acting as a DLC primary, i.e. when the TPU2000 or TPU2000R istransmitting a data frame with a DLC confirm or the TPU2000 or TPU2000R is transmitting a reset link frame.The timeout is not used for unconfirmed data frames or when the TPU2000 or TPU2000R is acting as secondaryand transmitting ACK, NACK, or other secondary frames. If this parameter is set to the default value of zero, then


25

a timeout value of 100 (1 second) is used. This parameter is also used to set the upper limit of the delay used forcollision recovery. If a collision is detected, i.e. data is received from the RS485 line at the time the TPU2000 orTPU2000R is prepared to transmit, then the TPU2000 or TPU2000R will delay for some random period of timeless than or equal to the primary timeout value specified by this parameter. The seed of the random numbergenerator used to randomize the collision delay is set to the unit address, so that probability of collisions withother TPU2000 or TPU2000R’s on the same RS485 line will be reduced.

"Parameter 3" is the number of data link layer primary retries. Can range from 0 through 255. Default is zerowhich eliminates retries, regardless of the setting of "Parameter 2".

"Parameter 4" is the minimum delay in milli-seconds after frame receive before a data link level frame can betransmitted. If this parameter is set to the default value of zero then a delay of 30 milli-seconds is used. Thisvalue must be increased to at least 200 milli-seconds when the TPU2000 or TPU2000R is being used with the Applied Systems Engineering DNP test set on the IBM PC. Failure to increase this timeout will cause the DNPtest set to ignore part or all of transmissions from the TPU2000 or TPU2000R.

"Parameter 5, 6, 7, and 8" specify which points are to be included in a class scans. The full set of points isdivided into several groups and the operator can specify from the front panel which of the groups are to beactivated so that they will be returned when the host asks for a class data scan. The default values, zero for all ofthese parameter bytes, causes only group zero to be returned for all class scans. To force all scan groups to bereturned parameters 5, 6, 7, and 8 should be set to 254, 255 255 and 255 respectively. These parametersdisable data return only for class scans (any class, 0 or integrity, 1, 2, or 3). All of the defined points areaccessible via a read command without regard to the settings of parameter bytes 5, 6, 7, and 8. ReferenceSection 5 for examples for parameterizing the GROUPS for Class scans.

"Parameter 9” has a default value of zero. This parameter can be used to specify the frequency in minutes (0 to255) that the relay will set the “time synchronization required from master” bit. Normally, (with the default value)this occurs every 60 minutes after a time synch is received from the master. This bit is initially set one minuteafter a System Reset. NOTE THAT in order for the Time Synchronization feature to operate, the IRIB B selectionillustrated in Figures 4-3 or 4-4, or configurable via the Front Panel Interface must be set to a value of “ENABLED–CC “ or “ENABLED –MMM”. Please reference the Time Synchronization section in Section 5 of this document.

"Parameter 10" is presently reserved for use by ABB and should be left at the default value of 0.

The group designation for binary inputs, counters, and analog inputs is given in the point list below and listedunder the column heading Scan Type. Use the designated Parameter Value to disable group zero output, orenable output of any of the other groups for a class scan. Since the front panel operator interface takes the inputin decimal, add the parameter values together to enable multiple groups in one parameter byte. The mapping ofthe parameter bytes is as follows:

Table 4-5. Class Masking Table for DNP 3.0

Group Number(Scan Type)

ParameterByte

ParameterValue (Except for group 0, set to enable)

----------- ----------- ----------- ----------------------------0 5 1 (0 = enabled, 1 = disabled)1 5 22 5 43 5 84 5 165 5 326 5 647 5 1288 6 19 6 210 6 411 6 8


26

12 6 1613 6 3214 6 6415 6 12816 7 117 7 218 7 419 7 820 7 1621 7 3222 7 6423 7 12824 8 125 8 226 8 427 8 828 8 1629 8 3230 8 6431 8 128

"Mode Parameter 1" indicates data link layer confirms. If value is not zero then confirmation at the data link layeris enabled. This means that "User Data With Confirm" and ACK will be used for all user data transmissions fromthe TPU2000 or TPU2000R to the host. If this parameter is set to the default value of disabled then "UnconfirmedUser Data" frames will be used for all user data transmissions to the host.

"Mode Parameter 2" indicates application level confirms. If the value is not zero then confirmation at theapplication layer is enabled. This means that the "CON" confirmation bit will be set in the application control byteof all response headers sent by the TPU2000 or TPU2000R to the host. The host is expected to respond withapplication level confirmation messages. Application level retries by the TPU2000 or TPU2000R are notsupported and no retry attempts will be made if the host does not respond with a confirmation frame. If the hostdoes not respond with a confirmation frame as expected, no special action is taken, i.e., the lack of a user levelconfirmation is ignored by the TPU2000 or TPU2000R. Note that this also means the event is not cleared fromTPU storage, and will be transmitted again upon receipt of another event scan or read operation. If thisparameter is set to the default value of disabled, then the "CON" confirmation bit will not be set in the applicationcontrol byte of response headers sent by the TPU2000 or TPU2000R to the host and no confirmation frames willbe expected from the host. In this case, events are cleared from TPU storage upon transmission, and maypotentially be lost due to transmission errors.

"Mode Parameter 3" indicates protocol selection for the serial ports. If the value is zero or disabled then theRS232 port uses the INCOM 10 byte ASCII protocol and the RS485 port uses DNP 3.0 protocol. If the modeparameter 3 value is one or enabled then the protocol selections for each port are swapped are reversed.

“Mode Parameter 4" indicates RTS/CTS handshaking for the RS232 serial port. This parameter is ignored unlessprotocol the relay contains a communications card with both RS232 and RS485 ports. If “disabled” this parametercauses the RS232 port to be set for constant carrier. “Enabling” this parameter enables RST/CTS handshaking.Presently handskaking via leased line modems is only supported by the DNP 3.0 protocol.

"Mode Parameter 5” enables/disables automatic resetting of sealed-in binary points, once their correspondingDNP events have been reported. The default value of “Disable” prevents them from being reset, until explicitlyrequested via either a control request from the DNP Binary Control point 26, or the ECP program, or a SystemReset.

“Mode Parameter 6” enables/disables the analog CLASS 3 data transfer mechanism in the TPU. This featureallows the User Definable Register information, on a register by register reporting basis to be returned on a times


27

interval via an Object 60 request. This allows for improved throughput. Please reference Section 5 for completeconfiguration information.

“Mode Parameters 7 and 8" are presently reserved for use by ABB and should be left at their default values of“Disable”.

The communication ports for DNP 3.0 may be configured via WIN ECP. The configuration screens appear thesame as shown in Figure 4-7 above. The DNP 3.0 configuration procedure if one is to perform the steps throughthe Front Panel Interface is listed as such:

Modification of the Front Panel Parameter settings is accomplished via the following keystrokes:

1. From the metering screen depress the “E” key.2. Depress the “↓ ” key once to select the SETTINGS menu and then depress the “E” pushbutton. 3. Depress the “↓ ” key once to select the CHANGE SETTINGS menu selection. Depress the “E” pushbutton. 4. Depress the “↓ ” key seven times to select the COMMUNICATIONS menu and then depress the “E”

pushbutton.5. Enter the unit’s password, one digit at a time. The default password is four spaces. Depress the “E”

pushbutton once.6. The CHANGE COMMUNICATION SETTINGS menu shall be displayed. With the cursor at the Unit Address

field, depress “E”. The unit address can be modified. The address selected in this field will configure theaddress for the entire node. Use the “↓ ” and “↑ ” arrow keys to select the password digit entry. Use the “→”and “←” keys to select the digit to configure. Depress “E” to save the digits. Depress “C” to return to the rootmenu.

7. Once returned to the main menu, depress the “↓ ” key four times to select the RP RS232 BAUD RATE (SEE NOTE 1) menu and then depress the “E” pushbutton. The selections for the menu are listed in Table 4-1.Use the “→” and “←” keys to select the baud rates for the port. Depress “E” to select the entry. Depress “C”to return to the root menu.

8. Once returned to the main menu, depress the “↓ ” key once to select the RP RS232 FRAME (SEE NOTE 2) menu and then depress the “E” pushbutton. The selections for the menu are listed in Table 4-1. Use the “→” and “←” keys to select the baud rates for the port. Depress “E” to select the entry. Depress“C” to return to the root menu.

9. Once returned to the main menu, depress the “↓ ” key once to select the RP RS485 BAUD RATE (SEE NOTE 3) menu and then depress the “E” pushbutton. The selections for the menu are listed in Table 4-1. Use the“→” and “←” keys to select the baud rates for the port. Depress “E” to select the entry. Depress “C” to returnto the root menu.

10. Once returned to the main menu, depress the “↓ ” key once to select the RP RS485 FRAME (SEE NOTE 4) menu and then depress the “E” pushbutton. The selections for the menu are listed in Table 4-1. Use the “→”and “←” keys to select the baud rates for the port. Depress “E” to select the entry. Depress “C” to return tothe root menu.

11. Once returned to the main menu, depress the “↓ ” key once to select the RP IRIG B selection. IRIG B is not supported via DNP 3.0. If this selection is enabled, the unit shall allow time synchronization via the DNP 3.0Network. Please refer to Section 5 to review TIME SYNCHRONIZATION procedures via DNP 3.0.

12. Once returned to the main menu, depress the “↓ ” key once to select the PARAMETER 1 (Inter Character Gap Timeout) menu and then depress the “E” pushbutton. The selections for this field may range from 0 to 255.Use the “→” and “←” keys to select appropriate entry for PARAMETER 1 as described above. Depress “E” to select the entry. Depress “C” to return to the root menu.

13. Once returned to the main menu, depress the “↓ ” key once to select the PARAMETER 2 (Data Link Layer Timeout) menu and then depress the “E” pushbutton. The selections for this field may range from 0 to 255.Use the “→” and “←” keys to select appropriate entry for PARAMETER 2 as described above. Depress “E” to select the entry. Depress “C” to return to the root menu.

14. Once returned to the main menu, depress the “↓ ” key once to select the PARAMETER 3 (Data Link Primary Retries) menu and then depress the “E” pushbutton. The selections for this field may range from 0 to 255.Use the “→” and “←” keys to select appropriate entry for PARAMETER 3 as described above. Depress “E” to select the entry. Depress “C” to return to the root menu.

15. Once returned to the main menu, depress the “↓ ” key once to select the PARAMETER 4 (Transmit Delay) menu and then depress the “E” pushbutton. The selections for this field may range from 0 to 255. Use the


28

“→” and “←” keys to select appropriate entry for PARAMETER 4 as described above.. Depress “E” to select the entry. Depress “C” to return to the root menu.

16. Once returned to the main menu, depress the “↓ ” key once to select the PARAMETER 5 (CLASS SCAN MASK) menu and then depress the “E” pushbutton. The selections for this field may range from 0 to 255.Use the “→” and “←” keys to select appropriate entry for PARAMETER 5 as described above. Depress “E” to select the entry. Depress “C” to return to the root menu.




20. Once returned to the main menu, depress the “↓ ” key once to select the PARAMETER 9 (Time Synchronization Frequency Request) menu and then depress the “E” pushbutton. The selections for this fieldmay range from 0 to 255. Use the “→” and “←” keys to select appropriate entry for PARAMETER 9 as described above.. Depress “E” to select the entry. Depress “C” to return to the root menu.

21. Once returned to the main menu, depress the “↓ ” key one time to select the MODE PARAMETER 1 menu item (DATA LINK LAYER CONFIRM WITH ACK) and then depress the “E” pushbutton. The selections forthis field are enable and disable.. Use the “→” and “←” keys to select appropriate entry for MODE PARAMETER 1 as described above.. Depress “E” to select the entry. Depress “C” to return to the root menu.

22. Once returned to the main menu, depress the “↓ ” key once to select the MODE PARAMETER 2 (APPLICATION LAYER LEVEL WITH ACK CONFIRM) menu item and then depress the “E” pushbutton. Theselections for this field are enable and disable. Use the “→” and “←” keys to select appropriate entry forMODE PARAMETER 2 as described above. Depress “E” to select the entry. Depress “C” to return to the root menu.

23. Once returned to the main menu, depress the “↓ ” key once to select the MODE PARAMETER 3 (SET RS232 PORT TO DNP 3.0) menu item and then depress the “E” pushbutton. The selections for this field are enableand disable. Use the “→” and “←” keys to select appropriate entry for MODE PARAMETER 3 as described above. Depress “E” to select the entry. Depress “C” to return to the root menu.

24. Once returned to the main menu, depress the “↓ ” key once to select the MODE PARAMETER 4 (ENABLE RTS/CTS HANDSHAKING) menu item and then depress the “E” pushbutton. The selections for this field areenable and disable. Use the “→” and “←” keys to select appropriate entry for MODE PARAMETER 4 as described above. Depress “E” to select the entry. Depress “C” to return to the root menu.

25. Once returned to the main menu, depress the “↓ ” key once to select the MODE PARAMETER 5 (AUTO RESET OF SEALED POINTS ON A READ) menu item and then depress the “E” pushbutton. The selectionsfor this field are enable and disable. Use the “→” and “←” keys to select appropriate entry for MODE PARAMETER 5 as described above. Depress “E” to select the entry. Depress “C” to return to the root menu.

26. Once returned to the main menu, depress the “↓ ” key once to select the MODE PARAMETER 6 (CLASS 3 TIMED ANALOG UPDATE MECHANISM) menu item and then depress the “E” pushbutton. The selectionsfor this field are enable and disable. Use the “→” and “←” keys to select appropriate entry for MODE PARAMETER 6 as described above. Depress “E” to select the entry. Depress “C” to return to the root menu. Reference Section 5 for complete “Communication Setting Miscellaneous Setting” information to completelyconfigure this feature. The Miscellaneous settings cannot be set via the Front Panel Interface and must beaccomplished via WIN ECP.

27. To Save the selections configured in the previous steps depress the “C” pushbutton. A query will bepresented to the operator “Enter YES to save settings <NO>”. Use the “→” and “←” keys to select the optionYES and depress “E” to save the settings.

NOTE 1: If the DUAL RS485 Board (Option 8) is selected, the query shall be modified as: RS485–1 Baud. If thehardware does not support COM 3, this query shall be omitted.


29

NOTE 2: If the DUAL RS485 Board (Option 8) is selected, the query shall be modified as RS485–1 Frame. If thehardware does not support COM 3, this query shall be omitted

NOTE 3: If the DUAL RS485 Board (Option 8) is selected, the query shall be modified to RS485-2 Baud.

NOTE 4: If the DUAL RS485 Board (Option 8) is selected, the query shall be modified to RS485–2 Frame.


30

Section 5 - DNP 3.0 Profile Description

The TPU2000 and TPU2000R has been one of the first IED’s incorporating DNP 3.0 in their protective relay.Although the DNP implementation is not specifically Level II, it incorporates LEVEL I, LEVEL II, and LEVEL IIIcommands. DNP 3.0 in the TPU2000 and TPU2000R is a robust implementation allowing the followingcapabilities:

� Acquisition of Metering Data� Contact Test Functionality� Forcing Capabilities� Status Reporting of Point Force/Unforce Status� Function Status Reporting� Counter Acquisition� Fault Record Reporting� Operation(Event) Record Reporting� Alarm Reporting� User Register Group Reporting� Class Data Reporting� Class Point Masking� Function Enabled Status Reporting� Time Synchronization Through DNP 3.0

The TPU2000 and TPU2000R does not support Unsolicited Response (or Report By Exception as referred to bysome). This new DNP 3.0 Profile document lists the supported commands in a format more conducive to thatspecified in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions Document. It is recommended that the reader consult the text titled:

GE HARRIS DISTRIBUTED NETWORK PROTOCOL – DNP 3.0 BASIC 4 DOCUMENT SET – PartNumber 994-0007 dated July 30, 1995 REV. 3

The device protocol tables follow:

Table 5-1 provides a Device Profile Information in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset DefinitionsDocument. The table, in combination with the Implementation Table (Table 5-2) provided and the Point Listsprovided in this user document should provide complete application implementation details for theTPU2000R/TPU2000 DNP environment.


31

DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT(Also see the DNP 3.0 Implementation Table in Section 5, beginning on page 33.)Vendor Name: ABB Inc.

Distribution Relay DivisionDevice Name: Transformer Protection Unit (TPU2000/2000R)Highest DNP Level Supported:

For Requests: Level 2 (Since theimplementation preceded the level definitions asof now the implementation lacks certain level 2functionalities as noted below)

For Responses: Level 2 (See the noteabove)

Device Function:

as Slave

Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP LevelsSupported (the complete list is described in the attached table): For static data requests, in addition to qualifier code 06 (no range), qualifier codes 00 and 01 (start-stop), and 17 and 28 (index) are supported. For requests made with qualifiers 17 and 28,responses will also include qualifier codes 17 or 28. 16-bit and 32-bit Analog Change Events with Time may be requested The read function code for Object 50 (Time and Date), variation 1, is supported. Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers NOT supported that are required for LEVEL 2 DNPLevels For Binary Input Change requests, (Object 2), Analog Change Event request (Object 32) andClass Data Scans (Object 60) qualifier codes 07 and 08 (limited quantity) are not supported. The event reporting is sorted by points and then with in each point sorted chronologically. Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Transmitted: 292 Received 292

Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets): Transmitted: 2048 Received 2048

Maximum Data Link Re-tries:

⊗ Configurable from 0 to 255 (UsingParameter 3)

Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:

⊗ None

Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:NeverAlwaysSometimes

⊗ Configurable (Using Mode Parameter) Enable/Disable Data Link Layer Confirmation asAlways or Never

Requires Application Layer Confirmation:NeverAlwaysWhen reporting Event Data (Slave devices only)When sending multi-fragment responses (Slave devices only)Sometimes

⊗ Configurable (Using Mode Parameter) Enable/Disable Application Layer Confirmationas Always or Never


32

DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT(Also see the DNP 3.0 Implementation Table in Section 5, beginning on page 33.)Timeouts while waiting for:

Data Link Confirm: None � Fixed at ____ � Variable ⊗ Configurable.Using Parameter

Complete Appl. Fragment: ⊗ None � Fixed at ____ � Variable � ConfigurableApplication Confirm: ⊗ None � Fixed at ____ � Variable � ConfigurableComplete Appl. Response: ⊗ None � Fixed at ____ � Variable � Configurable

Others: Inter-character Delay, Minimum turn around time for responses configurable. Request for Write Time - Interval configurable.

Sends/Executes Control Operations:

WRITE Binary Outputs ⊗ Never � Always � Sometimes � ConfigurableSELECT/OPERATE � Never ⊗ Always � Sometimes � ConfigurableDIRECT OPERATE � Never ⊗ Always � Sometimes � ConfigurableDIRECT OPERATE - NO ACK � Never ⊗ Always � Sometimes � Configurable

Count > 1 ⊗ Never � Always � Sometimes � ConfigurablePulse On � Never � Always ⊗ Sometimes � ConfigurablePulse Off � Never � Always ⊗ Sometimes � ConfigurableLatch On � Never � Always ⊗ Sometimes � ConfigurableLatch Off � Never � Always ⊗ Sometimes � Configurable

Queue ⊗ Never � Always � Sometimes � ConfigurableClear Queue ⊗ Never � Always � Sometimes � Configurable

Execution of Pulse On, Pulse Off, Latch On, and Latch Off depend upon the data point beingoperated upon.Reports Binary Input Change Events when nospecific variation requested:

� Never⊗ Only time-tagged� Only non-time-tagged

�� other (attach explanation)

Reports time-tagged Binary Input ChangeEvents when no specific variation requested:

� Never ⊗ Binary Input Change With Time � Binary Input Change With Relative Time � Configurable (attach explanation)

Sends Unsolicited Responses: ⊗ Never � Configurable � Only certain objects � Sometimes (attach explanation) � ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED

Function codes supported

Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses: ⊗ Never � When Device Restarts

��

No other options are permitted.

Default Counter Object/Variation:� No Counters Reported� Configurable (attach explanation)⊗ Default Object 20

Default Variation: 2� Point-by-point list attached

Counters Roll Over at:� No Counters Reported� Configurable (attach explanation)� 16 Bits� 32 Bits⊗ Other Value: 9999 � Point-by-point list attached


33

DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT(Also see the DNP 3.0 Implementation Table in Section 5, beginning on page 33.)Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:

⊗ Yes� No

DNP V3.0 Implementation Table

Table 5-1 identifies which object variations, function codes, and qualifiers the TPU2000/2000R supports in bothrequest messages and in response messages. Note that while the TPU2000/2000R may parse many objectvariations, it will respond to the request variations identified below with entries in the response column. Theshaded areas represent functionality beyond that required by a DNP Level 2 device. Also note that the unit doesnot respond to qualifier codes 07 and 08 for all the objects with the exception of object 50.

Table 5-1. DNP 3.0 Object/Variations Supported for the TPU2000/2000R

OBJECT REQUEST(TPU2000R will parse)

RESPONSE(TPU2000R will respond

with)Object

NumberVariationNumber

Description FunctionCodes (dec)

QualifierCodes (hex)

FunctionCodes(dec)


1 0 Binary Input – AnyVariation

1 (read) 00, 01(start-stop)06(no range)17, 28(index)

1 1 Binary Input 1 (read) 00, 01(start-stop)06(no range)17, 28(index)

129(response)

00, 01(start-stop)17, 28(index)

1 2(default)

Binary Input withStatus


129(response)


2 0 Binary InputChange – AnyVariation

1 (read) 06(no range)

2 1 Binary InputChange withoutTime

1 (read) 06(no range) 129(response)

17, 28(index)

2 2(default)

Binary InputChange with Time

1 (read) 06(no range) 129(response)

17, 28(index)

10 0 Binary OutputStatus – AnyVariation


10 2(default)

Binary OutputStatus


129(response)



34



with)Object




FunctionCodes(dec)


12 1 Control RelayOutput Block

3 (select)4(operate)5(direct op)6(dir. op,noack)


129(response)

echo ofrequest

20 0 Binary Counter -Any Variation

1 (read)7 (freeze)8(freezenoack)

00, 01(start-stop)06(no range)17, 28(index)

20 2(default)

16-Bit BinaryCounter



129(response)


20 6 16-Bit BinaryCounter withoutFlag



129(response)


21 0 Frozen Counter -Any Variation


21 2 16-Bit FrozenCounter


129(response)


21 6(default)

16-Bit FrozenCounter with timeof freeze


129(response)


21 10 16-Bit FrozenCounter withoutFlag


129(response)


30 0 Analog Input – AnyVariation

1 (read) 00, 01(start-stop)

06 (no range)

17, 28 (index)

30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01(start-stop)

06 (no range)

17, 28 (index)

129 (response) 00, 01(start-stop)

17, 28 (index)

30 2(default)

16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01(start-stop)06(no range)17, 28(index)

129(response)


30 3 32-Bit Analog Inputwithout Flag


129(response)


30 4 16-Bit Analog Inputwithout Flag


129(response)



35



with)Object




FunctionCodes(dec)


32 0 Analog ChangeEvent – AnyVariation


32 3 32-Bit AnalogChange Event withTime

1 (read) 06(no range) 129(response)130(unsol.resp)

17, 28(index)

32 4(default)

16-Bit AnalogChange Event withTime

1 (read) 06(no range) 129(response)130(unsol.resp)

17, 28(index)

50 0 Time and Date 1 (read)2 (write)

06(no range)07(no range)

50 1(default)

Time and Date 1 (read)2 (write)

06(no range)07(no range)

129(response)


52 1 Time Delay Fine 129(response)


60 0 Class 0, 1, 2, and 3Data


60 1 Class 0 Data 1 (read) 06(no range)60 2 Class 1 Data 1 (read) 06(no range)

60 3 Class 2 Data 1 (read) 06(no range)60 4 Class 3 Data 1 (read) 06(no range)80 1 Internal Indications 2 (write) 00(start-stop)

(index must =7)No Object (function code only) 13(cold

restart)No Object (function code only) 14(warm

restart)No Object (function code only) 23(delay

meas)

(Default variations are responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans.)

Cold And Warm Restart Capabilities

The DNP 3.0 implementation to the WARM and COLD restart (Application Control Function Codes 13 and 14) willgenerate a time delay object (object 52 variant 1). The response also requests an application level confirm.When this confirm is received from the host, then the TPU will halt all communication activity. This in turn willcause the watch dog time to time out and reset the TPU. Five seconds after the watch dog timer is reset, theTPU will again respond to DNP requests from the host.

Internal Indication (IIN) Field Data Returns

DNP 3.0, is a protocol which includes status bytes within a data transfer frame. The decode of the defined bitswithin the protocol are defined in Figure 5-1. The TPU2000 and TPU2000R support all the bits as defined in theprotocol. However the definition of when the defined bits are given as a reference to the operator.


36

The IIN field is useful to determine if Class Data is available, or if commands have been accepted or if diagnosticsand the device are operational.

First byte, Bit 4 - Time-synchronization required, set at power up, cleared by host.First byte, Bit 5 - Outputs offline - always zero.Second byte, Bit 5 - Configuration corrupt - always zero.First byte, Bit 6 - Device Trouble - set if any of the following binary inputs are true.

Table 5-2. Trouble Bit 6 Instance Occurrence Definitions

Description Self Test StatusDSP ROM FailureDSP Internal RAM FailureDSP External RAM FailureDSP +/-5V FailureDSP +/-15V FailureDSP +5V FailureDSP Comm. FailureADC FailureCPU RAM FailureCPU EPROM FailureCPU NVRAM FailureCPU EEPROM Failure

IIN CODE FORMAT

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

OCTET 1

OCTET 2

Bit 0 = All Stations MessageBit 1 = Class 1 DataBit 2 = Class 2 DataBit 3 = Class 3 DataBit 4 = Time Synch Required from MasterBit 5 = Digital Output Point(s) in LOCALBit 6 = Device TroubleBit 7 = Device Restart

Bit 0 = RESERVEDBit 1 = Requested Object(s) UnknownBit 2 = Qualifier, Range, or Data InvalidBit 3 = Event Buffers OverflowedBit 4 = Request Understood/Command ProcessingBit 5 = Current Configuration CorruptBit 6 = RESERVED (Always 0)Bit 7 = RESERVED (Always 0)

Figure 5-1. DNP 3.0 Device IIN Bit Definition Assignment


37

Binary Input Points (129 Indices Defined)

Binary Input Points are reported a variety of ways using Object 1 (Single Bit Binary Data with or without statusreporting) or Object 2 (Single Bit Binary Input Change with or without status/time reporting).

Table 5-3. Binary Input Index Definition Table

Binary Input PointsStatic (Steady-State) Object Number: 1Change Event Object Number: 2Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status)Change Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input without status)Note: For Static points the response for variation 0 is configurable

PointI.D.

Name/DescriptionDefault1

Change EventAssigned

Class(1, 2, 3 or none)

Scan Group

NOTE GROUP0 Contact Input Status Changed (obj 1 only) None @ 01 Local Settings Change (obj 1 only) None @ 02 Remote Edit Disabled (obj 1 only) None @ 53 Alternate Settings Group 1 Enabled (obj 1 only) None @ 04 Alternate Setting Group 2 Enabled (obj 1 only) None @ 05 Fault Record Logged (obj 1 only) 1 @ 06 Power was Cycled (obj 1 only) None @ 07 One/More Unreported Operations (obj 1 only) 2 @ 08 Local Operator Interface Action (obj 1 only) None @ 09 87T - Percentage Diff. Trip Enabled 3 210 87H - Instantaneous Diff. Trip Enabled 3 211 51P-1 - Wdg1 PHS Time O/C Trip Enabled 3 212 51P-2 - Wdg2 PHS Time O/C Trip Enabled 3 213 51N-1 - Wdg1 Neut Time O/C Trip Enabled 3 214 51G-2 (51N-2) - Wdg2 Ground (Neutral) Time O/C 3 215 50P-1 - Wdg1 PHS Inst O/C Trip Enabled 3 216 50P-2 - Wdg2 PHS Inst O/C Trip Enabled 3 217 50N-1 - Wdg1 Neut Inst O/C Trip Enabled 3 218 50G-2 (50N-2) - Wdg2 Ground (Neutral) Inst O/C Trip 3 219 150P-1 - Wdg1 PHS Inst O/C Trip Enabled 3 220 150P-2 - Wdg2 PHS Inst O/C Trip Enabled 3 221 150N-1 - Wdg1 Neut Inst O/C Trip Enabled 3 222 150G-2 (150N-2) - Wdg2 Ground (Neutral) Inst O/C

T i E bl d (3 i di )3 2

23 46-1 - Wdg1 Negative Seq. Trip Enabled 3 224 46-2 - Wdg1 Negative Seq. Trip Enabled 3 225 ALT1 - Alternate 1 settings Enabled 3 026 ALT2 - Alternate 2 settings Enabled 3 027 ECI1 - Event Capture 1 Initiated 3 328 ECI2 - Event Capture 2 Initiated 3 329 WCI - Waveform Capture Initiated 3 330 TRIP - Diff Trip Output Contact Enabled 3 3


38


PointI.D.




Scan Group

NOTE GROUP31 SPR - Sudden Pressure Input Enabled 3 332 TTCCMM -- TTrriipp CCooiill MMoonniittoorr EEnnaabblleedd 3 333 CCRRII -- CClleeaarr CCoouunntteerrss IInnppuutt EEnnaabblleedd 3 334 UULLII11 -- UUsseerr LLooggiiccaall IInnppuutt 11 EEnnaabblleedd 3 435 UULLII22 -- UUsseerr LLooggiiccaall IInnppuutt 22 EEnnaabblleedd 3 436 UULLII33 -- UUsseerr LLooggiiccaall IInnppuutt 33 EEnnaabblleedd 3 437 UULLII44 -- UUsseerr LLooggiiccaall IInnppuutt 44 EEnnaabblleedd 3 438 UULLII55 -- UUsseerr LLooggiiccaall IInnppuutt 55 EEnnaabblleedd 3 439 UULLII66 -- UUsseerr LLooggiiccaall IInnppuutt 66 EEnnaabblleedd 3 440 UULLII77 -- UUsseerr LLooggiiccaall IInnppuutt 77 EEnnaabblleedd 3 441 UULLII88 -- UUsseerr LLooggiiccaall IInnppuutt 88 EEnnaabblleedd 3 442 UULLII99 -- UUsseerr LLooggiiccaall IInnppuutt 99 EEnnaabblleedd 3 443 DDIIFFFF -- DDiiffff TTrriipp EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 5544 AALLAARRMM -- SSeellff CChheecckk AAllaarrmm EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 5545 8877TT -- PPeerrcceennttaaggee DDiiffff TTrriipp AAllmm EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 (L) 5546 8877HH -- IInnsstt DDiiffff TTrriipp AAllmm EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 (L) 5547 22HHRROOAA -- 22nndd HHaarrmm RReessttrraaiinntt AAllmm EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 (L) 5548 55HHRROOAA -- 55rrdd HHaarrmm RReessttrraaiinntt AAllmm EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 (L) 5549 AAHHRROOAA -- AAllll HHaarrmm RReessttrraaiinntt AAllmm EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 (L) 5550 TTCCFFAA -- TTrriipp CCiirrccuuiitt FFaaiilluurree AAllmm EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 5551 TTFFAA -- TTrriipp FFaaiilluurree AAllmm EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 5552 5511PP--11 -- WWddgg11 PPHHSS TTiimmee OO//CC TTrriipp EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 (L) 7753 5511PP--22 -- WWddgg22 PPHHSS TTiimmee OO//CC TTrriipp EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 (L) 7754 5500PP--11 -- WWddgg11 PPHHSS IInnsstt OO//CC TTrriipp EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 (L) 7755 115500PP--11 -- WWddgg11 PPHHSS IInnsstt OO//CC TTrriipp EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 (L) 7756 5500PP--22 -- WWddgg22 PPHHSS IInnsstt OO//CC TTrriipp EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 (L) 7757 115500PP--22 -- WWddgg22 PPHHSS IInnsstt OO//CC TTrriipp EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 (L) 7758 5511NN--11 –– WWddgg11 NNeeuutt TTiimmee OO//CC TTrriipp EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 (L) 7759 5511GG--22 ((5511NN--22)) -- WWddgg22 GGrroouunndd ((NNeeuuttrraall)) TTiimmee OO//CC 3 (L) 7760 5500NN--11 -- WWddgg11 NNeeuutt IInnsstt OO//CC TTrriipp EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 (L) 7761 115500NN--11 -- WWddgg11 NNeeuutt IInnsstt OO//CC TTrriipp EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 (L) 7762 5500GG--22 ((5500NN--22)) -- WWddgg22 GGrroouunndd ((NNeeuuttrraall)) IInnsstt OO//CC TTrriipp 3 (L) 7763 115500GG--22 ((115500NN--22)) -- WWddgg22 GGrroouunndd ((NNeeuuttrraall)) IInnsstt OO//CC 3 (L) 7764 4466--11 –– WWddgg11 NNeeggaattiivvee SSeeqq TTrriipp EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 (L) 7765 4466--22 –– WWddgg22 NNeeggaattiivvee SSeeqq TTrriipp EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 (L) 7766 8877TT--DD –– PPeerrcceennttaaggee DDiiffff TTrriipp DDiissaabblleedd 3 8867 87H-D – Inst Diff Trip Disabled 3 8868 51P-1D - Wdg1 PHS Time O/C Trip Disabled 3 88


39


PointI.D.




Scan Group

NOTE GROUP69 51P-2D - Wdg2 PHS Time O/C Trip Disabled 3 8870 51N-1D - Wdg1 Neut Time O/C Trip Disabled 3 8871 51G-2D (51N-2D) - Wdg2 Ground (Neutral) Time O/C 3 8872 50P-1D - Wdg1 PHS Inst O/C Trip Disabled 3 8873 50P-2D - Wdg2 PHS Inst O/C Trip Disabled 3 874 50N-1D - Wdg1 Neut Inst O/C Trip Disabled 3 875 50G-2D (50N-2D) - Wdg2 Ground (Neutral) Inst O/C 3 8876 115500PP--11DD -- WWddgg11 PPHHSS IInnsstt OO//CC TTrriipp DDiissaabblleedd 3 8877 115500PP--22DD -- WWddgg22 PPHHSS IInnsstt OO//CC TTrriipp DDiissaabblleedd 3 8878 115500NN--11DD -- WWddgg11 NNeeuutt IInnsstt OO//CC TTrriipp DDiissaabblleedd 3 8879 115500GG--22DD ((115500NN--22DD)) -- WWddgg22 GGrroouunndd ((NNeeuuttrraall)) IInnsstt 3 8880 4466--11DD -- WWddgg11 NNeeggaattiivvee SSeeqq TTrriipp DDiissaabblleedd 3 8881 4466--22DD -- WWddgg22 NNeeggaattiivvee SSeeqq TTrriipp DDiissaabblleedd 3 8882 PPAATTAA -- PPhhaassee AA TTaarrggeett AAllaarrmm 3 8883 PPBBTTAA -- PPhhaassee BB TTaarrggeett AAllaarrmm 3 8884 PPCCTTAA -- PPhhaassee CC TTaarrggeett AAllaarrmm 3 8885 PPUUAA -- PPiicckk UUpp AAllaarrmm 3 110086 6633 -- SSuuddddeenn PPrreessssuurree AAllaarrmm 3 (L) 110087 TTHHRRUUFFAA -- TThhrroouugghh FFaauulltt AAllaarrmm 3 110088 TTFFCCAA -- TThhrroouugghh FFaauulltt CCoouunntteerr AAllaarrmm 3 111189 TTFFKKAA -- TThhrroouugghh FFaauulltt kkAAmmpp SSuummmmaattiioonn AAllaarrmm 3 111190 TTFFSSCCAA -- TThhrroouugghh FFaauulltt CCyyccllee SSuumm.. AAllaarrmm 3 111191 DDTTCC -- DDiiffffeerreennttiiaall TTrriipp CCoouunntteerr AAllaarrmm 3 111192 OOCCTTCC -- OOvveerrccuurrrreenntt TTrriipp CCoouunntteerr AAllaarrmm 3 111193 PPDDAA -- PPhhaassee DDeemmaanndd CCuurrrreenntt AAllaarrmm 3 111194 NNDDAA -- NNeeuuttrraall DDeemmaanndd CCuurrrreenntt AAllaarrmm 3 111195 PPRRIIMM -- PPrriimmaarryy SSeettttiinnggss EEnnaabblleedd 3 111196 AALLTT11 -- AAlltteerrnnaattee 11 SSeettttiinnggss EEnnaabblleedd 3 111197 AALLTT22 -- AAlltteerrnnaattee 22 SSeettttiinnggss EEnnaabblleedd 3 111198 SSTTCCAA -- SSeettttiinnggss TTaabbllee CChhaannggee AAllaarrmm 3 111199 LLOOAADDAA -- LLooaadd CCuurrrreenntt AAllaarrmm 3 1100

100 OOCCAA--11 -- OOvveerrccuurrrreenntt AAllaarrmm WWddgg11 3 1100101 OOCCAA--22 -- OOvveerrccuurrrreenntt AAllaarrmm WWddgg22 3 1100102 HHLLDDAA--11 -- HHiigghh LLeevveell DDeetteeccttoorr AAllaarrmm WWddgg11 3 1100103 LLLLDDAA--11 -- LLooww LLeevveell DDeetteeccttoorr AAllaarrmm WWddgg11 3 1100104 HHLLDDAA--22 -- HHiigghh LLeevveell DDeetteeccttoorr AAllaarrmm WWddgg22 3 1100105 LLLLDDAA--22 -- LLooww LLeevveell DDeetteeccttoorr AAllaarrmm WWddgg22 3 1100106 HHPPFFAA -- HHiigghh PPoowweerr FFaaccttoorr AAllaarrmm 3 1111


40


PointI.D.




Scan Group

NOTE GROUP107 LLPPFFAA -- LLooww PPoowweerr FFaaccttoorr AAllaarrmm 3 1111108 VVaarrDDAA -- 33 PPhhaassee kkVVaarr DDeemmaanndd AAllaarrmm 3 1111109 PPVVAArrAA -- PPoossiittiivvee 33 PPhhaassee kkVVaarr AAllaarrmm 3 1111110 NNVVAArrAA -- NNeeggaattiivvee 33 PPhhaassee kkVVaarr AAllaarrmm 3 1111111 PPWWaatttt11 -- PPoossiittiivvee WWaatttt AAllaarrmm WWddgg11 3 1111112 PPWWaatttt22 -- PPoossiittiivvee WWaatttt AAllaarrmm WWddgg22 3 1111113 UULLOO11 -- UUsseerr LLooggiiccaall OOuuttppuutt 11 EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 1133114 UULLOO22 -- UUsseerr LLooggiiccaall OOuuttppuutt 22 EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 1133115 UULLOO33 -- UUsseerr LLooggiiccaall OOuuttppuutt 33 EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 1133116 UULLOO44 -- UUsseerr LLooggiiccaall OOuuttppuutt 44 EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 1133117 UULLOO55 -- UUsseerr LLooggiiccaall OOuuttppuutt 55 EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 1133118 UULLOO66 -- UUsseerr LLooggiiccaall OOuuttppuutt 66 EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 1133119 UULLOO77 -- UUsseerr LLooggiiccaall OOuuttppuutt 77 EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 1133120 UULLOO88 -- UUsseerr LLooggiiccaall OOuuttppuutt 88 EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 1133121 UULLOO99 -- UUsseerr LLooggiiccaall OOuuttppuutt 99 EEnneerrggiizzeedd 3 1133122 IInnppuutt 11 IInnppuutt cclloosseedd 3 1155123 IInnppuutt 22 IInnppuutt cclloosseedd 3 1155124 IInnppuutt 33 IInnppuutt cclloosseedd 3 1155125 IInnppuutt 44 IInnppuutt cclloosseedd 3 1155126 IInnppuutt 55 IInnppuutt cclloosseedd 3 1155127 IInnppuutt 66 IInnppuutt cclloosseedd 3 1155128 IInnppuutt 77 IInnppuutt cclloosseedd 3 1155129 IInnppuutt 88 IInnppuutt cclloosseedd 3 1155130 IInnppuutt 99 IInnppuutt cclloosseedd 3 1155

131 UUDDII -- UUsseerr DDeeffiinnaabbllee IInntteerrffaaccee ((llooggiiccaall iinnppuutt)) 3 99132 LLOOCCAALL ((llooggiiccaall iinnppuutt)) 3 99133 5511PP--33 ((llooggiiccaall iinnppuutt)) 3 (T) 99134 5511NN--33 ((llooggiiccaall iinnppuutt)) 3 (T) 99135 5500PP--33 ((llooggiiccaall iinnppuutt)) 3 (T) 99136 5500NN--33 ((llooggiiccaall iinnppuutt)) 3 (T) 99137 115500PP--33 ((llooggiiccaall iinnppuutt)) 3 (T) 99138 115500NN--33 ((llooggiiccaall iinnppuutt)) 3 (T) 99139 4466--33 ((llooggiiccaall iinnppuutt)) 3 (T) 99140 5511GG ((llooggiiccaall iinnppuutt)) 3 (T) 99141 5500GG ((llooggiiccaall iinnppuutt)) 3 (T) 99142 115500GG ((llooggiiccaall iinnppuutt)) 3 (T) 99143 5511PP--33DD ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 9144 5500PP--33DD ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99


41


PointI.D.




Scan Group

NOTE GROUP145 115500PP--33DD ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99146 5511NN--33DD ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99147 5500NN--33DD ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99148 115500NN--33DD ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99149 4466--33DD ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99150 5511GGDD ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99151 5500GGDD ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99152 115500GGDD ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99153 5511PP--33 ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99154 5500PP--33 ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99155 115500PP--33 ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99156 5511NN--33 ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99157 5500NN--33 ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99158 115500NN--33 ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99159 4466--33 ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99160 5511GG ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99161 5500GG ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99162 115500GG ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99163 TTFFKKAA--33 ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99164 HHLLDDAA--33 ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99165 LLLLDDAA--33 ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99166 OOCCAA--33 ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99167 PPwwaatttt33 ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99168 OOCCAA GGnndd ((llooggiiccaall oouuttppuutt)) 3 (T) 99

NOTES: @ = Static Object Reporting Supported Only (Object 1)(L) = Latched or Seal In Status Point(T) = TPU2000R Three Winding Unit Only(W) = TPU2000R Two Winding Unit Only(P) = Available in the TPU 2000 Unit Only.** = Version 3.4 DNP and Version 2.04 or later Flash Executive Required

DNP Control Explained

The explanation of DNP 3.0 control theory in relation to a ASE Test Set simulator follows. The discussion is not tobe host device centric but to be protocol centric. The commands discussed relate to the parameterization of theASE Test Set.


42

The ASE DOS Test Set has a standard list of DNP 3.0 commands. DNP 3.0 is an object based protocol uponwhich different functions are defined. The DNP 3.0 protocol is defined by GE Harris and a protocol documentTitled Distributed Network Protocol DNP 3.0 Basic 2 Document Set Part Number 994-0007 Revision 03 describedthe command set.

Control Functions and Objects Defined

DNP 3.0 defines two objects for discrete point data access/control. The defined Objects are:

Object 10 - Binary Output StatusSupporting Control Operation READ (Function 01)

Object 12- Binary Output Control.Supporting Control Operations SELECT (Function 03)

OPERATE (Function 04)DIRECT OPERATE (Function 05)DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK (Function 06)

It should be noted that the standard ASE Object Command SBO Relay OUT uses functions 03 and 04 tocomplete the control functionality.

It should also be noted that the standard ASE Default List of DNP 3.0 commands uses 8 bit (single octet) rangeidentifiers as a default. Thus Object 12 Variant 1 is intended to use a range qualifier of 17x when performingcontrol functionality.

The use of Binary Output Control (Object 12) shall be explained within this application note. To perform thedesired control functions with the ASE Test Set, the following information is required for initiation ofcommunications to a TPU2000/TPU2000R. ASE uses the description SBO Relay Out to denote control functionality.

Source 100Destination 1Object 12Variant 1 (Required for Object 12 Control)Qualifier 17x (HEX) (Single Byte Range Argument)Range 1 (Single Control Type)

Single Control Point Configuration

The ASE Test Set offers additional parameters that must be specified for control operation. Although multiplefunctions may be controlled via a DNP 3.0 command, this application note shall only deal with single point control.Depressing the Range button on the ASE Test Set and selecting the Single Point Control, a window shall be displayed requesting:

Index (Refer to Table 5 for the desired function)

Control Code Configuration

The second set of parameters which must be specified for control are particular to the control object 12. Thespecified control arguments required for in the Relay parameters field of the test set is:

Control CodeCount (Number of Times Control operation is to be executed)Length of Pulse ON (in mS) (Length of Pulse Control ON)Length of Pulse OFF (in mS) (Length of Pulse Control OFF)Status (TPU2000/TPU2000R this argument is always = 0)


43

The Pulse Control OFF argument is useful when the count is greater than 1. The Pulse ON and Pulse OFF timecreates a pulse train duration useful for execution of specific consecutive timed events.

The control codes are defined in DNP 3.0 as per the bit pattern as outlined in Figure 5-2. The followingpermutations are as such:

00 (hex) NULL Control (Cancels the Control Operation Depending on the Control function)01 (hex) Momentary Pulse ON (Duration = Pulse ON Value Field)02 (hex) Momentary Pulse OFF (Duration = Pulse OFF Value Field)03 (hex) Latch ON (Set Control Value to ON until reset or Latch OFF)04 (hex) Latch OFF (Set Control Value to OFF until reset of Latch ON)81 (hex) Trip Designation with Momentary On (Paired Point Operation)41 (hex) Close Designation with Momentary Off (Paired Point Operation)

Each of the above control functions included in Table 5-1 shall be explained using single point control arereviewed in the following sections. It is noted that the NULL CONTROL CODE is not supported and sending such a control code shall generate a returned message that the request is not accepted. This does not affect the operation of the relay.

• The control code for Trip would be 41x (hex)

• The control code for Close would be 81x (hex)

Trip = 01Close = 10For Control Code Bits

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

0000 = Null Operation0001 = Pulse On (for the specific On Time)0010 = Pulse Off (for the specific Off Time)0011 = Latch On0100 = Latch Off

Figure 5-2. DNP Control Field Bit Designation

The following sections explain the control operations for each of the aforementioned grouping of points. Thesupported objects and variants for each of the TPU2000/TPU2000R control types are listed inTPU2000/TPU2000R Implementation of the DNP 3.0 User Guide Revision 3.0.

Paired Point Operation

Several indices are configured as paired points. Paired point operation, as per the DNP 3.0 definition operateswith the TRIP (81x) and CLOSE (41x) commands. Paired Point implementation occurs with the following groups.

Physical Output Test ControlTrip Operate ControlReset Element ControlUser Logical Control

Several Groups of data have a PAIRED POINT operation implementation with respect to control codes TRIP 81xand CLOSE 41x. Although the TPU 2000/2000R supports the DNP close command, command execution of thephysical breaker (close), only follows the defined index. Each point in a PAIRED POINT IMPLEMENTATIONgroup operates as such:


44

EVEN POINT NUMBER: If a TRIP Command is sent to this point the corresponding function is energized(for example, trip physical output [index 0], Output 1 [index 2], or ULO 1 [index 14]). If a CLOSEcommand is sent to an even index, the next corresponding function [odd paired index] is energized (forexample, spare [index 1], Output 2 [index 3] or ULO 2 [index 15]). The groups described as being pairedpoints shall have the odd index- even index point pairing.

ODD POINT NUMBER: If a CLOSE Command (41x) is sent to an ODD index, the defined operation shalloccur as the index is defined in Table 5-1. If a TRIP (81x) command is sent, the command shall beaccepted but ignored.

The advantage of a PAIRED POINT implementation is that some legacy host devices perform trip and close onthe same point index. The PAIRED POINT implementation allows ABB protective relays to provide superiorautomation control via DNP 3.0 with a wide variety of host implementations.PAIRED POINT index implementation is not configurable from the operator or from the host device.

Physical Output Test Control (Index 0 Through 9)

Physical Output Control is provided for TPU2000R test. ABB DNP 3.0 implementation allows for pulsing of theoutput contacts for test. The output may be pulsed on for a duration of 300 mS. Control Index points 0 through 9allow for a single pulse of the selected point. The supported control operations are as follows for theaforementioned points. PAIRED POINT operation is implemented.

Even Numbered Control Points (0,2,4,6,8)

Control Code 01 (Momentary On)03 (Latch On)81 (Trip)41 (Close)All other Control Codes are accepted. No action results.

Count All counts other than 1 execute the command once.Length of Pulse ON A number 1 or greater pulses the output for 300 mSLength of Pulse OFF Field Value is ignored.Status Field Value is ignored.

Odd Numbered Control Points ( 1,3,5,7,9)

Control Code 01 (Momentary On)03 (Latch On)41 (Close)All other Control Codes are accepted. No action results.

Count All counts other than 1 execute the command once.Length of Pulse ON A number 1 or greater pulses the output for 300 mSLength of Pulse OFF Field Value is ignoredStatus Field Value is Ignored

Trip Operate Control (INDEX 10 - 11)

The Trip Operate Control index operates only with the trip control argument. Since the TPU2000R has only theability to trip a breaker, (Closing is only possible via a manual operation via a mimic panel switch). PAIRED POINT operation is implemented. The following are accepted control codes for single point control:

Control Code 81x (Trip)41x (Close)03x (Latch ON)04x (Latch OFF)

Count Count of 1 is supported only all others execute once.Length of Pulse ON The entry in this field determines the pulse duration.Length of Pulse OFF Field Value is ignored


45

Status Field Value is ignored

The TPU allows paired point operation for index points 11 and 12. As illustrated above, both a trip command (81hex) or a close command (41 hex) produces a trip operation on this singular index.

Reset Element Control (Index 12 through 13)

The TPU 2000R allows for resetting latched points via a DNP command (Supervisory Control). Targets, Alarms,and Demand values may also be reset. PAIRED POINT operation is implemented.

The control block for the RESET ELEMENT CONTROL functions are:Even Numbered Control Points (12)

Control Code 01 (Momentary On)03 (Latch On)04 (Latch Off)81 (Trip)41 (Close)All other Control Codes are accepted. No action results.

Count All counts other than 1 execute the command once.Length of Pulse ON A number 1 or greater pulses the output for 300 mSLength of Pulse OFF Field Value is ignored 0Status Field Value is ignored 0

Odd Numbered Control Points (13)

Control Code 01 (Momentary On)03 (Latch On)04 (Latch Off)41 (Close)All other Control Codes are accepted. No action results.

Count All counts other than 1 execute the command once.Length of Pulse ON A number 1 or greater for Code 01 is acceptedotherwise the field is ignored.Length of Pulse OFF Field Value is ignored 0Status Field Value is ignored 0

ULO “Soft Point” Control (Index 14 through 22)

The TPU has a variety of ULI/ULO control capabilities within the unit. ABB offers various application notescovering applications in which ULO/ULI control is desirable. The ABB TPU2000R Transformer Protection Unit1MRA588372-MIB (IB 7.11.1.7-5) Manual (REV C) has a detailed explanation of such capabilities listed in Section6. Soft Point Control may be linked to various TPU2000R elements, Physical Output and timer capabilities. TheTPU2000R allows for the ULO (User Logical Output) elements to be controlled via DNP 3.0 PAIRED POINT operation is implemented.

Valid control parameterization accepted to perform these capabilities are as follows:

Even Numbered Control Points (14,16,18,20,22)

Control Code 01 (Momentary On)03 (Latch On)04 (Latch Off)81 (Trip)41 (Close)All other Control Codes are accepted. No action results.

Count 1 to 512Length of Pulse ON 1 to 65,535


46

Length of Pulse OFF If the count is 1 this field is ignored else the number in this field, 1 to65,535 determines the OFF time duty cycle.

Status Field Value is ignored 0

Odd Numbered Control Points (15,19,21,23)Control Code 01 (Momentary On)

03 (Latch On)04 (Latch Off)41 (Close)All other Control Codes are accepted. No action results.

Count 1 to 512Length of Pulse ON 1 to 65,535Length of Pulse OFF If the count is 1 this field is ignored else the number in this field, 1 to

65,535 determines the OFF time duty cycle.Status Field Value is ignored 0

Force Logical Input Configuration

The TPU2000R has a default configuration of Force Logical Input bits. Forcing these bits on or off enables ordisables the function associated with the function bits. The TPU ECP (External Configuration Program) allowsreassignment of the default functions as listed in Table 1.

The TPU2000 and TPU2000R have the capability of automation configuration to a generic Logical Input bit.These bits are generic in nature and can be mapped via ECP (External Communication Program) or WIN ECP(WINdows External Communication Program). Mapping of the values occurs as such:

1. From WIN ECP select the menu item “FLI Index and User Name” selection.2. A list of default mappings are shown as in Figure 5-3 (WINECP Screen) In this case the user is viewing the

screen in WINECP as shown in the SETTINGS Screen.

3. The default list corresponds to the Logical Input mapping of Logical Inputs (hereto referred as LI) as illustratedin Table 5-2.

4. If one would wish to change the relay protective function element mapped to the specific LI, depress the“ENTER” key. The display in Figure 5-3 shall be displayed.

5. The user would then scroll down the list and highlight the element desired to be mapped to the specific LIwithin the edited list.

6. Depress the “ENTER” key to map the selected element into the table.

Figure 5-3. WINECP Forced Logical Input Mapping Screen


47

The usefulness of this feature cannot be understated. Each one of these functions can be forced via a networkcontrol. Programming need not be done to allow for function control via a network. If the relaying feature “ALT 1”were to be enabled, the bit FLI 07 could be forced to an “ON” condition via the network control. If a desired controlfunction were to be controlled via the network, then WINECP mapping would have to be configured as per Figure5-4.

Point Forcing Control Functionality (Index 32 Through 127)

The TPU2000R allows forcing of the following control points:� Logical Inputs� Physical Inputs� Physical Outputs

Traditionally, network or supervisory operation of control points was determined to be a special operation. As asafeguard to unintended operator control initiation ABB’s implementation of forcing functionality has specificallyrequired certain steps to be performed within the DNP 3.0 protocol for a supervisory operation to occur.

Additionally, when the operator has executed a force function, a visual indication is initiated on the faceplate ofthe relay. When no element is forced, the NORMAL LED at the front of the relay is illuminated in a solid green color. When any element is forced within the relay, the NORMAL LED flashes at a rate of one second energized and one second extinguished. The NORMAL LED shall continue to flash until no elements are forced within the TPU2000R.

Supervisory Forcing control points are implemented in a odd-even arrangement. As per TABLE 1, even pointsare designated as STATUS whereas odd points are designated as UNFORCE. The descriptions of theirfunctionality is as follows:

Control Code 03 (Latch On)04 (Latch Off)All other Control Codes are accepted. No action results.

Count All counts other than 1 execute the command once.Length of Pulse ON 1Length of Pulse OFF Field Value is ignored 0Status Field Value is ignored 0

A write of the control code 03x “LATCH ON” forces the point to a state of 1. A write of the control code 04x“LATCH OFF” forces the point to a state of 0. A force of the point allows control by the operator or supervisoryhost. If the point is forced, any logic capabilities configured in the TPU2000R are overridden by the supervisorycontrol established via DNP 3.0. The forced index control shall be forced until the point is “UNFORCED”.

To “UNFORCE” a control point, the following control code parameterization is required.

Control Code 01 (Momentary On)02 (Momentary Off)03 (Latch On)04 (Latch Off)81x ( Trip)82x(Trip Off)41x( Close)42x(Close Off).

Count All counts other than 1 execute the command once.Length of Pulse ON 1Length of Pulse OFF Field Value is ignored unless 02 or 82 code is used. 1Status Field Value is ignored 0

When the code is “UNFORCED” control is restored to the configured logic in the TPU2000R.


48

Table 5-4. Binary Output Control Indices

Binary Output Status PointsObject Number: 10Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)Control Relay Output BlocksObject Number: 12Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate),

5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, no acknowledge)PointI.D.

Name/Description Notes Supported Control Relay OutputBlock Fields

ScanGroup

0 Trip Contact operate test 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, LatchOn, Latch Off

1 RESERVED2 Output 1 Contact operate test 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off 03 Output 2 Contact operate test 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off 04 Output 3 Contact operate test 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off 15 Output 4 Contact operate test 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, 16 Output 5 Contact operate test 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, 17 Output 6 Contact operate test 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, 18 Output 7 Contact operate test 1,4 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off 19 RESERVED10 Trip operate command 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch

On, Latch Off1

11 RESERVED12 Reset Alarms/Target LEDs 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch

On, Latch Off1

13 Reset Peak and MinimumDemand Currents

1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, LatchOn, Latch Off

1

14 ULO1 Output Energize 1 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, LatchOn, Latch Off

8


8


8


8


8


8


8


8


8

23 Reserved Reserved24 Reserved Reserved25 Reserved Reserved26 Reserved Reserved27 Reserved Reserved28 Reserved Reserved29 Reserved Reserved


49




ScanGroup

30 Reserved Reserved31 Reserved Reserved32 Forced Logical Input 0 - status

(87T)3 Latch On, Latch Off 16

33 Forced Logical Input 0 - unforce(87T)


16

34 FLI 1 - status (87H) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 1635 FLI 1 - unforce (87H) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch

On, Latch Off16

36 FLI 2 - status (51P1) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 1637 FLI 2 - unforce (51P1) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch

On, Latch Off16

38 FLI 3 - status (51P-2) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 1639 FLI 3 - unforce (51P-2) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch

On, Latch Off16

40 FLI 4 - status (51N-1) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 1641 FLI 4 - unforce (51N-1) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch

On, Latch Off16

42 FLI 5 - status (51G-2) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 1643 FLI 5 - unforce (51G-2) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch

On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16


50




ScanGroup

60 FLI 14 - status (46-1) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 1661 FLI 14 - unforce (46-1) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch

On, Latch Off16

62 FLI 15 - status (46-2) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 1663 FLI 15 - unforce (46-2) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch

On, Latch Off16

64 FLI 16 - status (ALT1) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 1665 FLI 16 - unforce (ALT 1) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch

On, Latch Off16

66 FLI 17 - status (ALT2) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 1667 FLI 17 - unforce (ALT2) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch

On, Latch Off16

68 FLI 18 - status (ECI1) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 1669 FLI 18 - unforce (ECI2) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch

On, Latch Off16

70 FLI 19 - status (ECI2) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 1671 FLI 19 - unforce (ECI2) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch

On, Latch Off16

72 FLI 20 - status (WCI) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 1673 FLI 20 - unforce (WCI) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch

On, Latch Off16

74 FLI 21 - status (TRIP) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 1675 FLI 21 - unforce (TRIP) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch

On, Latch Off16

76 FLI 22 - status (SPR) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 1677 FLI 22 - unforce (SPR) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch

On, Latch Off16

78 FLI 23 - status (ULI 1) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 1679 FLI 23 - unforce (ULI 1) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch

On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16

90 FLI 29 - status (ULI 6) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 16


51




ScanGroup

91 FLI 29 - unforce (ULI 6) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, LatchOn, Latch Off

16


On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16

96 Forced Phy. Input 1 - status (IN1) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 1697 Forced Phy. Input 1 - unforce

(IN1)3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch

On, Latch Off16

98 FPI 2 - status (IN2) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 1699 FPI 2 - unforce (IN2) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch

On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16

114 Forced Phy. Output 1 - status(OUT1)

3 Latch On, Latch Off 16

115 Forced Phy. Output 1 - unforce(OUT1)


16

116 FPO 2 - status (OUT2) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 16117 FPO 2 - unforce (OUT2) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch

On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16

120 FPO 4 - status (OUT4) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 16121 FPO 4 - unforce (OUT4) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch 16


52




ScanGroup

On, Latch Off122 FPO 5 - status (OUT5) 3 Latch On, Latch Off 16123 FPO 5 - unforce (OUT5) 3 Trip, Close, Pulse ON, Pulse Off, Latch

On, Latch Off16


On, Latch Off16

126 FPO 7 - status (OUT7) - futureTPU2000 pt.

4 Latch On, Latch Off 16

127 FPO 7 - unforce (OUT7) - futureTPU2000 pt.


16

Note:1. When paired, this function operates on the next (even numbered) point in the table. When

unpaired it operates on the selected point.2. Function must be mapped to one of the output relays in order for this function to operate.3. TPU2000R Point Only4. TPU2000 Point Only

Counter Access (6 Elements Defined)

The TPU2000 and TPU2000R allow for access of several counter values including those associated with:

� Through Faults� Overcurrent Trips� Differential Trips

Counters may be read, written, or frozen. The frozen counter objects require an explicit freeze request from thehost. Each freeze request will capture one sample of the related static counter up to a maximum of 32 samples.A DNP read request for a frozen counter will return all frozen samples for each point specified in the read requestin ascending time order. Once read, further read requests for a point will not return frozen data for the previouslyread counter until another freeze request occurs.

Table 5-7 lists the index list of the counters defined for the TPU2000/TPU2000R.

Table 5-5. Counter Index Assignment

Binary CountersStatic (Steady-State) Object Number: 20Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack),

9 (freeze and clear), 10 (freeze and clear, noack)Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Binary Counter with Flag)Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none – not supported

Frozen CountersStatic (Steady-State) Object Number: 21Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)


53

Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 6 (16-Bit Frozen Binary with Flag andTimestamp)Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none – not supportedPointI.D.

Name/Description Change Event Assigned Class(1, 2, 3 or none)

Scan Groups2

0 Through Faults (0-9999) None 161 Through Fault kAmp A (0-9999) None 162 Through Fault kAmp B (0-9999) None 163 Through Fault kAmp C (0-9999) None 164 Through Fault Sum Cycle (0-9999) None 165 Over Current Trips (0-9999) None 166 Differential Trips (0-9999) None 16

Analog Input Index Designation (168 Elements Defined)

The TPU2000 and TPU2000R has 168 data elements assigned to Analog Input objects. The types of dataretrievable via the analog input data objects are:

� Metering Data� Demand Data� Peak Demands� Minimum Demands� Through Fault Data� Differential Fault Data� Harmonic Restraint Event Data� Operation ( Relay Event Record Data)� User Definable Register Data

Metering Data (Index 0 through 118, 351 through 354 and 319 through 350)

Metering data is retrieved in a straightforward manner. The definition of the data is given as 32 or 16 bit datatypes. All metering values are in primary units. If one wishes to scale and redefine the range of the returned data,User Definable Registers (Indices 319 through 350).

Metering Data is static in nature and is retrieved via variants 1 through 4 depending upon the data type assignedto the value (16 or 32 bit data).

Demand Data (Index 119 to 130)

Peak and minimum demands are continuously monitored and any change in value or associated time mark arerecorded as an event. These events are only collected/reported if the Group Number (enabled via Parameter5,6,7, and 8 settings as explained in the port configuration sequence) is enabled.

If indices 119 to 130 are accessed via static data objects (Object 30), then the current demand reading isreturned. If indices 43 through 54 are accessed via event change objects (Object 32), then the data returnedindicated either a minimum or peak demand reading between accesses.

The host may retrieve these events via an analog events scan or class scans (as explained in Section 5). Amaximum of 768 events may be stored for reporting to the host. An event, (one value with time stamp) is anychange in any one of the peak or minimum values. Upon power-up, any non zero peak or minimum value will bereturned to the host.

Demand Values (indices 119 through 130) are calculated until reset by the host. The reset index for demandvalues is available through object 12 index 13 as listed in Table 5-7 above.


54

Fault Records (Differential Fault Index 131 Through 202, Through Fault 202 Through240) and Operation Record (Index 316 Through 318) Retrieval

As shown in Figure 5-5, the TPU2000 and TPU2000R support fault record and operation data retrieval throughDNP 3.0. Three types of fault records are stored, Differential Fault [Index 131 through 202], Through Fault [Index203 through 240], and Harmonic Restraint Faults [Index 241 through 315]. Each time a fault is recorded withinthe TPU2000 or TPU2000R, it is stored in an internal buffer. Up to 32 fault records may be stored in the unit’sbuffer. If more than 32 faults are recorded, the first fault is overwritten in the buffer (internal to theTPU2000/TPU2000R). This internal buffer is different from the DNP 3.0 storage buffer. A total of 768 events(including those of digital changes, demands, faults, and operations), may be stored in the TNP queue. If morethan 768 events accumulate in the DNP 3.0 storage buffer, then the IIN buffer overflow bit shall be set. If theindices for points are read using a static object/qualifier combination, no points shall be reported and the hostshall receive a flag notification that the point is offline. Fault indices 131 through 315.

Operation Records also operate using the same principle as described for fault records. However, 128 operationrecords may be stored in the TPU2000/TPU2000R buffer. If more than 128 operation records are stored in theTPU’s internal buffer, then the first record in the buffer is overwritten. The same rules regarding the DNP 3.0buffer apply to the operation records.

Each operation is recorded and stamped via a unique message number. Table 5-7 lists the unique operationnumber (Index 316) assigned to each operation. As with the Event Records, Operation records are only reportedto the host on an event object or Class 2 Object poll. The indices for Operations Record reporting must beenabled via Parameters 5, 6, 7, and 8 as described in Section 4.

Differential Fault and Event Record Layout

(TPU 2000/2000R)

DNP INDICIES 131 -202

Fault Record Data

Reported On Change

Event or Class 1 Data

DIFFERENTIAL FAULT REC

DNP INDICIES 316 - 318

Operation Record

Data Reported on Change Event or Class 2 Data

32 Fault Record Max..

128 Operation Records Max.

Fault Stack

Record Stack

OPERATION RECORDS

CC EE

TARGETS

EC

TPU2000

TPU2000R

OR

Figure 5-4. Differential and Event Record Layout


55

T hrough F au lt and H arm on ic R estra in t F au lt Layou t

(T P U 2000 /20 00R )

D N P IN D IC IE S 2 03 -2 40

F au lt R ec ord D a ta

R e po r ted O n C h an g e

E ve n t o r C lass 1 D a ta

TH R O U G H F A U L T R E C O R D

D N P IN D IC IE S 2 41 - 3 15

O p era tion R ec ord

D a ta R epor ted o n C h an g e E v en t o r C la s s 2 D a ta

32 F a ult R e co rd M ax ..

32 Fa u lt R e co rds M a x.

F au lt S tack

R ecord S tack

H A R M O NIC R E S T R IN T FA U LT R E C O R D S

CC EE

T ARG ET S

EC

TP U 2000

T P U 20 00 R

O R

Figure 5-5. Through Fault and Harmonic Restraint Fault Layout

Table 5-6. Event Record Definition Type

Operation Record Type (Index 318 code definition)Operation Number Definitions00 87T Trip01 87H Trip02 51P-1 Trip03 51N-1 Trip04 50P-1 Trip05 50N-1 Trip06 150P-1 Trip07 150N-1 Trip08 46-1 Trip09 51P-2 Trip10 51G-2 Trip11 50P-2 Trip12 50G-2 Trip13 150P-2 Trip14 150G-2 Trip15 46-2 Trip16 ECI-117 ECI-218 Thru Flt19 Harm Rest31 Fault Clear Failed32 Fault Cleared33 Harmonic Restraint34 Manual Trip35 Manual Trip Failed40 87T Enabled41 87H Enabled42 51P-1 Enabled43 51P-2 Enabled44 51N-1 Enabled45 51G-2 Enabled46 50P-1 Enabled47 50P-2 Enabled48 50N-1 Enabled49 50G-2 Enabled50 150P-1 Enabled51 150P-2 Enabled


56

Operation Record Type (Index 318 code definition)52 150N-1 Enabled53 150G-2 Enabled54 46-1 Enabled55 46-2 Enabled56 ALT1 Input Closed57 ALT2 Input Closed58 Event Cap1 Init59 Event Cap2 Init60 Wave Cap. Init61 Trip Input Closed62 SPR Input Closed63 TCM Input Closed64 Primary Set Active65 Alt1 Set Active66 Alt2 Set Active70 Thru Flt Cntr Alm71 Thru Flt kASum Alm72 Thru Flt Cycle Alm73 OC Trip Cntr Alarm 74 Diff Trip Cntr Alm75 Phase Demand Alarm76 Neutral Demand Alm77 Load Current Alarm78 Trip Coil Failure79 High PF Alarm80 Low PF Alarm81 kVAR Demand Alarm82 Pos. kVAR Alarm83 Neg. kVAR Alarm84 Pos. Watt Alarm 185 Pos. Watt Alarm 290 Event Capture #191 Event Capture #292 Waveform Capture93 High Level Detection Alarm, Wdg 194 Low Level Detection Alarm, Wdg 195 High Level Detection Alarm, Wdg 296 Low Level Detection Alarm, Wdg 2100 ROM Failure101 RAM Failure102 Self Test Failed103 EEPROM Failure104 BATRAM Failure105 DSP Failure106 Control Power Fail107 Editor Access120 87T Disabled121 87H Disabled122 51P-1 Disabled123 51P-2 Disabled124 51N-1 Disabled125 51G-2 Disabled126 50P-1 Disabled127 50P-2 Disabled128 50N-1 Disabled129 50G-2 Disabled130 150P-1 Disabled131 150P-2 Disabled


57

Operation Record Type (Index 318 code definition)132 150N-1 Disabled133 150G-2 Disabled134 46-1 Disabled135 46-2 Disabled136 ALT1 Input Opened 137 ALT2 Input Opened138 Event Cap1 Reset139 Event Cap2 Reset140 Wave Cap. Reset141 Trip Input Opened142 SPR Input Opened143 TCM Input Opened162 ULI1 Input Closed163 ULI1 Input Opened164 ULI2 Input Closed165 ULI2 Input Opened166 ULI3 Input Closed167 ULI3 Input Opened168 ULI4 Input Closed169 ULI4 Input Opened170 ULI5 Input Closed171 ULI5 Input Opened172 ULI6 Input Closed173 ULI6 Input Opened174 ULI7 Input Closed175 ULI7 Input Opened176 ULI8 Input Closed177 ULI8 Input Opened178 ULI9 Input Closed179 ULI9 Input Opened180 CRI Input Closed181 CRI Input OpenedDifferential (Index 132) / Harmonic Restraint (Index 204)/Through Fault (Index 242) Codes for the TPU.00 87T01 87H02 51P-103 51N-104 50P-105 50N-106 150P-107 150N-1 08 46-109 51P-210 51G-211 50P-212 50G-213 150P-214 150G-215 46-216 ECI-117 ECI-218 Thru Flt19 Harm Rest


58

User Definable Registers (Indices 319 Through 350)

Many DNP 3.0 hosts may follow differing levels of implementation. Some hosts may accept 16 bit objects, butthey may only interpret 12 bit data types. ABB allows scaling of this data to various data lengths. The procedureto configure these User Definable Registers is detailed in Section 5 of this document. Using the register definitionlists as described in the Modbus/Modbus Plus Section of this manual, data may be configured from a 32 bit formatto a 16 bit or less data format.

The data may also be packed to ensure that a group of data is returned upon a poll of the specific analog datatypes.

Please refer to Section 5 of this document which describes the method to perform REGISTER SCALING ANDREMAPPING.

Analog Data Index Definition

Table 5-7 lists the Analog data retrievable via DNP 3.0.

Table 5-7. Analog Input Index Designation

Analog Input PointsStatic (Steady-State) Object Number: 30Change Event Object Number: 32Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input) or 1 (32 Bit AnalogInput)Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Change Event w/oTime)PointI.D.

Item Description Assigned Class(1, 2, 3 or none)

ScanGroup

0 IA-1 (Load Currents) Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 11771 IA-1 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 11772 IB-1 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 11773 IB-1 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 11774 IC-1 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 11775 IC-1 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 11776 IN-1 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 11777 IN-1 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 11778 IA-2 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 11779 IA-2 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 117710 IB-2 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 117711 IB-2 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 117712 IC-2 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 117713 IC-2 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 117714 IG-2 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 117715 IG-2 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 117716 IA-3 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 117717 IA-3 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 117718 IB-3 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 117719 IB-3 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 117720 IC-3 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 117721 IC-3 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 117722 IN-3 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 117723 IN-3 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 117724 I0-1 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 1188


59



ScanGroup

25 I0-1 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 118826 I1-1 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 118827 I1-1 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 118828 I2-1 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 118829 I2-1 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 118830 I0-2 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 118831 I0-2 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 118832 I1-2 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 118833 I1-2 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 118834 I2-2 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 118835 I2-2 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 118836 I0-3 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 118837 I0-3 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 118838 I1-3 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 118839 I1-3 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 118840 I2-3 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 118841 I2-3 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 118842 Iop A (*800) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 119943 Iop B (*800) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 119944 Iop C (*800) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 119945 IresA-1 (*800) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 119946 IresA-1 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 119947 IresB-1 (*800) Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 119948 IresB-1 Angle Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 119949 IresC-1 (*800) Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 119950 IresC-1 Angle Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 119951 IresA-2 (*800) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 119952 IresA-2 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 119953 IresB-2 (*800) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 119954 IresB-2 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 119955 IresC-2 (*800) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 119956 IresC-2 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 119957 IresA-3 (*800) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 119958 IresA-3 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 119959 IresB-3 (*800) Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 119960 IresB-3 Angle Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 119961 IresC-3 (*800) Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 119962 IresC-3 Angle Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 119963 2nd Harmonic % A-1 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220064 2nd Harmonic % B-1 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220065 2nd Harmonic % C-1 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220066 2nd Harmonic % A-2 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220067 2nd Harmonic % B-2 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220068 2nd Harmonic % C-2 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220069 2nd Harmonic % A-3 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220070 2nd Harmonic % B-3 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 2200


60



ScanGroup

71 2nd Harmonic % C-3 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220072 5th Harmonic % A-1 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220073 5th Harmonic % B-1 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220074 5th Harmonic % C-1 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220075 5th Harmonic % A-2 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220076 5th Harmonic % B-2 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220077 5th Harmonic % C-2 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220078 5th Harmonic % A-3 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220079 5th Harmonic % B-3 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220080 5th Harmonic % C-3 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220081 All Harmonics % A-1 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220082 All Harmonics % B-1 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220083 All Harmonics % C-1 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220084 All Harmonics % A-2 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220085 All Harmonics % B-2 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220086 All Harmonics % C-2 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220087 All Harmonics % A-3 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220088 All Harmonics % B-3 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220089 All Harmonics % C-3 (*2) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 220090 KVan (Mag) Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 228891 KVan (Ang) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 228892 KVbn (Mag) Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 228893 KVbn (Ang) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 228894 KVcn (Mag) Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 228895 KVcn (Ang) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 228896 KWan Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 228897 KWbn Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 228898 KWcn Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 228899 KW3* Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 2288

100 KVARan Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 2288101 KVARbn Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 2288102 KVARcn Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 2288103 KVAR3* Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 2288104 KWHra Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 2288105 KWHrb Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 2288106 KWHrc Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 2288107 KWHr3* Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 2288108 KVARHra Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 2288109 KVARHrb Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 2288110 KVARHrc Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 2288111 KVARHr3* Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 2288112 KVA3* Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 2288113 Frequency (*100) Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 2288114 Power Factor (*100) Signed,

two's comp + = Leading, = Lagging

Static – 16 Bit ( Var 2 or 4) None 2288


61



ScanGroup

115 KV1 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 2299116 KV1 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 2299117 KV2 Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) None 2299118 KV2 Angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 2299119 Demand Ia (Load Currents) See Note 1 3 2211120 Demand Ib See Note 1 3 2211121 Demand Ic See Note 1 3 2211122 Demand In/Ig See Note 1 3 2211123 Demand KWan See Note 1 3 3300124 Demand KWbn See Note 1 3 3300125 Demand KWcn See Note 1 3 3300126 Demand KW3* See Note 1 3 3300127 Demand KVARan See Note 1 3 3300128 Demand KVARbn See Note 1 3 3300129 Demand KVARcn See Note 1 3 3300130 Demand KVAR3* See Note 1 3 3300131 Fault Parameter Flag See Note 2 1 2233132 Fault Type (element) See Note 2 1 2222133 Setting See Note 2 1 2233134 Fault Number See Note 2 1 2222135 Clear Time (*1000) See Note 2 1 2233136 Winding 1 Tap (*500) See Note 2 1 2244137 Winding 2 Tap (*500) See Note 2 1 2244138 I operate A (*800) See Note 2 1 2244139 I operate B (*800) See Note 2 1 2244140 I operate C (*800) See Note 2 1 2244141 I restraint A-1 (*800) See Note 2 1 2244142 I restraint B-1 (*800) See Note 2 1 2244143 I restraint C-1 (*800) See Note 2 1 2244144 I restraint A-2 (*800) See Note 2 1 2244145 I restraint B-2 (*800) See Note 2 1 2244146 I restraint C-2 (*800) See Note 2 1 2244147 2nd Harmonic A-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255148 5th Harmonic A-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255149 All Harmonic A-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255150 2nd Harmonic B-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255151 5th Harmonic B-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255152 All Harmonic B-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255153 2nd Harmonic C-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255154 5th Harmonic C-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255155 All Harmonic C-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255156 2nd Harmonic A-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255157 5th Harmonic A-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255158 All Harmonic A-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255159 2nd Harmonic B-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255160 5th Harmonic B-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255


62



ScanGroup

161 All Harmonic B-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255162 2nd Harmonic C-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255163 5th Harmonic C-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255164 All Harmonic C-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255165 I restraint A-1 (Ang) See Note 2 1 2244166 I restraint B-1 (Ang) See Note 2 1 2244167 I restraint C-1 (Ang) See Note 2 1 2244168 I restraint A-2 (Ang) See Note 2 1 2244169 I restraint B-2 (Ang) See Note 2 1 2244170 I restraint C-2 (Ang) See Note 2 1 2244171 IA-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note 2 1 2233172 IB-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note 2 1 2233173 IC-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note 2 1 2233174 IN-1 (*800 / Neutral Wdg1 Scale) See Note 2 1 2233175 IA-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note 2 1 2233176 IB-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note 2 1 2233177 IC-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note 2 1 2233178 IG-2 (*800 / Ground Wdg2

Scale)See Note 2 1 2233

179 IA-1 Angle See Note 2 1 2266180 IB-1 Angle See Note 2 1 2266181 IC-1 Angle See Note 2 1 2266182 IN-1 Angle See Note 2 1 2266183 IA-2 Angle See Note 2 1 2266184 IB-2 Angle See Note 2 1 2266185 IC-2 Angle See Note 2 1 2266186 IG-2 Angle See Note 2 1 2266187 I0-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note 2 1 2277188 I1-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note 2 1 2277189 I2-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note 2 1 2277190 I0-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note 2 1 2277191 I1-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note 2 1 2277192 I2-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note 2 1 2277193 I0-1 Angle See Note 2 1 2277194 I1-1 Angle See Note 2 1 2277195 I2-1 Angle See Note 2 1 2277196 I0-2 Angle See Note 2 1 2277197 I1-2 Angle See Note 2 1 2277198 I2-2 Angle See Note 2 1 2277199 Scale - Phase Wdg 1 See Note 2 1 2233200 Scale - Phase Wdg 2 See Note 2 1 2233201 Scale - Neutral Wdg 1 See Note 2 1 2233202 Scale - Ground Wdg 2 See Note 2 1 2233203 Fault Paramter Flag See Note 2 1 2233204 Fault Type (element) See Note 2 1 2222205 Setting See Note 2 1 2233


63



ScanGroup

206 Fault Number See Note 2 1 2222207 Clear Time (*1000) See Note 2 1 2233208 Relay Time (*1000) See Note 2 1 2233209 IA-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note 2 1 2233210 IB-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note 2 1 2233211 IC-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note 2 1 2233212 IN-1 (*800 / Neutral Wdg1 Scale) See Note 2 1 2233213 IA-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note 2 1 2233214 IB-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note 2 1 2233215 IC-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note 2 1 2233216 IG-2 (*800 / Ground Wdg2

Scale)See Note 2 1 2233

217 IA-1 Angle See Note 2 1 2266218 IB-1 Angle See Note 2 1 2266219 IC-1 Angle See Note 2 1 2266220 IN-1 Angle See Note 2 1 2266221 IA-2 Angle See Note 2 1 2266222 IB-2 Angle See Note 2 1 2266223 IC-2 Angle See Note 2 1 2266224 IG-2 Angle See Note 2 1 2266225 I0-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note 2 1 2277226 I1-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note 2 1 2277227 I2-1 (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) See Note 2 1 2277228 I0-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note 2 1 2277229 I1-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note 2 1 2277230 I2-2 (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) See Note 2 1 2277231 I0-1 Angle See Note 2 1 2277232 I1-1 Angle See Note 2 1 2277233 I2-1 Angle See Note 2 1 2277234 I0-2 Angle See Note 2 1 2277235 I1-2 Angle See Note 2 1 2277236 I2-2 Angle See Note 2 1 2277237 Scale - Phase Wdg 1 See Note 2 1 2233238 Scale - Phase Wdg 2 See Note 2 1 2233239 Scale - Neutral Wdg 1 See Note 2 1 2233240 Scale - Ground Wdg 2 See Note 2 1 2233241 Fault Paramter Flag See Note 2 1 2233242 Fault Type (element) See Note 2 1 2222243 Setting See Note 2 1 2233244 Fault Number See Note 2 1 2222245 Winding 1 Tap (*10) See Note 2 1 2244246 Winding 2 Tap (*10) See Note 2 1 2244247 I operate A (*800) See Note 2 1 2244248 I operate B (*800) See Note 2 1 2244249 I operate C (*800) See Note 2 1 2244250 I restraint A-1 (*800) See Note 2 1 2244


64



ScanGroup

251 I restraint B-1 (*800) See Note 2 1 2244252 I restraint C-1 (*800) See Note 2 1 2244253 I restraint A-2 (*800) See Note 2 1 2244254 I restraint B-2 (*800) See Note 2 1 2244255 I restraint C-2 (*800) See Note 2 1 2244256 2nd Harmonic A-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255257 5th Harmonic A-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255258 All Harmonic A-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255259 2nd Harmonic B-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255260 5th Harmonic B-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255261 All Harmonic B-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255262 2nd Harmonic C-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255263 5th Harmonic C-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255264 All Harmonic C-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255265 2nd Harmonic A-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255266 5th Harmonic A-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255267 All Harmonic A-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255268 2nd Harmonic B-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255269 5th Harmonic B-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255270 All Harmonic B-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255271 2nd Harmonic C-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255272 5th Harmonic C-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255273 All Harmonic C-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255274 I restraint A-1 (Ang) See Note 2 1 2244275 I restraint B-1 (Ang) See Note 2 1 2244276 I restraint C-1 (Ang) See Note 2 1 2244277 I restraint A-2 (Ang) See Note 2 1 2244278 I restraint B-2 (Ang) See Note 2 1 2244279 I restraint C-2 (Ang) See Note 2 1 2244280 Winding 1 Tap (*10) See Note 2 1 2244281 Winding 2 Tap (*10) See Note 2 1 2244282 I operate A (*800) See Note 2 1 2244283 I operate B (*800) See Note 2 1 2244284 I operate C (*800) See Note 2 1 2244285 I restraint A-1 (*800) See Note 2 1 2244286 I restraint B-1 (*800) See Note 2 1 2244287 I restraint C-1 (*800) See Note 2 1 2244288 I restraint A-2 (*800) See Note 2 1 2244289 I restraint B-2 (*800) See Note 2 1 2244290 I restraint C-2 (*800) See Note 2 1 2244291 2nd Harmonic A-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255292 5th Harmonic A-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255293 All Harmonic A-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255294 2nd Harmonic B-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255295 5th Harmonic B-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255296 All Harmonic B-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255


65



ScanGroup

297 2nd Harmonic C-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255298 5th Harmonic C-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255299 All Harmonic C-1 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255300 2nd Harmonic A-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255301 5th Harmonic A-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255302 All Harmonic A-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255303 2nd Harmonic B-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255304 5th Harmonic B-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255305 All Harmonic B-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255306 2nd Harmonic C-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255307 5th Harmonic C-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255308 All Harmonic C-2 (*2) See Note 2 1 2255309 I restraint A-1 (Ang) See Note 2 1 2244310 I restraint B-1 (Ang) See Note 2 1 2244311 I restraint C-1 (Ang) See Note 2 1 2244312 I restraint A-2 (Ang) See Note 2 1 2244313 I restraint B-2 (Ang) See Note 2 1 2244314 I restraint C-2 (Ang) See Note 2 1 2244315 Duration (*1000) See Note 2 1 2222316 Operation message # See Note 2 2 2222317 Operation Value (if any) See Note 2 2 2222318 Operation Number See Note 2 2 2222319 User Register 1 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311320 User Register 2 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311321 User Register 3 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311322 User Register 4 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311323 User Register 5 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311324 User Register 6 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311325 User Register 7 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311326 User Register 8 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311327 User Register 9 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311328 User Register 10 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311329 User Register 11 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311330 User Register 12 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311331 User Register 13 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311332 User Register 14 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311333 User Register 15 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311334 User Register 16 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311335 User Register 17 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311336 User Register 18 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311337 User Register 19 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311338 User Register 20 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311339 User Register 21 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311340 User Register 22 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311341 User Register 23 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311342 User Register 24 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311


66



ScanGroup

343 User Register 25 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311344 User Register 26 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311345 User Register 27 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311346 User Register 28 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311347 User Register 29 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311348 User Register 30 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311349 User Register 31 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311350 User Register 32 Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) None 3311351 IG magnitude Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) (T) None 1144352 IG angle Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) (T) None 1144353 Power Factor – magnitude Static – 32 Bit (Var 1 or 3) (T) None 1144354 Power Factor – lead/lag status Static – 16 Bit (Var 2 or 4) (T) None 1144

NOTE:1. If Static data is read (Object 30) then the current demand data is returned. If Event Read data is

placed in the buffer, then the peak demand (Load) and minimum demand (Load) values are returnedfor class or object data.

2. Event and Fault Data Returned only on a change event detection (Object 32). No data is available asstatic (Object 30)

3. 16 Bit static information is reported to the host. Refer to Section 5 of this document for scalingcapabilities contained with the TPU 2000R.

4. Added in Version 3.4 which requires flash executive 4.02 or later for feature incorporation. (T) – THREE WINDING TPU ONLY

Class Data Parameterization

The TPU2000 and TPU2000R supports Class Data. All elements described in Tables 5-4, 5-5 and 5-8 arereported in a Class 0 scan. A Class 0 scan is sometimes referred to as an integrity scan. Figures 5-6 through 5-9explain the method to enable Class data reporting via enabling of group information.

A summary explanation of DNP 3.0 Class Reporting Data is as follows:

� Class 0 All Static Data� Class 1 Fault Record Data (Digital Input Points 96, 97 and Analog Input Points 55-86)� Class 2 Operation Records (Analog Input Points 87 through 89)� Class 3 Minimum and Maximum Demand Data (Analog Input Points 43 through 54)

Status Point Information (Digital Input Points 1 through 95, and 98 through 1-162)

It should be noted that only Class 3 (Object 60 Variant 3) Digital Points may be masked to provide a reducedamount of data returned between integrity scans. It is a reliable method of obtaining change of state data withinthe TPU2000, and TPU2000R.


67

Parameter 5 Class Data Configuration

Parameter 5 - If Bit 0 = 1 Group 0 Disabled

Parameter 5 - If Bit 0 = 0 Group 0 Enabled

Parameter 5 - If Bit 1 - 7 = 1 Group 1 to 7 Enabled. If 0 then corresponding group Disabled

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Upper Byte Used forClass Data Masking

Lower Byte Used forClass Data Selection

Bit 0 = 0 = Group 0 data reported = value = 0Bit 1 = 1 = Group 1 data reported = value = 3Bit 2 = 1 = Group 2 data reported = value = 5Bit 3 = 1 = Group 3 data reported = value = 9


To enable all Groups parameter must be set to 254.

Figure 5-6. Parameter 5 DNP 3.0 Group Mask


Parameter 6 - If Bit 0 - 7 = 1 Group 8 to 15. If 0 then corresponding group Disabled.

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5






Figure 5-7. Parameter 6 Group Mask


68


Parameter 7 - If Bit 0 - 7 = 1 Group 16 to 23. If 0 then corresponding group Disabled.

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5








Parameter 8 - If Bit 0 - 7 = 1 Group 24 to 31. If bit is 0 thencorresponding group Disabled.

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5



Bit 0 = 1 = Group 24 data reported= value = 1Bit 1 = 1 = Group 25 data reported = value = 2Bit 2 = 1 = Group 26 data reported = value = 4Bit 3 = 1 = Group 27 data reported = value = 8




EXAMPLE If Groups 0, 1, 27 and 28 were to be enabled and all other points were to be disabled. What would be thecalculated parameters for PARAMETERS 5, 6, 7, and 8.

SOLUTION Parameter 5 = Group 0 Enabled + Group 1 Enabled + Group 2 Disabled + Group 3 Disabled + Group 4 Disabled+ Group 5 Disabled + Group 6 Disabled + Group 7 Disabled

Parameter 5 = 0 + 2+ 0+0+0+0+0+0

Parameter 5 = 2Parameter 6 = 0 (Nothing selected for these groups)Parameter 7 = 0 (Nothing selected for these groups)

Parameter 8 = Group 24 Disabled + Group 25 Disabled + Group 26 Disabled + Group 27 Enabled + Group 28Enabled + Group 29 Disabled + Group 30 Disabled + Group 31 Disabled

Parameter 8 = 0 + 0+ 0+16+8+0+0+0Parameter 8 = 24.


69

Thus in the setup communication parameter configuration screen Parameters 5, 6, 7, and 8 would be configuredwith the values 2,0,0, and 24.

It must be noted that regardless of the order of points given in the group enable parameterization, class data for agiven class will be returned in the order defined in the parameter byte assignment configuration table. More thanone object may be contained in the response to accommodate various data types and variations required tosatisfy the request.

Class 3 Data Masking

DNP 3.0 is a powerful protocol designed for utility applications. However, the amount of data must be efficientlymanaged so that fast updates to the host may occur. A common method to acquire vast amounts of data is toconfigure a host to perform an integrity scan initially (request Class 1, 2, 3, and 0 Data) and then perform Class 3scans. The host shall update its database in that Class 3 data shall only return the data, which has changed fromthe previous, scan to the present scan. Each implementer determines the time duration between Class Scans.When a sufficient period of time elapses, the host would then execute an integrity scan. The host would thenupdate its own database and verify the integrity of its own records. Integrity scans can occur as frequently asevery 5 minutes or as infrequently as every 1 hour. Each host has its own capabilities and the designer of theautomation system designs the polling interval to suit the application.

ABB relays incorporate a method to decrease the amount of data reported upon a change event poll. If the grouphas been enabled, all points in that group are returned for a class. If the amount of data required on a Class 3 pollis less than that on a Class 0 or integrity poll, Event Masking is a method to de-select points within a Class 3request poll.

The method to perform event masking is described as such:Events generated for Binary Input points can be masked to minimize the amount of data returned on a Class 3scan. As of release v3.2, all Binary Input points with point index 11 or greater generate change events. Pointindex 96 and 97 generate Class 1 events, all other binary events are Class 3 and may be masked. The maskingmust be set up using the ABB provided External Communications Program - ECP.

The Communication Configuration Settings are accessed via the Miscellaneous Settings item on the ChangeSettings Menu. The Binary Input Event Masks are contained in Settings 1 to 9; by default they are all zero -enabled. This causes all events to be reported (provided their Scan Group is enabled). They can be disabled bychanging all of these Communication Configuration Settings to have all bits set (65535).

The procedure to access the Miscellaneous Settings Screen is as follows:

Figure 5-10. Settings Menu Access Screen for the TPU2000/2000R


70

The settings screen is visible in Figure 5-9. Select the MISCELLANEOUS tab within WINECP and the screenshown in Figure 5-10 is visible.

Figure 5-11. Settings Screen

Figure 5-12. Miscellaneous Settings Submeu Screen

There are three pushbutton fields, select the Set Communication Settings Screen to display the screen to enterthe 32 parameters which are used for CLASS 3 EVENT masking as described in the text that follows. Figure 5-12illustrates the submenu screen for parameter entry.


71

Figure 5-13. 32 Parameter Configuration Screen

The masks for individual points can be determined from the Table 5 below. The left half of the table specifieswhich Settings Word applies for each group of 16 points. By dividing the point index by 16 and checking theremainder in the right half of the table the mask value for each individual point index can be determined.

Table 5-8. Class 3 Event Masking Settings

Point Comm. Configuration Settings PointIndex Setting Mask IndexRange Word Value Remainder0-15 1 1 016-31 2 2 132-47 3 4 248-63 4 8 364-79 5 16 480-95 6 32 596-111 7 64 6

112-127 8 128 7

128-143 9512 91024 102048 114096 128192 1316384 1432768 15

Example 1: To mask out the Binary Event for the Breaker Failure Alarm (BFA) - point index 57, perform thefollowing steps:

a . Divide 57 by 16, to get a remainder of 9.b . Look up the entries for 57 and 9 in the left and right halves of the table, respectively.c . This tells us that Communication Configuration Setting 4 should be set to 512 to mask out

this event.


72

Example 2: To mask out multiple Binary Events, for the 50P3 and 50N3 Functions (point indexes 40 and 41)first follow the procedure from example 1, then perform the following steps:

a . The steps in example 1 establish that both points are in Communication Configuration Setting3 and that the values are 256 and 512 for point index 40 and 41, respectively.

b . To mask off both points we need only to add the two values together to get 768.

Users who have DNP software versions prior to v3.2 may want to limit the number of points reported via the Class3 Binary Input changes for compatibility with those other versions. For versions v2.0 through v2.8 only point index11 was reported as a Class 3 Binary Input event. For versions v2.9 and v3.0, the Class 3 Binary Input eventswere limited to point index 11 and the points marked as “sealed-ins”. The table below shows the CommunicationConfiguration Settings to restrict event reporting to those points if using a relay with v3.2 or later software.

Setting v2.0 - v2.8 v2.9 - v3.0Word Value Values

1 63487 634872 65535 655353 65535 34 65535 650225 65535 645116 65535 655357 65535 655358 65535 501759 65535 65534

NOTE: In all cases, events are not reported unless the specified Scan Group (or Scan Type) is enabled.Thus, a disabled Scan Group also effectively masks all Class 3 events generated by points in thatgroup.

The Sample DNP Event Masking Worksheet (on the next page) shows how the values for masking all events thatare not available on the DNP v3.0 software were determined.


73

DNP Event Masking Worksheet (sample)

Communications Configurable Setting #Value10 ValueHex 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

1 0x0001 0 16 32 x 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160

2 0x0002 1 17 33 49 65 81 97 113 129 145 1614 0x0004 2 18 x 34 50 66 82 98 114 130 146 1628 0x0008 3 19 x 35 51 67 83 99 115 131 147 163

16 0x0010 4 20 x 36 52 68 84 100 116 132 148 164

32 0x0020 5 21 x 37 53 69 85 101 117 133 149 16564 0x0040 6 22 x 38 54 70 86 102 118 134 150 166

128 0x0080 7 23 x 39 55 71 87 103 119 135 151 167256 0x0100 8 24 x 40 56 72 88 104 120 136 152 168512 0x0200 9 25 x 41 x 57 73 89 105 121 137 153

1024 0x0400 10 26 x 42 58 x 74 90 106 x 122 138 1542048 0x0800 x 11 27 x 43 59 75 91 107 x 123 139 1554096 0x1000 12 28 x 44 60 76 92 108 x 124 140 1568192 0x2000 13 29 x 45 61 77 93 109 x 125 141 157

16384 0x4000 14 30 x 46 62 78 94 110 126 142 15832768 0x8000 15 31 x 47 63 79 95 111 127 143 159

(step 2) 2048 0 65532 513 1024 0 0 15360 0 0 0 Totals 65535 (step 3) 63487 65535 3 65022 64511 65535 65535 50175 65535 65535 65535 Totals (step 4) 0xF7FF 0xFFFF 0x0003 0xFDFE 0xFBFF 0xFFBF 0xFFFF 0xC3FF 0xFFFF 0xFFFF 0xFFFF

•• EEnnttrriieess iinn tthhee ttaabbllee iinnddiiccaattee DDNNPP PPooiinntt nnuummbbeerrss..•• TThhee CCoommmmuunniiccaattiioonnss CCoonnffiigguurraabbllee SSeettttiinngg ##ss iinn tthhee ccoolluummnn hheeaaddiinnggss sshhooww wwhhiicchh sseettttiinngg ccoonnttaaiinnss tthhee mmaasskkss

ffoorr tthhee iinnddiiccaatteedd DDNNPP ppooiinnttss..•• TThhee lleeffttmmoosstt ccoolluummnnss ccoonnttaaiinn tthhee mmaasskk vvaalluuee ffoorr eeaacchh rrooww ooff DDNNPP ppooiinnttss iinn ddeecciimmaall aanndd hheexxiiddeecciimmaall..

SStteeppss::11.. MMaarrkk ((wwiitthh aann xx)) eeaacchh ppooiinntt tthhaatt sshhoouulldd hhaavvee eevveenntt rreeppoorrttiinngg eennaabblleedd..22.. PPrroocceeeeddiinngg oonnee ccoolluummnn aatt aa ttiimmee,, ttoottaall tthhee vvaalluueess ccoorrrreessppoonnddiinngg ttoo tthhee mmaarrkkeedd ppooiinnttss..33.. CCaallccuullaattee tthhee mmaasskk vvaalluuee bbyy ssuubbttrraaccttiinngg tthhee vvaalluuee ffrroomm sstteepp 22 ffrroomm 6655553355..44.. TThhee sstteepp 33 rreessuullttss hhaavvee bbeeeenn ccoonnvveerrtteedd ttoo hheexxiiddeecciimmaall ffoorrmmaatt ((ooppttiioonnaall))..55.. EEnntteerr tthhee rreessuullttss ffrroomm sstteepp 33 iinn tthhee EECCPP pprrooggrraamm ffoorr tthhee ssppeecciiffiieedd CCoommmmuunniiccaattiioonnss CCoonnffiigguurraabbllee SSeettttiinnggss..


74

DNP Event Masking Worksheet

Communications Configurable Setting #Value10 ValueHex 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

1 0x0001 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160

2 0x0002 1 17 33 49 65 81 97 113 129 145 1614 0x0004 2 18 34 50 66 82 98 114 130 146 1628 0x0008 3 19 35 51 67 83 99 115 131 147 163

16 0x0010 4 20 36 52 68 84 100 116 132 148 164

32 0x0020 5 21 37 53 69 85 101 117 133 149 16564 0x0040 6 22 38 54 70 86 102 118 134 150 166

128 0x0080 7 23 39 55 71 87 103 119 135 151 167256 0x0100 8 24 40 56 72 88 104 120 136 152 168512 0x0200 9 25 41 57 73 89 105 121 137 153

1024 0x0400 10 26 42 58 74 90 106 122 138 1542048 0x0800 11 27 43 59 75 91 107 123 139 1554096 0x1000 12 28 44 60 76 92 108 124 140 1568192 0x2000 13 29 45 61 77 93 109 125 141 157

16384 0x4000 14 30 46 62 78 94 110 126 142 15832768 0x8000 15 31 47 63 79 95 111 127 143 159

Totals 65535Totals 0xFFFF

•• EEnnttrriieess iinn tthhee ttaabbllee iinnddiiccaattee DDNNPP PPooiinntt nnuummbbeerrss..•• TThhee CCoommmmuunniiccaattiioonnss CCoonnffiigguurraabbllee SSeettttiinngg ##ss iinn tthhee ccoolluummnn hheeaaddiinnggss sshhooww wwhhiicchh sseettttiinngg ccoonnttaaiinnss tthhee mmaasskkss

ffoorr tthhee iinnddiiccaatteedd DDNNPP ppooiinnttss..TThhee lleeffttmmoosstt ccoolluummnnss ccoonnttaaiinn tthhee mmaasskk vvaalluuee ffoorr eeaacchh rrooww ooff DDNNPP ppooiinnttss iinnddeecciimmaall aanndd hheexxiiddeecciimmaall..

Time Synchronization

Although not required for a Level 2 implementation, the TPU2000 and TPU2000R allows for TimeSynchronization via the DNP 3.0 communication network. Time Synchronization must be enabled if the value inParameter 9 is other than 0. The procedure for Time Synchronization is covered in the DNP Texts referencedwithin this document. The procedure to perform time synchronization is included here for the benefit of thereader.

1. The Master station sends a Delay Measurement Response request to the relay (Object 52 Variant 1 or 2 inreference to fine or coarse time). The Master records the time of the transmission of the first bit of the firstbyte of the request.

2. The relay receives the first bit of the first byte of the Delay Measurement Request at the time the RTURECEIVE TIME (the local time in the relay).

3. The relay transmits the first bit of the first byte of the response to the Delay Measurement request at timeRTU SEND TIME. The response contains the fine or coarse (as defined by Variant 1 or 2 of Object 52 asdefined in the DNP 3.0 specification) TIME DELAY object, with the time in his object equal to the "turn aroundtime [time of send/receive and relay response] of the host communicating to the relay.

4. The Master Station receives the first bit of the first byte of the relay’s response at the time the Master ReceiveTime is recorded by the host as the response input.


75

5. The Master Station can now calculate the one way propagation delay = (Master Send Time - Master ReceiveTime - "turn around time")/2

6. The master now transmits the first bit of the first byte of a WRITE COMMAND at time of send. The Writerequest contains the calculated value of the actual host time plus the calculated delay time. This is the timethe relay will be set to including delay. The Write command shall be Object 50 variant 2 as defined by theDNP 3.0 protocol.

When the relay receives the time synchronize write command, the relay is Synchronized.

According to the specification of DNP 3.0, if all delay times for all devices receiving commands on the network arethe same, the host may send a broadcast command which is address FFFF hexadecimal.

It is exceptionally important that parameter 9 be configured for time synchronization setting iin bit reporting. Alsothe communication menu must be configured for IRIG B being “enabled”. Select the communication menu tab asillustrated in the previous figures and select the IRIG B parameterization as illustrated in Figure 5-13.

Figure 5-14. Time Synchronization Parameterization Requirements

Rapid Analog Reporting

The ABB DPU 2000/2000R does not incorporate analog deadbanding. In order to improve DNP 3.0 response,analternate method of performing rapid access of DNP 3.0 metering values has been developed. Since no meteringvalues are returned in the CLASS 1, 2, or 3 scans, all metering data must be obtained by performing a CLASS 0,or Object 30. An alternate means has been incorporated in which up to 32 UDR (User Definable Registers) maybe reported in a CLASS 3 scan on a timed basis. If the DPU has not been read by a Class 3 scan within that timeinterval, the analog UDR data register is overwritten and the new value is reported. FIGURE 5-9E illustrates themethod to calculate the Miscellaneous Communication Parameters to enable the Rapid Analog ReportingFeature.

The method to configure the TPU 2000R is as follows:

1. GROUP 31 (User Definable Registers) must be enabled via Communication Parameter 8. Reference Section4 of this manual for an explanation of this procedure.

2. Mode Parameter 6 must be enabled to allow the DPU 2000/2000R to periodically report the User DefinableRegisters on a timed Basis. Section 4 of this manual describes the means to configure the communicationconfiguration screen.


76

3. Select the Miscellaneous Tab in WIN ECP to access the screen to configure the UDR Analog Reportingfeature. The screen is shown in Figure 5-14A. Select the submenu selection “Set Communications Config” toaccess the screen to parameterize the device. The Analog Reporting Configuration process may only beaccomplished via WIN ECP. The process may not be accomplished via the FRONT PANEL INTERFACE.Parameters 17,18, and 19 are available to parameterize this feature. Access the sub window configurationscreen by “clicking” over the field to be configured. Figure 5-14B shows the subwindow available forconfiguration.

4. Enable the specific UDR registers as per the prodedure illustrated in Figures 5-14 C and 5-14 D.Miscellaneous Setting parameter 17 and 18 selects the register to report to the host. It must be emphasizedthat if the specific bit is set to a value of “1” the specific UDR will not be reported on a timed basis. If thespecific bit is set to a value of “0” then the specific UDR will be reported on a timed basis to the requestinghost device.

5. The rate as to how often the UDR registers are placed in the CLASS 3 reporting buffer (thereby setting theCLASS 3 bit) is configured in the Miscellaneous Setting 19. The value written in this parameter is from 1 to32763 and reflects the number of seconds by which UDR’s are placed in the CLASS 3 data reportingmechanism. If the CLASS 3 data is not scanned within the configured time window, the values areoverwritten. It should be noted that time stamping of the analog CLASS 3 data does not occur. In otherwords, no matter how long it takes the master station before the IED is scanned, there will only be one set ofUDR registers to be reported and the time of reporting will NOT be reported as part of the CLASS 3 scan datareturned to the host.

6. Refer to the next section titled REGISTER SCALING AND RE-MAPPING AND USER DEFINABLEREGISTER (UDR) CONFIGURATION PROCESS, for configuring the data format for the requested CLASS 3reported information.

Figure 5-14A. Miscellaneous Settings Screen


77

Figure 5-14B. Miscellaneous Parameter Configuration Subscreens

Miscellaneous Communication Configurable Settings-Setting 17

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 0 = 0 = UDR 17 data not reported value = 1Bit 1 = 0 = UDR 18 data not reported value = 2Bit 2 = 0 = UDR 19 data not reported value = 4Bit 3 = 0 = UDR 20 data not reported value = 8 Bit 4 = 0 = UDR 21 data not reported value = 16Bit 5 = 0 = UDR 22 data not reported value = 32Bit 6 = 0 = UDR 23 data not reported value = 64Bit 7 = 0 = UDR 24 data not reported value = 128

Bit 15

Bit 14

Bit 8

Bit 9

Bit10

Bit 11

Bit 12

Bit 13

Bit 8 = 0 = UDR 25 data not reported value = 256Bit 9 = 0 = UDR 26 data not reported value = 512Bit 10= 0 = UDR 27 data not reported value = 1,024Bit 11= 0 = UDR 28 data not reported value = 2,048 Bit 12 = 0 = UDR 29 data not reported value = 4,096Bit 13 = 0 = UDR 30 data not reported value = 8,192Bit 14 = 0 = UDR 31 data not reported value = 16,384Bit 15 = 0 = UDR 32 data not reported value = 32,768

EXAMPLE:

IF UDR’s 17,23 and 27were to be included in aClass 3 scan:

65535 - 1 - 64 - 1024=Setting = 64446

Figure 5-14C. Miscellaneous Parameter 17 Setting


78

Miscellaneous Communication Configurable Settings-Setting 18

Bit 7

Bit 6

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 0 = 0 = UDR 1 data not reported value = 1Bit 1 = 0 = UDR 2 data not reported value = 2Bit 2 = 0 = UDR 3 data not reported value = 4Bit 3 = 0 = UDR 4 data not reported value = 8 Bit 4 = 0 = UDR 5 data not reported value = 16Bit 5 = 0 = UDR 6 data not reported value = 32Bit 6 = 0 = UDR 7 data not reported value = 64Bit 7 = 0 = UDR 8 data not reported value = 128

Bit 15

Bit 14

Bit 8

Bit 9

Bit10

Bit 11

Bit 12

Bit 13

Bit 8 = 0 = UDR 9 data not reported value = 256Bit 9 = 0 = UDR 10 data not reported value = 512Bit 10= 0 = UDR11 data not reported value = 1,024Bit 11= 0 = UDR 12 data not reported value = 2,048 Bit 12 = 0 = UDR 13 data not reported value = 4,096Bit 13 = 0 = UDR 14 data not reported value = 8,192Bit 14 = 0 = UDR 15 data not reported value = 16,384Bit 15 = 0 = UDR 16 data not reported value = 32,768

EXAMPLE:

IF UDR’s 1 through 5were to be included in aClass 3 scan:

65535 - 1 -2 - 4 -8 - 16=Setting = 65472

Figure 5-14D. Miscellaneous Parameter 18 Setting

EXAMPLE

Miscellaneous Communication Parameter

Setting 17 = 64446Setting 18 = 65472Setting 19 = 5

UDR’s 1,2,3,4,5, 17,23 and 27 are reported in a CLASS 3 SCAN ( IIN BIT SET) every 5 seconds.

EC

IIN Class 3 BITSET

Send UDR 1, UDR 2, UDR 3, UDR 4, UDR 5, UDR 17, UDR 23, UDR 27wneh requested by and OBJECT 60 VARIANT 4.

Figure 5-14D. Example Continued

Register Scaling and Re-Mapping and User Definable Register (UDR) ConfigurationProcess

In the evolution of SCADA hosts, different capabilities have been implemented in conjunction with a protocol’simplementation. Some SCADA manufacturers have limited the range of numbers accepted at the host level.Other SCADA manufacturers have reserved alternate definitions of most significant bit placement. Still, otherSCADA manufacturers have restricted the amount of commands, which a host may send over a network.

ABB’s implementation of Register Scaling and Re-Mapping is one method of dealing with certain restrictions orlimitations of a SCADA host’s protocol implementation. For example, if a host device only accepts numbers from avalue of 0 to 4095 (12 bit unipolar) or –2047 to + 2048, how can that host device interpret the Van (Voltage a toneutral) in the TPU2000 which reports the value as a number from 0 to +4,294,967,295 (32 bit number)? The


79

answer is that one of the devices must take the 32 bit data and scale it into a format usable by the other device.Many hosts share this limitation and are unable to undertake the mathematical machinations to scale the datavalue. The ABB TPU2000 and 2000R permits scaling of its own internal data. The procedure is straightforward inthat a simple configuration screen is presented to the operator and menu of choices is selected to complete theconfiguration procedure.

Re-mapping is especially instrumental in increasing network throughput by allowing all information to be accessedvia one network transaction. Within the TPU2000 and 2000R, multitudes of values are available for retrieval via anetwork connection. However, different protocols require that each group of information can only be accessed viaa single network query. Thus if three different groups of information are required via the network, three networkaccesses must occur. However, if the information is re-mapped to a single memory area in the relay, only onenetwork access need be undertaken to gather the data. Network throughput is increased. Register scaling andre-mapping is common to all ABB TPU2000 and 2000R relays. The Register Scaling and Re-Mapping procedureis the same for DNP/Modbus/Modbus Plus/Standard Ten Byte Protocols. . DNP uses this method to improveoverall network throughput in reporting analog data in a CLASS 3 scan.

TPU2000 and TPU2000R protective relays provide for scaling and re-mapping functionality. The TPU does notsupport this capability. Figure 5-6 illustrates the example of re-mapping Van to one of 32 possible Modbusregister locations. The example table configuration entries are shown in the Figure. A definition of eachconfiguration entry and mathematically derived configuration examples follow.

TPU2000 and 2000R Internal Operation

The TPU2000 and TPU2000R reads the raw analog values received from the CT and PT physical connections.The microprocessor-based relay then converts the analog values to a raw digital numeric value from the relay’sinternal Analog to Digital Converter (A/D) hardware platform. The conversion of the voltage and current readingsis not complete. The TPU2000 and TPU2000R microprocessor then takes the raw converted value and performsa mathematical calculation providing a numeric value which is displayed on the relay’s front panel MMI or throughnetwork accesses.

A protection engineer would recognize the terms as such:

PRIMARY VALUES – the metering values displayed on the protective relay’s front panel interface.

SECONDARY VALUES – the current or voltage received by the CT or PT attached to the unit.

SCALED VALUES – the value received by the host device (or calculated by the IED and transmitted to the host)through the communication interface.

The mathematical calculations involved require the CT Phase, CT Neutral, and PT ratios in order to convert theraw A/D to an understandable value, displayed on the front panel MMI or available for access via a networkconnection. Thus, the information Van (Voltage A to Neutral), is displayed on the front panel MMI is in convertedformat (not raw A/D readings), and the data received via the Modbus/Modbus Plus Registers (40265 and 40266)is reported in Volts in a 32 bit representation. The maximum value able to be physically metered by the relay isdependent upon the TPU2000/2000R and the ratio of the PT and CT’s used. The CT and PT values are enteredinto the TPU through ECP/WinECP in the Configuration Settings Menu illustrated in Figure 5-14.

However, life as we know it, is not perfect. Many SCADA hosts are unable to interpret the 32-bit value receivedover a network. What can be done? ABB’s answer is to provide for a fill-in-the-blanks method of scaling. Thismethod takes the interpreted value and provides for DIVISOR SCALING (taking the MMI/network register valuesand dividing by a constant) or a RATIO SCALING (taking the MMI values/network register values, PT Ratios, CTRatios and Full SCALE Metered Readings) and transform it into a raw scaled value depending on theminimum/maximum value the SCADA system can interpret. The SCADA system must then receive themathematical value and perform its own internal calculations so that the data may be displayed to the operatorwhich mirrors that displayed on the relay’s front panel.


80

E

C

NORMALFAILPICKUPRECLOSER OUT

SYSTEM RESET

TIMEINSTANTANEOUSFREQUENCYNEGATIVE SEQUENCE

TARGET RESET

ST ATUS TARGETS

ABCN

DPU2000R

NetworkPartnerV1.0

DPU2000R

32Mappable Registers

Change Register Configuration

400001

400002

400003

400004

400005

400032

User Definable Register 40005

Scale 500Source Register Address (4XXX) 265Destination Data Type Bipolar (LSB)Destination Data Size 12 BitSource Scale Type VoltageSource Data Type Unsigned 32 Bit

To Accept Changes: Press Enter Return

No Change: Press Escape Key

High Word Van

Low Word Van

40265

40266

TYPICAL SCALING EXAMPLE

Figure 5-15. Register Scaling Methodology

Figure 5-16. Change Configuration Settings Menu Illustrating CT and VT Configuration

ABB Data Type Definitions

All definitions within this manual shall be based upon bits or registers. Since the ABB concept of Register Scalingand Remapping is based upon the Modbus Protocol, it is essential to understand Modbus Protocol even whenproviding Register Scaling and Remapping for DNP, Modbus Plus or Standard Ten Byte Protocols.

For example, Modbus requires all register values to be reported in 16 bit portions (1 word). Two registers may becombined to form numeric representations for IEEE notations, long signed (a number from –2,147,483,648 to+2,147,483,647) or unsigned numbers( a number from 0 to +4,294,967,295). If a value is requested in the shortform ( a number from –128 to +127, or 0 to 255), 16 bits will be returned as a response to the host’s request, butthe number will be within the range of an 8 bit integer.

msb lsb msb lsbWord Data MSW Word Data LSW

Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3Register Offsets of Signed/Unsigned Long

Word Data Byte 0 Byte 1

Register Offsets of Signed /Unsigned Integers0 Byte Data


81

Byte 0 Byte 1Register Offsets of Signed/Unsigned Short

ASCII Char ASCII CharByte 0 Byte 1

Register Offsets of ASCII Characters

The TPU2000 and TPU2000R support the following data return types for 4X formats:

• Unsigned Short - 8 bits - 1 byte in 1 word - Range 0 to 255• Signed Short - 8 bits - 1 byte in 1 word - Range -128 to +127• Unsigned - 16 bits - 2 bytes in 1 word - Range 0 to + 65,535• Signed - 16 bits - 2 bytes in 1 word - Range -32,768 to 32,767• Unsigned Long - 32 bits - 4 bytes in 2 words - Range 0 to +4,294,967,295• Signed Long - 32 bits - 4 bytes in 2 words - Range -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647• ASCII - 16 bits - 2 bytes in 1 word 2 characters per register (Reference Appendix A)

The tables contained within this document reference the above definitions and give the cadence of bytes or wordsas:

• MSB Most Significant Byte• LSB Least Significant Byte• MSW Most Significant Word• LSW Least Significant Word• msb Most Significant Bit• lsb Least Significant Bit

Register Scaling Investigated

Within ECP and WinECP, the Change Settings Mode must be entered. A selection titled “Register Configuration”will appear to the operator. Within ECP, a screen as depicted in Figure 8-3 appears allowing configuration of anyof the 32 available registers.

Figure 5-17. User Definable Register Configuration Screen

When using the ABB ECP Relay configuration program or the ABB WinECP Relay configuration program, thefollowing menu items must be selected for each of the 32 mappable and scalable entries. The scaled registeraddresses are resident in Modbus addressing format from Register 40001 through 40032. The following fieldsmust be configured to perform scaling correctly:


82

Table 5-9. Register Scaling Queries

ECP QUERY QUERY SELECTIONSSCALING METHOD UNIPOLAR

NEGATIVE UNIPOLARBIPOLAROFFSET BIPOLAR

DESTINATION REGISTER JUSTIFICATION(Selectable with Scaling Method)

LSB (Least Significant Bit)

MSB (Most Significant Bit)DESTINATION REGISTER SIZE 16 Bits

12 Bits8 Bits4 Bits1 Bit

SOURCE REGISTER ADDRESS 257 – XXXX which is a valid 4X register listedwithin this document

SOURCE REGISTER TYPE 16 Bits Signed16 Bits Unsigned32 Bits Signed32 Bits Unsigned

SOURCE SCALE RANGE 1 – 65535SOURCE SCALE TYPE CURRENT

VOLTAGEPOWERNORMALREMAINDER

Figure 5-15 illustrates the WIN ECP configuration, which appears before the operator upon configuration of eachof the User Definable Registers (UDR). Using the computer’s arrow keys to select the field, and depressing thespace bar shall allow configuration of the fields within this popup menu screen.

Figure 5-18. Popup Menu Configuration Screen for Data Type Register Selections


83

Scaling Option and Destination Register Length Options Explained

The source data may be scaled from a 32 bit or 16 bit value from the relay to a 16,12,8,4,or 1, bit scale of thevalue which is sent to a destination register. The scaling, minimum and maximum values sent to the destinationregister are listed in the table below.

Table 5-10. Minimum and Maximum Ranges for Scaled Numbers Depending Upon Scale Optionand Bit Length Selected

ScaleOption

16 Bit Scalemin max

12 Bit Scalemin max

8 Bit Scalemin max

4 Bit Scalemin max

1 Bit Scalemin max

OffsetBipolar

0 65535 0 4095 0 255 0 15 0 1

Bipolar -32768 32767 -2048 2047 -128 127 -8 7 0 1Unipolar 0 65535 0 4095 0 255 0 15 0 1NegativeUnipolar

0 65535 0 4095 0 255 0 15 0 1

The above table lists the maximum and minimum values reported to a host in the scaled format. Figure 5illustrates the value correlation between the scale bit minimum and maximum numbers reported to the hostversus the unscaled values generated by the TPU2000 and 2000R.

Within following discussions of scaling parameters, it should be remembered that the bit scale shall be referred toas the quantity “N” which is used extensively for the final scaled value calculation. N shall be a value of 16,12,8,4,or 2, which corresponds to the Bit Scale type referred to in Table 5-10 above.

OFFSETBIPOLARSCALING

UnscaledValue In TheDPU2000R

Scaled Value ReportedTo the Host Via Network

- Full Scale

0

+ Full Scale

Table 2 Minimum Value

0

Table 2 Maximum Value

OROR BIPOLARSCALING


Scaled Value Reported To the Host Via Network

0

+ Full Scale



UNUSED

UNIPOLAR SCALING


Scaled Value Reported To the Host Via Network

0

- Full Scale



UNUSED

NEGATIVEUNIPOLAR SCALING

Figure 5-19. Relationship Between Scaled and Unscaled Formats for Offset Bipolar, Bipolar,Unipolar, and Negative Unipolar Scaling Selection in the TPU2000 and 2000R

If one were to mathematically compute the minimum and maximum values as described above in Table 5-10 andrelate the values to the unscaled full scale + and full scale – values, the following equations would result from theanalysis.


84

Data Type Definitions Value Ranges EQUATION 1:Offset Bipolar (0 to +2N-1) where 0 = -FS, 2N-1-1 = 0 and 2N-1 = +FSEQUATION 2:Bipolar (-2N-1 to + 2N-1-1) where -2N-1 = -FS, 0 = 0 and 2N-1-1 = +FSEQUATION 3:Unipolar (0 to 2N-1) where 0 = 0 and 2N-1 = +FSEQUATION 4:Negative Unipolar (0 to 2N-1) where 0 = 0 and 2N-1 = -FS

NOTE: for the above equations “N” = the amount of bits selected for scaling (i.e. 16, 12, 8, 4, 1)

Destination Register Length Justification Options Explained

Modbus has one definition, but its definition has been interpreted differently by various protocol implementers.This presents a special challenge to the automation engineer. For example, some host device implementationscount the first address as address zero whereas other implementers count the first address as address 1 andinternally shift the address to offset it by 1 to account for the baseline format.

Another interpretation has been that of most significant bit and least significant bit justification. Two selections arepossible for the query DESTINATION BIT JUSTIFICATION. Selections as per Table X and Figure 8-3 are MSBand LSB. Figure 8-6 illustrates the bit definition and bit padding for the DESTINATION BIT JUSTIFICATION fieldselection and DESTINATION REGISTER SIZE query.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415 1616BIT

MSB Justification LSB Justification

NOTE : Bit designated as a 1 is the words most significant bit whereas the highest bit number is the least significant bit. 0 indicates a padded bit.

0 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 0 0 0 012BIT

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 08BIT

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 04BIT

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 02BIT

Figure 5-20. Bit Justification Notation

An investigation of Figure X illustrates that register justification shifts the data to the left of the right of the register.If the reported data for example is to be reported as 1 after scaling, the internal Modbus presentation to the hostshall be 0001 hex in 12 bit MSB justification format and 0010 in the 12 bit LSB justification format. In both casesBit 12 is set to represent the number 1, however the reported data to the host is shifted accordingly dependingupon the hosts interpretation of the Modbus data.

Source Register Address and Source Register Type Explained

Table 5-11 lists the source addresses of each of the TPU quantities which may be mapped to the User DefinableRegisters. The addresses are actually the MODBUS addresses from the TPU Modbus Address map. One mayconsult the TPU 2000/2000R Automation Guide for the exact addresses. For example, if one wished to map the


85

Voltage a to neutral value from its Modbus address at Register 40265, the entry within the SOURCE REGISTERquery would be 265. The leading 40 designation (or 4X as some refer to it as) is not required. However, for easeof configuration, the pointer addresses are given to the user in Table 5-11.

Within this Automation Technical Guide several designations are given for the source data type. Each valuereported within a 4X Register has a separate designation. Example data type designations available for scalingand re-mapping are as follows:

Unsigned Short Register 40257 Current Phase A 16 Bit Register UnsignedSigned Short Register 40335 Power Factor 16 Bit Register SignedUnsigned Long Registers 40265

40266 Voltage Phase A 32 Bit Double Register UnsignedSigned Long Registers 40283

40284 kWatts Phase A 32 Bit Double Register Signed

The query field may contain any of the above four register types for data transfer.

Table 5-11. Register Scaling and Remapping Quantities and Associated Indexes

ECP SourceRegister

Address Entry

Item Description

158 Phase CT Ratio Unsigned 16 Bit159 Neutral Ratio Unsigned 16 Bit160 PT Ratio Unsigned 16 Bit161 Power Fail Timestamp Year Unsigned Integer 16 Bit

1900<=Range<= 2100162 Power Fail Timestamp Month Unsigned Integer 16 Bit

1<=Range <=12163 Power Fail Timestamp Day Unsigned Integer 16 Bit

1<=Range<=31164 Power Fail Timestamp Hours Unsigned Integer 16 Bit

0<=Range<=23165 Power Fail Timestamp Minutes Unsigned Integer 16 Bit

0<=Range<=59166 Power Fail Timestamp Seconds Unsigned Integer 16 Bit

0<=Range<=59167 Power Fail Timestamp Hundredths

of SecondsUnsigned Integer 16 Bit0<=Range<99

168 Power Fail Timestamp Fail Type Unsigned Integer 16 Bit1 = DC

169 Power Fail Timestamp MachineState

Unsigned Integer 16 Bit0 = Circuit Breaker Closed1 = Picked Up2 = Circuit Breaker Tripping3 = Circuit Breaker Failed to Open4 = Circuit Breaker Open6 = Circuit Breaker Open7 = Circuit Breaker Failed to Open8 = Control Switch Trip Fail9 = Circuit Breaker State Unknown

170 Fast StatusBit 0 - 5 Division Code ( Lsb)Bit 6 RESERVEDBit 7 RESERVEDBit 8 RESERVEDBit 9 Unreported OperationRecord

Unsigned 16 Bit00 0101 = 07 HEX)RESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVED1 = Unreported Record


86

Bit 10 – 15 Reserved Reserved171 Fast Status

Bit 0 - 5 RESERVED ( Lsb)Bit 6 RESERVEDBit 7 RESERVEDBit 8 RESERVEDBit 9 RESERVEDBit 10 – 15 Product ID (Msb)

Unsigned Integer 16 BitRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVED00 1110 = 0E HEX left justified

172 Last Comm Port Error Unsigned Integer0 = Modbus Plus (Type 6 or 7 Card OnlyTPU2000R)1 = INCOM2 = RS 2323 = RS 485

173 Last Comm Error Command Unsigned Integer/ Word Byte DecodeIf Modbus or Modbus Plus, register containsModbus Command. If INCOM or Standard TenByte, register contains Command + Subcommand inupper lower byte decode.

174 Last Comm Error Register Request Unsigned IntegerLast Requested Address on Comm error read/writerequest.

175 Last Comm Error Type Unsigned Integer1 = Invalid Password2 = Checksum Error3 = Block/Register Range Invalid4 = Block/Register attempted to be accessed invalid5 = Range of data attempted to be accessed invalid6 = Invalid Data7 = Settings being edited elsewhere in unit orremote edit disabled8 = A write to one setting group attempted whileactively editing another.9 = Breaker State Invalid10 Data entered is below minimum value11 = Data entered is above maximum allowed12 = Data entered is out of step32 = Reference Type or File Number Invalid33 = Too many registers for Modbus Protocol34 = Invalid Function Code35 = Invalid Record Control

176 Control Mask If Write Error Unsigned IntegerControl Mask 1 Write Mask ( MSW)

177 Control Mask If Write Error Unsigned IntegerControl Mask 1 Write Mask ( LSW)

178 Control Mask If Write Error Unsigned IntegerControl Mask 2 Write Mask ( MSW)

179 Control Mask If Write Error Unsigned IntegerControl Mask 2 Write Mask ( LSW)

257 Operate Current A Unsigned Integer Scale Factor is 800258 Operate Current B Unsigned Integer Scale Factor is 800259 Operate Current C Unsigned Integer Scale Factor is 800260 Restraint Current A Winding 1 Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Scale Factor is 800261 Restraint Current B Winding 1 Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Scale 16 Bit Factor is 800262 Restraint Current C Winding 1 Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Scale Factor is 800263 Restraint Current A Winding 2 Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Scale Factor is 800264 Restraint Current-B Winding 2 Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Scale Factor is 800265 Restraint Current C Winding 2 Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Scale Factor is 800


87

266 Restraint Current A Winding 3 Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Scale Factor is 800267 Restraint Current B Winding 3 Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Scale Factor is 800268 Restraint Current C Winding 3 Unsigned Integer 16 Bit Scale Factor is 800269 Restraint Angle-A Winding 1 Unsigned 16 Bit270 Restraint Angle-B Winding 1 Unsigned 16 Bit271 Restraint Angle-C Winding 1 Unsigned 16 Bit272 Restraint Angle-A Winding 2 Unsigned 16 Bit273 Restraint Angle-B Winding 2 Unsigned 16 Bit274 Restraint Angle-C Winding 2 Unsigned 16 Bit275 Restraint Angle-A Winding 3 Unsigned 16 Bit276 Restraint Angle-B Winding 3 Unsigned 16 Bit277 Restraint Angle-C Winding 3 Unsigned 16 Bit385 Load Current A Winding 1 Unsigned 32 Bit Current387 Load Current B Winding 1 Unsigned 32 Bit Current389 Load Current C Winding 1 Unsigned 32 Bit Current391 Load Current N Winding 1 Unsigned 32 Bit Current393 Load Current A Winding 2 Unsigned 32 Bit Current395 Load Current B Winding 2 Unsigned 32 Bit Current397 Load Current C Winding 2 Unsigned 32 Bit Current399 Load Current N Winding 2 Unsigned 32 Bit Current401 Load Current A Winding 3 Unsigned 32 Bit Current403 Load Current B Winding 3 Unsigned 32 Bit Current405 Load Current C Winding 3 Unsigned 32 Bit Current407 Load Current N Winding 3 Unsigned 32 Bit Current409 Load Current A Angle Winding 1 Unsigned 16 Bit410 Load Current B Angle Winding 1 Unsigned 16 Bit411 Load Current C Angle Winding 1 Unsigned 16 Bit412 Load Current N Angle Winding 1 Unsigned 16 Bit413 Load Current A Angle Winding 2 Unsigned 16 Bit414 Load Current B Angle Winding 2 Unsigned 16 Bit415 Load Current C Angle Winding 2 Unsigned 16 Bit416 Load Current N Angle Winding 2 Unsigned 16 Bit417 Load Current A Angle Winding 3 Unsigned 16 Bit418 Load Current B Angle Winding 3 Unsigned 16 Bit419 Load Current C Angle Winding 3 Unsigned 16 Bit420 Load Current N Angle Winding 3 Unsigned 16 Bit421 Load Current Zero Sequence

Winding 1Unsigned 32 Bit Current

423 Load Current Positive SequenceWinding 1

Unsigned 32 Bit Current

425 Load Current Negative SequenceWinding 1


427 Load Current Zero SequenceWinding 2






433 Load Current Zero SequenceWinding 3






439 Load Current Zero Sequence AngleWinding 1

Unsigned 16 Bit


88

440 Load Current Positive SequenceAngle Winding 1

Unsigned 16 Bit

441 Load Current Negative SequenceAngle Winding 1

Unsigned 16 Bit


Unsigned 16 Bit


Unsigned 16 Bit


Unsigned 16 Bit


Unsigned 16 Bit


Unsigned 16 Bit


Unsigned 16 Bit

448 Ground Current Magnitude –Sensor 10 (SEE NOTE 1)


450 Ground Current Angle – Sensor 10(SEE NOTE 1)

Unsigned 16 Bit

513 Voltage VA Unsigned High Order Word LSW515 Voltage VB Unsigned High Order Word LSW517 Voltage VC Unsigned High Order Word LSW519 Voltage VA Angle Unsigned 16 Bit520 Voltage VB Angle Unsigned 16 Bit521 Voltage VC Angle Unsigned 16 Bit522 Voltage Positive Sequence Unsigned High Order Word LSW524 Voltage Negative Sequence Unsigned High Order Word LSW526 Voltage Positive Sequence Angle Unsigned 16 Bit527 Voltage Negative Sequence Angle Unsigned 16 Bit528 KWatts A Unsigned High Order Word LSW530 KWatts B Unsigned High Order Word LSW532 KWatts C Unsigned High Order Word LSW534 KVars A Unsigned High Order Word LSW536 KVars B Unsigned High Order Word LSW538 KVars C Unsigned High Order Word LSW540 KWatt Hours A Unsigned High Order Word LSW542 KWatt Hours B Unsigned High Order Word LSW544 KWatt Hours C Unsigned High Order Word LSW546 KVar Hours A Unsigned High Order Word LSW548 KVar Hours B Unsigned High Order Word LSW550 KVar Hours C Unsigned High Order Word LSW552 3 Phase KWatts Unsigned High Order Word LSW554 3 Phase KVars Unsigned High Order Word LSW556 3 Phase Kwatt Hours Unsigned High Order Word LSW558 3 Phase Kvar Hours Unsigned High Order Word LSW560 3 Phase KVA Unsigned High Order Word LSW562 System Frequency Unsigned Byte – 8 bits represented in a 16 bit

format563 Spare ( 2 Winding Unit)

Power Factor (3 Winding Unit)INTERPRETED WORD.(3 Winding Unit Only)Bits 15 – 9 : Not Used (mSW)Bit 8: Quantity Sign: 1 = Pos. 0 = Neg.Bit 7: Status: 0 = Leading 1 = LaggingBit 0 – 6 : Power Factor * 100 ( lSW)

564 Power Factor (2 Winding Unit) Bits 15 – 9 : Not Used (mSW)


89

Spare (3 Winding Unit) Bit 8: Quantity Sign: 1 = Pos. 0 = Neg.Bit 7: Status: 0 = Leading 1 = LaggingBit 0 – 6 : Power Factor * 100 ( lSW)

565 Signed Power Factor Signed 16 Bits566 Power Factor Status 0 = Leading 1 = Lagging641 Demand Current Phase A Unsigned 32 Bit Current643 Demand Current Phase B Unsigned 32 Bit Current645 Demand Current Phase C Unsigned 32 Bit Current647 Demand Current Neutral Unsigned 32 Bit Current649 Demand kWatts Phase A Unsigned 32 Bit Power651 Demand kWatts Phase B Unsigned 32 Bit Power653 Demand kWatts Phase C Unsigned 32 Bit Power655 Demand kVars Phase A Unsigned 32 Bit Power657 Demand kVars Phase B Unsigned 32 Bit Power659 Demand kVars Phase C Unsigned 32 Bit Power661 3 Phase Demand Watts Unsigned 32 Bit Power663 3 Phase Demand Vars Unsigned 32 Bit Power1025 Unreported Differential Fault

Record CounterUnsigned Integer 16 Bits0<=Range<=9999

1026 Unreported Through Fault RecordCounter

Unsigned Integer 16 Bits0<=Range<=9999

1027 Unreported Harmonic RestraintRecord Fault Counter

Unsigned Integer 16 Bits0<=Range<= 9999

1028 Unreported Operation RecordCounter

Unsigned Integer 16 Bits0<=Range<= 9999

1029 Through Fault Counter Unsigned Integer 16 Bits1030 Through Fault KSIA

Kiloamps Symmetrical Ia – Currentexisting when breaker opened onPhase A.

Signed 32 Bit High Order Word MSW

1031 Through Fault KSIAKiloamps Symmetrical Ia – Currentexisting when breaker opened onPhase A.

Signed 32 Bit Low Order Word LSW

1032 Through Fault KSIBKiloamps Symmetrical Ib – Currentexisting when breaker opened onPhase B.


1033 Through Fault KSIBKiloamps Symmetrical Ib – Currentexisting when breaker opened onPhase B.


1034 Through Fault KSICKiloamps Symmetrical Ic – Currentexisting when breaker opened onPhase C


1035 Through Fault KSICKiloamps Symmetrical Ic – Currentexisting when breaker opened onPhase C


1036 Through Fault Cycle SummationCounter


1037 Through Fault Cycle SummationCounter


1038 Overcurrent Trip Counter Unsigned 16 Bit0 – 9999


90

1039 Differential Trip Counter Unsigned 16 Bit0 – 9999

1153 Logical OutputBit 15 = DIFFBit 14 = SELF CHECK ALARMBit 13 = 87TBit 12 = 87H

Bit 11 =2HROABit 10 = 5HROABit 9 = AHROABit 8 = TCFABit 7 = TFA

Bit 6 = 51P1Bit 5 = 51P2Bit 4 = 50-P1 (Note 1)

Bit 3 = 150P-1 (Note 1)

Bit 2 = 50-P2 (Note 1)

Bit 1 = 150P-2 (Note 1)

Bit 0 = 51N-1 (Note 1) (lsb)

Unsigned Integer 16 BitsDifferential Trip Alarm (msb leftmost bit)0 = Fault 1 = Normal Diagnostic AlarmHarmonic Restrained % Differential Trip AlarmUnrestrained High Set Instantaneous DifferentialTrip Alarm2nd Harmonic Restraint Alarm5th Harmonic Restraint AlarmAll Harmonics Restraint AlarmTrip Coil Failure Alarm (Trip Circuit Open =1)Trip Failure Alarm (Trip Not Cleared within Trip FailDropout Set)Winding 1 Phase Time Overcurrent Trip AlarmWinding 2 Phase Time Overcurrent Trip Alarm1st Winding Phase 1 Instantaneous Overcurrent TripAlarm2nd Winding 1 Phase Instantaneous OvercurrentTrip Alarm1st Winding Phase 2 Instantaneous Overcurrent TripAlarm2nd Winding 2 Phase Instantaneous OvercurrentTrip AlarmWinding 1 Neutral Time Overcurrent Trip Alarm (lsbrightmost bit)

1154 Logical OutputBit 15 = 51G-2 (Note 1)

Bit 14 = 50N-1 (Note 1)Bit 13 = 150N-1 (Note 1)

Bit 12 = 50G-2 (Note 1)Bit 11 =150G-2 (Note 1)

Bit 10 = 46-1 (Note 1)

Bit 9 = 46-2 (Note 1)

Bit 8 = 87T-D (Note 1)Bit 7 = 87H-D (Note 1)Bit 6 = 51P-1D (Note 1)

Bit 5 = 51P-2D (Note 1)

Bit 4 = 51N-1D (Note 1)

Bit 3 = 51G-2D (Notes 1,2)

Bit 2 = 50P-1D (Note 1)

Bit 1 = 50P-2D (Note 1)

Bit 0 = 50N-1D (Note 1)

Unsigned Integer 16 Bits 1st Winding 2 Ground Time Trip Alarm (msbleftmost bit)1st Winding 1 Neutral Instantaneous Trip Alarm2nd Winding 1 Neutral Instantaneous OvercurrentTrip Alarm1st Winding 2 Ground Instantaneous Trip Alarm2nd Winding 2 Ground Instantaneous OvercurrentTrip AlarmWinding 1 Negative Sequence Time OvercurrentTrip AlarmWinding 2 Negative Sequence Time OvercurrentTrip AlarmPercentage Differential Function Disabled AlarmHigh Set Instantaneous Function Disabled AlarmWinding 1 Phase Time Overcurrect FunctionDisabled AlarmWinding 1 Phase Time Overcurrect FunctionDisabled AlarmWinding 1 Neutral Time Overcurrent FunctionDisabled AlarmWinding 2 Ground Time Overcurrent FunctionDisabled Alarm1st Winding 1 Phase Instantaneous OvercurrentFunction Disabled Alarm1st Winding 2 Phase Instantaneous OvercurrentFunction Disabled Alarm1st Winding 1 Neutral Instantaneous OvercurrentFunction Disabled Alarm (lsb rightmost bit)

1155 Logical OutputBit 15 = 50G-2D (Note 1,2)

Unsigned Integer 16 BitWinding 2 Ground Time Overcurrent FunctionDisabled Alarm (msb leftmost bit)


91

Bit 14 = 150P-1D

Bit 13 =150P-2D

Bit 12 =150N-1D

Bit 11 =150G-2D (Notes 1,2)

Bit 10 = 46-1D

Bit 9 =4 6-2D

Bit 8 = PATABit 7 = PBTABit 6 = PCTABit 5 = PUABit 4 = 63Bit 3 =THRUFABit 2 = TFCA (Note 1)Bit 1 = TFKA (Note 1)Bit 0 =TFSCA (Note 1)

2nd Winding 1 Phase Instantaneous OvercurrentFunction Disabled Alarm2nd Winding 2 Phase Instantaneous OvercurrentFunction Disabled Alarm2nd Winding 1 Neutral Instantaneous OvercurrentFunction Disabled Alarm2nd Winding 2 Ground Instantaneous OvercurrentFunction Disabled AlarmWinding 1 Negative Sequence Time OvercurrentFunction Disabled AlarmWinding 2 Negative Sequence Time OvercurrentFunction Disabled AlarmPhase A Target AlarmPhase B Target AlarmPhase C Target AlarmPick Up AlarmSudden Pressure AlarmThrough Fault AlarmThrough Fault Counter AlarmThrough Fault Counter AlarmThrough Fault Cycle Summation Alarm (lsbrightmost bit)

1156 Logical OutputBit 15 = DTC (Note 1)Bit 14 = OCTCBit 13 = PDABit 12 = NDABit 11 = PRIMBit 10 = ALT1Bit 9 = ALT2Bit 8 = STCA (L)Bit 7 = 87T (L)

Bit 6 = 87H (L)

Bit 5 = 2HROA (L)Bit 4 = 5HROA (L)Bit 3 = AHROA (L)Bit 2 = 50P-1D (L)

Bit 1 = 50P-2D (L)

Bit 0 = 50N-1D (L)

Unsigned Integer 16 BitDifferential Trip Counter Alarm (msb leftmost bit)Overcurrent Trip Counter AlarmPhase Demand Counter AlarmNeutral Demand Current AlarmPrimary Settings Enabled AlarmAlternate 1 Settings Enabled AlarmAlternate 2 Setting Enabled AlarmSettings Table Changed Alarm LATCHEDHarmonic Restrained % Differential Trip AlarmLATCHEDUnrestrained High Set Instantaneous DifferentialTrip Alarm LATCHED2nd Harmonic Restraint Alarm LATCHED5th Harmonic Restraint Alarm LATCHEDAll Harmonics Restraint Alarm LATCHED1st Winding Phase 1 Instantaneous Overcurrent TripAlarm LATCHED2nd Winding 1 Phase Instantaneous OvercurrentTrip Alarm LATCHED1st Winding Phase 2 Instantaneous Overcurrent TripAlarm LATCHED (lsb rightmost bit)

1157 Logical OutputBit 15 = 150P-1 (L)

Bit 14 = 50-P2 (L)

Bit 13 = 150P-2 (L)

Bit 12 = 51N-1 (L)

Bit 11 = 51N-2 (L) (Note 3)

Bit 10 = 50N-1 (L)

Bit 9 =150N-1 (L)Bit 8 = 50N-2 (L) (Note 3)

Unsigned Integer 16 Bit (msb leftmost bit)2nd Winding 1 Phase Instantaneous OvercurrentTrip Alarm LATCHED1st Winding Phase 2 Instantaneous Overcurrent TripAlarm LATCHED2nd Winding 2 Phase Instantaneous OvercurrentTrip Alarm LATCHEDWinding 1 Neutral Time Overcurrent Trip AlarmLATCHEDWinding 2 Neutral Time Overcurrent Seal In AlarmLATCHED1st Winding 1 Neutral Instantaneous OvercurrentSeal In Alarm LATCHED2nd Winding 1 Neutral Instantaneous OvercurrentSeal In Alarm LATCHED


92

Bit 7 = 150N-2 (L) (Note 3)

Bit 6 = 46-1 (L)

Bit 5 = 46-2 (L)

Bit 4 = 63 (L)Bit 3 = ULO 1Bit 2 = ULO 2Bit 1 = ULO 3Bit 0 = ULO 4

1st Winding 2 Neutral Instantaneous OvercurrentSeal In Alarm LATCHED2nd Winding 2 Neutral Instantaneous OvercurrentSeal In Alarm LATCHEDWinding 1 Negative Sequence Time OvercurrentSeal In AlarmWinding 2 Negative Sequence Time OvercurrentSeal In AlarmSudden Pressure Seal In AlarmUser Logical Output 1 EnergizedUser Logical Output 2 EnergizedUser Logical Output 3 EnergizedUser Logical Output 4 Energized (lsb rightmost bit)

1158 Logical OutputBit 15 = ULO 5Bit 14 = ULO 6Bit 13 = ULO 7Bit 12 = ULO 8Bit 11 = ULO 9Bit 10 = LOADABit 9 = OCA –1Bit 8 = OCA-2Bit 7 = HLDA-1Bit 6 = LLDA-1Bit 5 = HLDA-2Bit 4 = LLDA-2Bit 3 = HPFABit 2 = LPFABit 1 = VarDABit 0 = PVarA

Unsigned Integer 16 BitUser Logical Output 5 Energized (msb leftmost )User Logical Output 6 EnergizedUser Logical Output 7 EnergizedUser Logical Output 8 EnergizedUser Logical Output 9 EnergizedLoad Current AlarmWinding 1 Overcurrent AlarmWinding 2 Overcurrent AlarmWinding 1 High Level Detector AlarmWinding 1 Low Level Detector AlarmWinding 1 High Level Detector AlarmWinding 2 Low Level Detector AlarmHigh Power Factor AlarmLow Power Factor Alarm3 Phase kVar Demand AlarmPositive 3 Phase Power Factor Alarm(lsb rightmostbit)

1159 Logical OutputBit 15 = NvarABit 14 = PWATT1Bit 13 = PWATT2Bit 12 = RESERVEDBit 11 = RESERVEDBit 10 = RESERVEDBit 9 = RESERVEDBit 8 = RESERVEDBit 7 = RESERVEDBit 6 = RESERVEDBit 5 = RESERVEDBit 4 = RESERVEDBit 3 = RESERVEDBit 2 = RESERVEDBit 1 = RESERVEDBit 0 = RESERVED

Unsigned Integer 16 BitsNegative 3 Phase Kvar Alarm(msb leftmost bit)Pwinding 1 Positive 3Phase kWatt AlarmPwinding 2 Positive 3Phase kWatt AlarmRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVED (lsb rightmost bit)

1160 Logical OutputBit 15 = RESERVEDBit 14 = RESERVEDBit 13 = RESERVEDBit 12 = RESERVEDBit 11 = RESERVEDBit 10 = RESERVEDBit 9 = RESERVEDBit 8 = RESERVEDBit 7 = RESERVEDBit 6 = RESERVED

Unsigned Integer 16 Bits(msb leftmost bit)


93

Bit 5 = RESERVEDBit 4 = RESERVEDBit 3 = RESERVEDBit 2 = RESERVEDBit 1 = RESERVEDBit 0 = RESERVED (lsb rightmost bit)

1161 Logical InputBit 15 = 87T

Bit 14 = 87H

Bit 13 = 51P-1Bit 12 = 51P-2Bit 11 = 51N-1

Bit 10 =51G-2 (Note 2)

51N-2 (Note 3)

Bit 9 = 50P-1

Bit 8 = 50P-2

Bit 7 = 50N-1

Bit 6 = 50G-2 (Note 2)

50N-2 (Note 3)

Bit 5 = 150P-1

Bit 4 = 150P-2

Bit 3 = 150N-1

Bit 2 = 150G-2

Bit 1 = 46-1Bit 0 = 46-2

Unsigned Integer 16 BitTwo or Three Winding 3 Phase % DifferentialCurrent Control Enabled (msb leftmost)Two or Three Winding 3 Phase InstantaneousDifferential Current Control. EnabledWinding 1 Phase Time Overcurrent Control EnabledWinding 2 Phase Time Overcurrent Control EnabledWinding 1 Neutral Time Overcurrent ControlEnabledWinding 2 Ground Time Overcurrent ControlEnabledWinding 2 Neutral Time Overcurrent ControlEnabled1st Winding 1 Phase Instantaneous OvercurrentControl Enabled1st Winding 2 Phase Instantaneous OvercurrentControl Enabled1st Winding 1 Neutral Instantaneous OvercurrentControl Enabled1st Winding 2 Ground Instantaneous OvercurrentControl Enabled1st Winding 2 Neutral Instantaneous OvercurrentControl Enabled2nd Winding 1 Phase Instantaneous OvercurrentControl Enabled2nd Winding 2 Phase Instantaneous OvercurrentControl Enabled2nd Winding 1 Neutral Instantaneous OvercurrentControl Enabled2nd Winding 2 Ground Instantaneous OvercurrentControl EnabledWinding 1 Negative Sequence Control EnabledWinding 1 Negative Sequence Control Enabled (lsbrightmost)

1162 Logical InputBit 15 = ALT 1Bit 14 = ALT 2Bit 13 = ECI 1Bit 12 = ECI 2Bit 11 = WCIBit 10 =TRIPBit 9 = SPRBit 8 = TCMBit 7 = ULI 1Bit 6 = ULI 2Bit 5 = ULI 3Bit 4 = ULI 4Bit 3 = ULI 5Bit 2 = ULI 6Bit 1 = ULI 7Bit 0 = ULI 8

Unsigned Integer 16 BitAlternate 1 Settings Enabled (msb leftmost)Alternate 2 Settings EnabledEvent Capture 1 Initiated EnabledEvent Capture 2 Initiated EnabledWaveform Capture InitiatedInitiate Differential Trip Output ContactsSudden Pressure Input SensedTrip Coil Monitor Input SensedUser Logical Input 1 SensedUser Logical Input 2 SensedUser Logical Input 3 SensedUser Logical Input 4 SensedUser Logical Input 5 SensedUser Logical Input 6 SensedUser Logical Input 7 SensedUser Logical Input 8 Sensed (lsb rightmost)

1163 Logical Input Unsigned Integer 16 Bits


94

Bit 15 = ULI 9Bit 14 = CRI

Bit 13 = RESERVEDBit 12 = RESERVEDBit 11 = RESERVEDBit 10 = RESERVEDBit 9 = RESERVEDBit 8 = RESERVEDBit 7 = RESERVEDBit 6 = RESERVEDBit 5 = RESERVEDBit 4 = RESERVEDBit 3 = RESERVEDBit 2 = RESERVEDBit 1 = RESERVEDBit 0 = RESERVED

User Logical Input 8 Sensed (msb leftmost)Fault and Overcurrent Clear Through CountersEnabledRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVED (lsb rightmost)

1164 Logical InputRESERVED

Unsigned Integer 16 BitsRESERVED

1165 Logical InputBit 15 = 51P-3 (Note 3)

Bit 14 = 51N-3 (Note 3)

Bit 13 = 50P-3 (Note 3)

Bit 12 = 50N-3 (Note 3)

Bit 11 = 150P-3 (Note 3)

Bit 10 = 150N-3 (Note3)

Bit 9 = 46-3 (Note 3)Bit 8 = 51GBit 7 = 50G

Bit 6 = 150G (Note 3)

Bit 5 = ECI3 (Note 3)Bit 4 = RESERVEDBit 3 = RESERVEDBit 2 = RESERVEDBit 1 = RESERVEDBit 0 = RESERVED

Unsigned Integer 16 BitsWinding 3 Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent ControlEnabled (msb leftmost)Winding 3 Neutral Instantaneous OvercurrentControl Enabled1st Winding 3 Phase Time Overcurrent ControlEnabled1st Winding 2 Neutral Time Overcurrent ControlEnabled2nd Winding 3 Phase Time Overcurrent ControlEnabled2nd Winding 2 Neutral Time Overcurrent ControlEnabledWinding 3 Negative Sequence Control EnabledGround Time Overcurrent Function Enabled1st Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent FunctionEnabled2nd Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent FunctionEnabledStorage of Data Fault Summary Capture InitiatedRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVED (lsb rightmost)







1169 Bit 15 = RESERVEDBit 14 = RESERVEDBit 13 = RESERVEDBit 12 = RESERVEDBit 11 = RESERVEDBit 10 = RESERVEDBit 9 = RESERVEDBit 8 = RESERVEDBit 7 = OUT 7

16 Bit Unsigned Integer(msb leftmost bit)


95

Bit 6 = OUT 6Bit 5 = OUT 5Bit 4 = OUT 4Bit 3 = OUT 3Bit 2 = OUT 2Bit 1 = OUT 1Bit 0 =TRIP (lsb rightmost bit)

1170 FORCE PHYS INBit 15 = RESERVEDBit 14 = RESERVEDBit 13 = RESERVEDBit 12 = RESERVEDBit 11 = RESERVEDBit 10 = RESERVEDBit 9 = RESERVEDBit 8 = IN 9Bit 7 = IN 8Bit 6 = IN 7Bit 5 = IN 6Bit 4 = IN 5Bit 3 = IN 4Bit 2 = IN 3Bit 1 = IN 2Bit 0 = IN 1

Unsigned Integer 16 Bits (msb leftmost bit)

(lsb rightmost bit)1171 FORCE PHYS IN

Bit 15 = RESERVEDBit 14 = RESERVEDBit 13 = RESERVEDBit 12 = RESERVEDBit 11 = RESERVEDBit 10 = RESERVEDBit 9 = RESERVEDBit 8 = IN 9Bit 7 = IN 8Bit 6 = IN 7Bit 5 = IN 6Bit 4 = IN 5Bit 3 = IN 4Bit 2 = IN 3Bit 1 = IN 2Bit 0 = IN 1

Unsigned Integer 16 Bits –Physical Input SelectStatusRESERVED (msb leftmost bit)RESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVED0 = Normal : 1 = Forced0 = Normal : 1 = Forced0 = Normal : 1 = Forced0 = Normal : 1 = Forced0 = Normal : 1 = Forced0 = Normal : 1 = Forced0 = Normal : 1 = Forced0 = Normal : 1 = Forced0 = Normal : 1 = Forced (lsb rightmost bit)

1172 FORCE PHYS INBit 15 = RESERVEDBit 14 = RESERVEDBit 13 = RESERVEDBit 12 = RESERVEDBit 11 = RESERVEDBit 10 = RESERVEDBit 9 = RESERVEDBit 8 = IN 9Bit 7 = IN 8Bit 6 = IN 7Bit 5 = IN 6Bit 4 = IN 5Bit 3 = IN 4Bit 2 = IN 3Bit 1 = IN 2Bit 0 = IN 1

Unsigned Integer 16 Bits – Physical Input Bit StateRESERVED (msb leftmost bit)RESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVED0 = Open : 1 = Closed0 = Open : 1 = Closed0 = Open : 1 = Closed0 = Open : 1 = Closed0 = Open : 1 = Closed0 = Open : 1 = Closed0 = Open : 1 = Closed0 = Open : 1 = Closed0 = Open : 1 = Closed (lsb rightmost bit)


96

1173 Phys Out

Bit 15 = RESERVEDBit 14 = RESERVEDBit 13 = RESERVEDBit 12 = RESERVEDBit 11 = RESERVEDBit 10 = RESERVEDBit 9 = RESERVEDBit 8 = RESERVEDBit 7 = OUT 7Bit 6 = OUT 6Bit 5 = OUT 5Bit 4 = OUT4Bit 3 = OUT3Bit 2 = OUT2Bit 1 = OUT 1Bit 0 = TRIP

16 Bit Unsigned Integer Physical Output SelectStatusRESERVED (msb leftmost bit)RESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVED0 = Normal : 1 = Forced0 = Normal : 1 = Forced0 = Normal : 1 = Forced0 = Normal : 1 = Forced0 = Normal : 1 = Forced0 = Normal : 1 = Forced0 = Normal : 1 = Forced0 = Normal : 1 = Forced (lsb rightmost bit)

1174 Phys Out

Bit 15 = RESERVEDBit 14 = RESERVEDBit 13 = RESERVEDBit 12 = RESERVEDBit 11 = RESERVEDBit 10 = RESERVEDBit 9 = RESERVEDBit 8 = RESERVEDBit 7 = OUT 7Bit 6 = OUT 6Bit 5 = OUT 5Bit 4 = OUT4Bit 3 = OUT3Bit 2 = OUT2Bit 1 = OUT 1Bit 0 = TRIP

16 Bit Unsigned Integer – Physical Output SelectStateRESERVED(msb leftmost bit)RESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVED0 = Open : 1 = Closed0 = Open : 1 = Closed0 = Open : 1 = Closed0 = Open : 1 = Closed0 = Open : 1 = Closed0 = Open : 1 = Closed0 = Open : 1 = Closed0 = Open : 1 = Closed0 = Open : 1 = Closed (lsb rightmost bit)

1175 FORCED LOGICAL INBit 15 = FLI 17Bit 14 = FLI 18Bit 13 = FLI 19Bit 12 = FLI 20Bit 11 = FLI 21Bit 10 = FLI 22Bit 9 = FLI 23Bit 8 = FLI 24Bit 7 = FLI 25Bit 6 = FLI 26Bit 5 = FLI 27Bit 4 = FLI 28Bit 3 = FLI 29Bit 2 = FLI 30Bit 1 = FLI 31Bit 0 = FLI 32

Unsigned Integer 16 Bits – FLI Select Status0 = Normal : 1= Forced (msb leftmost bit)0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced (lsb rightmost bit)

1176 FORCED LOGICAL INBit 15 = FLI 1Bit 14 = FLI 2Bit 13 = FLI 3Bit 12 = FLI 4Bit 11 = FLI 5

Unsigned Integer 16 Bits – FLI Select Status0 = Normal : 1= Forced (msb leftmost bit)0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced


97

Bit 10 = FLI 6Bit 9 = FLI 7Bit 8 = FLI 8Bit 7 = FLI 9Bit 6 = FLI 10Bit 5 = FLI 11Bit 4 = FLI 12Bit 3 = FLI 13Bit 2 = FLI 14Bit 1 = FLI 15Bit 0 = FLI 16

0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced0 = Normal : 1= Forced (lsb rightmost bit)


Unsigned Integer 16 Bits FLI Point State0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized (msb leftmost bit)0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized (lsb rightmost bit)


Unsigned Integer 16 Bits0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized (msb leftmost bit)0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized0 = De-energized : 1 = Energized (lsb rightmost bit)

1179 Phys Out

Bit 15 = 51P-3

Bit 14 = 50P-3

Bit 13 = 150P-3

Bit 12 = 51N-3Bit 11 = 50N-3

Bit 10 = 150N-3

Bit 9 = 46-3

16 Bit Unsigned Integer Physical Output SelectStatusWinding 3 Phase Time Overcurrent Alarm (msbleftmost bit)1st Winding 3 Phase Instantaneous OvercurrentAlarm2nd Winding 3 Phase Instantaneous OvercurrentAlarmWinding 3 Neutral Time Overcurrent Alarm1st Winding 3 Neutral Instantaneous OvercurrentAlarm2nd Winding 3 Neutral Instantaneous OvercurrentAlarmWinding 3 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent


98

Bit 8 = 51GBit 7 = 50 GBit 6 = 150GBit 5 = 51P-3D

Bit 4 = 51N-3D

Bit 3 = 50P-3D

Bit 2 = 50N-3D

Bit 1 = 150P-3D

Bit 0 = 150N-3D

Alarm1st Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent AlarmGround Time Overcurrent Alarm2nd Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent AlarmWinding 3 Phase Instantaneous OvercurrentFunction Disabled AlarmWinding 3 Neutral Instantaneous OvercurrentFunction Disabled Alarm1st Winding 3 Phase Time Overcurrent FunctionDisabled AlarmWinding 3 Neutral Time Overcurrent FunctionDisabled Alarm2nd Winding 3 Phase Time Overcurrent FunctionDisabled Alarm2nd Winding 3 Neutral Time Overcurrent FunctionDisabled Alarm (lsb rightmost bit)

1180 Phys OutBit 15 = 46-3

Bit 14 = 51GD

Bit 13 = 50GD

Bit 12 = 150GD

Bit 11 = 51P-3 (L)

Bit 10 = 50P-3 (L)

Bit 9 = 150P-3 (L)

Bit 8 = 51N-3 (L)

Bit 7 = 50N-3 (L)

Bit 6 = 150N-3 (L)

Bit 5 = 46-3 (L)

Bit 4 = 51G (L)

Bit 3 = 50G (L)Bit 2 = 150G (L)

Bit 1 = TFKA-3 (Note 1)Bit 0 = HLDA-3

16 Bit Unsigned IntegerWinding 3 Negative Sequence Time OvercurrentAlarm (msb leftmost bit)1st Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent FunctionDisabled Alarm1st Winding 3 Ground Instantaneous OvercurrentFunction Disabled2nd Winding 3 Ground Instantaneous OvercurrentFunction DisabledWinding 3 Phase Time Overcurrent AlarmLATCHED1st Winding 3 Phase Instantaneous OvercurrentAlarm LATCHED2nd Winding 3 Phase Instantaneous OvercurrentAlarm LATCHEDWinding 3 Neutral Time Overcurrent AlarmLATCHED1st Winding 3 Neutral Instantaneous OvercurrentAlarm LATCHED2nd Winding 3 Neutral Instantaneous OvercurrentAlarm LATCHEDWinding 3 Negative Sequence Time OvercurrentAlarm LATCHED1st Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent AlarmLATCHEDGround Time Overcurrent Alarm LATCHED2nd Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent AlarmLATCHEDThrough Fault Counter AlarmWinding 3 High Level Detector Alarm (lsb rightmostbit)

1181 Phys Out

Bit 15 = LLDA –3

Bit 14 = OCA-3Bit 13 = Pwatt3Bit 12 = OCA GndBit 11 = RESERVEDBit 10 = RESERVEDBit 9 = RESERVEDBit 8 = RESERVEDBit 7 = RESERVED

16 Bit Unsigned Integer Physical Output SelectStatusWinding 3 Low Level Detector Alarm (msb leftmostbit)Winding 3 Overcurrent AlarmWinding 3 Positive 3 Phase Watt AlarmGround Overcurrent AlarmRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVED


99

Bit 6 = RESERVEDBit 5 = RESERVEDBit 4 = RESERVEDBit 3 = RESERVEDBit 2 = RESERVEDBit 1 = RESERVEDBit 0 = RESERVED

RESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVED (lsb rightmost bit)

NOTE 1: Drop Out Time is 3 cycles for Alarm Signals. The alarms activate with each operation or power-upuntil the counters are reset. The counter alarms are reset when the targets are reset.NOTE 2: Two Winding Relay OnlyNOTE 3: Three Winding Relay Only(L): This signal is latched and is only reset upon a protocol control command (Section 5), WIN ECP,ECP, or Front Panel Interface reset sequence.

Source Scale Range and Source Scale Type Selections Explained

Scaling is determined by a simple formula depending upon the SCALE TYPE, FULL SCALE/SCALE FACTOR,SCALING OPTION, and DESTINATION LENGTH, values.

Each of the 4X registers defined within the Modbus Protocol Document are classified by being a Current Value,Voltage Value, or Power Value. If one of these aforementioned scale types are selected, the value in the FULLSCALE/SCALE FACTOR field is designated as the maximum value of the unscaled source value. If the sourcevalue is above the configured FULL SCALE/SCALE FACTOR field value, the maximum value (as shown in TableX) will be reported as the destination register scaled value.

The values within the relay may be scaled by an integer factor if a normal or remainder scaling type is selected. Ifone of aforementioned selections are within the FULL SCALE/SCALE FACTOR selection field then the selectionis automatically the scale factor.

The allowable values for the FULL SCALE/SCALE FACTOR field are from 1 to 65535. This is equivalent to thesecondary quantities and the relationship to the primary quantities being scaled as per said formulas below.(which should be familiar to those of you who are “old” transducer engineers.)

If one of the voltage, current, or power SCALE TYPES are selected, then one or more of the following CT /PTratio values must be known to compute the destination scaled value. The quantities which must be known tocompute the equations for scaling are:

158: Unsigned Short Phase CT (CT)159: Unsigned Short Neutral CT Ratio (CT)160: Unsigned Short PT Ratio (PT)

The values may be viewed from the ECP/WinECP program as illustrated in Figure 8-2.

IF OFFSET BIPOLAR CURRENT IS SELECTEDEQUATION 5:

Register Value = (2N-1*Source Value / [FS*CT Ratio])+2N-1-1

IF OFFSET BIPOLAR VOLTAGE IS SELECTEDEQUATION 6:

Register Value = (2N-1*Source Value / [FS*PT Ratio])+2N-1-1

IF OFFSET BIPOLAR POWER IS SELECTEDEQUATION 7:

Register Value = (2N-1*Source Value / [FS*CT Ratio*PT Ratio])+2N-1-1

IF NORMAL SCALING IS SELECTEDEQUATION 8:

Register Value = Source Value / Scale


100

IF REMAINDER SCALING IS SELECTEDEQUATION 9:

Register Value = Remainder of [Source Value/Scale] (commonly referred to as the modulusfunction).

IF BIPOLAR CURRENT IS SELECTEDEQUATION 10:

Register Value = (2N-1*Source Value / [FS*CT Ratio])

IF BIPOLAR VOLTAGE IS SELECTEDEQUATION 11:

Register Value = (2N-1*Source Value / [FS*PT Ratio])

IF BIPOLAR POWER IS SELECTEDEQUATION 12:

Register Value = (2N-1*Source Value / [FS*CT Ratio*PT Ratio])

One should notice that if equations 5, 6, 7, 10, 11,or 12 are used, the SCALE entry shown in Figure 8-2, refers tothe full scale value referenced in the equations. If equations 8 or 9 are used, the SCALE entry shown in Figure 8-2 refers to the Scale divisor denominator as referenced.

TPU2000 and 2000R User Definable Register Defaults

The TPU2000 and 2000R contains User Definable Register default mappings as shown in Table 5-12 below. Itshould be noted that the register shall saturate at the maximum values computed and shown in Table 5-11 above.The maximum saturation value can be computed to be 2N-1 where N is the register size in bits.

Table 5-12. Default Scaling and Remapping Register Assignments

User DefinableRegister

Register Type(Bits)

Start Register(Bits/Type)

FS orScale(Type)

Description

1: INDEX 97 Unipolar (16) 40129 (16/Unsigned) 1(Normal) Relay Status2: INDEX 98 Offset Bipolar (12) 40393 (16/Unsigned) 10 (Current) Load Current A(Wdg 2)3: INDEX 99 Offset Bipolar (12) 40395 (16/Unsigned) 10 (Current) Load Current B(Wdg 2)4: INDEX 100 Offset Bipolar (12) 40397 (16/Unsigned) 10 (Current) Load Current C(Wdg 2)5: INDEX 101 Offset Bipolar (12) 40513 (32/Unsigned) 150 (Voltage) Voltage VAN6: INDEX 102 Offset Bipolar (12) 40515 (32/Unsigned) 150 (Voltage) Voltage VBN7: INDEX 103 Offset Bipolar (12) 40517 (32/Unsigned) 150 (Voltage) Voltage VCN8: INDEX 104 Offset Bipolar (12) 40552 (32/Signed) 3000 (Power) 3 Phase Watts9: INDEX 105 Offset Bipolar (12) 40554 (32/Signed) 3000 (Power) 3 Phase VARs10:INDEX 106 Offset Bipolar (12) 40528 (32/Signed) 1000 (Power) Phase A Watts11:INDEX 107 Offset Bipolar (12) 40530 (32/Signed) 1000 (Power) Phase B Watts12:INDEX 108 Offset Bipolar (12) 40532 (32/Signed) 1000 (Power) Phase C Watts13:INDEX 109 Offset Bipolar (12) 40534 (32/Signed) 1000 (Power) Phase A VARs14:INDEX 110 Offset Bipolar (12) 40536 (32/Signed) 1000 (Power) Phase B VARs15: INDEX111 Offset Bipolar (12) 40538 (32/Signed) 1000 (Power) Phase C VARs16: INDEX 112 Unipolar (16) 40158 (16/Unsigned) 1 (Normal) Phase CT Ratio17: INDEX 113 Unipolar (16) 40159 (16/Unsigned) 1 (Normal) PT Ratio18: INDEX 114 Offset Bipolar (12) 40399 (16/Unsigned) 10 (Current) Load Current N19:INDEX 115 Unipolar (16) 40556 (32/Signed) 10000

(Normal)Pos 3 PhasekWatthours (High)

20:INDEX 116 Unipolar (16) 40556 (32/Signed) 10000(Remainder)

Pos 3 PhasekWatthours (Low)

21: INDEX 117 Neg Unipolar (16) 40556 (32/Signed) 10000(Normal)

Neg 3 PhasekWatthours (High)


101

22: INDEX 118 Neg Unipolar (16) 40556 (32/Signed) 10000(Remainder)

Pos 3 PhasekWatthours (Low)

23: INDEX 119 Unipolar (16) 40558 (32/Signed) 10000(Normal)

Pos 3 PhasekVARhours (High)

24: INDEX 120 Unipolar (16) 40558 (32/Signed) 10000(Remainder)

Pos 3 PhasekVARhours (Low)

25: INDEX 121 Neg Unipolar (16) 40558 (32/Signed) 10000(Normal)

Neg 3 PhasekVARhours (High)

26: INDEX 122 Neg Unipolar (16) 40558 (32/Signed) 10000(Remainder)

Neg 3 PhasekVARhours (Low)

27:INDEX 123 Unipolar (16) 40562 (16/Unsigned) 1 (Normal) System Frequency28: INDEX 124 No Default No Default No Default Spare29: INDEX 125 No Default No Default No Default Spare30: INDEX 126 No Default No Default No Default Spare31: INDEX 127 No Default No Default No Default Spare32: INDEX 128 No Default No Default No Default Spare

An explanation of some of the above default mappings are offered as a guide to understanding the scalingmethodology implementation. Figure X illustrates the scaling procedure for Indicies 98 through 100. Registers257, 259, and 261 (as detailed in Table 5-12 above) contain the MMI reported current values to be remappedand re-scaled to 12 bit Offset Bipolar Values.

E

C


SYSTEM RESET

TIMEINSTANTANEOUSFREQUENCYNEGATIVE SEQUENCE

TARGET RESET

STAT US TARGET S

ABCN

DPU2000R

NetworkPartnerV1.0

DPU2000R

32Mappable Registers

400001

400002

400003

400004

400005

400032

Ia Current Mag.

Ib Current Mag.

40257

40259

40261 Ic Current Mag.

OFFSET BIPOLAR12 bit resolution0 = (-) Full Scale

(12 bits -1)2 - 1 = 2047 = 0

(12 bits)2 - 1 = 4095 = (+) Full Scale

REFERENCE TABLE 2

(+) Full Scale = 10 A

(-) Full Scale = -10 A

0 Amperes

RTU or Host Reads 0

RTU or Host Reads 2047


DPU 2000(R) Register Contentsin Register 40002, 40003, or 40004

DPU 2000(R) MMI Displayor Register Contents of 40257, et al

Figure 5-21. Register Scaling Default Example

The mathematics to determine the reported value to the host is illustrated in Figure 8-8 and using Equation 5above.

Full Scale = 10 ACT Ratio (Current Calculation) = 100:1 (as per the default screen shown in Figure 8-2)Source Value Location = 259 [neglect the leading 4] 16 Bit Value SignedCalculate the 12 bit scaled reading when the TPU2000R indicates 5A for Ia. (12 bits -1) (12 bits -1)(( 2 * 5A)/(10 A * 100)) +(2 - 1) = 3071 counts.

Thus Equation 7 illustrates that a current of 5A displayed on the MMI shall indicate a count of 3071 reported to theSCADA Host when register 40002 is read. The SCADA host shall then interpret it and display it on its host screenas 5 A.


102

Perhaps another example shall suffice. The TPU2000/2000R also meters voltages. The next example illustratesthe scaling which occurs for the default registers 40005, 40006, and 40007. Figure 8-8 shows the scale algorithmapplication for scaling to an Offset Bipolar 12 bit number.

Change Register Configuration

E

C


SYSTEM RESET

TI MEI NSTANTANEOUSFREQUENCYNEGATIVE SEQUENCE

TARGET RESET

STATUS TARGETS

ABCN

DPU2000R

NetworkPartnerV1.0

DPU2000R32Mappable Registers

400001 . . .400005

400006

400007

400032

Va Voltage Mag. Hi

VbVoltage Mag. Hi

40265

40266

40268

40269

40271

40272

Vc Voltage Mag. Hi

Va Voltage Mag. Lo

VbVoltage Mag. Lo

Vc Voltage Mag. Lo

OFFSET BIPOLAR12 bit resolution0 = (-) Full Scale

(12 bits -1)2 - 1 = 2047 = 0

(12 bits)2 - 1 = 4095 = (+) Full Scale

(+) Full Scale = 15000 V

(-) Full Scale = - 15000 V

0 Amperes

RTU or Host Reads 0



DPU 2000/2000R Metered Value reportedto the MMI SCREEN

Value stored in Registers 40005, 40006,and 40007 read bythe SCADA Host.

Figure 5-22. Scaling Example for Voltage Mapped Registers

The values used for this example are:

Full Scale = 150 VPT Ratio (Current Calculation) = 100:1Source Value Location = 265 [neglect the leading 4] 32 Bit Value Unsigned

Using Equation 6 the following results when calculating the numeric value reported to the SCADA host whenregister 40005, 40006 or 40007 is accessed.

(12 bits -1) (12 bits -1)(( 2 * 11884)/(500 * 100)) + (2 - 1) = 3699.562 counts

1622.562 + 2047 = 3699

When the front panel MMI reads 11884 V, a value of 3699 is reported to the SCADA host.

One final example is illustrated for transferring values from different areas in the protective relay to the defaulttable. Such values as Relay status (located in register 40129 and transferred to 40001), Phase CT ratio (used bythe SCADA host to provide for scale conversion located in Register 40158 and transferred to 40016), PT ratio(used by the SCADA host to provide for scale conversion in Register 40160 and transferred to 40017), andsystem frequency (located in Register 40027).

The transfer of registers to a block is accomplished by using equation 8 and providing a scale factor of 1. Thusthe contents of the source register are divided by 1 and transferred to the User Definable Register Table. It isimportant that the scale type of 16 be use d to ensure the transfer is not scaled.


103

Section 6 - DNP 3.0 Communication Troubleshooting

DNP 3.0 is a very involved protocol. Many individuals when troubleshooting the network lack the appropriatetools to view the communication strings passed between the host and the TPU2000/2000R. The most commonissues, which arise when commissioning a DNP 3.0 network, are as follows:

1. Improper host/TPU2000 or TPU2000R parameterization. Most individuals when setting the mode parametersselect the defaults. Perhaps the most trouble is that the host has parameters for response in excess of thoseexpected of the IED. The most critical parameter causing communication malfunction is device timeout(Parameter 4). Other issues are that all data is enabled via Groups. It is recommended that the devicetimeout parameter be maximized until communication occurs between the host. The value can be decreasedlater to efficiently tune communication speeds. Decrease Parameters 5,6,7, and 8 to 0,0,0,0. Thus enablingGroup 0. Thus the minimum of data is transmitted upon a class or event request, thus allowing for networktuning.

2. Improper RS232 or RS485 cabling. Refer to Section 3 of this document.

3. Selecting a physical interface converter which cannot support DNP 3.0 communications. Additionally, someconverters require additional configuration to set the data transfer on a RD line instead of RTS/CTShandshaking.

4. Improper Host Addressing. Remember, the TPU2000 and TPU2000R’s address is in HEX.

It is imperative that a complete understanding of the protocol exists by the implementor. It is recommended thatthe DNP 3.0 Texts be consulted (GE-HARRIS DNP 3.0 manual is especially beneficial). Several Websites arealso available such as:

www.demandside.org

www.dnp.org

www.trianglemicroworks.com

It is also recommended that a communication analyzer package be available. One of many which has been usedin the process is manufactured by Applied System Engineering of Sunnyvale, CA. The ASE DNP 3.0 test setallows (depending upon the model selected), the user to decode command strings between the devices, allow thetest set to be a slave device, and/or allow the test set to be a host device.

Many hosts also offer these same capabilities with respect to datascope or communication analyzer features.Some even offers communication string decodes capabilities.


104

Appendix A - ASCII CODE

Decimal Hexadecimal ControlValue Value Character Character

0 00 NUL (CTRL @) Null1 01 SOH (CTRL A)2 02 STX ( CTRL B)3 03 ETX (CTRL C)4 04 EOT (CTRL D)5 05 ENQ (CTRL E)6 06 ACK(CTRL F)7 07 BEL (CTRL G) Beep8 08 BS (CTRL H) Backspace9 09 HT (CTRL I) Tab10 0A LF (CTRL J) Line-feed11 0B VT (CTRL K) Cursor home12 0C FF (CTRL M) Form-feed13 0D CR (CTRL N) Carriage Return (Enter)14 0E SO (CTRL O) Shift Out15 0F SI (CTRL P) Shift In16 10 DLE Data Link Escape17 11 DCI18 12 DC219 13 DC320 14 DC421 15 NAK22 16 SYN23 17 ETB24 18 CAN25 19 EM26 1A SUB27 1B ESC28 1C Cursor right29 1D Cursor left30 1E Cursor up31 1F Cursor down32 20 Space33 21 !34 22 “35 23 #36 24 $37 25 %38 26 &39 27 ‘40 28 (41 29 (42 2A *43 2B +44 2C ,45 2D -46 2E .47 2F /48 30 049 31 150 32 251 33 3


105

52 34 453 35 554 36 655 37 756 38 857 39 958 3A59 3B60 3C <61 3D62 3E >63 3F ?64 40 @65 41 A66 42 B67 43 C68 44 D69 45 E70 46 F71 47 G72 48 H73 49 I74 4A J75 4B K76 4C L77 4D M78 4E N79 4F O80 50 P81 51 Q82 52 R83 53 S84 54 T85 55 U86 56 V87 57 W88 58 X89 59 Y90 5A Z91 5B [92 5C \93 5D ]94 5E ^95 5F _96 60 ‘97 61 a98 62 b99 63 c100 64 d101 65 e102 66 f103 67 g104 68 h105 69 i106 6A j107 6B k108 6C l109 6D m110 6E n


106

111 6F o112 70 p113 71 q114 72 r115 73 s116 74 t117 75 u118 76 v119 77 w120 78 x121 79 y122 7A z123 7B {124 7C |125 7D }126 7E ~127 7F DEL


107

Appendix B - TPU2000 Protocol Command Set

Revision 3.1

1 Revision History

Revision Date Author Description3.1 04/07/98 VAB 3-4-11: maximum CT ratio was 2000 for messages 2/1-4/2.

Maximum VT ratio was 2000 for message 20/1-20/2.


108

The valid commands for the TPU2000 relay are listed below. The words transmit and receive in the command are withrespect to the relay. The commands are spelt out in a 10 byte RS-232 protocol or a 3 byte INCOM protocol.

It will be easy to understand the commands in a 33 bit INCOM context and then translate the protocol to a 10 byte RS-232protocol. The protocol messages are of two types - command and data.

S S C/D Inst Cmd AddressSubcmd BCH S

1 2 3 4 to 7 8 to 11 12 to 15 16 to 27 28 to 32 33Bit

Command Message (33 bit INCOM)

Figure 2 - Command Message (INCOM)

Figure 3 - Data Message (INCOM)

These INCOM message types can be represented in a 10 byte RS-232 protocol as follows:

STX C/D

1 2 3Byte

Command Message (10 byte RS-232)

Inst Cmd SCmd Addr Lo Addr Mid Addr Hi CS Lo CS Hi

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Figure 4 - Command Message (10 byte RS 232)

The address bytes, Addr Lo, Addr Mid, and Addr Hi, are a 3 digit hex address. The checksum is 256 minus the sum of theASCII characters in bytes 1 to 8. CS Lo is the low byte and CS Hi is the high byte of the checksum.

Example (3 4 1 command with a unit address of 001)STX = hex 02 = use 2 -->Start of transmissionC/D = hex 31 = ascii 1 -->Command type of messageInst = hex 33 = ascii 3 -->Instruction byteCmd = hex 34 = ascii 4 -->Command byteSCmd = hex 31 = ascii 1 -->Subcommand byteAddr Lo = hex 31 = ascii 1 -->Unit address low byteAddr Mid = hex 30 = ascii 0 -->Unit address mid byteAddr Hi = hex 30 = ascii 0 -->Unit address high byteCS Lo = hex 34 = ascii 4 -->Checksum low byteCS Hi = hex 46 = ascii F -->Checksum high byte

Checksum = 256 - (STX + C/D + Inst + Cmd + SCmd + Addr Lo + Addr Mid + Addr Hi) 256 - (2 + 1 + 3 + 4 + 1 + 1 + 0 + 0) = F4

Figure 5 - Data Message (10 byte RS 232)

S S C/D BCH S

1 2 3 28 to 32 33Bit

Data Message (33 bit INCOM)

Data 1 Data 2 Data 3

4 to 11 12 to 19 20 to 27

STX C/D

1 2 3Byte

Data Message (10 byte RS-232)

CS Lo CS Hi

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

D1 Lo D1 Hi D2 Lo D2 Hi D3 Lo D3 Hi


109

Where D1 Lo is the low nibble of the first data byte and D1 Hi is the high nibble of the first data byte, D2 Lo is the lownibble of the second data byte and D2 Hi is the high nibble of the second data byte, and D3 Lo is the low nibble of the thirddata byte and D3 Hi is the high nibble of the third data byte.

The checksum is 256 minus the sum of the ASCII characters in bytes 1 to 8. CS Lo is the low byte and CS Hi is the highbyte of the checksum.

Example (3 data bytes, ascii characters 4, 8, and 7)STX = hex 2 --> Start of transmissionC/D = hex 0 --> Data type of messageD1 Lo = hex 4 --> Data 1 low byteD1 Hi = hex 3 --> Data 1 high byteD2 Lo = hex 8 --> Data 2 low byteD2 Hi = hex 3 --> Data 2 high byteD3 Lo = hex 7 --> Data 3 low byteD3 Hi = hex 3 --> Data 3 high byteCS Lo = hex 2 --> Checksum low byteCS Hi = hex E --> Checksum high byte

The three data bytes translate to:Data 1 = 34 --> ascii 4Data 2 = 38 --> ascii 8Data 3 = 37 --> ascii 7

Checksum = 256 - (STX + C/D + D1L + D1H + D2L + D2H + D3L + D3H) 256 - (2 + 0 + 4 + 3 + 8 + 3 + 7 + 3) = E2

Transmission and reception convention

To acknowledge successful receipt of a message, an ACK is transmitted. The three byte message packet is 0x000013. For anunsuccessful reception, ie. a checksum error or an error in command processing, a NACK is transmitted. The three bytemessage packet is 0x100013.

The commands for the TPU2000 relay can be catagorized into three basic types according to the response that is expected bythe master. When a command or data is received, the TPU2000 must acknowledge if the reception was successful.

1-Simple Commands: A simple command directs the TPU2000 to perform specific actions. After the successful completionof these actions, the TPU2000 transmits an ACK as seen below.

Master DPU2000Command

ACK

Figure 6 - Simple Command Communication Flow

2-Upload Data This type of command requests the TPU2000 to transmit specific data. The proper transmission of this datais the TPU2000 acknowledge of this type of command as seen below.


110

Figure 7 - Upload Data Communication Flow

3-Download Data: These commands edit the TPU2000 data. The TPU2000 responds with an ACK after the successfulreceipt of each data message packet. This can be seen in the figure below.

Figure 8 - Download Data Communication Flow

Message Packet Checksum: This checksum is different than the checksum associated with every incom message packet. Thevalue of the checksum is contained in a two byte integer and is the summation of all message bytes (1/1 + 1/2 + 1/3 + 2/1 +2/2 + ...) for the command. The only exception is that the checksum message bytes are not included in the summation.

Example (3 3 1 command): (values are hex equivalent of the ASCII)1/1 = hex 05 3/1 = hex 441/2 = hex 31 3/2 = hex 001/3 = hex 04 3/3 = hex 002/1 = hex 00 4/1 = hex 002/2 = hex 01 4/2 = hex 00 <-- checksum high byte2/3 = hex 44 4/3 = hex C3 <-- checksum low byte

Command Set Summary

Inst Cmd Subcmd Definition3 0 n Status Commands3 1 n3 2 n3 3 n Transmit Settings Commands3 4 n Transmit Settings Commands3 5 n Transmit Meter/Record Commands3 6 n Load Profile/Record Commands3 7 n Transmit Meter Commands3 8 n3 9 n Relay Commands

MasterCommand

Data

DataData

.

.

.

DPU2000

Master

Command

Data

Data

Data

.

.

.

ACK

ACK

ACK DPU2000


111

3 10 n Receive Edit Buffer Commands3 11 n Receive Edit Buffer Commands3 12 n3 13 n Programmable Curve Commands3 14 n Waveform Capture Commands3 15 n Reserved for Factory

0 Transmit Status "N" Commands ( 3 0 n )

N Definition 0 Transmit Fast Status 1 Reserved 2 Unit Information 3 Reserved 4 Unreported Record Status 5 Reset Alarms/Target LEDs 6 Reset Max/Min Demand Currents 7 Show Logical I/O status

0.0 Transmit Fast Status ( 3 0 0 )

This command will cause the relay to respond with one data message with the format shown below:

byte 3 | byte 2 | byte 1 ST2 ST1 L T4 T3 T2 T1 T0 | P5 P4 P3 P2 P1 P0 A3 A2 | A1 A0 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 => Division Code . RTD division code is 5(000101) A3 A2 A1 A0 => A0 - One/More Unreported Operations A1 - Reserved A2,A3 - ReservedP5 P4 P3 P2 P1 P0 => Product ID. (TPU2000 = 010011) T2 T1 T0 => Reserved T4 T3 => Reserved L => Reserved for local operator interface action. ST2 ST1 => Reserved for corporate standard status bits.

0.2 Unit Information ( 3 0 2 )

This command will cause the relay to transmit data messages containing catalog number and the software version.

1/1-5/3 Catalog Number (18 characters)6/1 CPU Software Version high byte (*100)6/2 CPU Software Version low byte6/3 DSP Software Version (*10)7/1 Front Panel Software Version (*10)7/2 Rear Communication Software version (*10)7/3 Serial Number most significant low byte8/1 Serial Number least significant high byte8/2 Serial Number least significant low byte8/3 Serial Number most significant high byte

0.3 RCVDALL ( 3 0 3 )

- Reserved -


112

0.4 Unreported Record Status ( 3 0 4 )

This command will respond with the number of unacknowledged operation and fault records.

To mark the record as being reported, a 3 6 12 command will retrieve the oldest unreported differential fault record anddecrement the unreported differential fault record counter by one.

Likewise, a 3 6 13 command will retrieve the oldest unreported through fault record and decrement the unreported throughfault record counter by one.

The 3 6 14 command will retrieve the oldest unreported harmonic restraint record and decrement the unreported harmonicrestraint record counter by one.

The 3 6 15 command will retrieve the oldest unreported operations record and decrement the unreported operations recordcounter by one.

Msg byte Definition1/1 Relay Status (see command 4 1, msg 1/1)1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x041/3 Total Number of Messages = 42/1 Unreported Differential Fault Record Count byte2/2 Unreported Through Fault Record Count byte2/3 Unreported Harmonic Restraint Record Count byte3/1 Unreported Operations Record Count byte3/2 Spare3/3 Spare4/1 Spare4/2 Spare4/3 Spare

0.5 Reset Alarms/Target LEDs ( 3 0 5 )

The targets, alarms and relay status flag (see command 3 4 1 msg 2/1) will be reset on the TPU. After the relay receives thiscommand it will transmit an ACK/NACK based on the TPU completing the command.

0.6 Reset Max/Min Demand Currents ( 3 0 6 )

This command will reset the maximum and minimum demand current values along with their time tags. After the relayreceives this command it will transmit an ACK/NACK based on the TPU completing the command.

0.7 Show Logical Input/Output Status ( 3 0 7 )

This command displays the binary value of the logical input and output table for the present state of the unit.

Bit = 0, Input Disabled/Output Not EnergizedBit = 1, Input Enabled/Output Energized

Byte-Bit Output Input Byte-Bit Output Input1-7 DIFF 87T 2-7 TFA 50N-11-6 ALARM 87H 2-6 51P-1 50G-21-5 87T 51P-1 2-5 51P-2 150P-11-4 87H 51P-2 2-4 50P-1 150P-21-3 2HROA 51N-1 2-3 150P-1 150N-11-2 5HROA 51G-2 2-2 50P-2 150G-21-1 AHROA 50P-1 2-1 150P-2 46-11-0 TCFA 50P-2 2-0 51N-1 46-2


113

Byte-Bit Output Input Byte-Bit Output Input3-7 51G-2 ALT1 4-7 87H-D ULI13-6 50N-1 ALT2 4-6 51P-1D ULI23-5 150N-1 ECI1 4-5 51P-2D ULI33-4 50G-2 ECI2 4-4 51N-1D ULI43-3 150G-2 WCI 4-3 51G-2D ULI53-2 46-1 TRIP 4-2 50P-1D ULI63-1 46-2 SPR 4-1 50P-2D ULI73-0 87T-D TCM 4-0 50N-1D ULI8

Byte-Bit Output Input Byte-Bit Output Input5-7 50G-2D ULI9 6-7 PBTA5-6 150P-1D CRI 6-6 PCTA5-5 150P-2D 6-5 PUA5-4 150N-1D 6-4 635-3 150G-2D 6-3 THRUFA5-2 46-1D 6-2 TFCA5-1 46-2D 6-1 TFKA5-0 PATA 6-0 TFSCA

Byte-Bit Output Input Byte-Bit Output Input7-7 DTC 8-7 87T*7-6 OCTC 8-6 87H*7-5 PDA 8-5 2HROA*7-4 NDA 8-4 5HROA*7-3 PRIM 8-3 AHROA*7-2 ALT1 8-2 51P-1*7-1 ALT2 8-1 51P-2*7-0 STCA 8-0 50P-1*

Byte-Bit Output Input Byte-Bit Output Input9-7 150P-1* 10-7 150G-2*9-6 50P-2* 10-6 46-1*9-5 150P-2* 10-5 46-2*9-4 51N-1* 10-4 63*9-3 51G-2* 10-3 ULO19-2 50N-1* 10-2 ULO29-1 150N-1* 10-1 ULO39-0 50G-2* 10-0 ULO4

Byte-Bit Output Input Byte-Bit Output Input11-7 ULO5 12-7 HLDA-111-6 ULO6 12-6 LLDA-111-5 ULO7 12-5 HLDA-211-4 ULO8 12-4 LLDA-211-3 ULO9 12-3 HPFA11-2 LOADA 12-2 LPFA11-1 OCA-1 12-1 VarDA11-0 OCA-2 12-0 PVArA

Byte-Bit Output Input Byte-Bit Output Input13-7 NVArA 14-7 Spare13-6 PWatt1 14-6 Spare13-5 PWatt2 14-5 Spare13-4 Spare 14-4 Spare13-3 Spare 14-3 Spare13-2 Spare 14-2 Spare


114

13-1 Spare 14-1 Spare13-0 Spare 14-0 Spare

Msg byte Definition1/1 Relay Status (see command 4 1, msg 1/1)1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x071/3 Total Number of Messages = 122/1 Logical Output byte 12/2 Logical Output byte 22/3 Logical Output byte 33/1 Logical Output byte 43/2 Logical Output byte 53/3 Logical Output byte 64/1 Logical Output byte 74/2 Logical Output byte 84/3 Logical Output byte 95/1 Logical Output byte 105/2 Logical Output byte 115/3 Logical Output byte 126/1 Logical Output byte 136/2 Logical Output byte 146/3 Logical Output byte 157/1 Logical Output byte 167/2 Logical Input byte 17/3 Logical Input byte 28/1 Logical Input byte 38/2 Logical Input byte 48/3 Logical Input byte 59/1 Logical Input byte 69/2 Logical Input byte 79/3 Logical Input byte 810/1 Logical Input byte 910/2 Logical Input byte 1010/3 Logical Input byte 1111/1 Logical Input byte 1211/2 Logical Input byte 1311/3 Logical Input byte 1412/1 Logical Input byte 1512/2 Logical Input byte 1612/3 Spare12/1 Spare12/2 Checksum High byte12/3 Checksum Low byte

1 Transmit Buffer "N" Commands ( 3 1 n )

N Definition 0 Reserved for repeat 3 1 n 1 Register Based Communication Command

1.1 Transmit Register Based Data Set ( 3 1 1 )

Data Byte Definition1/1 Block Number (0-255)1/2 Offset Number (0-255)1/3 Number of Bytes to Retrieve (NumBytes)(3-132) in multiples of 3


115

Msg Byte Definition1/1 Relay Status Byte

Bit 7: Control Power CycledBit 6: New Fault RecordedBit 5: Alternate 2 Settings ActiveBit 4: Alternate 1 Settings ActiveBit 3: Remote Edit DisableBit 2: Local Settings ChangedBit 1: Contact Input ChnagedBit 0: Selftest Status

1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xXY1/3 Total Number of Messages (TotalMsg = 1+(Num Bytes/3))2/1 Data Byte Block Number, Offset Number2/2 Data Byte Block Number, Offset Number + 12/3 Data Byte Block Number, Offset Number + 2 . . . . . .TotalMsg/1 Data Byte Block Number, Offset Number + NumBytes - 3TotalMsg/2 Data Byte Block Number, Offset Number + NumBytes - 2TotalMsg/3 Data Byte Block Number, Offset Number + NumBytes - 1

Data Type Definitions Value RangesUnsigned Byte (0 to 255)Signed Byte (-128 to 127)Unsigned Short (0 to 65535)Signed Short (-32,768 to 32767)Unsigned Long (0 to 4,294,967,295)Signed Long (-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647)

Note: Data Byte Order follows the Low Address -High Byte, High Address - Low Byte Convention.

TPU2000/R Register Based Communication Definitions

BLK 0: SYSTEM STATUS/CONFIGURATION BLOCK

Block Offset Data Size Scale DescriptionOffset 0: Unsigned Word Relay Status

Bit 15-11: SpareBit 10: New Minimum Demand ValueBit 9: New Peak Demand ValueBit 8: New Operation RecordedBit 7: Control Power CycledBit 6: New Fault RecordedBit 5: Alternate 2 Settings ActiveBit 4: Alternate 1 Settings ActiveBit 3: Remote Edit DisableBit 2: Local Settings ChangedBit 1: Contact Input ChangedBit 0: Selftest Status

Offset 2: Unsigned Long Diagnostic Status FlagBit 31-16: SpareBit 15: DSP COP FAILUREBit 14: DSP +5V FAILUREBit 13: DSP +/-15V FAILUREBit 12: DSP +/-5V FAILUREBit 11: DSP ADC FAILUREBit 10: DSP EXT RAM FAILURE


116

Bit 9: DSP INT RAM FAILUREBit 8: DSP ROM FAILUREBit 7: SpareBit 6: SpareBit 5: SpareBit 4: SpareBit 3: CPU EEPROM FAILUREBit 2: CPU NVRAM FAILUREBit 1: CPU EPROM FAILUREBit 0: CPU RAM FAILURE

Offset 6: Unsigned Word Relay ConfigurationBit 15-4: SpareBit 3: 0=kWhr/kVarhr, 1=MWhr/MVarhrBit 2: 0= Wye PT, 1=Delta PTBit 1,0: Meter Winding Mode (0=Winding 1,

1=Winding2, 2=Winding3)Offset 8:20 Char String(NULL Term) Catalog NumberOffset 28: Unsigned Short 100 CPU Software Version NumberOffset 30: Unsigned Short 10 Analog/DSP Software Version NumberOffset 32: Unsigned Short 10 Front Panel Controller Software Version NumberOffset 34: Unsigned Short 10 Auxillary Communication Software Version NumberOffset 36: Unsigned Long 1 Serial NumberOffset 40: 18 Char String (NULL Term) Unit Name

BLK 1: DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT/ANGULAR/HARMONIC VALUES BLOCK

Block Offset Data Size Scale DescriptionOffset 0: Unsigned Word 800 Operate Current-AOffset 2: Unsigned Word 800 Operate Current-BOffset 4: Unsigned Word 800 Operate Current-COffset 6: Unsigned Word 800 Restraint Current-A Winding 1Offset 8: Unsigned Word 800 Restraint Current-B Winding 1Offset 10: Unsigned Word 800 Restraint Current-C Winding 1Offset 12: Unsigned Word 800 Restraint Current-A Winding 2Offset 14: Unsigned Word 800 Restraint Current-B Winding 2Offset 16: Unsigned Word 800 Restraint Current-C Winding 2Offset 18: Unsigned Word 800 Restraint Current-A Winding 3Offset 20: Unsigned Word 800 Restraint Current-B Winding 3Offset 22: Unsigned Word 800 Restraint Current-C Winding 3Offset 24: Unsigned Word 1 Restraint Angle-A Winding 1Offset 26: Unsigned Word 1 Restraint Angle-B Winding 1Offset 28: Unsigned Word 1 Restraint Angle-C Winding 1Offset 30: Unsigned Word 1 Restraint Angle-A Winding 2Offset 32: Unsigned Word 1 Restraint Angle-B Winding 2Offset 34: Unsigned Word 1 Restraint Angle-C Winding 2Offset 36: Unsigned Word 1 Restraint Angle-A Winding 3Offset 38: Unsigned Word 1 Restraint Angle-B Winding 3Offset 40: Unsigned Word 1 Restraint Angle-C Winding 3Offset 42: Unsigned Word 1 Restraint Angle-B Winding 3Offset 44: Unsigned Byte 2 % Second Harmonic-A Winding 1Offset 45: Unsigned Byte 2 % Second Harmonic-B Winding 1Offset 46: Unsigned Byte 2 % Second Harmonic-C Winding 1Offset 47: Unsigned Byte 2 % Fifth Harmonic-A Winding 1Offset 48: Unsigned Byte 2 % Fifth Harmonic-B Winding 1Offset 49: Unsigned Byte 2 % Fifth Harmonic-C Winding 1Offset 50: Unsigned Byte 2 % All Harmonic-A Winding 1Offset 51: Unsigned Byte 2 % All Harmonic-B Winding 1Offset 52: Unsigned Byte 2 % All Harmonic-C Winding 1Offset 53: Unsigned Byte 2 % Second Harmonic-A Winding 2


117

Offset 54: Unsigned Byte 2 % Second Harmonic-B Winding 2Offset 55: Unsigned Byte 2 % Second Harmonic-C Winding 2Offset 56: Unsigned Byte 2 % Fifth Harmonic-A Winding 2Offset 57: Unsigned Byte 2 % Fifth Harmonic-B Winding 2Offset 58: Unsigned Byte 2 % Fifth Harmonic-C Winding 2Offset 59: Unsigned Byte 2 % All Harmonic-A Winding 2Offset 60: Unsigned Byte 2 % All Harmonic-B Winding 2Offset 61: Unsigned Byte 2 % All Harmonic-C Winding 2Offset 62: Unsigned Byte 2 % Second Harmonic-A Winding 3Offset 63: Unsigned Byte 2 % Second Harmonic-B Winding 3Offset 64: Unsigned Byte 2 % Second Harmonic-C Winding 3Offset 65: Unsigned Byte 2 % Fifth Harmonic-A Winding 3Offset 66: Unsigned Byte 2 % Fifth Harmonic-B Winding 3Offset 67: Unsigned Byte 2 % Fifth Harmonic-C Winding 3Offset 68: Unsigned Byte 2 % All Harmonic-A Winding 3Offset 69: Unsigned Byte 2 % All Harmonic-B Winding 3Offset 70: Unsigned Byte 2 % All Harmonic-C Winding 3Offset 71 Unsigned Byte 10 Current Tap Scale Winding 1Offset 72 Unsigned Byte 10 Current Tap Scale Winding 2Offset 73 Unsigned Byte 10 Current Tap Scale Winding 3

BLK 2: RMS LOAD CURRENT/ANGULAR VALUES BLOCK

Block Offset Data Size Scale DescriptionOffset 0: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-A Winding 1Offset 4: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-B Winding 1

Offset 8: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-C Winding 1Offset 12: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-N Winding 1Offset 16: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-A Winding 2Offset 20: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-B Winding 2

Offset 24: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-C Winding 2Offset 28: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-G Winding 2Offset 32: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-A Winding 3Offset 36: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-B Winding 3

Offset 40: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-C Winding 3Offset 44: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current-N Winding 3Offset 48: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-A Angle Winding 1Offset 50: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-B Angle Winding 1Offset 52: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-C Angle Winding 1Offset 54: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-N Angle Winding 1Offset 56: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-A Angle Winding 2Offset 58: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-B Angle Winding 2Offset 60: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-C Angle Winding 2Offset 62: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-G Angle Winding 2Offset 64: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-A Angle Winding 3Offset 66: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-B Angle Winding 3Offset 68: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-C Angle Winding 3Offset 70: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current-N Angle Winding 3Offset 72: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current Zero Sequence Winding 1Offset 76: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current Positive Sequence Winding 1Offset 80: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current Negative Sequence Winding 1Offset 84: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current Zero Sequence Winding 2Offset 88: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current Positive Sequence Winding 2Offset 92: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current Negative Sequence Winding 2Offset 96: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current Zero Sequence Winding 3Offset 100: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current Positive Sequence Winding 3Offset 104: Unsigned Long 1 Load Current Negative Sequence Winding 3Offset 108: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current Zero Sequence Angle Winding 1Offset 110: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current Positive Sequence Angle Winding 1Offset 112: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current Negative Sequence Angle Winding 1


118

Offset 114: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current Zero Sequence Angle Winding 2Offset 116: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current Positive Sequence Angle Winding 2Offset 118: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current Negative Sequence Angle Winding 2Offset 120: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current Zero Sequence Angle Winding 3Offset 122: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current Positive Sequence Angle Winding 3Offset 124: Unsigned Word 1 Load Current Negative Sequence Angle Winding 3

BLK 3: RMS VOLTAGE/ANGULAR/REAL and REACTIVE POWER/ENERGY VALUES BLOCK

Block Offset Data Size Scale DescriptionOffset 0: Unsigned Long 1 Voltage VAOffset 4: Unsigned Long 1 Voltage VB

Offset 8: Unsigned Long 1 Voltage VCOffset 12: Unsigned Word 1 Voltage VA AngleOffset 14: Unsigned Word 1 Voltage VB AngleOffset 16: Unsigned Word 1 Voltage VC AngleOffset 18: Unsigned Long 1 Voltage Positive SequenceOffset 22: Unsigned Long 1 Voltage Negative SequenceOffset 26: Unsigned Word 1 Voltage Positive Sequence AngleOffset 28: Unsigned Word 1 Voltage Negative Sequence AngleOffset 30: Signed Long 1 kWatts AOffset 34: Signed Long 1 kWatts BOffset 38: Signed Long 1 kWatts COffset 42: Signed Long 1 kVars AOffset 46: Signed Long 1 kVars BOffset 50: Signed Long 1 kVars COffset 54: Signed Long 1 kWatt Hours AOffset 58: Signed Long 1 kWatt Hours BOffset 62: Signed Long 1 kWatt Hours COffset 66: Signed Long 1 kVar Hours AOffset 70: Signed Long 1 kVar Hours BOffset 74: Signed Long 1 kVar Hours COffset 78 Signed Long 1 3 Phase kWattsOffset 82 Signed Long 1 3 Phase kVarsOffset 86 Signed Long 1 3 Phase kWatt HoursOffset 90 Signed Long 1 3 Phase kVar HoursOffset 94 Signed Long 1 3 Phase kVAOffset 98 Unsigned Short 100 System FrequencyOffset 100 Unsigned Short Power Factor

Bit 15-9: Not usedBit 8: 0=Positive, 1=NegativeBit 7: 0=Leading, 1=LaggingBit 6-0: Power Factor Value (x100)

BLK 4: RMS DEMAND CURRENT/REAL and REACTIVE POWER VALUES BLOCK

Block Offset Data Size Scale DescriptionOffset 0: Signed Long 1 Demand Current-AOffset 4: Signed Long 1 Demand Current-BOffset 8: Signed Long 1 Demand Current-COffset 12: Signed Long 1 Demand Current-NOffset 16: Signed Long 1 Demand kWatts-AOffset 20: Signed Long 1 Demand kWatts-BOffset 24: Signed Long 1 Demand kWatts-COffset 28: Signed Long 1 Demand kVars-AOffset 32: Signed Long 1 Demand kVars-BOffset 36: Signed Long 1 Demand kVars-COffset 40: Signed Long 1 3 Phase Demand WattsOffset 44: Signed Long 1 3 Phase Demand Vars


119

BLK 5: RMS PEAK DEMAND CURRENT/REAL and REACTIVE POWER VALUES and TIME STAMPSBLOCK

Block Offset Data Size Scale DescriptionOffset 0: Signed Long 1 Peak Demand Current-AOffset 4: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-A YearOffset 5: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-A MonthOffset 6: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-A DayOffset 7: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-A HourOffset 8: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-A MinuteOffset 9: Unsigned Byte SpareOffset10: Signed Long 1 Peak Demand Current-BOffset14: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-B YearOffset15: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-B MonthOffset16: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-B DayOffset17: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-B HourOffset18: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-B MinuteOffset19: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 20: Signed Long 1 Peak Demand Current-COffset 24: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-C YearOffset 25: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-C MonthOffset 26: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-C DayOffset 27: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-C HourOffset 28: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-C MinuteOffset 29: Unsigned Byte SpareOffset 30: Signed Long 1 Peak Demand Current-NOffset 34: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-N YearOffset 35: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-N MonthOffset 36: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-N DayOffset 37: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-N HourOffset 38: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand Current-N MinuteOffset 39: Unsigned Byte Spare Offset 40: Signed Long 1 Peak Demand KWatts-AOffset 44: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-A YearOffset 45: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-A MonthOffset 46: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-A DayOffset 47: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-A HourOffset 48: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-A MinuteOffset 49: Unsigned Byte SpareOffset 50: Signed Long 1 Peak Demand KWatts-BOffset 54: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-B YearOffset 55: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-B MonthOffset 56: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-B DayOffset 57: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-B HourOffset 58: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-B MinuteOffset 59: Unsigned Byte SpareOffset 60: Signed Long 1 Peak Demand KWatts-COffset 64: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-C YearOffset 65: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-C MonthOffset 66: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-C DayOffset 67: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-C HourOffset 68: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KWatts-C MinuteOffset 69: Unsigned Byte SpareOffset 70: Signed Long 1 Peak Demand KVars-AOffset 74: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-A YearOffset 75: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-A MonthOffset 76: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-A DayOffset 77: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-A HourOffset 78: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-A Minute


120

Offset 79: Unsigned Byte SpareOffset 80: Signed Long 1 Peak Demand KVars-BOffset 84: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-B YearOffset 85: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-B MonthOffset 86: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-B DayOffset 87: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-B HourOffset 88: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-B MinuteOffset 89: Unsigned Byte SpareOffset 90: Signed Long 1 Peak Demand KVars-COffset 94: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-C YearOffset 95: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-C MonthOffset 96: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-C DayOffset 97: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-C HourOffset 98: Unsigned Byte Peak Demand KVars-C MinuteOffset 99: Unsigned Byte SpareOffset 100: Signed Long 1 3 Phase Peak Demand KWattsOffset 104: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Peak Demand KWatts YearOffset 105: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Peak Demand KWatts MonthOffset 106: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Peak Demand KWatts DayOffset 107: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Peak Demand KWatts HourOffset 108: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Peak Demand KWatts MinuteOffset 109: Unsigned Byte SpareOffset 110: Signed Long 1 3 Phase Peak Demand KVarsOffset 114: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Peak Demand KVars YearOffset 115: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Peak Demand KVars MonthOffset 116: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Peak Demand KVars DayOffset 117: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Peak Demand KVars HourOffset 118: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Peak Demand KVars MinuteOffset 119: Unsigned Byte Spare

BLK 6: RMS MINIMUM DEMAND CURRENT/REAL and REACTIVE POWER VALUES and TIME STAMPSBLOCK

Block Offset Data Size Scale DescriptionOffset 0: Signed Long 1 Minimum Demand Current-AOffset 4: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-A YearOffset 5: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-A MonthOffset 6: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-A DayOffset 7: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-A HourOffset 8: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-A MinuteOffset 9: Unsigned Byte SpareOffset10: Signed Long 1 Minimum Demand Current-BOffset14: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-B YearOffset15: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-B MonthOffset16: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-B DayOffset17: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-B HourOffset18: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-B MinuteOffset19: Unsigned Byte SpareOffset 20: Signed Long 1 Minimum Demand Current-COffset 24: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-C YearOffset 25: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-C MonthOffset 26: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-C DayOffset 27: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-C HourOffset 28: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-C MinuteOffset 29: Unsigned Byte SpareOffset 30: Signed Long 1 Minimum Demand Current-NOffset 34: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-N YearOffset 35: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-N MonthOffset 36: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-N DayOffset 37: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-N Hour


121

Offset 38: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand Current-N MinuteOffset 39: Unsigned Byte SpareOffset 40: Signed Long 1 Minimum Demand KWatts-AOffset 44: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-A YearOffset 45: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-A MonthOffset 46: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-A DayOffset 47: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-A HourOffset 48: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-A MinuteOffset 49: Unsigned Byte SpareOffset 50: Signed Long 1 Minimum Demand KWatts-BOffset 54: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-B YearOffset 55: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-B MonthOffset 56: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-B DayOffset 57: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-B HourOffset 58: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-B MinuteOffset 59: Unsigned Byte SpareOffset 60: Signed Long 1 Minimum Demand KWatts-COffset 64: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-C YearOffset 65: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-C MonthOffset 66: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-C DayOffset 67: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-C HourOffset 68: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KWatts-C MinuteOffset 69: Unsigned Byte SpareOffset 70: Signed Long 1 Minimum Demand KVars-AOffset 74: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-A YearOffset 75: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-A MonthOffset 76: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-A DayOffset 77: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-A HourOffset 78: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-A MinuteOffset 79: Unsigned Byte SpareOffset 80: Signed Long 1 Minimum Demand KVars-BOffset 84: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-B YearOffset 85: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-B MonthOffset 86: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-B DayOffset 87: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-B HourOffset 88: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-B MinuteOffset 89: Unsigned Byte SpareOffset 90: Signed Long 1 Minimum Demand KVars-COffset 94: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-C YearOffset 95: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-C MonthOffset 96: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-C DayOffset 97: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-C HourOffset 98: Unsigned Byte Minimum Demand KVars-C MinuteOffset 99: Unsigned Byte SpareOffset 100: Signed Long 1 3 Phase Minimum Demand KWattsOffset 104: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Minimum Demand KWatts YearOffset 105: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Minimum Demand KWatts MonthOffset 106: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Minimum Demand KWatts DayOffset 107: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Minimum Demand KWatts HourOffset 108: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Minimum Demand KWatts MinuteOffset 109: Unsigned Byte SpareOffset 110: Signed Long 1 3 Phase Minimum Demand KVarsOffset 114: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Minimum Demand KVars YearOffset 115: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Minimum Demand KVars MonthOffset 116: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Minimum Demand KVars DayOffset 117: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Minimum Demand KVars HourOffset 118: Unsigned Byte 3 Phase Minimum Demand KVars MinuteOffset 119: Unsigned Byte Spare


122

BLK 7: COUNTERS BLOCK

Block Offset Data Size Scale DescriptionOffset 0: Unsigned Short 1 Unreported Differential Fault Record CounterOffset 2: Unsigned Short 1 Unreported Through Fault Record CounterOffset 4: Unsigned Short 1 Unreported Harmonic Restraint Record CounterOffset 6: Unsigned Short 1 Unreported Operation Record CounterOffset 8: Unsigned Short 1 Through Fault CounterOffset 10: Unsigned Long 1 Through Fault Summation kAmps-A CounterOffset 14: Unsigned Long 1 Through Fault Summation kAmps-B CounterOffset 18: Unsigned Long 1 Through Fault Summation kAmps-C CounterOffset 22: Unsigned Long 1 Through Fault Summation Cycles CounterOffset 26: Unsigned Short 1 Overcurrent Trip CounterOffset 28: Unsigned Short 1 Differential Trip Counter

BLK 8: PHYSICAL and LOGICAL INPUT/OUTPUT BLOCK

Block Offset Data Size DescriptionOffset 0: Unsigned Long Logical Output 0-31

Bit 31: DIFF Bit 15: 51G-2Bit 30: ALARM Bit 14: 50N-1Bit 29: 87T Bit 13: 150N-1Bit 28: 87H Bit 12: 50G-2Bit 27: 2HROA Bit 11: 150G-2Bit 26: 5HROA Bit 10: 46-1Bit 25: AHROABit 9: 46-2Bit 24: TCFA Bit 8: 87T-DBit 23: TFA Bit 7: 87H-DBit 22: 51P-1 Bit 6: 51P-1DBit 21: 51P-2 Bit 5: 51P-2DBit 20: 50P-1 Bit 4: 51N-1DBit 19: 150P-1 Bit 3: 51G-2DBit 18: 50P-2 Bit 2: 50P-1DBit 17: 150P-2 Bit 1: 50P-2DBit 16: 51N-1 Bit 0: 50N-1D

Offset 4: Unsigned Long Logical Output 32-63Bit 31: 50G-2D Bit 15: DTCBit 30: 150P-1D Bit 14: OCTCBit 29: 150P-2D Bit 13: PDABit 28: 150N-1D Bit 12: NDABit 27: 150G-2D Bit 11: PRIMBit 26: 46-1D Bit 10: ALT1Bit 25: 46-2D Bit 9: ALT2Bit 24: PATA Bit 8: STCABit 23: PBTA Bit 7: 87T*Bit 22: PCTA Bit 6: 87H*Bit 21: PUA Bit 5: 2HROA*Bit 20: 63 Bit 4: 5HROA*Bit 19: THRUFA Bit 3: AHROA*Bit 18: TFCA Bit 2: 51P-1*Bit 17: TFKA Bit 1: 51P-2*Bit 16: TFSCA Bit 0: 50P-1*

Offset 8: Unsigned Long Logical Output 64-95Bit 31: 150P-1* Bit 15: ULO5Bit 30: 50P-2* Bit 14: ULO6Bit 29: 150P-2* Bit 13: ULO7Bit 28: 51N-1* Bit 12: ULO8Bit 27: 51G-2* Bit 11: ULO9Bit 26: 50N-1* Bit 10: LOADA


123

Bit 25: 150N-1* Bit 9: OCA-1Bit 24: 50G-2* Bit 8: OCA-2Bit 23: 150G-2* Bit 7: HLDA-1Bit 22: 46-1* Bit 6: LLDA-1Bit 21: 46-2* Bit 5: HLDA-2Bit 20: 63* Bit 4: LLDA-1Bit 19: ULO1 Bit 3: HPFABit 18: ULO2 Bit 2: LPFABit 17: ULO3 Bit 1: VarDABit 16: ULO4 Bit 0: PVarA

Offset 12: Unsigned Long Logical Output 96-127Bit 31: NVarA Bit 15:Bit 30: PWatt1 Bit 14:Bit 29: PWatt2 Bit 13:Bit 28: Bit 12:Bit 27: Bit 11:Bit 26: Bit 10:Bit 25: Bit 9:Bit 24: Bit 8:Bit 23: Bit 7:Bit 22: Bit 6:Bit 21: Bit 5:Bit 20: Bit 4:Bit 19: Bit 3:Bit 18: Bit 2:Bit 17: Bit 1:Bit 16: Bit 0:

Offset 16: Unsigned Long Logical Input 0-31Bit 31: 87T Bit 15: ALT1Bit 30: 87H Bit 14: ALT2Bit 29: 51P-1 Bit 13: ECI1Bit 28: 51P-2 Bit 12: ECI2Bit 27: 51N-1 Bit 11: WCIBit 26: 51G-2 Bit 10: TRIPBit 25: 50P-1 Bit 9: SPRBit 24: 50P-2 Bit 8: TCMBit 23: 50N-1 Bit 7: ULI1Bit 22: 50G-2 Bit 6: ULI2Bit 21: 150P-1 Bit 5: ULI3Bit 20: 150P-2 Bit 4: ULI4Bit 19: 150N-1 Bit 3: ULI5Bit 18: 150G-2 Bit 2: ULI6Bit 17: 46-1 Bit 1: ULI7Bit 16: 46-2 Bit 0: ULI8

Offset 20: Unsigned Long Logical Input 32-63Bit 31: ULI9 Bit 15:Bit 30: CRI Bit 14:Bit 29: Bit 13:Bit 28: Bit 12:Bit 27: Bit 11:Bit 26: Bit 10:Bit 25: Bit 9:Bit 24: Bit 8:Bit 23: Bit 7:Bit 22: Bit 6:Bit 21: Bit 5:Bit 20: Bit 4:Bit 19: Bit 3:Bit 18: Bit 2:


124

Bit 17: Bit 1:Bit 16: Bit 0:

Offset 24: Unsigned Long Logical Input 64-95 (Reserved)Offset 28: Unsigned Long Logical Input 96-127 (Reserved)Offset 32: Unsigned Short Physical Output

Bit 15: Spare Bit 7: OUT7Bit 14: Spare Bit 6: OUT6Bit 13: Spare Bit 5: OUT5Bit 12: Spare Bit 4: OUT4Bit 11: Spare Bit 3: OUT3Bit 10: Spare Bit 2: OUT2Bit 9: Spare Bit 1: OUT1Bit 8: Spare Bit 0: TRIP

Offset 34: Unsigned Short Physical InputBit 15: Spare Bit 7: IN8Bit 14: Spare Bit 6: IN7Bit 13: Spare Bit 5: IN6Bit 12: Spare Bit 4: IN5Bit 11: Spare Bit 3: IN4Bit 10: Spare Bit 2: IN3Bit 9: Spare Bit 1: IN2Bit 8: IN9 Bit 0: IN1


N Definition 0 Reserved for repeat 3 3 n 1 Communications Settings

3.1 Transmit Communications Settings ( 3 3 1 )

Low byte consists of bits 0 through 7.High byte consists of bits 8 through 15.

Port configuration bytebit0-3 = port baud rate where 0 = 300, 1 = 1200, 2 = 2400, 3 = 4800, 4 = 9600, 5 = 19200,6 = 38400bit 4-5 = parity (0=None,1=Odd,2=Even)bit 6 = number of data bits (0=seven,1=eight)bit 7 = number of stop bits (0=one,1=two)

Valid Frame Combinations (EVEN 7 1, ODD 7 1, NONE 8 1, EVEN 8 1, ODD 8 1, NONE 8 2, NONE 7 2)

Msg byte Definition1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1)1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x311/3 Total Number of Messages = 92/1 Unit Address high byte2/2 Unit Address low byte2/3 Front Panel RS232 configuration byte3/1 Rear Panel RS232 or INCOM configuration byte3/2 Rear Panel RS485 configuration byte3/3 Rear Panel IRIG byte 0=Disabled, 1=Enabled4/1 Spare

4/2 Spare4/3 Aux Port Parameter 1 byte (0-255)5/1 Aux Port Parameter 2 byte (0-255)5/2 Aux Port Parameter 3 byte (0-255)5/3 Aux Port Parameter 4 byte (0-255)6/1 Aux Port Parameter 5 byte (0-255)6/2 Aux Port Parameter 6 byte (0-255)


125

6/3 Aux Port Parameter 7 byte (0-255)7/1 Aux Port Parameter 8 byte (0-255)7/2 Aux Port Parameter 9 byte (0-255)7/3 Aux Port Parameter 10 byte (0-255)8/1 Aux Port Parameter Mode byte8/2 Spare

8/3 Spare9/1 Spare9/2 Checksum high byte9/3 Checksum low byte


N Definition 0 Reserved for repeat 3 4 n 1 Programmable Input Select and Index Tables 2 Programmable Input Negated AND Table 3 Programmable Input AND/OR Table 4 Programmable Input User Defined Input Names 5 Programmable Output Select Table 6 Programmable Output AND/OR Table 7 Programmable Output User Defined Output Strings 8 Primary Relay Settings 9 Alternate 1 Relay Settings10 Alternate 2 Relay Settings11 Configuration Settings12 Counter Settings13 Alarm Settings14 Real Time Clock15 Output Delays

4.1 Transmit Programmable Input Select and Index ( 3 4 1 )

Bit = 0, Physical Input is selected.Bit = 1, Physical Input is not selected.Low byte consists of bits 0 through 7.High byte consists of bits 8 through 15.Index byte is the offset into the TPU’s logical input structure.

Offset Definitions 00 87T Restrained Differential Trip 01 87H High Set Inst Differential Trip 02 51P-1 Wdg1 Phase Time OC Trip 03 51P-2 Wdg2 Phase Time OC Trip 04 51N-1 Wdg1 Neutral Time OC Trip 05 51G-2 Wdg2 Ground Time OC Trip 06 50P-1 1st Wdg1 Phase Inst OC Trip 07 50P-2 1st Wdg2 Phase Inst OC Trip 08 50N-1 1st Wdg1 Neutral Inst OC Trip 09 50G-2 1st Wdg2 Ground Inst OC Trip 10 150P-1 2nd Wdg1 Phase Inst OC Trip 11 150P-2 2nd Wdg2 Phase Inst OC Trip 12 150N-1 2nd Wdg1 Neutral Inst OC Trip 13 150G-2 2nd Wdg2 Ground Inst OC Trip 14 46-1 Wdg1 Neg Seq Time OC Trip 15 46-2 Wdg2 Neg Seq Time OC Trip 16 ALT1 Enables Alt 1 Settings 17 ALT2 Enables Alt 2 Settings 18 ECI1 Event-1 Capture Initiated 19 ECI2 Event-2 Capture Initiated


126

20 WCI Waveform Capture Initiated 21 Trip Initiates Diff Trip Output 22 SPR Sudden Pressure Input 23 TCM Trip Coil Monitoring 24 ULI1 User Logical Input 1 25 ULI2 User Logical Input 2 26 ULI3 User Logical Input 3 27 ULI4 User Logical Input 4 28 ULI5 User Logical Input 5 29 ULI6 User Logical Input 6 30 ULI7 User Logical Input 7 31 ULI8 User Logical Input 8 32 ULI9 User Logical Input 9 33 CRI Clears Through Fault and OC Counters

Example : if message 2/1 = hex 242/2 = hex 11

2/3 = hex 4I/O word is 00100100 00010001 hex 2411

Note the Physical Inputs are translated using the physical input table below: In the example IN3, IN10, IN8 and IN5 areselected for GND.

The AND/OR selection and enable disable mapping is selected with commands 3 11 3 and 3 11 2

Bit Physical Input--- --------------0 IN6

1 IN7 2 IN8 3 IN2

4 IN9 5 IN3

6 IN47 IN58 IN1

9 Reserved10 Reserved11 Reserved12 Reserved

13 Reserved 14 Reserved

15 Reserved

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status

Bit 0 : SelfTest Status Bit 1 : Contact Input Status changed Bit 2 : Local Settings Change Bit 3 : Remote Edit Disabled. Bit 4 : Alternate Settings Group 1 enabled. Bit 5 : Alternate Setting Group 2 enabled. Bit 6 : Fault Record Logged. Bit 7 : Power was Cycled

1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x41 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 34 2/1 INPUT1 high byte 2/2 INPUT1 low byte 2/3 INPUT1 index byte


127

3/1 INPUT2 high byte 3/2 INPUT2 low byte 3/3 INPUT2 index byte 4/1 INPUT3 high byte 4/2 INPUT3 low byte 4/3 INPUT3 index byte 5/1 INPUT4 high byte 5/2 INPUT4 low byte Bit Physical Input 5/3 INPUT4 index byte --- -------------- 6/1 INPUT5 high byte 0 IN6 6/2 INPUT5 low byte 1 IN7 6/3 INPUT5 index byte 2 IN8 7/1 INPUT6 high byte 3 IN2 7/2 INPUT6 low byte 4 IN9 7/3 INPUT6 index byte 5 IN3 8/1 INPUT7 high byte 6 IN4 8/2 INPUT7 low byte 7 IN5 8/3 INPUT7 index byte 8 IN1 9/1 INPUT8 high byte 9 Reserved 9/2 INPUT8 low byte 10 Reserved 9/3 INPUT8 index byte 11 Reserved 10/1 INPUT9 high byte 12 Reserved 10/2 INPUT9 low byte 13 Reserved 10/3 INPUT9 index byte 14 Reserved 11/1 INPUT10 high byte 15 Reserved 11/2 INPUT10 low byte 11/3 INPUT10 index byte 12/1 INPUT11 high byte 12/2 INPUT11 low byte 12/3 INPUT11 index byte 13/1 INPUT12 high byte 13/2 INPUT12 low byte 13/3 INPUT12 index byte 14/1 INPUT13 high byte 14/2 INPUT13 low byte 14/3 INPUT13 index byte 15/1 INPUT14 high byte 15/2 INPUT14 low byte 15/3 INPUT14 index byte 16/1 INPUT15 high byte 16/2 INPUT15 low byte 16/3 INPUT15 index byte 17/1 INPUT16 high byte 17/2 INPUT16 low byte 17/3 INPUT16 index byte 18/1 INPUT17 high byte 18/2 INPUT17 low byte 18/3 INPUT17 index byte 19/1 INPUT18 high byte 19/2 INPUT18 low byte 19/3 INPUT18 index byte 20/1 INPUT19 high byte 20/2 INPUT19 low byte 20/3 INPUT19 index byte 21/1 INPUT20 low byte 21/3 INPUT20 index byte 22/1 INPUT21 high byte 22/2 INPUT21 low byte 22/3 INPUT21 index byte


128

23/1 INPUT22 high byte 23/2 INPUT22 low byte 23/3 INPUT22 index byte 24/1 INPUT23 high byte 24/2 INPUT23 low byte 24/3 INPUT23 index byte 25/1 INPUT24 high byte 25/2 INPUT24 low byte 25/3 INPUT24 index byte 26/1 INPUT25 high byte 26/2 INPUT25 low byte 26/3 INPUT25 index byte 27/1 INPUT26 high byte 27/2 INPUT26 low byte 27/3 INPUT26 index byte 28/1 INPUT27 high byte 28/2 INPUT27 low byte 28/3 INPUT27 index byte 29/1 INPUT28 high byte 29/2 INPUT28 low byte 29/3 INPUT28 index byte 30/1 INPUT29 high byte 30/2 INPUT29 low byte 30/3 INPUT29 index byte 31/1 INPUT30 high byte 31/2 INPUT30 low byte 31/3 INPUT30 index byte 32/1 INPUT31 high byte 32/2 INPUT31 low byte 32/3 INPUT31 index byte 33/1 INPUT32 high byte 33/2 INPUT32 low byte 33/3 INPUT32 index byte 34/1 spare 34/2 Checksum high byte 34/3 Checksum low byte

4.2 Transmit Programmable Input Negated AND Input ( 3 4 2 )

From TPU Negated Programmable Input data transferred from TPU2 to PC. (3, 4, 2)

Bit = 0, Enabled when input is opened.Bit = 1, Enabled when input is closed.Low byte consists of bits 0 through 7.High byte consists of bits 8 through 15.

Msg byte Definition1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1)1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x421/3 Total Number of Messages = 232/1 INPUT1 high byte2/2 INPUT1 low byte2/3 INPUT2 high byte3/1 INPUT2 low byte3/2 INPUT3 high byte3/3 INPUT3 low byte4/1 INPUT4 high byte4/2 INPUT4 low byte Bit Physical Input4/3 INPUT5 high byte --- --------------


129

5/1 INPUT5 low byte 0 IN65/2 INPUT6 high byte 1 IN75/3 INPUT6 low byte 2 IN86/1 INPUT7 high byte 3 IN26/2 INPUT7 low byte 4 IN96/3 INPUT8 high byte 5 IN37/1 INPUT8 low byte 6 IN47/2 INPUT9 high byte 7 IN57/3 INPUT9 low byte 8 IN18/1 INPUT10 high byte 9 Reserved8/2 INPUT10 low byte 10 Reserved8/3 INPUT11 high byte 11 Reserved9/1 INPUT11 low byte 12 Reserved9/2 INPUT12 high byte 13 Reserved9/3 INPUT12 low byte 14 Reserved10/1 INPUT13 high byte 15 Reserved10/2 INPUT13 low byte10/3 INPUT14 high byte11/1 INPUT14 low byte11/2 INPUT15 high byte11/3 INPUT15 low byte12/1 INPUT16 high byte12/2 INPUT16 low byte12/3 INPUT17 high byte13/1 INPUT17 low byte13/2 INPUT18 high byte13/3 INPUT18 low byte14/1 INPUT19 high byte14/2 INPUT19 low byte14/3 INPUT20 high byte15/1 INPUT20 low byte15/2 INPUT21 high byte15/3 INPUT21 low byte16/1 INPUT22 high byte16/2 INPUT22 low byte16/3 INPUT23 high byte17/1 INPUT23 low byte17/2 INPUT24 high byte17/3 INPUT24 low byte18/1 INPUT25 high byte18/2 INPUT25 low byte18/3 INPUT26 high byte19/1 INPUT26 low byte19/2 INPUT27 high byte19/3 INPUT27 low byte20/1 INPUT28 high byte20/2 INPUT28 low byte20/3 INPUT29 high byte21/1 INPUT29 low byte21/2 INPUT30 high byte21/3 INPUT30 low byte22/1 INPUT31 high byte22/2 INPUT31 low byte22/3 INPUT32 high byte23/1 INPUT32 low byte23/2 Checksum high byte23/3 Checksum low byte


130

4.3 Transmit Programmable Input AND/OR Select ( 3 4 3 )

Bit = 0, Selected inputs are ORed together. Bit = 1, Selected inputs are ANDed together.

Msg byte Definition1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1)1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x431/3 Total Number of Messages = 32/1 Programmable input AND/OR selection bits 24-312/2 Programmable input AND/OR selection bits 16-232/3 Programmable input AND/OR selection bits 8-153/1 Programmable input AND/OR selection bits 0-73/2 Checksum high byte3/3 Checksum low byte

Bit Logical Input --- ------------- 0 INPUT1 1 INPUT2 . . . 27 INPUT28 28 INPUT29 29 INPUT30 30 INPUT31 31 INPUT32

4.4 Transmit Programmable User Defined Input Names ( 3 4 4 )

User definable 8 char input strings. Byte 9 is an implied NULL.

Msg byte Definition1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1)1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x441/3 Total Number of Messages = 372/1-4/2 IN1 Character String 8 bytes4/3-7/1 IN2 Character String 8 bytes7/2-9/3 IN3 Character String 8 bytes10/1-12/2 IN4 Character String 8 bytes12/3-15/1 IN5 Character String 8 bytes15/2-17/3 IN6 Character String 8 bytes18/1-20/2 IN7 Character String 8 bytes20/3-23/1 IN8 Character String 8 bytes23/2-25/3 IN9 Character String 8 bytes26/1-28/2 spare Character String 8 bytes28/3-31/1 spare Character String 8 bytes31/2-33/3 spare Character String 8 bytes34/1-36/2 spare Character String 8 bytes36/3-37/1 Spare37/2 Checksum high byte37/3 Checksum low byte

4.5 Transmit Programmable Output Select ( 3 4 5 )

Bit = 0, Physical Output is selected.Bit = 1, Physical Output is not selected.


131

Least significant low byte consists of bits 0 through 7.Least significant high byte consists of bits 8 through 15.Most significant low byte consists of bits 16 through 23.Most significant high byte consists of bits 24 through 31.

Bit Logical Output 0 Not used, reserved for fixed Differential Trip 1 OUTPUT1 2 OUTPUT2 3 OUTPUT3

. . . 30 OUTPUT30 31 OUTPUT31

Msg byte Definition1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1)1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x451/3 Total Number of Messages = 212/1 Contact OUT5 most significant high byte2/2 Contact OUT5 most significant low byte2/3 Contact OUT5 least significant high byte3/1 Contact OUT5 least significant low byte3/2 Contact OUT7 most significant high byte3/3 Contact OUT7 most significant low byte4/1 Contact OUT7 least significant high byte4/2 Contact OUT7 least significant low byte4/3 Contact OUT4 most significant high byte5/1 Contact OUT4 most significant low byte5/2 Contact OUT4 least significant high byte5/3 Contact OUT4 least significant low byte6/1 Contact OUT6 most significant high byte6/2 Contact OUT6 most significant low byte6/3 Contact OUT6 least significant high byte7/1 Contact OUT6 least significant low byte7/2 Contact OUT3 most significant high byte7/3 Contact OUT3 most significant low byte8/1 Contact OUT3 least significant high byte8/2 Contact OUT3 least significant low byte8/3 Contact OUT2 most significant high byte9/1 Contact OUT2 most significant low byte9/2 Contact OUT2 least significant high byte9/3 Contact OUT2 least significant low byte10/1 Contact OUT1 most significant high byte10/2 Contact OUT1 most significant low byte10/3 Contact OUT1 least significant high byte11/1 Contact OUT1 least significant low byte11/2-21/1 Spare Outputs21/2 Checksum high byte21/3 Checksum low byte

4.6 Transmit Programmable Output AND/OR Select ( 3 4 6 )

Bit = 0, Selected inputs are ORed together.Bit = 1, Selected inputs are ANDed together.Index byte is the offset into the TPU’s logical output structure.


132

Bit Logical Output 0 not used, reserved for fixed DIFF TRIP 1 Contact OUT5 2 Contact OUT7 3 Contact OUT4 4 Contact OUT6 5 Contact OUT3 6 Contact OUT2 7 Contact OUT1 8 spare 9 spare 10 spare 11 spare 12 spare 13 spare 14 spare 15 spare

Index Output Definition00 DIFF Fixed Diff Trip, 87T or 87H01 ALARM Fixed Self Check Alarm02 87T Percentage Differential Trip03 87H High Set Inst Diff Trip04 2HROA 2nd Harm Restraint Output Alarm05 5HROA 5th Harm Restraint Alarm06 AHROA All Harm Restraint Alarm07 TCFA Trip Circuit Failure Alarm08 TFA Trip Failure Alarm09 51P-1 Wdg 1 Phase Time OC Trip10 51P-2 Wdg 2 Phase Time OC Trip11 50P-1 1st Wdg 1 Phase Inst OC Trip12 150P-1 2nd Wdg 1 Phase Inst OC Trip13 50P-2 1st Wdg 2 Phase Inst OC Trip14 150P-2 2nd Wdg 2 Phase Inst OC Trip15 51N-1 Wdg 1 Neutral Time OC Trip16 51G-2 Wdg 2 Ground Time OC Trip17 50N-1 1st Wdg 1 Neutral Inst OC Trip18 150N-1 2nd Wdg 1 Neutral Inst OC Trip19 50G-2 1st Wdg 2 Ground Inst OC Trip20 150G-2 2nd Wdg 2 Ground Inst OC Trip21 46-1 Wdg 1 Neg Sequence Time OC Trip22 46-2 Wdg 2 Neg Sequence Time OC Trip23 87T-D Percentage Differential Disabled Alarm24 87H-D High Set Inst Diff Disabled Alarm25 51P-1D Wdg 1 Phase Time OC Disabled Alarm26 51P-2D Wdg 2 Phase Time OC Disabled Alarm27 51N-1D Wdg 1 Neutral Time OC Disabled Alarm28 51G-2D Wdg 2 Ground Time OC Disabled Alarm29 50P-1D 1st Wdg 1 Phase Inst OC Disabled Alarm30 50P-2D 1st Wdg 2 Phase Inst OC Disabled Alarm31 50N-1D 1st Wdg 1 Neutral Inst OC Disabled Alarm32 50G-2D 1st Wdg 2 Ground Inst OC Disabled Alarm33 150P-1D 2nd Wdg 1 Phase Inst Disabled Alarm34 150P-2D 2nd Wdg 2 Phase Inst Disabled Alarm35 150N-1D 2nd Wdg 1 Neutral Inst Disabled Alarm36 150G-2D 2nd Wdg 2 Ground Inst Disabled Alarm37 46-1D Wdg 1 Neg Sequence Time OC Disabled Alarm38 46-2D Wdg 2 Neg Sequence Time OC Disabled Alarm


133

39 PATA Phase A LED Alarm40 PBTA Phase B LED Alarm41 PCTA Phase C LED Alarm42 PUA Pickup Alarm43 63 Sudden Pressure Input Alarm44 THRUFA Through Fault Alarm45 TFCA Through Fault Counter Alarm46 TFKA Through Fault KAmp Summation Alarm47 TFSCA Through Fault Cycle Summation Alarm48 DTC Differential Trip Counter Alarm49 OCTC Overcurrent Trip Counter Alarm50 PDA Phase Current Demand Alarm51 NDA Neutral Current Demand Alarm52 PRIM Primary Set Enabled Alarm53 ALT1 Alt1 Set Enabled Alarm54 ALT2 Alt2 Set Enabled Alarm55 STCA Settings Table Changed Alarm56 87T* Percentage Diff Sealed In Alarm57 87H* High Set Inst Diff Sealed In Alarm58 2HROA* 2nd Harmonic Restraint Sealed In Alarm59 5HROA* 5th Harmonic Restraint Sealed In Alarm60 AHROA* All Harmonic Restraint Sealed In Alarm61 51P-1* Wdg 1 Phase Time OC Sealed In Alarm62 51P-2* Wdg 2 Phase Time OC Sealed In Alarm63 50P-1* 1st Wdg1 Phase Inst OC Sealed In Alarm64 150P-1* 2nd Wdg1 Phase Inst OC Sealed In Alarm65 50P-2* 1st Wdg2 Phase Inst OC Sealed In Alarm66 150P-2* 2nd Wdg2 Phase Inst OC Sealed In Alarm67 51N-1* Wdg1 Neutral Time OC Sealed In Alarm68 51G-2* Wdg2 Ground Time OC Sealed In Alarm69 50N-1* 1st Wdg1 Neutral Inst OC Sealed In Alarm70 150N-1* 2nd Wdg1 Neutral Inst OC Sealed In Alarm71 50G-2* 1st Wdg2 Ground Inst OC Sealed In Alarm72 150G-2* 2nd Wdg2 Ground Inst OC Sealed In Alarm73 46-1* Wdg1 Neg Sequence Time OC Sealed In Alarm74 46-2* Wdg2 Neg Sequence Time OC Sealed In Alarm75 63* Sudden Pressure Input Sealed In Alarm76 ULO1 User Logical Output 177 ULO2 User Logical Output 278 ULO3 User Logical Output 379 ULO4 User Logical Output 480 ULO5 User Logical Output 581 ULO6 User Logical Output 682 ULO7 User Logical Output 783 ULO8 User Logical Output 884 ULO9 User Logical Output 985 LOADA Load Current86 OCA-1 Overcurrent Alarm, Winding 187 OCA-2 Overcurrent Alarm, Winding 288 HLDA-1 High Level Detection Alarm, Winding 189 LLDA-1 Low Level Detection Alarm, Winding 190 HLDA-2 High Level Detection Alarm, Winding 291 LLDA-2 Low Level Detection Alarm, Winding 292 HPFA High Power Factor Alarm93 LPFA Low Power Factor Alarm94 VarDA Three Phase kVar Demand Alarm95 PVArA Positive 3 Phase kiloVAr Alarm96 NVArA Negative 3 Phase kiloVAr Alarm97 PWatt1 Positive Watt Alarm 1


134

98 PWatt2 Positive Watt Alarm 2

Msg byte Definition1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1)1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x461/3 Total Number of Messages = 142/1 spare (bits 24-31)2/2 spare (bits 16-23)2/3 Programmable output AND/OR selection bits 8-153/1 Programmable output AND/OR selection bits 0-73/2 OUTPUT1 index byte3/3 OUTPUT2 index byte4/1 OUTPUT3 index byte4/2 OUTPUT4 index byte4/3 OUTPUT5 index byte5/1 OUTPUT6 index byte5/2 OUTPUT7 index byte5/3 OUTPUT8 index byte6/1 OUTPUT9 index byte6/2 OUTPUT10 index byte6/3 OUTPUT11 index byte7/1 OUTPUT12 index byte7/2 OUTPUT13 index byte7/3 OUTPUT14 index byte8/1 OUTPUT15 index byte8/2 OUTPUT16 index byte8/3 OUTPUT17 index byte9/1 OUTPUT18 index byte9/2 OUTPUT19 index byte9/3 OUTPUT20 index byte10/1 OUTPUT21 index byte10/2 OUTPUT22 index byte10/3 OUTPUT23 index byte11/1 OUTPUT24 index byte11/2 OUTPUT25 index byte11/3 OUTPUT26 index byte12/1 OUTPUT27 index byte12/2 OUTPUT28 index byte12/3 OUTPUT29 index byte13/1 OUTPUT30 index byte13/2 OUTPUT31 index byte13/3 spare14/1 spare14/2 Checksum high byte14/3 Checksum low byte

4.7 Transmit Programmable Output User Defined Strings ( 3 4 7 )

User definable 8 char output strings. Byte 9 is an implied NULL

Msg byte Definition1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1)1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x471/3 Total Number of Messages = 392/1-4/2 OUT1 Character String 8 bytes4/3-7/1 OUT2 Character String 8 bytes7/2-9/3 OUT3 Character String 8 bytes10/1-12/2 OUT4 Character String 8 bytes12/3-15/1 OUT5 Character String 8 bytes


135

15/2-17/3 OUT6 Character String 8 bytes18/1-20/2 OUT7 Character String 8 bytes20/3-23/1 spare Character String 8 bytes23/2-25/3 spare Character String 8 bytes26/1-28/2 spare Character String 8 bytes28/3-31/1 spare Character String 8 bytes31/2-33/3 spare Character String 8 bytes34/1-36/2 spare Character String 8 bytes36/3-39/1 spare Character String 8 bytes39/2 Checksum high byte39/3 Checksum low byte

4.8,9,10 Transmit Relay Settings ( 3 4 X )

( 3 4 8 ) = Primary Settings( 3 4 9 ) = Alternate 1 Settings( 3 4 10 ) = Alternate 2 Settings


Curve Selection Type I0 = Extremely Inverse1 = Very Inverse2 = Inverse3 = Short Time Inverse4 = Definite Time5 = Long Time Extremely Inverse6 = Long Time Very Inverse7 = Long Time Inverse8 = Recloser Curve9 = Disabled10 = User Curve 111 = User Curve 212 = User Curve 3

Curve Selection Type II0 = Disabled1 = Standard2 = Inverse3 = Definite Time4 = Short Time Inverse5 = Short Time Extremely Inverse6 = User Curve 17 = User Curve 28 = User Curve 3

Curve Selection Type 87T0 = Disabled1 = Percent Slope2 = HU 30%3 = HU 35%4 = Percent 15 Tap5 = Percent 25 Tap6 = Percent 40 Tap7 = User Curve 18 = User Curve 29 = User Curve 3


136

Mode Selection Type 87T0 = Disabled1 = 2nd Harmonics2 = 2nd & 5th Harmonics3 = All Harmonics

Msg byte Definition1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1)1/2 Command + Subcommand = (Prim=0x48, Alt1=0x49, Alt2=0x4a)1/3 Total Number of Messages = 252/1 87T Curve byte (Type 87T)2/2 87T Minimum I Operate (0.2-1.0 *10)2/3 87T Percent Restraint (15-60)3/1 87T Restraint Mode (Mode Selection Type 87T)3/2 87T 2nd Harmonic Restraint high byte(7.5-25 *10)3/3 87T 2nd Harmonic Restraint low byte4/1 87T 5th Harmonic Restraint high byte (15-40 *10)4/2 87T 5th Harmonic Restraint low byte4/3 87T All Harmonics Restraint high byte (15-40 *10)5/1 87T All Harmonics Restraint low byte 5/2 87H Tap X byte (6-20 *10)5/3 87T-1 Tap Amp (2-9 Amp *10, 0.4-1.8 Amp *50)6/1 51P-1 Curve Select byte (Type I)6/2 51P-1 Pickup Amp/OA (1-12 Amp *10, 0.2-2.4Amp *50)6/3 51P-1 Timedial/delay (dial 1-10 *20, delay 0-10 *20)7/1 50P-1 Curve Select byte (Type II)7/2 50P-1 Pickup X byte (0.5-20.0, *10)7/3 50P-1 Timedial/delay high byte (dial *10,delay *100)8/1 50P-1 Timedial/delay low (dial 1-10, delay 0-9.99)8/2 150P-1 Curve Select byte (Type II)8/3 150P-1 Pickup X (0.5-20, *10)9/1 150P-1 Timedial high byte (0-9.99, *100)9/2 150P-1 Timedial low byte9/3 46-1 Curve Select byte (Type I)10/1 46-1 Pickup Amp byte (1-12 Amp *10, 0.2-2.4Amp *50)10/2 46-1 Timedial/delay (dial 1-10 *20, delay 0-10 *20)10/3 51N-1 Curve Select byte (Type I)11/1 51N-1 Pickup Amp byte (1-12 Amp *10, 0.2-2.4Amp *50) 11/2 51N-1 Timedial/delay (dial 1-10 *20, delay 0-10 *20)11/3 50N-1 Curve Select byte (Type II)12/1 50N-1 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10)12/2 50N-1 Timedial/delay high byte (dial *10,delay *100)12/3 50N-1 Timedial/delay low (dial 1-10, delay 0-9.99)13/1 150N-1 Curve Select byte (Type II)13/2 150N-1 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10)13/3 150N-1 Time Delay high byte (0-9.99, *100)14/1 150N-1 Time Delay low byte14/2 87T-2 Tap Amp byte (2-9 Amp *10, 0.4-1.8 Amp *50)14/3 51P-2 Curve Select byte (Type I)15/1 51P-2 Pickup Amp/OA (1-12 Amp *10, 0.2-2.4Amp *50)15/2 51P-2 Timedial/delay (dial 1-10 *20, delay 0-10 *20)15/3 50P-2 Curve Select byte (Type II)16/1 50P-2 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10)16/2 50P-2 Timedial/delay high byte (dial *10,delay *100)16/3 50P-2 Timedial/delay low (dial 1-10, delay 0-9.99)17/1 150P-2 Curve Select byte (Type II)17/2 150P-2 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10)17/3 150P-2 Time Delay high byte (0-9.99, *100)18/1 150P-2 Time Delay low byte


137

18/2 46-2 Curve Select byte (Type I)18/3 46-2 Pickup Amp byte (1-12 Amp *10, 0.2-2.4Amp *50)19/1 46-2 Timedial/delay (dial 1-10 *20, delay 0-10 *20)19/2 51G-2 Curve Select byte (Type I)19/3 51G-2 Pickup Amp byte (1-12 Amp *10, 0.2-2.4Amp *50)20/1 51G-2 Timedial/delay (dial 1-10 *20, delay 0-10 *20)20/2 50G-2 Curve Select byte (Type II)20/3 50G-2 PickupX (0.5-20, *10)21/1 50G-2 Timedial/delay high byte (dial *10,delay *100)21/2 50G-2 Timedial/delay low (dial 1-10, delay 0-9.99)21/3 150G-2 Curve Select byte (Type II)22/1 150G-2 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10)22/2 150G-2 Time Delay high byte (0-9.99, *100)22/3 150G-2 Time Delay low byte23/1 Disturb-2 Pickup X byte (0.5-5, *10)23/2 Level Detector-1 PickupX (0.5-20, *10, 201=Disable)23/3 Level Detector-2 PickupX (0.5-20, *10, 201=Disable)24/1 spare24/2 spare24/3 spare25/1 Unit Configuration byte

bit 0 : neutral tap range Wdg1 (0=1-12A, 1=0.2-2.4A)bit 1 : phase tap range Wdg1 (0=1-12A, 1=0.2-2.4A)bit 2 : neutral tap range Wdg2 (0=1-12A, 1=0.2-2.4A)bit 3 : phase tap range Wdg2 (0=1-12A, 1=0.2-2.4A)bit 4 : user definable curvesbit 5 : Reserved for frequencybit 6 : neutral tap range Wdg3 (0=1-12A, 1=0.2-2.4A)bit 7 : phase tap range Wdg3 (0=1-12A, 1=0.2-2.4A)

25/2 Checksum high byte25/3 Checksum low byte

4.11 Transmit Configuration Settings ( 3 4 11 )


Mode Selection Type Trip Failure0 = Differential Trip1 = OC Alarm2 = Differential and OC Alarm

Mode Selection Type Demand Time Constant0 = 51 = 152 = 303 = 60

Msg byte Definition1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1)1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x4b1/3 Total Number of Messages = 212/1 Wdg1 P CT Ratio high byte (1-4000)2/2 Wdg1 P CT Ratio low byte2/3 Wdg1 N CT Ratio high byte (1-4000)3/1 Wdg1 N CT Ratio low byte3/2 Wdg2 P CT Ratio high byte (1-4000)3/3 Wdg2 P CT Ratio low byte4/1 Wdg2 G CT Ratio high byte (1-4000)


138

4/2 Wdg2 G CT Ratio low byte4/3 Winding Phase Comp high byte (0-330, /30)5/1 Winding Phase Comp low byte5/2 Wind 1 CT Config high byte (0=Wye; 1=Delta, IA-IC; 2=Delta, IA-IB)5/3 Wind 1 CT Config low byte6/1 Wind 2 CT Config high byte (0=Wye; 1=Delta, IA-IC; 2=Delta, IA-IB)6/2 Wind 2 CT Config low byte6/3 Phase Rotation high byte (0=ABC, 1=ACB)7/1 Phase Rotation low byte7/2 Alt 1 Settings high byte (0=Disable, 1=Enable)7/3 Alt 1 Settings low byte8/1 Alt 2 Settings high byte (0=Disable, 1=Enable)8/2 Alt 2 Settings low byte8/3 Trip Failure Mode high byte (Type Trip Failure)9/1 Trip Failure Mode low byte9/2 Trip Failure Time high byte (5-60)9/3 Trip Failure Time low byte

10/1 Trip Fail Dropout % PU high byte (5-90)10/2 Trip Fail Dropout % PU low byte10/3 Configuration Flag high byte

bit 8 : Cross Block Mode (0=Disable, 1=Enable)bit 9 : SPAREbit 10 : SPAREbit 11 : SPAREbit 12 : SPAREbit 13 : SPAREbit 14 : SPAREbit 15 : SPARE

11/1 Configuration Flag low bytebit 0 : OC Protect Mode (0=Fund, 1=RMS)bit 1 : Reset Mode (0=Instant 1=Delayed)bit 2 : Sparebit 3 : Target Display Mode (0=Last, 1=All)bit 4 : Local Edit (0=Disable, 1=Enable)bit 5 : Remote Edit (0=Disable, 1=Enable)bit 6 : WHr/VARHr Meter Mode (0=KWHr, 1=MWHr)bit 7 : LCD Light (0=Timer, 1=On)

11/2-16/1 Unit Name character 1-1516/2 Transformer Configuration Byte (0=Wye1-Wye2, 1=Wye1-Delta2, 2=Delta1-Wye2, 3=Delta1-

Delta2) 16/3 Demand Time Const high byte (Type Demand Time) 17/1 Demand Time Const low byte 17/2 LCD Contrast Adj high byte (0-63)

17/3 LCD Contrast Adj low byte18/1 Relay Password character 118/2 Relay Password character 218/3 Relay Password character 319/1 Relay Password character 419/2 Meter Winding Mode (0=Wdg1, 1=Wdg2, 2=Wdg3)19/3 VT Configuration (0=69VWye, 1=120VWye, 2=120V Delta, 3=208V Delta)

20/1 VT Ratio high byte (1-4500)20/2 VT Ratio low byte

20/3 Spare21/1 Spare21/2 Checksum high byte21/3 Checksum low byte


139

4.12 Transmit Counter Settings ( 3 4 12 )


Msg byte Definition1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1)1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x4c1/3 Total Number of Messages = 72/1 Through Faults high byte (0-9999)2/2 Through Faults low byte2/3 Through Fault Sum kAmp A high byte (0-9999)3/1 Through Fault Sum kAmp A low byte3/2 Through Fault kAmp B high byte (0-9999)3/3 Through Fault kAmp B low byte4/1 Through Fault kAmp C high byte (0-9999)4/2 Through Fault kAmp C low byte4/3 Thr Fault Sum Cyc high byte (0-99990)5/1 Thr Fault Sum Cyc low byte5/2 Overcurrent Trips high byte (0-9999)5/3 Overcurrent Trips low byte6/1 Differential Trips high byte (0-9999)6/2 Differential Trips low byte6/3 Spare7/1 Spare7/2 Checksum high byte7/3 Checksum low byte

4.13 Transmit Alarm Settings ( 3 4 13 )


Msg byte Definition1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1)1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x4d1/3 Total Number of Messages = 172/1 Through Faults high byte (0-9999)2/2 Through Faults low byte2/3 Through Fault Sum kAmp high byte (0-9999)3/1 Through Fault Sum kAmp low byte3/2 Through Fault Sum Cyc high byte (0-99990)3/3 Through Fault Sum Cyc low byte4/1 Overcurrent Trips high byte (0-9999)4/2 Overcurrent Trips low byte4/3 Differential Trips high byte (0-9999)5/1 Differential Trips low byte5/2 Phase Demand high byte (1-9999)5/3 Phase Demand low byte6/1 Neutral Demand high byte (1-9999)6/2 Neutral Demand low byte6/3 Load Current Alarm high byte (1 to 9999)7/1 Load Current Alarm low byte7/2 Phase Demand Alarm high byte (1-9999,10000=Disables)7/3 Phase Demand Alarm low byte8/1 Low PF Alarm high byte(0.5-1.0 *100, 101=Disables)8/2 Low PF Alarm low byte


140

8/3 High PF Alarm high byte(0.5-1.0 *100, 101=Disables)9/1 High Pf Alarm low byte9/2 Positive kVAR Alarm high byte (10-99990 / 10,10000=Disable)9/3 Positive kVAR Alarm low byte10/1 Negative kVAR Alarm high byte (10-99990 /10,10000=Disable)10/2 Negative kVAR Alarm high byte10/3 Pos Watt Alarm 1 high byte (1-9999, 10000=Disable)11/1 Pos Watt Alarm 1 low byte11/2 Pos Watt Alarm 2 high byte (1-9999, 10000=Disable)11/3 Pos Watt Alarm 2 low byte12/1 Spare12/2 Spare12/3 Spare13/1 Spare13/2 Spare13/3 Spare14/1 Spare14/2 Spare14/3 Spare15/1 Spare15/2 Spare15/3 Spare16/1 Spare16/2 Spare16/3 Spare17/1 Spare17/2 Checksum high byte17/3 Checksum low byte

4.14 Transmit Real Time Clock ( 3 4 14 )

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x4e 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 4 2/1 Hours byte (0-23) 2/2 Minutes byte (0-59) 2/3 Seconds byte (0-59) 3/1 Day byte (0-31), (0=Shutdown Clock) 3/2 Month byte (1-12) 3/3 Year byte (0-99) 4/1 Spare 4/2 Checksum high byte 4/3 Checksum low byte

4.15 Transmit Programmable Output Delays ( 3 4 15 )

Msg Byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x4f 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 8 2/1 OUT 5 delay high byte (0.00-60, *100) 2/2 OUT 5 delay low byte 2/3 OUT 7 delay high byte (0.00-60, *100) 3/1 OUT 7 delay low byte

3/2 OUT 4 delay high byte (0.00-60, *100) 3/3 OUT 4 delay low byte 4/1 OUT 6 delay high byte (0.00-60, *100) 4/2 OUT 6 delay low byte


141

4/3 OUT 3 delay high byte (0.00-60, *100) 5/1 OUT 3 delay low byte 5/2 OUT 2 delay high byte (0.00-60, *100) 5/3 OUT 2 delay low byte

6/1 OUT 1 delay high byte (0.00-60, *100) 6/2 OUT 1 delay low byte 6/3 Spare 7/1 Spare 7/2 Spare 7/3 Spare 8/1 Spare 8/2 Checksum high byte 8/3 Checksum low byte


When n=0 then the previous Receive Number command would define the number "N". Otherwise this command would takethe number "N" defined by the subcmd field (1 - 15 ).

N Definition0 Reserved for repeat 3 5 n1 Show Wdg 1 & 2 Load Metered Data2 Show Demand Currents Data3 Show Max Demand Currents Data4 Show Min Demand Currents Data5 Show Magnitudes Load Meter Data6 Show Average Load Current7 Show Wdg 1 & 2 Differential Meter Data8 Send First Fault Record9 Send Next Fault Record10 Not used11 Not used12 Send First Operation Record13 Send Next Operation Record14 Breaker Status (including contact inputs)15 Power Fail Data

5.1 Show Wdg 1 & 2 Load Metered Data ( 3 5 1 )

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x51 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 29 2/1 Aux. Status byte (Meter Mode)

Bits 0 & 1 : 0=Winding1; 1=Winding2; 2=Winding3 Bit 2 : 0 = Wye PTs; 1 = Delta PTs Bit 3 : 0 = kWhr; 1 = MWhr

2/2 IA-1 Hi byte (Load Currents) 2/3 IA-1 Mid byte 3/1 IA-1 Lo byte 3/2 IA-1 Angle Hi byte 3/3 IA-1 Angle Lo byte 4/1 IB-1 Hi byte 4/2 IB-1 Mid byte 4/3 IB-1 Lo byte 5/1 IB-1 Angle Hi byte 5/2 IB-1 Angle Lo byte 5/3 IC-1 Hi byte 6/1 IC-1 Mid byte


142

6/2 IC-1 Lo byte 6/3 IC-1 Angle Hi byte 7/1 IC-1 Angle Lo byte 7/2 IN-1 Hi byte 7/3 IN-1 Mid byte 8/1 IN-1 Lo byte 8/2 IN-1 Angle Hi byte 8/3 IN-1 Angle Lo byte 9/1 I0-1 (Mag) Hi byte 9/2 I0-1 (Mag) Mid byte 9/3 I0-1 (Mag) Lo byte 10/1 I0-1 Angle Hi byte 10/2 I0-1 Angle Lo byte 10/3 I1-1 (Mag) Hi byte 11/1 I1-1 (Mag) Mid byte 11/2 I1-1 (Mag) Lo byte 11/3 I1-1 Angle Hi byte

12/1 I1-1 Angle Lo byte 12/2 I2-1 (Mag) Hi byte

12/3 I2-1 (Mag) Mid byte 13/1 I2-1 (Mag) Lo byte 13/2 I2-1 Angle Hi byte 13/3 I2-1 Angle Lo byte 14/1 IA-2 Hi byte 14/2 IA-2 Mid byte 14/3 IA-2 Lo byte 15/1 IA-2 Angle Hi byte 15/2 IA-2 Angle Hi byte 15/3 IB-2 Hi byte 16/1 IB-2 Mid byte 16/2 IB-2 Lo byte 16/3 IB-2 Angle Hi byte 17/1 IB-2 Angle Lo byte 17/2 IC-2 Hi byte 17/3 IC-2 Mid byte 18/1 IC-2 Lo byte 18/2 IC-2 Angle Hi byte 18/3 IC-2 Angle Lo byte 19/1 IG-2 Hi byte 19/2 IG-2 Mid byte 19/3 IG-2 Lo byte 20/1 IG-2 Angle Hi byte 20/2 IG-2 Angle Lo byte 20/3 I0-2 (Mag) Hi byte 21/1 I0-2 (Mag) Mid byte 21/2 I0-2 (Mag) Lo byte 21/3 I0-2 Angle Hi byte 22/1 I0-2 Angle Lo byte 22/2 I1-2 (Mag) Hi byte 22/3 I1-2 (Mag) Mid byte 23/1 I1-2 (Mag) Lo byte 23/2 I1-2 Angle Hi byte 23/3 I1-2 Angle Lo byte 24/1 I2-2 (Mag) Hi byte 24/2 I2-2 (Mag) Mid byte 24/3 I2-2 (Mag) Lo byte 25/1 I2-2 Angle Hi byte 25/2 I2-2 Angle Lo byte 25/3 Spare


143

26/1-29/3 Reserved for Tap Changer Position

5.2 Show Demand Currents Data ( 3 5 2 )

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x52 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 6 2/1 Aux. Status byte (see command 3 5 1, msg 2/1) 2/2 Demand Ia Hi byte (Load Currents) 2/3 Demand Ia Mid byte 3/1 Demand Ia Lo byte 3/2 Demand Ib Hi byte 3/3 Demand Ib Mid byte 4/1 Demand Ib Lo byte 4/2 Demand Ic Hi byte 4/3 Demand Ic Mid byte 5/1 Demand Ic Lo byte 5/2 Demand In/Ig Hi byte 5/3 Demand In/Ig Mid byte 6/1 Demand In/Ig Lo byte 6/2 Spare 6/3 Spare

5.3 Show Maximum Demand Currents Data ( 3 5 3 )

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x53 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 12 2/1 Aux. Status byte (see command 3 5 1, msg 2/1) 2/2 Max Dem Ia Hi byte (Load Currents) 2/3 Max Dem Ia Mid byte 3/1 Max Dem Ia Lo byte 3/2 Max Dem Ia time yy 3/3 Max Dem Ia time mn 4/1 Max Dem Ia time dd 4/2 Max Dem Ia time hh 4/3 Max Dem Ia time mm 5/1 Max Dem Ib Hi byte 5/2 Max Dem Ib Mid byte 5/3 Max Dem Ib Lo byte 6/1 Max Dem Ib time yy 6/2 Max Dem Ib time mn 6/3 Max Dem Ib time dd 7/1 Max Dem Ib time hh 7/2 Max Dem Ib time mm 7/3 Max Dem Ic Hi byte 8/1 Max Dem Ic Mid byte 8/2 Max Dem Ic Lo byte 8/3 Max Dem Ic time yy 9/1 Max Dem Ic time mn 9/2 Max Dem Ic time dd 9/3 Max Dem Ic time hh 10/1 Max Dem Ic time mm 10/2 Max Dem In/Ig Hi byte 10/3 Max Dem In/Ig Mid byte 11/1 Max Dem In/Ig Lo byte 11/2 Max Dem In/Ig time yy


144

11/3 Max Dem In/Ig time mn 12/1 Max Dem In/Ig time dd

12/2 Max Dem In/Ig time hh 12/3 Max Dem In/Ig time mm

5.4 Show Minimum Demand Currents Data ( 3 5 4 )

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x53 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 12 2/1 Aux. Status byte (see command 3 5 1, msg 2/1) 2/2 Min Dem Ia Hi byte (Load Currents) 2/3 Min Dem Ia Mid byte 3/1 Min Dem Ia Lo byte 3/2 Min Dem Ia time yy 3/3 Min Dem Ia time mn 4/1 Min Dem Ia time dd 4/2 Min Dem Ia time hh 4/3 Min Dem Ia time mm 5/1 Min Dem Ib Hi byte 5/2 Min Dem Ib Mid byte 5/3 Min Dem Ib Lo byte 6/1 Min Dem Ib time yy 6/2 Min Dem Ib time mn 6/3 Min Dem Ib time dd 7/1 Min Dem Ib time hh 7/2 Min Dem Ib time mm 7/3 Min Dem Ic Hi byte 8/1 Min Dem Ic Mid byte 8/2 Min Dem Ic Lo byte 8/3 Min Dem Ic time yy 9/1 Min Dem Ic time mn 9/2 Min Dem Ic time dd 9/3 Min Dem Ic time hh 10/1 Min Dem Ic time mm 10/2 Min Dem In/Ig Hi byte 10/3 Min Dem In/Ig Mid byte 11/1 Min Dem In/Ig Lo byte 11/2 Min Dem In/Ig time yy 11/3 Min Dem In/Ig time mn 12/1 Min Dem In/Ig time dd 12/2 Min Dem In/Ig time hh 12/3 Min Dem In/Ig time mm

5.5 Show Magnitudes Load Metered Data ( 3 5 5 )

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x55 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 6 2/1 Aux. Status byte (see command 3 5 1, msg 2/1) 2/2 Ia high byte (Load Currents) 2/3 Ia (mid byte) 3/1 Ia (low byte) 3/2 Ib (high byte) 3/3 Ib (mid byte) 4/1 Ib (low byte) 4/2 Ic (high byte)


145

4/3 Ic (mid byte) 5/1 Ic (low byte) 5/2 In/Ig (high byte) 5/3 In/Ig (mid byte) 6/1 In/Ig (low byte) 6/2 Spare 6/3 Spare

5.6 Show Average Load Current ( 3 5 6 )

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x56 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 3 2/1 Aux. Status byte (see command 3 5 1, msg 2/1) 2/2 Iavg (high byte) 2/3 Iavg (mid byte) 3/1 Iavg (low byte) 3/2 Spare 3/3 Spare

5.7 Show Wdg 1 & 2 Differential Metering ( 3 5 7 )

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x57 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 18 2/1 Aux. Status (see command 3 5 1, msg 2/1) 2/2 Iop A high byte (*800) 2/3 Iop A low byte 3/1 Iop B high byte (*800) 3/2 Iop B low byte 3/3 Iop C high byte (*800) 4/1 Iop C low byte 4/2 IresA-1 high byte (*800) 4/3 IresA-1 low byte 5/1 IresA-1 Angle high byte 5/2 IresA-1 Angle low byte 5/3 IresB-1 high byte (*800) 6/1 IresB-1 low byte 6/2 IresB-1 Angle high byte 6/3 IresB-1 Angle low byte 7/1 IresC-1 high byte (*800) 7/2 IresC-1 low byte 7/3 IresC-1 Angle high byte 8/1 IresC-1 Angle low byte 8/2 IresA-2 high byte (*800) 8/3 IresA-2 low byte 9/1 IresA-2 Angle high byte 9/2 IresA-2 Angle low byte 9/3 IresB-2 high byte (*800) 10/1 IresB-2 low byte 10/2 IresB-2 Angle high byte 10/3 IresB-2 Angle low byte 11/1 IresC-2 high byte (*800) 11/2 IresC-2 low byte 11/3 IresC-2 Angle high byte 12/1 IresC-2 Angle low byte 12/2 2nd Harmonic % A-1 byte (*2)


146

12/3 2nd Harmonic % B-1 byte (*2) 13/1 2nd Harmonic % C-1 byte (*2) 13/2 2nd Harmonic % A-2 byte (*2) 13/3 2nd Harmonic % B-2 byte (*2) 14/1 2nd Harmonic % C-2 byte (*2) 14/2 5th Harmonic % A-1 byte (*2) 14/3 5th Harmonic % B-1 byte (*2) 15/1 5th Harmonic % C-1 byte (*2) 15/2 5th Harmonic % A-2 byte (*2) 15/3 5th Harmonic % B-2 byte (*2) 16/1 5th Harmonic % C-2 byte (*2) 16/2 All Harmonics % A-1 byte (*2) 16/3 All Harmonics % B-1 byte (*2) 17/1 All Harmonics % C-1 byte (*2) 17/2 All Harmonics % A-2 byte (*2) 17/3 All Harmonics % B-2 byte (*2) 18/1 All Harmonics % C-2 byte (*2) 18/2 Winding 1 Tap (*10) 18/3 Winding 2 Tap (*10)

5.8 Send First Differential Fault Record ( 3 5 8 )

The Differential Fault Record command returns data in two parts. This command requires a data byte message to indicatewhich part of the record is to be returned. If the data message 1/2 = 0, part 1 of the record is returned. If the data message1/2 = 1, part 2 of the record is returned.

Fault Type Definitions00 87T01 87H02 51P-103 51N-104 50P-105 50N-106 150P-107 150N-108 46-109 51P-210 51G-211 50P-212 50G-213 150P-214 150G-215 46-216 ECI-117 ECI-218 Thru Flt19 Harm Rest

Data byte 1/1 0 = Reserved for Unreported Records 1/2 0 = Send part 1 of Record, 1 = Send part 2 of Record 1/3 Checksum 1/1 + 1/2

Msg byte Definition-Part 1 of Record 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x58 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 28 2/1 Param Flag high byte 2/2 Param Flag low byte


147

2/3 Fault Type (element) 3/1 Setting 3/2 Fault Number (high byte) 3/3 Fault Number (low byte) 4/1 Year 4/2 Month 4/3 Day 5/1 Hours 5/2 Minutes 5/3 Seconds 6/1 Hundredths of seconds 6/2 Clear Time Hi byte (*1000) 6/3 Clear Time Lo byte 7/1 Winding1 Tap Hi byte (*10) 7/2 Winding1 Tap Lo byte 7/3 Winding2 Tap Hi byte (*10) 8/1 Winding2 Tap Lo byte 8/2 I operate A Hi byte (*800) 8/3 I operate A Lo byte 9/1 I operate B Hi byte (*800) 9/2 I operate B Lo byte 9/3 I operate C Hi byte (*800) 10/1 I operate C Lo byte 10/2 I restraint A-1 Hi byte (*800) 10/3 I restraint A-1 Lo byte 11/1 I restraint B-1 Hi byte (*800) 11/2 I restraint B-1 Lo byte 11/3 I restraint C-1 Hi byte (*800) 12/1 I restraint C-1 Lo byte 12/2 I restraint A-2 Hi byte (*800) 12/3 I restraint A-2 Lo byte 13/1 I restraint B-2 Hi byte (*800) 13/2 I restraint B-2 Lo byte 13/3 I restraint C-2 Hi byte (*800) 14/1 I restraint C-2 Lo byte 14/2 2nd Harmonic A-1 (*2) 14/3 5th Harmonic A-1 (*2) 15/1 All Harmonics A-1 (*2) 15/2 2nd Harmonic B-1 (*2) 15/3 5th Harmonic B-1 (*2) 16/1 All Harmonics B-1 (*2) 16/2 2nd Harmonic C-1 (*2) 16/3 5th Harmonic C-1 (*2) 17/1 All Harmonics C-1 (*2) 17/2 2nd Harmonic A-2 (*2) 17/3 5th Harmonic A-2 (*2) 18/1 All Harmonics A-2 (*2) 18/2 2nd Harmonic B-2 (*2) 18/3 5th Harmonic B-2 (*2) 19/1 All Harmonic B-2 (*2) 19/2 2nd Harmonic C-2 (*2) 19/3 5th Harmonic C-2 (*2) 20/1 All Harmonic C-2 (*2) 20/2 I restraint A-1 (Ang) Hi byte 20/3 I restraint A-1 (Ang) Lo byte 21/1 I restraint B-1 (Ang) Hi byte 21/2 I restraint B-1 (Ang) Lo byte 21/3 I restraint C-1 (Ang) Hi byte 22/1 I restraint C-1 (Ang) Lo byte


148

22/2 I restraint A-2 (Ang) Hi byte 22/3 I restraint A-2 (Ang) Lo byte 23/1 I restraint B-2 (Ang) Hi byte 23/2 I restraint B-2 (Ang) Lo byte 23/3 I restraint C-2 (Ang) Hi byte 24/1 I restraint C-2 (Ang) Lo byte 24/2 Spare 24/3 Spare 25/1 Spare 25/2 Spare 25/3 Spare 26/1 Spare 26/2 Spare 26/3 Spare 27/1 Spare 27/2 Spare 27/3 Spare 28/1 Spare 28/2 Spare 28/3 Spare

Data byte See previous

Msg byte Definition-Part 2 of Record 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x58 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 28 2/1 Param Flag high byte 2/2 Param Flag low byte 2/3 Fault Type (element) 3/1 Setting 3/2 Fault Number (high byte) 3/3 Fault Number (low byte) 4/1 Year 4/2 Month 4/3 Day 5/1 Hours 5/2 Minutes 5/3 Seconds 6/1 Hundredths of seconds 6/2 Clear Time Hi byte (*1000) 6/3 Clear Time Lo byte 7/1 I A-1 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 7/2 I A-1 low byte 7/3 I B-1 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 8/1 I B-1 low byte 8/2 I C-1 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 8/3 I C-1 low byte

9/1 I N-1 high byte (*800 / Neutral Wdg1 Scale) 9/2 I N-1 low byte 9/3 I A-2 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 10/1 I A-2 low byte 10/2 I B-2 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 10/3 I B-2 low byte 11/1 I C-2 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 11/2 I C-2 low byte 11/3 I G-2 high byte (*800 / Ground Wdg2 Scale) 12/1 I G-2 low byte


149

12/2 Spare 12/3 I A-1 (ang) high byte 13/1 I A-1 (ang) low byte 13/2 I B-1 (ang) high byte 13/3 I B-1 (ang) low byte 14/1 I C-1 (ang) high byte 14/2 I C-1 (ang) low byte 14/3 I N-1 (ang) high byte 15/1 I N-1 (ang) low byte 15/2 I A-2 (ang) high byte 15/3 I A-2 (ang) low byte 16/1 I B-2 (ang) high byte 16/2 I B-2 (ang) low byte 16/3 I C-2 (ang) high byte 17/1 I C-2 (ang) low byte 17/2 I G-2 (ang) high byte 17/3 I G-2 (ang) low byte 18/1 I 0-1 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 18/2 I 0-1 low byte 18/3 I 1-1 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 19/1 I 1-1 low byte 19/2 I 2-1 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 19/3 I 2-1 low byte 20/1 I 0-2 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 20/2 I 0-2 low byte 20/3 I 1-2 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 21/1 I 1-2 low byte 21/2 I 2-2 high byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 21/3 I 2-2 low byte 22/1 I 0-1 (ang) high byte 22/2 I 0-1 (ang) low byte 22/3 I 1-1 (ang) high byte 23/1 I 1-1 (ang) low byte 23/2 I 2-1 (ang) high byte 23/3 I 2-1 (ang) low byte 24/1 I 0-2 (ang) high byte 24/2 I 0-2 (ang) low byte 24/3 I 1-2 (ang) high byte 25/1 I 1-2 (ang) low byte 25/2 I 2-2 (ang) high byte 25/3 I 2-2 (ang) low byte 26/1 Scale - Phase Wdg 1 high byte 26/2 Scale - Phase Wdg 1 low byte 26/3 Scale - Phase Wdg 2 high byte 27/1 Scale - Phase Wdg 2 low byte 27/2 Scale - Neutral Wdg 1 high byte 27/3 Scale - Neutral Wdg 1 low byte 28/1 Scale - Ground Wdg 2 high byte 28/2 Scale - Ground Wdg 2 low byte

28/3 Spare

If no fault data entry is present then send all 0s for 2/1 through 27/3.

5.9 Send Next Differential Fault Record ( 3 5 9 )

Same format as ( 3 5 8 ) except Msg 1/2 = 0x59.


150

5.12 Send First Operations Record ( 3 5 12 )

Message Number Definitions00 87T Trip01 87H Trip02 51P-1 Trip03 51N-1 Trip04 50P-1 Trip05 50N-1 Trip06 150P-1 Trip07 150N-1 Trip08 46-1 Trip09 51P-2 Trip10 51G-2 Trip11 50P-2 Trip12 50G-2 Trip13 150P-2 Trip14 150G-2 Trip15 46-2 Trip16 ECI-117 ECI-218 Thru Flt19 Harm Rest

31 Fault Clear Failed32 Fault Cleared33 Harmonic Restraint34 Manual Trip35 Manual Trip Failed40 87T Enabled41 87H Enabled42 51P-1 Enabled43 51P-2 Enabled44 51N-1 Enabled45 51G-2 Enabled46 50P-1 Enabled47 50P-2 Enabled48 50N-1 Enabled49 50G-2 Enabled50 150P-1 Enabled51 150P-2 Enabled52 150N-1 Enabled53 150G-2 Enabled54 46-1 Enabled55 46-2 Enabled56 ALT1 Input Closed57 ALT2 Input Closed58 Event Cap1 Init59 Event Cap2 Init60 Wave Cap. Init61 Trip Input Closed62 SPR Input Closed63 TCM Input Closed64 Primary Set Active65 Alt1 Set Active66 Alt2 Set Active70 Thru Flt Cntr Alm71 Thru Flt kASum Alm72 Thru Flt Cycle Alm


151

73 OC Trip Cntr Alarm74 Diff Trip Cntr Alm75 Phase Demand Alarm76 Neutral Demand Alm77 Load Current Alarm78 Trip Coil Failure79 High PF Alarm80 Low PF Alarm81 kVAR Demand Alarm82 Pos. kVAR Alarm83 Neg. kVAR Alarm84 Pos. Watt Alarm 185 Pos. Watt Alarm 290 Event Capture #191 Event Capture #292 Waveform Capture93 High Level Detection Alarm, Wdg 194 Low Level Detection Alarm, Wdg 195 High Level Detection Alarm, Wdg 296 Low Level Detection Alarm, Wdg 2100 ROM Failure101 RAM Failure102 Self Test Failed103 EEPROM Failure104 BATRAM Failure105 DSP Failure106 Control Power Fail107 Editor Access120 87T Disabled121 87H Disabled122 51P-1 Disabled123 51P-2 Disabled124 51N-1 Disabled125 51G-2 Disabled126 50P-1 Disabled127 50P-2 Disabled128 50N-1 Disabled129 50G-2 Disabled130 150P-1 Disabled131 150P-2 Disabled132 150N-1 Disabled133 150G-2 Disabled134 46-1 Disabled135 46-2 Disabled136 ALT1 Input Opened137 ALT2 Input Opened138 Event Cap1 Reset139 Event Cap2 Reset140 Wave Cap. Reset141 Trip Input Opened142 SPR Input Opened143 TCM Input Opened162 ULI1 Input Closed163 ULI1 Input Opened164 ULI2 Input Closed165 ULI2 Input Opened

166 ULI3 Input Closed167 ULI3 Input Opened

168 ULI4 Input Closed


152

169 ULI4 Input Opened170 ULI5 Input Closed171 ULI5 Input Opened

172 ULI6 Input Closed173 ULI6 Input Opened

174 ULI7 Input Closed175 ULI7 Input Opened176 ULI8 Input Closed177 ULI8 Input Opened178 ULI9 Input Closed179 ULI9 Input Opened180 CRI Input Closed181 CRI Input Opened

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x5c 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 5 2/1 Year 2/2 Month 2/3 Day 3/1 Hour 3/2 Minute 3/3 Second 4/1 Hundredths of second 4/2 Message Number 4/3 Value (if any) Hi byte 5/1 Value (if any) Lo byte 5/2 Operation Number (high byte) 5/3 Operation Number (low byte)

If the operation entry doesn’t exist then send 0’s in all the bytes 2/1 through 5/3.

5.13 Send Next Operations Record ( 3 5 13 )

Same format as ( 3 5 12 ) except Msg 1/2 = 0x5d.

5.14 Breaker Status (Including I/O Status) ( 3 5 14 )

Input status bit 0=opened, 1=closed.Output status bit 0=de-energized, 1=energized.

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x5e 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 3 2/1 Contact Input Status (high byte)

Bit 0 - Input 9 Bit 1 - Spare Bit 2 - Spare Bit 3 - Spare Bit 4 - Spare Bit 5 - Spare Bit 6 - Spare Bit 7 - Spare

2/2 Contact Input Status (low byte) Bit 0 - Input 1 Bit 1 - Input 2 Bit 2 - Input 3


153

Bit 3 - Input 4 Bit 4 - Input 5 Bit 5 - Input 6 Bit 6 - Input 7 Bit 7 - Input 8

2/3 Self Test Status (high byte) Bit 0 - DSP ROM Bit 1 - DSP Internal RAM Bit 2 - DSP External RAM Bit 3 - ADC Failure Bit 4 - DSP +/-5V Bit 5 - DSP +/-15V Bit 6 - DSP +5V Bit 7 - DSP Comm. Failure

3/1 Self Test Status (low byte) Bit 0 - CPU RAM Bit 1 - CPU EPROM Bit 2 - CPU NVRAM Bit 3 - CPU EEPROM Bit 4 - Bit 5 - Bit 6 - Bit 7 -

3/2 Output Contact Status (high byte) Bit 0 - Spare Bit 1 - Spare Bit 2 - Spare Bit 3 - Spare Bit 4 - Spare Bit 5 - Spare Bit 6 - Spare Bit 7 - Spare

3/3 Output Contact Status (low byte) Bit 0 - Trip Bit 1 - Output 1 Bit 2 - Output 2 Bit 3 - Output 3 Bit 4 - Output 4 Bit 5 - Output 5 Bit 6 - Output 6 Bit 7 - Output 7

5.15 Power Fail Data ( 3 5 15 )

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x5f 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 4 2/1 Year 2/2 Month 2/3 Day 3/1 Hour 3/2 Minute 3/3 Second 4/1 Hundredths of second 4/2 Power Fail Type

Bit 0: DC Control Bit 1: +5/+15V

4/3 Breaker Status (state)


154

6 Load Profile Commands & Records ( 3 6 n )

N Definition0 Define Load Profile Settings1 Start Load Profile Data Accumulation2 Freeze Load Profile Data3 Report Load Profile Header-All4 Report Next Load Profile Data Block5 Retransmit Last Load Profile Data Block6 Report Load Profile Header-Last7 Not in use8 Fault Record-First9 Fault Record-Next10 Restraint Record-First11 Restraint Record-Next12 Oldest Unreported Differential Record13 Oldest Unreported Through Fault Record14 Oldest Unreported Harmonic Restraint Record15 Oldest Unreported Operations Record

6.0 Load Profile Settings ( 3 6 0 )

Reserved for user configuration.

6.1 Accumulate Load Profile Data ( 3 6 1 )

6.2 Freeze Load Profile Data ( 3 6 2 )

6.3 Report Load Profile Data Header(All Data) ( 3 6 3 )

This command is used to initialize the unit to report the entire contents of the accumulated load profile.

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2-4/1 Report Column (1-9) Attribute Number 4/2 spare 4/3-9/3 Unit Id Name (16 chars)10/1-11/2 Time Tag of the first Block reporting (5 bytes :yy,mn,dd,hh,mm in order)11/3 spare12/1-12/2 Report Column 1 Attribute Scale(high, low byte)12/3-17/3 Report Column (2-9) Attribute Scale

Attr# Description Dynamic Scale0 Demand Ia 11 Demand Ib 12 Demand Ic 13 Demand In 1

6.4 Report Next Load Profile Data Block ( 3 6 4 )

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Demand Interval (5/15/30/60 Mins) 1/2-1/3 Record # (a number starting from 1 to #of blocks) 2/1 Total Number Data Bytes (1 through 126) 2/2-3/3 Time Tag of the first Block (5 bytes : hh, mm, dd, mn, yy in order)

NOTE: Different order from command 3 6 3 time stamp. 4/1-45/3 Data Blocks (up to 126 bytes of data)


155

Each data block is a two byte word that has the following bit configuration:bit 0-13 : data valuesbit 14 : sign bit (1=multiply bits 0-13 by -1)bit 15 : scale bit (0=multiply bits 0-13 by 1, 1=multiply bits 0-13 by attribute scale)

Example: Report column 1 is profiling attribute #0 (Demand kW-A) and has a dynamic scale = 122

Data word Binary pattern Scale Reported value8,000 0001111101000000 1 8,000 kW24,384 0101111101000000 -1 -8,000 kW16,776 0100000011000100 122 23,912 kW49,384 1100000011000100 -122 -23,912 kW

To obtain the reported value column from the data word, a listing for a c routine should look as follows:

long int ConvertData( unsigned short ,unsigned short );long int report_value;unsigned short intdata_word;

report_value = ConvertData( data_word ,attribute_scale);{

int scale=1;

if ( data_word & 0x4000 ) /* is sign bit set ? */{ scale = -1;}

if ( data_word & 0x8000 ) /* is scale bit set ? */{ scale *= attribute_scale;}

return( (data_word & 0x3fff) * scale );}

6.5 Retransmit the Last Load Profile Data Block ( 3 6 5 )

Same as Report Next Load Profile Data Block except its the previous data sent!

6.6 Report Load Profile Data Header(Last Data) ( 3 6 6 )

This command is used to initialize the unit to report the entire contents of the accumulated load profile.

6.8 Send First Through Fault Record (3 6 8)

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x68 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 30 2/1 Param Flag (high byte) 2/2 Param Flag (low byte) 2/3 Fault Type (element) (See Send First Differential Fault Record, command 3 5 8 for Fault Type

Definitions) 3/1 Setting 3/2 Fault Number (high byte) 3/3 Fault Number (low byte)


156

4/1 Year 4/2 Month 4/3 Day 5/1 Hours 5/2 Minutes 5/3 Seconds 6/1 Hundredths of seconds 6/2 Clear Time High byte (*1000) 6/3 Clear Time Low byte 7/1 Relay Time Most Significant Hi byte (*1000) 7/2 Relay Time Most Significant Lo byte 7/3 Relay Time Least Significant Hi byte 8/1 Relay Time Least Significant Lo byte 8/2 I A-1 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 8/3 I A-1 Lo byte 9/1 I B-1 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 9/2 I B-1 Lo byte 9/3 I C-1 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 10/1 I C-1 Lo byte 10/2 I N-1 Hi byte (*800 / Neutral Wdg1 Scale) 10/3 I N-1 Lo byte 11/1 I A-2 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 11/2 I A-2 Lo byte 11/3 I B-2 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 12/1 I B-2 Lo byte 12/2 I C-2 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 12/3 I C-2 Lo byte 13/1 I G-2 Hi byte (*800 / Ground Wdg2 Scale) 13/2 I G-2 Lo byte 13/3 Spare 14/1 I A-1 (ang) Hi byte 14/2 I A-1 (ang) Lo byte 14/3 I B-1 (ang) Hi byte 15/1 I B-1 (ang) Lo byte 15/2 I C-1 (ang) Hi byte 15/3 I C-1 (ang) Lo byte 16/1 I N-1 (ang) Hi byte 16/2 I N-1 (ang) Lo byte 16/3 I A-2 (ang) Hi byte 17/1 I A-2 (ang) Lo byte 17/2 I B-2 (ang) Hi byte 17/3 I B-2 (ang) Lo byte 18/1 I C-2 (ang) Hi byte 18/2 I C-2 (ang) Lo byte 18/3 I G-2 (ang) Hi byte 19/1 I G-2 (ang) Lo byte 19/2 I 0-1 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 19/3 I 0-1 Lo byte 20/1 I 1-1 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 20/2 I 1-1 Lo byte 20/3 I 2-1 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg1 Scale) 21/1 I 2-1 Lo byte 21/2 I 0-2 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 21/3 I 0-2 Lo byte 22/1 I 1-2 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 22/2 I 1-2 Lo byte 22/3 I 2-2 Hi byte (*800 / Phase Wdg2 Scale) 23/1 I 2-2 Lo byte 23/2 I 0-1 (ang) Hi byte


157

23/3 I 0-1 (ang) Lo byte 24/1 I 1-1 (ang) Hi byte 24/2 I 1-1 (ang) Lo byte 24/3 I 2-1 (ang) Hi byte 25/1 I 2-1 (ang) Lo byte 25/2 I 0-2 (ang) Hi byte 25/3 I 0-2 (ang) Lo byte 26/1 I 1-2 (ang) Hi byte 26/2 I 1-2 (ang) Lo byte 26/3 I 2-2 (ang) Hi byte 27/1 I 2-2 (ang) Lo byte 27/2 Scale - Phase Wdg 1 high byte 27/3 Scale - Phase Wdg 1 low byte 28/1 Scale - Phase Wdg 2 high byte 28/2 Scale - Phase Wdg 2 low byte 28/3 Scale - Neutral Wdg 1 high byte 29/1 Scale - Neutral Wdg 1 low byte 29/2 Scale - Ground Wdg 2 high byte 29/3 Scale - Ground Wdg 2 low byte 30/1 Spare 30/2 Spare 30/3 Spare

If no fault data entry is present then send all 0s for 2/1 through 30/3.

6.9 Send Next Through Fault Record (3 6 9)

Same format as ( 3 6 8 ) except Msg 1/2 = 0x69.

6.10 Send First Harmonic Restraint Record (3 6 10)

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0x6a 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 42 2/1 Param Flag (high byte) 2/2 Param Flag (low byte) 2/3 Fault Type (element) (See Send First Differential Fault Record, command 3 5 8 for Fault Type

Definitions) 3/1 Setting 3/2 Fault Number (high byte) 3/3 Fault Number (low byte) 4/1 Year 4/2 Month 4/3 Day 5/1 Hours 5/2 Minutes 5/3 Seconds 6/1 Hundredths of seconds

Values at Start 6/2 Winding 1 Tap Hi byte (*10) 6/3 Winding 1 Tap Lo byte 7/1 Winding 2 Tap Hi byte (*10) 7/2 Winding 2 Tap Lo byte 7/3 I operate A hi byte (*800) 8/1 I operate A lo byte 8/2 I operate B hi byte (*800)


158

8/3 I operate B lo byte 9/1 I operate C hi byte (*800) 9/2 I operate C lo byte 9/3 I restraint A-1 Hi byte (*800) 10/1 I restraint A-1 Lo byte 10/2 I restraint B-1 Hi byte (*800) 10/3 I restraint B-1 Lo byte 11/1 I restraint C-1 Hi byte (*800) 11/2 I restraint C-1 Lo byte 11/3 I restraint A-2 Hi byte (*800) 12/1 I restraint A-2 Lo byte 12/2 I restraint B-2 Hi byte (*800) 12/3 I restraint B-2 Lo byte 13/1 I restraint C-2 Hi byte (*800) 13/2 I restraint C-2 Lo byte 13/3 2nd Harmonic A-1 byte (*2) 14/1 5th Harmonic A-1 byte (*2) 14/2 All Harmonics A-1 byte (*2) 14/3 2nd Harmonic B-1 byte (*2) 15/1 5th Harmonic B-1 byte (*2) 15/2 All Harmonics B-1 byte (*2) 15/3 2nd Harmonic C-1 byte (*2) 16/1 5th Harmonic C-1 byte (*2) 16/2 All Harmonics C-1 byte (*2) 16/3 2nd Harmonic A-2 byte (*2) 17/1 5th Harmonic A-2 byte (*2) 17/2 All Harmonics A-2 byte (*2) 17/3 2nd Harmonic B-2 byte (*2) 18/1 5th Harmonic B-2 byte (*2) 18/2 All Harmonics B-2 byte (*2) 18/3 2nd Harmonic C-2 byte (*2) 19/1 5th Harmonic C-2 byte (*2) 19/2 All Harmonics C-2 byte (*2) 19/3 I Restraint A-1 (ang) Hi byte 20/1 I Restraint A-1 (ang) Lo byte 20/2 I Restraint B-1 (ang) Hi byte 20/3 I Restraint B-1 (ang) Lo byte 21/1 I Restraint C-1 (ang) Hi byte 21/2 I Restraint C-1 (ang) Lo byte 21/3 I Restraint A-2 (ang) Hi byte 22/1 I Restraint A-2 (ang) Lo byte 22/2 I Restraint B-2 (ang) Hi byte 22/3 I Restraint B-2 (ang) Lo byte 23/1 I Restraint C-2 (ang) Hi byte 23/2 I Restraint C-2 (ang) Lo byte

Values at End 23/3 Winding 1 Tap Hi byte (*10) 24/1 Winding 1 Tap Lo byte 24/2 Winding 2 Tap Hi byte (*10) 24/3 Winding 2 Tap Lo byte 25/1 I operate A hi byte (*800) 25/2 I operate A lo byte 25/3 I operate B hi byte (*800) 26/1 I operate B lo byte 26/2 I operate C hi byte (*800) 26/3 I operate C lo byte 27/1 I restraint A-1 Hi byte (*800) 27/2 I restraint A-1 Lo byte


159

27/3 I restraint B-1 Hi byte (*800) 28/1 I restraint B-1 Lo byte 28/2 I restraint C-1 Hi byte (*800) 28/3 I restraint C-1 Lo byte 29/1 I restraint A-2 Hi byte (*800) 29/2 I restraint A-2 Lo byte 29/3 I restraint B-2 Hi byte (*800) 30/1 I restraint B-2 Lo byte 30/2 I restraint C-2 Hi byte (*800) 30/3 I restraint C-2 Lo byte 31/1 2nd Harmonic A-1 byte (*2) 31/2 5th Harmonic A-1 byte (*2) 31/3 All Harmonics A-1 byte (*2) 32/1 2nd Harmonic B-1 byte (*2) 32/2 5th Harmonic B-1 byte (*2) 32/3 All Harmonics B-1 byte (*2) 33/1 2nd Harmonic C-1 byte (*2) 33/2 5th Harmonic C-1 byte (*2) 33/3 All Harmonics C-1 byte (*2) 34/1 2nd Harmonic A-2 byte (*2) 34/2 5th Harmonic A-2 byte (*2) 34/3 All Harmonics A-2 byte (*2) 35/1 2nd Harmonic B-2 byte (*2) 35/2 5th Harmonic B-2 byte (*2) 35/3 All Harmonics B-2 byte (*2) 36/1 2nd Harmonic C-2 byte (*2) 36/2 5th Harmonic C-2 byte (*2) 36/3 All Harmonics C-2 byte (*2) 37/1 I Restraint A-1 (ang) Hi byte 37/2 I Restraint A-1 (ang) Lo byte 37/3 I Restraint B-1 (ang) Hi byte 38/1 I Restraint B-1 (ang) Lo byte 38/2 I Restraint C-1 (ang) Hi byte 38/3 I Restraint C-1 (ang) Lo byte 39/1 I Restraint A-2 (ang) Hi byte 39/2 I Restraint A-2 (ang) Lo byte 39/3 I Restraint B-2 (ang) Hi Lo byte 40/1 I Restraint B-2 (ang) Lo Hi byte 40/2 I Restraint C-2 (ang) Hi byte 40/3 I Restraint C-2 (ang) Lo byte 41/1 Duration Most Significant Hi byte (*1000) 41/2 Duration Most Significant Lo byte 41/3 Duration Least Significant Hi byte 42/1 Duration Least Significant Lo byte 42/2 Spare 42/3 Spare

If no harmonic restraint data entry is present then send all 0s for 2/1 through 27/3.

6.11 Send Next Harmonic Restraint Record (3 6 11)

Same format as ( 3 6 10 ) except Msg 1/2 = 0x6b.

6.12 Oldest Unreported Differential Fault Record (3 6 12)

This command will report the oldest unreported differential fault record. The 3 0 4 command can be issued to determine thenumber of unreported records that exist in the unit’s queue. The issuance of the 3 6 12 command will decrement the unit’scounter by one record.


160

Unreported Command Byte0 = Get Oldest Unreported, 1 = Repeat last command

Data Byte Definition 1/1 Unreported Command Byte 1/2 Record Part Byte (0=Part 1, 1=Part 2) 1/3 Checksum 1/1 + 1/2

Msg Byte DefinitionSame format as (3 5 8) except Msg 1/2 = 0x6c.

6.13 Oldest Unreported Through Fault Record (3 6 13)

This command will report the oldest unreported through fault record. The 3 0 4 command can be issued to determine thenumber of unreported records that exist in the unit’s queue. The issuance of the 3 6 13 command will decrement the unit’scounter by one record.


Data Byte Definition 1/1 Unreported Command Byte 1/2 Reserved for Differential Record Part 1/3 Checksum 1/1 + 1/2

Msg Byte DefinitionSame format as (3 6 8) except Msg 1/2 = 0x6d.

6.14 Oldest Unreported Harmonic Restraint Record (3 6 14)

This command will report the oldest unreported harmonic restraint record. The 3 0 4 command can be issued to determinethe number of unreported records that exist in the unit’s queue. The issuance of the 3 6 14 command will decrement the unit’scounter by one record.



Msg Byte DefinitionSame format as (3 6 10) except Msg 1/2 = 0x6e.

6.15 Oldest Unreported Operations Record (3 6 15)

This command will report the oldest unreported operations record. The 3 0 4 command can be issued to determine thenumber of unreported records that exist in the unit’s queue. The issuance of the 3 6 15 command will decrement the unit’scounter by one record.




161

Msg Byte DefinitionSame format as (3 5 12) except Msg 1/2 = 0x6f.

9 Trip and Energize Commands ( 3 9 n )

N Definition0 Trip Command2 Energize Output Contact Command3 Set/Reset Outputs Command

9.0 Trip Command (3 9 0)

The TRIP command will be issued to the TPU. This command has a data message that contains the Password and a commandverification code for trip.

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0x90

9.2 Energize Output Contact Command (3 9 2)

The test output contact command will be issued to the TPU. This command has a data message that contains the Passwordand a command verification code and a 16 bit word indicating which contacts should be closed.

The output contact will be a momentary closure for the time period specified in the configuration menu for trip failure time.

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0x92 3/1 Output Contact State

Bit 0-7 - Spare 3/2 Output Contact State

Bit 0 - TRIP Bit 1 - OUT1 Bit 2 - OUT2 Bit 3 - OUT3 Bit 4 - OUT4 Bit 5 - OUT5 Bit 6 - OUT6 Bit 7 - OUT7

3/3 Output Contact State Confirmation Bit 0-7 - Spare

4/1 Output Contact State Confirmation Bit 0 - TRIP Bit 1 - OUT1 Bit 2 - OUT2 Bit 3 - OUT3 Bit 4 - OUT4 Bit 5 - OUT5


162

Bit 6 - OUT6 Bit 7 - OUT7

4/2 Checksum high byte 4/3 Checksum low byte

9.3 Set/Reset Output Contacts Command (3 9 3)

This command allows for the assertion/deassertion of the ULO1 to ULO9 logical outputs. It also provides the means to resetthe sealed in logical output contacts. Outputs denoted with an ’*’ are sealed in and can only be reset.

Bit = 0, Output Not Energized/No Change in Status.Bit = 1, Output Energized/Change in Status.

Bit Output Byte1 Output Byte2 Output Byte37 87T* 150P-1* 150G-2*6 87H* 50P-2* 46-1*5 2HROA* 150P-2* 46-2*4 5HROA* 51N-1* 63*3 AHROA* 51G-2* ULO12 51P-1* 50N-1* ULO21 51P-2* 150N-1* ULO30 50P-1* 50G-2* ULO4

Bit Output Byte4 Output Bytes5-87 ULO5 SPARE6 ULO6 SPARE5 ULO7 SPARE4 ULO8 SPARE3 ULO9 SPARE2 SPARE SPARE1 SPARE SPARE0 SPARE SPARE

Example: To send a command to clear 150G-2* and set ULO4, the following command bytes should be issued.Set/Reset Output Byte3 = 01 hexStatus Change Output Byte3 = 81 hex

This allows a change to occur for outputs in bit position 7 and 0. Note that you can only clear ’*’ (sealed in) outputs.

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0x93 3/1 Set/Reset Output Byte1 3/2 Set/Reset Output Byte2 3/3 Set/Reset Output Byte3 4/1 Set/Reset Output Byte4 4/2 Set/Reset Output Byte5 4/3 Set/Reset Output Byte6 5/1 Set/Reset Output Byte7 5/2 Set/Reset Output Byte8 5/3 Spare 6/1 Spare 6/2 Spare 6/3 Spare

7/1 Status Change Output Byte1 7/2 Status Change Output Byte2


163

7/3 Status Change Output Byte3 8/1 Status Change Output Byte4 8/2 Status Change Output Byte5 8/3 Status Change Output Byte6 9/1 Status Change Output Byte7 9/2 Status Change Output Byte8 9/3 Spare 10/1 Spare 10/2 Spare 10/3 Spare 11/1 Spare

11/2 Checksum high byte 11/3 Checksum low byte

10 Receive Buffer "N" Commands ( 3 10 n )

N Definition 0 Reserved for repeat 3 10 n 1 Communications Settings

10.1 Receive Communications Settings ( 3 10 1 )


Port configuration bytebit 0-3 = port baud rate (0=300,1=1200,2=2400,3=4800, 4=9600,5=19200,6=38400)bit 4-5 = parity (0=None,1=Odd,2=Even)bit 6 = number of data bits (0=seven,1=eight)bit 7 = number of stop bits (0=one,1=two)

Msg byte Definition1/1 Most significant high byte of password1/2 Most significant low byte of password1/3 Least significant high byte of password2/1 Least significant low byte of password2/2 Spare2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xa13/1 Unit Address high byte3/2 Unit Address low byte3/3 Front Panel RS232 configuration byte4/1 Rear Panel RS232 or INCOM configuration byte4/2 Rear Panel RS485 configuration byte4/3 Rear Panel IRIG byte 0=Disabled, 1=Enabled5/1 Spare5/2 Spare5/3 Aux Port Parameter 1 byte (0-255)6/1 Aux Port Parameter 2 byte (0-255)6/2 Aux Port Parameter 3 byte (0-255)6/3 Aux Port Parameter 4 byte (0-255)7/1 Aux Port Parameter 5 byte (0-255)7/2 Aux Port Parameter 6 byte (0-255)7/3 Aux Port Parameter 7 byte (0-255)8/1 Aux Port Parameter 8 byte (0-255)8/2 Aux Port Parameter 9 byte (0-255)8/3 Aux Port Parameter 10 byte (0-255)9/1 Aux Port Parameter Mode byte9/2 Spare9/3 Spare


164

10/1 Spare10/2 Checksum high byte10/3 Checksum low byte

11 Receive Edit Buffer "N" Commands (3 11 n)

N Definition 0 Reserved for repeat 3 11 n 1 Programmable Input Select and Index Tables 2 Programmable Input Negated AND Table 3 Programmable Input AND/OR Table 4 Programmable Input User Defined Input Names 5 Programmable Output Select Table 6 Programmable Output AND/OR Table 7 Programmable Output User Defined Output Names 8 Primary Relay Settings 9 Alternate 1 Relay Settings10 Alternate 2 Relay Settings11 Configuration Settings12 Counter Settings13 Alarm Settings14 Real Time Clock15 Output Delays

11.1 Receive Programmable Input Select and Index ( 3 11 1 )

Bit = 0, Physical Input is selected.Bit = 1, Physical Input is not selected.Low byte consists of bits 0 through 7.High byte consists of bits 8 through 15.Index byte is the offset into the TPU’s logical input structure.

Offset Definitions 00 87T Restrained Differential Trip 01 87H High Set Inst Differential Trip 02 51P-1 Wdg1 Phase Time OC Trip 03 51P-2 Wdg2 Phase Time OC Trip 04 51N-1 Wdg1 Neutral Time OC Trip 05 51G-2 Wdg2 Ground Time OC Trip 06 50P-1 1st Wdg1 Phase Inst OC Trip 07 50P-2 1st Wdg2 Phase Inst OC Trip 08 50N-1 1st Wdg1 Neutral Inst OC Trip 09 50G-2 1st Wdg2 Ground Inst OC Trip 10 150P-1 2nd Wdg1 Phase Inst OC Trip 11 150P-2 2nd Wdg2 Phase Inst OC Trip 12 150N-1 2nd Wdg1 Neutral Inst OC Trip 13 150G-2 2nd Wdg2 Ground Inst OC Trip 14 46-1 Wdg1 Neg Seq Time OC Trip 15 46-2 Wdg2 Neg Seq Time OC Trip 16 ALT1 Enables Alt 1 Settings 17 ALT2 Enables Alt 2 Settings 18 ECI1 Event-1 Capture Initiated 19 ECI2 Event-2 Capture Initiated 20 WCI Waveform Capture Initiated 21 Trip Initiates Diff Trip Output 22 SPR Sudden Pressure Input 23 TCM Trip Coil Monitoring 24 ULI1 User Logical Input 1 25 ULI2 User Logical Input 2


165

26 ULI3 User Logical Input 3 27 ULI4 User Logical Input 4 28 ULI5 User Logical Input 5 29 ULI6 User Logical Input 6 30 ULI7 User Logical Input 7 31 ULI8 User Logical Input 8 32 ULI9 User Logical Input 9 33 CRI Resets OC Trip and all Recloser Counters

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 Spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xb1 3/1 INPUT1 high byte 3/2 INPUT1 low byte 3/3 INPUT1 index byte 4/1 INPUT2 high byte 4/2 INPUT2 low byte 4/3 INPUT2 index byte 5/1 INPUT3 high byte 5/2 INPUT3 low byte 5/3 INPUT3 index byte 6/1 INPUT4 high byte 6/2 INPUT4 low byte Bit Physical Input 6/3 INPUT4 index byte --- -------------- 7/1 INPUT5 high byte 0 IN6 7/2 INPUT5 low byte 1 IN7 7/3 INPUT5 index byte 2 IN8 8/1 INPUT6 high byte 3 IN2 8/2 INPUT6 low byte 4 IN9 8/3 INPUT6 index byte 5 IN3 9/1 INPUT7 high byte 6 IN4 9/2 INPUT7 low byte 7 IN5 9/3 INPUT7 index byte 8 IN1 10/1 INPUT8 high byte 9 Reserved 10/2 INPUT8 low byte 10 Reserved 10/3 INPUT8 index byte 11 Reserved 11/1 INPUT9 high byte 12 Reserved 11/2 INPUT9 low byte 13 Reserved 11/3 INPUT9 index byte 14 Reserved 12/1 INPUT10 high byte 15 Reserved 12/2 INPUT10 low byte 12/3 INPUT10 index byte 13/1 INPUT11 high byte 13/2 INPUT11 low byte 13/3 INPUT11 index byte 14/1 INPUT12 high byte 14/2 INPUT12 low byte 14/3 INPUT12 index byte 15/1 INPUT13 high byte 15/2 INPUT13 low byte 15/3 INPUT13 index byte 16/1 INPUT14 high byte 16/2 INPUT14 low byte 16/3 INPUT14 index byte 17/1 INPUT15 high byte


166

17/2 INPUT15 low byte 17/3 INPUT15 index byte 18/1 INPUT16 high byte 18/2 INPUT16 low byte 18/3 INPUT16 index byte 19/1 INPUT17 high byte 19/2 INPUT17 low byte 19/3 INPUT17 index byte 20/1 INPUT18 high byte 20/2 INPUT18 low byte 20/3 INPUT18 index byte 21/1 INPUT19 high byte 21/2 INPUT19 low byte 21/3 INPUT19 index byte 22/1 INPUT20 high byte 22/2 INPUT20 low byte 22/3 INPUT20 index byte 23/1 INPUT21 high byte 23/2 INPUT21 low byte 23/3 INPUT21 index byte 24/1 INPUT22 high byte 24/2 INPUT22 low byte 24/3 INPUT22 index byte 25/1 INPUT23 high byte 25/2 INPUT23 low byte 25/3 INPUT23 index byte 26/1 INPUT24 high byte 26/2 INPUT24 low byte 26/3 INPUT24 index byte 27/1 INPUT25 high byte 27/2 INPUT25 low byte 27/3 INPUT25 index byte 28/1 INPUT26 high byte 28/2 INPUT26 low byte 28/3 INPUT26 index byte 29/1 INPUT27 high byte 29/2 INPUT27 low byte 29/3 INPUT27 index byte 30/1 INPUT28 high byte 30/2 INPUT28 low byte 30/3 INPUT28 index byte 31/1 INPUT29 high byte 31/2 INPUT29 low byte 31/3 INPUT29 index byte 32/1 INPUT30 high byte 32/2 INPUT30 low byte 32/3 INPUT30 index byte 33/1 INPUT31 high byte 33/2 INPUT31 low byte 33/3 INPUT31 index byte 34/1 INPUT32 high byte 34/2 INPUT32 low byte 34/3 INPUT32 index byte 35/1 Spare 35/2 Checksum high byte 35/3 Checksum low byte


167

11.2 Receive Programmable Input Negated AND ( 3 11 2 )

Bit = 0, Enabled when input is opened.Bit = 1, Enabled when input is closed.Low byte consists of bits 0 through 7.High byte consists of bits 8 through 15.

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xb2 3/1 INPUT1 high byte 3/2 INPUT1 low byte 3/3 INPUT2 high byte 4/1 INPUT2 low byte 4/2 INPUT3 high byte 4/3 INPUT3 low byte 5/1 INPUT4 high byte 5/2 INPUT4 low byte 5/3 INPUT5 high byte Bit Physical Input 6/1 INPUT5 low byte--- -------------- 6/2 INPUT6 high byte 0 IN6 6/3 INPUT6 low byte 1 IN7 7/1 INPUT7 high byte 2 IN8 7/2 INPUT7 low byte 3 IN2 7/3 INPUT8 high byte 4 IN9 8/1 INPUT8 low byte 5 IN3 8/2 INPUT9 high byte 6 IN4 8/3 INPUT9 low byte 7 IN5 9/1 INPUT10 high byte 8 IN1 9/2 INPUT10 low byte 9 Reserved 9/3 INPUT11 high byte 10 Reserved 10/1 INPUT11 low byte 11 Reserved 10/2 INPUT12 high byte 12 Reserved 10/3 INPUT12 low byte 13 Reserved 11/1 INPUT13 high byte 14 Reserved 11/2 INPUT13 low byte 15 Reserved 11/3 INPUT14 high byte 12/1 INPUT14 low byte 12/2 INPUT15 high byte 12/3 INPUT15 low byte 13/1 INPUT16 high byte 13/2 INPUT16 low byte 13/3 INPUT17 high byte 14/1 INPUT17 low byte 14/2 INPUT18 high byte 14/3 INPUT18 low byte 15/1 INPUT19 high byte 15/2 INPUT19 low byte 15/3 INPUT20 high byte 16/1 INPUT20 low byte 16/2 INPUT21 high byte 16/3 INPUT21 low byte 17/1 INPUT22 high byte 17/2 INPUT22 low byte


168

17/3 INPUT23 high byte 18/1 INPUT23 low byte 18/2 INPUT24 high byte 18/3 INPUT24 low byte 19/1 INPUT25 high byte 19/2 INPUT25 low byte 19/3 INPUT26 high byte 20/1 INPUT26 low byte 20/2 INPUT27 high byte 20/3 INPUT27 low byte 21/1 INPUT28 high byte 21/2 INPUT28 low byte 21/3 INPUT29 high byte 22/1 INPUT29 low byte 22/2 INPUT30 high byte 22/3 INPUT30 low byte 23/1 INPUT31 high byte 23/2 INPUT31 low byte 23/3 INPUT32 high byte 24/1 INPUT32 low byte 24/2 Checksum high byte 24/3 Checksum low byte

11.3 Receive Programmable Input AND/OR Select ( 3 11 3 )

Bit = 0, Selected inputs are ORed together.Bit = 1, Selected inputs are ANDed together.

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xb3 3/1 Programmable input AND/OR selection bits 24-31 3/2 Programmable input AND/OR selection bits 16-23 3/3 Programmable input AND/OR selection bits 8-15 4/1 Programmable input AND/OR selection bits 0-7 4/2 Checksum high byte 4/3 Checksum low byte

Bit Logical Input --- ------------ 0 INPUT1 1 INPUT2 . . . 27 INPUT28 28 INPUT29 29 INPUT30 30 INPUT31 31 INPUT32

11.4 Receive Programmable Input User Defined Strings ( 3 11 4 )

User definable 8 char input strings. Byte 9 is an implied NULL


169

Msg byte Definition1/1 Most significant high byte of password1/2 Most significant low byte of password1/3 Least significant high byte of password2/1 Least significant low byte of password2/2 spare2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xb43/1-5/2 IN1 Character String 8 bytes5/3-8/1 IN2 Character String 8 bytes8/2-10/3 IN3 Character String 8 bytes11/1-13/2 IN4 Character String 8 bytes13/3-16/1 IN5 Character String 8 bytes16/2-18/3 IN6 Character String 8 bytes19/1-21/2 IN7 Character String 8 bytes21/3-24/1 IN8 Character String 8 bytes24/2-26/3 IN9 Character String 8 bytes27/1-29/2 spare Character String 8 bytes29/3-32/1 spare Character String 8 bytes32/2-34/3 spare Character String 8 bytes35/1-37/2 spare Character String 8 bytes37/3-38/1 spares38/2 Checksum high byte38/3 Checksum low byte

11.5 Receive Programmable Output Select ( 3 11 5 )

Programmable Output data transferred from PC to TPU2000.

Bit = 0, Physical Output is selected.Bit = 1, Physical Output is not selected.Least significant low byte consists of bits 0 through 7.Least significant high byte consists of bits 8 through 15.Most significant low byte consists of bits 16 through 23.Most significant high byte consists of bits 24 through 31.

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xb5 3/1 Contact OUT5 most significant high byte 3/2 Contact OUT5 most significant low byte 3/3 Contact OUT5 least significant high byte 4/1 Contact OUT5 least significant low byte 4/2 Contact OUT7 most significant high byte 4/3 Contact OUT7 most significant low byte 5/1 Contact OUT7 least significant high byte 5/2 Contact OUT7 least significant low byte 5/3 Contact OUT4 most significant high byte 6/1 Contact OUT4 most significant low byte 6/2 Contact OUT4 least significant high byte 6/3 Contact OUT4 least significant low byte 7/1 Contact OUT6 most significant high byte 7/2 Contact OUT6 most significant low byte 7/3 Contact OUT6 least significant high byte 8/1 Contact OUT6 least significant low byte


170

8/2 Contact OUT3 most significant high byte 8/3 Contact OUT3 most significant low byte 9/1 Contact OUT3 least significant high byte 9/2 Contact OUT3 least significant low byte 9/3 Contact OUT2 most significant high byte 10/1 Contact OUT2 most significant low byte 10/2 Contact OUT2 least significant high byte 10/3 Contact OUT2 least significant low byte 11/1 Contact OUT1 most significant high byte 11/2 Contact OUT1 most significant low byte 11/3 Contact OUT1 least significant high byte 12/1 Contact OUT1 least significant low byte 12/2-22/1 spare 22/2 Checksum high byte 22/3 Checksum low byte

Bit Logical Output --- -------------- 0 TRIP 1 OUTPUT1 2 OUTPUT2 3 OUTPUT3 . . . 30 OUTPUT29 31 OUTPUT30

11.6 Receive Programmable Output AND/OR Index ( 3 11 6 )

Bit = 0, Selected outputs are ORed together.Bit = 1, Selected outputs are ANDed together.Index byte is the offset into the TPU’s logical output structure.

Index Output Definition00 DIFF Fixed Diff Trip, 87T or 87H01 ALARM Fixed Self Check Alarm02 87T Percentage Differential Trip03 87H High Set Inst Diff Trip04 2HROA 2nd Harm Restraint Output Alarm05 5HROA 5th Harm Restraint Alarm06 AHROA All Harm Restraint Alarm07 TCFA Trip Circuit Failure Alarm08 TFA Trip Failure Alarm09 51P-1 Wdg 1 Phase Time OC Trip10 51P-2 Wdg 2 Phase Time OC Trip11 50P-1 1st Wdg 1 Phase Inst OC Trip12 150P-1 2nd Wdg 1 Phase Inst OC Trip13 50P-2 1st Wdg 2 Phase Inst OC Trip14 150P-2 2nd Wdg 2 Phase Inst OC Trip15 51N-1 Wdg 1 Neutral Time OC Trip16 51G-2 Wdg 2 Ground Time OC Trip17 50N-1 1st Wdg 1 Neutral Inst OC Trip18 150N-1 2nd Wdg 1 Neutral Inst OC Trip19 50G-2 1st Wdg 2 Ground Inst OC Trip20 150G-2 2nd Wdg 2 Ground Inst OC Trip21 46-1 Wdg 1 Neg Sequence Time OC Trip22 46-2 Wdg 2 Neg Sequence Time OC Trip23 87T-D Percentage Differential Disabled Alarm


171

24 87H-D High Set Inst Diff Disabled Alarm25 51P-1D Wdg 1 Phase Time OC Disabled Alarm26 51P-2D Wdg 2 Phase Time OC Disabled Alarm27 51N-1D Wdg 1 Neutral Time OC Disabled Alarm28 51G-2D Wdg 2 Ground Time OC Disabled Alarm29 50P-1D 1st Wdg 1 Phase Inst OC Disabled Alarm30 50P-2D 1st Wdg 2 Phase Inst OC Disabled Alarm31 50N-1D 1st Wdg 1 Neutral Inst OC Disabled Alarm32 50G-2D 1st Wdg 2 Ground Inst OC Disabled Alarm33 150P-1D 2nd Wdg 1 Phase Inst Disabled Alarm34 150P-2D 2nd Wdg 2 Phase Inst Disabled Alarm35 150N-1D 2nd Wdg 1 Neutral Inst Disabled Alarm36 150G-2D 2nd Wdg 2 Ground Inst Disabled Alarm37 46-1D Wdg 1 Neg Seq Time OC Disabled Alarm38 46-2D Wdg 2 Neg Seq Time OC Disabled Alarm39 PATA Phase A LED Alarm40 PBTA Phase B LED Alarm41 PCTA Phase C LED Alarm42 PUA Pickup Alarm43 63 Sudden Pressure Input Alarm44 THRUFA Through Fault Alarm45 TFCA Through Fault Counter Alarm46 TFKA Through Fault KAmp Summation Alarm47 TFSCA Through Fault Cycle Summation Alarm48 DTC Differential Trip Counter Alarm49 OCTC Overcurrent Trip Counter Alarm50 PDA Phase Current Demand Alarm51 NDA Neutral Current Demand Alarm52 PRIM Primary Set Enabled Alarm53 ALT1 Alt1 Set Enabled Alarm54 ALT2 Alt2 Set Enabled Alarm55 STCA Settings Table Changed Alarm56 87T* Percentage Diff Sealed In Alarm57 87H* High Set Inst Diff Sealed In Alarm58 2HROA* 2nd Harmonic Restraint Sealed In Alarm59 5HROA* 5th Harmonic Restraint Sealed In Alarm60 AHROA* All Harmonic Restraint Sealed In Alarm61 51P-1* Wdg 1 Phase Time OC Sealed In Alarm62 51P-2* Wdg 2 Phase Time OC Sealed In Alarm63 50P-1* 1st Wdg1 Phase Inst OC Sealed In Alarm64 150P-1* 2nd Wdg1 Phase Inst OC Sealed In Alarm65 50P-2* 1st Wdg2 Phase Inst OC Sealed In Alarm66 150P-2* 2nd Wdg2 Phase Inst OC Sealed In Alarm67 51N-1* Wdg1 Neutral Time OC Sealed In Alarm68 51G-2* Wdg2 Ground Time OC Sealed In Alarm69 50N-1* 1st Wdg1 Neutral Inst OC Sealed In Alarm70 150N-1*2nd Wdg1 Neutral Inst OC Sealed In Alarm71 50G-2* 1st Wdg2 Ground Inst OC Sealed In Alarm72 150G-2* 2nd Wdg2 Ground Inst OC Sealed In Alarm73 46-1* Wdg1 Neg Seq Time OC Sealed In Alarm74 46-2* Wdg2 Neg Seq Time OC Sealed In Alarm75 63* Sudden Pressure Input Sealed In Alarm76 ULO1 User Logical Output 177 ULO2 User Logical Output 278 ULO3 User Logical Output 379 ULO4 User Logical Output 480 ULO5 User Logical Output 581 ULO6 User Logical Output 682 ULO7 User Logical Output 7


172

83 ULO8 User Logical Output 884 ULO9 User Logical Output 985 LOADA Load Current86 OCA-1 Overcurrent Alarm Winding 187 OCA-2 Overcurrent Alarm Winding 288 HLDA-1 High Level Detection Alarm Winding 189 LLDA-1 Low Level Detection Alarm Winding 190 HLDA-2 High Level Detection Alarm Winding 291 LLDA-2 Low Level Detection Alarm Winding 292 HPFA High Power Factor Alarm93 LPFA Low Power Factor Alarm94 VarDA Three Phase kVar Demand Alarm95 PVArA Positive 3 Phase kiloVAr Alarm96 NVArA Negative 3 Phase kiloVAr Alarm97 PWatt1 Positive Watt Alarm 198 PWatt2 Positive Watt Alarm 2

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xb6 3/1 spare (bits 24-31) 3/2 spare (bits 16-23) 3/3 Programmable output AND/OR selection bits 8-15 4/1 Programmable output AND/OR selection bits 0-7 4/2 OUTPUT1 index byte 4/3 OUTPUT2 index byte 5/1 OUTPUT3 index byte 5/2 OUTPUT4 index byte 5/3 OUTPUT5 index byte 6/1 OUTPUT6 index byte 6/2 OUTPUT7 index byte 6/3 OUTPUT8 index byte 7/1 OUTPUT9 index byte 7/2 OUTPUT10 index byte 7/3 OUTPUT11 index byte 8/1 OUTPUT12 index byte 8/2 OUTPUT13 index byte 8/3 OUTPUT14 index byte 9/1 OUTPUT15 index byte 9/2 OUTPUT16 index byte 9/3 OUTPUT17 index byte 10/1 OUTPUT18 index byte 10/2 OUTPUT19 index byte 10/3 OUTPUT20 index byte 11/1 OUTPUT21 index byte 11/2 OUTPUT22 index byte 11/3 OUTPUT23 index byte 12/1 OUTPUT24 index byte 12/2 OUTPUT25 index byte 12/3 OUTPUT26 index byte 13/1 OUTPUT27 index byte 13/2 OUTPUT28 index byte 13/3 OUTPUT29 index byte 14/1 OUTPUT30 index byte 14/2 OUTPUT31 index byte


173

14/3 spare 15/1 spare 15/2 Checksum high byte 15/3 Checksum low byte

Bit Physical Output --- --------------- 0 not used reserved for fixed DIFF TRIP 1 Contact OUT5 2 Contact OUT7 3 Contact OUT4 4 Contact OUT6 5 Contact OUT3 6 Contact OUT2 7 Contact OUT1 8 spare 9 spare 10 spare 11 spare 12 spare 13 spare 14 spare 15 spare

11.7 Receive Programmable Output User Defined Names (3 11 7)

User definable 8 char output strings. Byte 9 is an implied NULL.

Msg byte Definition1/1 Most significant high byte of password1/2 Most significant low byte of password1/3 Least significant high byte of password2/1 Least significant low byte of password2/2 spare2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xb73/1-5/2 OUT1 Character String 8 bytes5/3-8/1 OUT2 Character String 8 bytes8/2-10/3 OUT3 Character String 8 bytes11/1-13/2 OUT4 Character String 8 bytes13/3-16/1 OUT5 Character String 8 bytes16/2-18/3 OUT6 Character String 8 bytes19/1-21/2 OUT7 Character String 8 bytes21/3-24/1 spare Character String 8 bytes24/2-26/3 spare Character String 8 bytes27/1-29/2 spare Character String 8 bytes29/3-32/1 spare Character String 8 bytes32/2-34/3 spare Character String 8 bytes35/1-37/2 spare Character String 8 bytes37/3-40/1 spare Character String 8 bytes40/2 Checksum high byte40/3 Checksum low byte

11.8,9,10 Receive Relay Settings ( 3 11 X )

( 3 11 8 ) = Primary Settings( 3 11 9 ) = Alternate 1 Settings( 3 11 10 ) = Alternate 2 Settings


174


Curve Selection Type I0 = Extremely Inverse1 = Very Inverse2 = Inverse3 = Short Time Inverse4 = Definite Time5 = Long Time Extremely Inverse6 = Long Time Very Inverse7 = Long Time Inverse8 = Recloser Curve9 = Disabled10 = User Curve 111 = User Curve 212 = User Curve 3

Curve Selection Type II0 = Disabled1 = Standard2 = Inverse3 = Definite Time4 = Short Time Inverse5 = Short Time Extremely Inverse6 = User Curve 17 = User Curve 28 = User Curve 3

Curve Selection Type 87T0 = Disabled1 = Percent Slope2 = HU 30%3 = HU 35%4 = Percent 15 Tap5 = Percent 25 Tap6 = Percent 40 Tap7 = User Curve 18 = User Curve 29 = User Curve 3

Mode Selection Type 87T0 = Disabled1 = 2nd Harmonics2 = 2nd & 5th Harmonics3 = All Harmonics

Msg byte Definition1/1 Most significant high byte of password1/2 Most significant low byte of password1/3 Least significant high byte of password2/1 Least significant low byte of password2/2 spare2/3 Command + Subcommand = (Prim=0xb8, Alt1=0xb9, Alt2=0xba)3/1 87T Curve Select byte (Type 87T)3/2 87T Min I Operate byte (0.2-1.0 *10)3/3 87T Percent Restraint byte (15-60)4/1 87T Restraint Mode byte (Mode Selection Type 87T)


175

4/2 87T 2nd Harmonic Restraint high byte (7.5-25 *10)4/3 87T 2nd Harmonic Restraint low byte5/1 87T 5th Harmonic Restraint high byte (15-40 *10)5/2 87T 5th Harmonic Restraint low byte5/3 87T All Harmonics Restraint high byte (15-40 *10)6/1 87T All Harmonics Restraint low byte6/2 87H Tap X byte (6-20 *10)6/3 87T-1 Tap Amp byte (2-9 Amp *10, 0.4-1.8 Amp *50)7/1 51P-1 Curve Select byte (Type I)7/2 51P-1 Pickup Amp/OA (1-12A *10, 0.2-2.4A *50)7/3 51P-1 Timedial/delay (dial 1-10, delay 0-10, *20)8/1 50P-1 Curve Select byte (Type II)8/2 50P-1 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10)8/3 50P-1 Timedial/delay high (dial *10,delay *100)9/1 50P-1 Timedial/delay low (dial 1-10, delay 0-9.99)9/2 150P-1 Curve Select byte (Type II)9/3 150P-1 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10)10/1 150P-1 Time Delay high byte (0-9.99, *100)10/2 150P-1 Time Delay low byte10/3 46-1 Curve Select byte (Type I)11/1 46-1 Pickup Amp byte (1-12A *10, 0.2-2.4A *50)11/2 46-1 Timedial/delay (dial 1-10, delay 0-10,*20)11/3 51N-1 Curve Select byte (Type I)12/1 51N-1 Pickup Amp byte (1-12A *10, 0.2-2.4A *50)12/2 51N-1 Timedial/delay (dial 1-10, delay 0-10,*20)12/3 50N-1 Curve Select byte (Type II)13/1 50N-1 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10)13/2 50N-1 Timedial/delay high (dial *10,delay *100)13/3 50N-1 Timedial/delay low (dial 1-10, delay 0-9.99)14/1 150N-1 Curve Select byte (Type II)14/2 150N-1 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10)14/3 150N-1 Time Delay high byte (0-9.99, *100)15/1 150N-1 Time Delay low byte15/2 87T-2 Tap Amp byte (2-9 Amp *10, 0.4-1.8 Amp *50)15/3 51P-2 Curve Select byte (Type I)16/1 51P-2 Pickup Amp/OA (1-12 Amp *10, 0.2-2.4Amp *50)16/2 51P-2 Timedial/delay (dial 1-10, delay 0-10, *20)16/3 50P-2 Curve Select byte (Type II)17/1 50P-2 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10)17/2 50P-2 Timedial/delay high (dial *10,delay *100)17/3 50P-2 Timedial/delay low (dial 1-10, delay 0-9.99)18/1 150P-2 Curve Select byte (Type II)18/2 150P-2 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10)18/3 150P-2 Time Delay high byte (0-9.99, *100)19/1 150P-2 Time Delay low byte19/2 46-2 Curve Select byte (Type I)19/3 46-2 Pickup Amp byte (1-12A *10, 0.2-2.4A *50)20/1 46-2 Timedial/delay byte (dial 1-10, delay 0-10, *20)20/2 51G-2 Curve Select byte (Type I)20/3 51G-2 Pickup Amp byte (1-12A *10, 0.2-2.4A *50)21/1 51G-2 Timedial/delay byte (dial 1-10, delay 0-10, *20)21/2 50G-2 Curve Select byte (Type II)21/3 50G-2 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10)22/1 50G-2 Timedial/delay high (dial *10,delay *100)22/2 50G-2 Timedial/delay low (dial 1-10, delay 0-9.99)22/3 150G-2 Curve Select byte (Type II)23/1 150G-2 Pickup X byte (0.5-20, *10)23/2 150G-2 Time Delay high byte (0-9.99, *100)23/3 150G-2 Time Delay low byte


176

24/1 Disturb-2 Pickup X byte (0.5-5, *10)24/2 Level Detector-1 PickupX (0.5-20, *10, 201=Disable)24/3 Level Detector-2 PickupX (0.5-20, *10, 201=Disable)25/1 spare25/2 spare25/3 spare26/1 Unit Configuration byte

bit 0 : neutral tap range Wdg1 (0=1-12A, 1=0.2-2.4A)bit 1 : phase tap range Wdg1 (0=1-12A, 1=0.2-2.4A)bit 2 : neutral tap range Wdg2 (0=1-12A, 1=0.2-2.4A)bit 3 : phase tap range Wdg2 (0=1-12A, 1=0.2-2.4A)bit 4 : user definable curvesbit 5 : Reserved for frequencybit 6 : neutral tap range Wdg3 (0=1-12A, 1=0.2-2.4A)bit 7 : phase tap range Wdg3 (0=1-12A, 1=0.2-2.4A)

26/2 Checksum high byte26/3 Checksum low byte

11.11 Receive Configuration Settings ( 3 11 11 )


Mode Selection Type Trip Failure0 = Differential Trip1 = OC Alarm2 = Differential and OC Alarm

Mode Selection Type Demand Time Constant0 = 51 = 152 = 303 = 60

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xbb 3/1 Wdg1 P CT Ratio high byte (1-2000) 3/2 Wdg1 P CT Ratio low byte 3/3 Wdg1 N CT Ratio high byte (1-2000) 4/1 Wdg1 N CT Ratio low byte 4/2 Wdg2 P CT Ratio high byte (1-2000) 4/3 Wdg2 P CT Ratio low byte 5/1 Wdg2 G CT Ratio high byte (1-2000) 5/2 Wdg2 G CT Ratio low byte 5/3 Winding Phase Comp high byte (0-330, /30) 6/1 Winding Phase Comp low byte 6/2 Wind1 CT Config high byte (0=Wye; 1=Delta, IA-IC; 2=Delta, IA-IB) 6/3 Wind1 CT Config low byte 7/1 Wind2 CT Config high byte (0=Wye; 1=Delta, IA-IC; 2=Delta, IA-IB) 7/2 Wind2 CT Config low byte 7/3 Phase Rotation high byte (0=ABC, 1=ACB) 8/1 Phase Rotation low byte 8/2 Alt 1 Settings high byte (0=Disable, 1=Enable) 8/3 Alt 1 Settings low byte


177

9/1 Alt 2 Settings high byte (0=Disable, 1=Enable) 9/2 Alt 2 Settings low byte 9/3 Trip Failure Mode high byte (Type Trip Failure) 10/1 Trip Failure Mode low byte 10/2 Trip Failure Time high byte (5-60) 10/3 Trip Failure Time low byte 11/1 Trip Fail Dropout % PU high byte (5-90) 11/2 Trip Fail Dropout % PU low byte 11/3 Configuration Flag high byte

bit 8 : Cross Block Mode (0=Disable, 1=Enable)bit 9 : SPAREbit 10 : SPAREbit 11 : SPAREbit 12 : SPAREbit 13 : SPAREbit 14 : SPAREbit 15 : SPARE

12/1 Configuration Flag low bytebit 0 : OC Protect Mode (0=Fund, 1=RMS)bit 1 : Reset Mode (0=Instant 1=Delayed)bit 2 : Sparebit 3 : Target Display Mode (0=Last, 1=All)bit 4 : Local Edit (0=Disable, 1=Enable)bit 5 : Remote Edit (0=Disable, 1=Enable)bit 6 : WHr/VARHr Meter Mode (0=KWHr, 1=MWHr)bit 7 : LCD Light (0=Timer, 1=On)

12/2 Unit Name character 1 12/3 Unit Name character 2 13/1 Unit Name character 3 13/2 Unit Name character 4 13/3 Unit Name character 5 14/1 Unit Name character 6 14/2 Unit Name character 7 14/3 Unit Name character 8 15/1 Unit Name character 9 15/2 Unit Name character 10 15/3 Unit Name character 11 16/1 Unit Name character 12 16/2 Unit Name character 13 16/3 Unit Name character 14 17/1 Unit Name character 15 17/2 Transformer Configuration Byte (0=Wye1-Wye2, 1=Wye1-Delta2, 2=Delta1-Wye2, 3=Delta1-Delta2) 17/3 Demand Time Const high byte (Type Demand Time) 18/1 Demand Time Const low byte 18/2 LCD Contrast Adjustment high byte (0-63) 18/3 LCD Contrast Adjustment low byte 19/1 Relay Password character 1 19/2 Relay Password character 2 19/3 Relay Password character 3 20/1 Relay Password character 4 20/2 Meter Winding Mode (0=Wdg1, 1=Wdg2, 2=Wdg3) 20/3 VT Configuration (0=69VWye, 1=120VWye, 2=120V Delta, 3=208V Delta)

21/1 VT Ratio high byte (1-2000) 21/2 VT Ratio low byte 21/3 spare 22/1 spare 22/2 Checksum high byte 22/3 Checksum low byte


178

11.12 Receive Counter Settings ( 3 11 12 )


Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xbc 3/1 Through Faults Counter high byte (0-9999) 3/2 Through Faults Counter low byte 3/3 Thr Fault Sum kAmp A Counter high byte (0-9999) 4/1 Thr Fault Sum kAmp A Counter low byte 4/2 Through Fault Sum Cyc Counter high byte (0-99990) 4/3 Through Fault Sum Cyc Counter low byte 5/1 Overcurrent Trips Counter high byte (0-9999) 5/2 Overcurrent Trips Counter low byte 5/3 Differential Trips Counter high byte (0-9999) 6/1 Differential Trips Counter low byte 6/2 Thr Fault Sum kAmp B Counter high byte (0-9999) 6/3 Thr Fault Sum kAmp B Counter low byte 7/1 Thr Fault Sum kAmp C Counter high byte (0-9999) 7/2 Thr Fault Sum kAmp C Counter low byte 7/3 Spare 8/1 Spare 8/2 Checksum high byte 8/3 Checksum low byte

11.13 Receive Alarm Settings ( 3 11 13 )


Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xbd 3/1 Through Faults Alarm Threshold high byte (0-9999) 3/2 Through Faults Alarm Threshold low byte 3/2 Through Fault Sum kAmp Alarm Thres high (0-9999) 4/1 Through Fault Sum kAmp Alarm Threshold low byte 4/2 Through Fault Sum Cyc Alarm high (0-99990, /10) 4/3 Through Fault Sum Cyc Alarm Threshold low byte 5/1 Overcurrent Trips Alarm high byte (0-9999) 5/2 Overcurrent Trips Alarm low byte 5/3 Differential Trips Alarm high byte (0-9999) 6/1 Differential Trips Alarm low byte 6/2 Phase Demand Alarm high byte (1-9999) 6/3 Phase Demand Alarm low byte 7/1 Neutral Demand Alarm high byte (1-9999) 7/2 Neutral Demand Alarm low byte 7/3 Load Alarm high byte (1-9999)


179

8/1 Load Alarm low byte 8/2 Phase Demand Alarm high byte (1-9999,10000=Disables) 8/3 Phase Demand Alarm low byte 9/1 Low PF Alarm high byte(0.5-1.0 *100, 101=Disables) 9/2 Low PF Alarm low byte 9/3 High PF Alarm high byte(0.5-1.0 *100, 101=Disables) 10/1 High Pf Alarm low byte 10/2 Positive kVAR Alarm high byte (10-99990 / 10,10000=Disable)

10/3 Positive kVAR Alarm low byte 11/1 Negative kVAR Alarm high byte (10-99990 /10,10000=Disable) 11/2 Negative kVAR Alarm high byte 11/3 Pos Watt Alarm 1 high byte (1-9999, 10000=Disable) 12/1 Pos Watt Alarm 1 low byte 12/2 Pos Watt Alarm 2 high byte (1-9999, 10000=Disable) 12/3 Pos Watt Alarm 2 low byte 13/1 Spare 13/2 Spare 13/3 Spare 14/1 Spare 14/2 Spare 14/3 Spare 15/1 Spare 15/2 Spare 15/3 Spare 16/1 Spare 16/2 Spare 16/3 Spare 17/1 Spare 17/2 Spare 17/3 Spare 18/1 Spare 18/2 Checksum high byte 18/3 Checksum low byte

11.14 Receive Real Time Clock ( 3 11 14 )

Msg byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xbe 3/1 Hours byte (0-23) 3/2 Minutes byte (0-59) 3/3 Seconds byte (0-59) 4/1 Day byte (0-31), (0=Shutdown Clock) 4/2 Month byte (1-12) 4/3 Year byte (0-99) 5/1 spare 5/2 Checksum high byte 5/3 Checksum low byte

11.15 Receive Programmable Output Delays ( 3 11 15 )

Msg Byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password


180

2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 Spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xbf 3/1 OUT 5 delay high byte (0.00-60, *100) 3/2 OUT 5 delay low byte 3/3 OUT 7 delay high byte (0.00-60, *100) 4/1 OUT 7 delay low byte

4/2 OUT 4 delay high byte (0.00-60, *100) 4/3 OUT 4 delay low byte 5/1 OUT 6 delay high byte (0.00-60, *100) 5/2 OUT 6 delay low byte 5/3 OUT 3 delay high byte (0.00-60, *100) 6/1 OUT 3 delay low byte 6/2 OUT 2 delay high byte (0.00-60, *100) 6/3 OUT 2 delay low byte

7/1 OUT 1 delay high byte (0.00-60, *100) 7/2 OUT 1 delay low byte 7/3 Spare 8/1 Spare 8/2 Spare 8/3 Spare 9/1 Spare 9/2 Checksum high byte 9/3 Checksum low byte

13 Programmable Curve Commands ( 3 13 n )

N Definition0 Reserved for repeat 3 13 n1 Receive Overcurrent Curve Parameters2 Receive First Overcurrent Curve Data Set3 Receive Next Overcurrent Curve Data Set4 Receive Overcurrent Curve Pointer Table5 Send Overcurrent Curve Parameters6 Send Overcurrent Curve Data Set7 Send Overcurrent Curve Pointer Table8 Receive Differential Curve Parameters9 Receive First Differential Curve Data Set10 Receive Next Differential Curve Data Set11 Send Differential Curve Parameters12 Send Differential Curve Data Set

13.1 Receive Overcurrent Curve Parameters ( 3 13 1 )

For the unit to receive the overcurrent curve data, the following sequence of commands must be issued:

3 13 1 (Curve Parameters)3 13 2 (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block 03 13 3 (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block 13 13 3 (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block 23 13 3 (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block 33 13 3 (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block 43 13 3 (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block 53 13 3 (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block 63 13 4 (60 Pointer Offsets)

Data Byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password


181

1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 Spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xd1 3/1 Programmable curve number

User Programmable Curve number: 1=User 1; 2=User 2; 3=User 3 3/2 Coefficient A (high high byte) 3/3 Coefficient A | 4/1 Coefficient A | 4/2 Coefficient A (low low byte) 4/3 Coefficient B (high byte) 5/1 Coefficient B | 5/2 Coefficient B | 5/3 Coefficient B (low byte) 6/1 Coefficient C (high byte) 6/2 Coefficient C | 6/3 Coefficient C | 7/1 Coefficient C (low byte) 7/2 Coefficient P (high byte) 7/3 Coefficient P | 8/1 Coefficient P | 8/2 Coefficient P (low byte) 8/3 Spare 9/1 Spare 9/2 Checksum (high byte) 9/3 Checksum (low byte)

13.2 Receive First Overcurrent Curve Data Set ( 3 13 2 )

Data Byte Definition1/1 Most significant high byte of password1/2 Most significant low byte of password1/3 Least significant high byte of password2/1 Least significant low byte of password2/2 Spare2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xd23/1 Programmable curve number

User Programmable Curve number: 1=User 1; 2=User 2; 3=User 33/2 Segment 0: Endrange (high byte)3/3 Segment 0: Endrange (low byte)4/1 Segment 0: Alpha (high byte)4/2 Segment 0: Alpha |4/3 Segment 0: Alpha |5/1 Segment 0: Alpha (low byte)5/2 Segment 0: Beta (high byte)5/3 Segment 0: Beta |6/1 Segment 0: Beta |6/2 Segment 0: Beta (low byte)6/3-9/3 Segment 1 (same as segment 0)10/1-14/1 Segment 2 (same as segment 0)14/2-18/2 Segment 3 (same as segment 0)18/3-22/3 Segment 4 (same as segment 0)23/1-27/1 Segment 5 (same as segment 0)27/2-31/2 Segment 6 (same as segment 0)31/3-35/3 Segment 7 (same as segment 0)

36/1 Spare 36/2 Checksum (high byte) 36/3 Checksum (low byte)


182

13.3 Receive Next Overcurrent Curve Data Set ( 3 13 3 )

Same format as ( 3 13 2 ).

13.4 Receive Overcurrent Curve Pointer Table ( 3 13 4 )

Data Byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 Spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xd4 3/1 Programmable curve number

User Programmable Curve number: 1=User 1; 2=User 2; 3=User 3 3/2 Pointer offset 0 3/3 Pointer offset 1 4/1 Pointer offset 2 4/2 Pointer offset 3 4/3 Pointer offset 4 5/1 Pointer offset 5 5/2 Pointer offset 6 5/3 Pointer offset 7 6/1 Pointer offset 8 6/2 Pointer offset 9 6/3 Pointer offset 10 7/1 Pointer offset 11 7/2 Pointer offset 12 7/3 Pointer offset 13 8/1 Pointer offset 14 8/2 Pointer offset 15 8/3 Pointer offset 16 9/1 Pointer offset 17 9/2 Pointer offset 18 9/3 Pointer offset 19 10/1 Pointer offset 20 10/2 Pointer offset 21 10/3 Pointer offset 22 11/1 Pointer offset 23 11/2 Pointer offset 24 11/3 Pointer offset 25 12/1 Pointer offset 26 12/2 Pointer offset 27 12/3 Pointer offset 28 13/1 Pointer offset 29 13/2 Pointer offset 30 13/3 Pointer offset 31 14/1 Pointer offset 32 14/2 Pointer offset 33 14/3 Pointer offset 34 15/1 Pointer offset 35 15/2 Pointer offset 36 15/3 Pointer offset 37 16/1 Pointer offset 38 16/2 Pointer offset 39 16/3 Pointer offset 40 17/1 Pointer offset 41 17/2 Pointer offset 42


183

17/3 Pointer offset 43 18/1 Pointer offset 44 18/2 Pointer offset 45 18/3 Pointer offset 46 19/1 Pointer offset 47 19/2 Pointer offset 48 19/3 Pointer offset 49 20/1 Pointer offset 50 20/2 Pointer offset 51 20/3 Pointer offset 52 21/1 Pointer offset 53 21/2 Pointer offset 54 21/3 Pointer offset 55 22/1 Pointer offset 56 22/2 Pointer offset 57 22/3 Pointer offset 58 23/1 Pointer offset 59 23/2 Spare 23/3 Spare 24/1 Spare 24/2 Spare 24/3 Spare 25/1 Spare 25/2 Spare 25/3 Spare 26/1 Spare 26/2 Checksum (high byte) 26/3 Checksum (low byte)

13.5 Send Overcurrent Curve Parameters ( 3 13 5 )

For the unit to receive the overcurrent curve data, the following sequence of commands must be issued.

3 13 5 (Curve Parameters)3 13 6 (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block 03 13 6 (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block 13 13 6 (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block 23 13 6 (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block 33 13 6 (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block 43 13 6 (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block 53 13 6 (8 Alpha-Beta segments) Block 63 13 7 (60 Pointer Offsets)

Data Byte Definition 1/1 Programmable Curve Number

User Programmable Curve number: 1=User 1; 2=User 2; 3=User 3 1/2 Programmable Curve Number

1/3 Programmable Curve Number

Msg Byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xd5

1/3 Total Number of Messages = 8 2/1 Coefficient A (high byte) 2/2 Coefficient A | 2/3 Coefficient A | 3/1 Coefficient A (low byte) 3/2 Coefficient B (high byte) 3/3 Coefficient B |


184

4/1 Coefficient B | 4/2 Coefficient B (low byte) 4/3 Coefficient C (high byte) 5/1 Coefficient C | 5/2 Coefficient C | 5/3 Coefficient C (low byte) 6/1 Coefficient P (high byte) 6/2 Coefficient P | 6/3 Coefficient P | 7/1 Coefficient P (low byte) 7/2 Spare 7/3 Spare 8/1 Spare 8/2 Checksum (high byte) 8/3 Checksum low byte)

13.6 Send Overcurrent Curve Data Set ( 3 13 6 )

Data Byte Definition 1/1 User Programmable Curve number: 1=User 1; 2=User 2; 3=User 3 1/2 Block number 1/3 Programmable curve number + Block number

Msg Byte Definition1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1)1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xd6

1/3 Total Number of Messages = 292/1 Programmable curve number

User Programmable Curve number: 1=User 1; 2=User 2; 3=User 32/2 Block number2/3 Segment 0: Endrange (high byte)3/1 Segment 0: Endrange (low byte)3/2 Segment 0: Alpha (high byte)3/3 Segment 0: Alpha |4/1 Segment 0: Alpha |4/2 Segment 0: Alpha (low byte)4/3 Segment 0: Beta (high byte)5/1 Segment 0: Beta |5/2 Segment 0: Beta |5/3 Segment 0: Beta (low byte)6/1-9/1 Segment 1 (same as segment 0)9/2-12/2 Segment 2 (same as segment 0)12/3-15/3 Segment 3 (same as segment 0)16/1-19/1 Segment 4 (same as segment 0)19/2-22/2 Segment 5 (same as segment 0)22/3-25/3 Segment 6 (same as segment 0)26/1-29/1 Segment 7 (same as segment 0)29/2 Checksum (high byte)

29/3 Checksum (low byte)

13.7 Send Overcurrent Curve Pointer Table ( 3 13 7 )

Data Byte Definition 1/1 Programmable curve number

User Programmable Curve number: 1=User 1; 2=User 2; 3=User 3 1/2 Programmable curve number 1/3 Programmable curve number


185

Msg Byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xd7

1/3 Total Number of Messages = 25 2/1 Programmable curve number

User Programmable Curve number: 1=User 1; 2=User 2; 3=User 3 2/2 Pointer offset 0 2/3 Pointer offset 1 3/1 Pointer offset 2 3/2 Pointer offset 3 3/3 Pointer offset 4 4/1 Pointer offset 5 4/2 Pointer offset 6 4/3 Pointer offset 7 5/1 Pointer offset 8 5/2 Pointer offset 9 5/3 Pointer offset 10 6/1 Pointer offset 11 6/2 Pointer offset 12 6/3 Pointer offset 13 7/1 Pointer offset 14 7/2 Pointer offset 15 7/3 Pointer offset 16 8/1 Pointer offset 17 8/2 Pointer offset 18 8/3 Pointer offset 19 9/1 Pointer offset 20 9/2 Pointer offset 21 9/3 Pointer offset 22 10/1 Pointer offset 23 10/2 Pointer offset 24 10/3 Pointer offset 25 11/1 Pointer offset 26 11/2 Pointer offset 27 11/3 Pointer offset 28 12/1 Pointer offset 29 12/2 Pointer offset 30 12/3 Pointer offset 31 13/1 Pointer offset 32 13/2 Pointer offset 33 13/3 Pointer offset 34 14/1 Pointer offset 35 14/2 Pointer offset 36 14/3 Pointer offset 37 15/1 Pointer offset 38 15/2 Pointer offset 39 15/3 Pointer offset 40 16/1 Pointer offset 41 16/2 Pointer offset 42 16/3 Pointer offset 43 17/1 Pointer offset 44 17/2 Pointer offset 45 17/3 Pointer offset 46 18/1 Pointer offset 47 18/2 Pointer offset 48 18/3 Pointer offset 49 19/1 Pointer offset 50 19/2 Pointer offset 51


186

19/3 Pointer offset 52 20/1 Pointer offset 53 20/2 Pointer offset 54 20/3 Pointer offset 55 21/1 Pointer offset 56 21/2 Pointer offset 57 21/3 Pointer offset 58 22/1 Pointer offset 59 22/2 Spare 22/3 Spare 23/1 Spare 23/2 Spare 23/3 Spare 24/1 Spare 24/2 Spare 24/3 Spare 25/1 Spare 25/2 Checksum (high byte) 25/2 Checksum (low byte)

13.8 Receive Differential Curve Parameters ( 3 13 8 )

For the unit to receive the differential curve data, the following sequence of commands must be issued:

3 13 8 (Differential Curve Parameters)3 13 9 (Operate Threshold Data Points) Block 03 13 10 (Operate Threshold Data Points) Block 13 13 10 (Operate Threshold Data Points) Block 2

Data Byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 Spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xd8 3/1 Programmable curve number (1, 2, or 3) 3/2 Coefficient A (high high byte) 3/3 Coefficient A | 4/1 Coefficient A | 4/2 Coefficient A (low low byte) 4/3 Coefficient B (high byte) 5/1 Coefficient B | 5/2 Coefficient B | 5/3 Coefficient B (low byte) 6/1 Coefficient C (high byte) 6/2 Coefficient C | 6/3 Coefficient C | 7/1 Coefficient C (low byte) 7/2 Spare 7/3 Spare 8/1 Spare 8/2 Spare 8/3 Spare 9/1 Spare 9/2 Checksum (high byte) 9/3 Checksum (low byte)


187

13.9 Receive First Differential Curve Data Set ( 3 13 9 )

Data Byte Definition1/1 Most significant high byte of password1/2 Most significant low byte of password1/3 Least significant high byte of password2/1 Least significant low byte of password2/2 Spare2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xd93/1 Programmable curve number (1, 2, or 3)3/2 Data Point 0: Operate Threshold (high byte)3/3 Data Point 0: Operate Threshold (low byte)4/1 Data Point 1: (same as Data Point 0)4/2 Data Point 1: (same as Data Point 0)4/3 Data Point 2: (same as Data Point 0)5/1 Data Point 2: (same as Data Point 0)5/2 Data Point 3: (same as Data Point 0)5/3 Data Point 3: (same as Data Point 0)6/1 Data Point 4: (same as Data Point 0)6/2 Data Point 4: (same as Data Point 0)6/3 Data Point 5: (same as Data Point 0)7/1 Data Point 5: (same as Data Point 0)7/2 Data Point 6: (same as Data Point 0)7/3 Data Point 6: (same as Data Point 0)8/1 Data Point 7: (same as Data Point 0)8/2 Data Point 7: (same as Data Point 0)8/3 Data Point 8: (same as Data Point 0)9/1 Data Point 8: (same as Data Point 0)9/2 Data Point 9: (same as Data Point 0)9/3 Data Point 9: (same as Data Point 0)10/1 Data Point 10: (same as Data Point 0)10/2 Data Point 10: (same as Data Point 0)10/3 Data Point 11: (same as Data Point 0)11/1 Data Point 11: (same as Data Point 0)11/2 Data Point 12: (same as Data Point 0)11/3 Data Point 12: (same as Data Point 0)12/1 Data Point 13: (same as Data Point 0)12/2 Data Point 13: (same as Data Point 0)12/3 Data Point 14: (same as Data Point 0)13/1 Data Point 14: (same as Data Point 0)13/2 Data Point 15: (same as Data Point 0)13/3 Data Point 15: (same as Data Point 0)14/1 Data Point 16: (same as Data Point 0)14/2 Data Point 16: (same as Data Point 0)14/3 Data Point 17: (same as Data Point 0)15/1 Data Point 17: (same as Data Point 0)15/2 Data Point 18: (same as Data Point 0)15/3 Data Point 18: (same as Data Point 0)16/1 Data Point 19: (same as Data Point 0)16/2 Data Point 19: (same as Data Point 0)16/3 Data Point 20: (same as Data Point 0)17/1 Data Point 20: (same as Data Point 0)17/2 Data Point 21: (same as Data Point 0)17/3 Data Point 21: (same as Data Point 0)18/1 Data Point 22: (same as Data Point 0)18/2 Data Point 22: (same as Data Point 0)18/3 Data Point 23: (same as Data Point 0)19/1 Data Point 23: (same as Data Point 0)


188

19/2 Data Point 24: (same as Data Point 0)19/3 Data Point 24: (same as Data Point 0)20/1 Data Point 25: (same as Data Point 0)20/2 Data Point 25: (same as Data Point 0)20/3 Data Point 26: (same as Data Point 0)21/1 Data Point 26: (same as Data Point 0)21/2 Data Point 27: (same as Data Point 0)21/3 Data Point 27: (same as Data Point 0)22/1 Data Point 28: (same as Data Point 0)22/2 Data Point 28: (same as Data Point 0)22/3 Data Point 29: (same as Data Point 0)23/1 Data Point 29: (same as Data Point 0)23/2 Data Point 30: (same as Data Point 0)23/3 Data Point 30: (same as Data Point 0)24/1 Data Point 31: (same as Data Point 0)24/2 Data Point 31: (same as Data Point 0)24/3 Data Point 32: (same as Data Point 0)25/1 Data Point 32: (same as Data Point 0)25/2 Data Point 33: (same as Data Point 0)25/3 Data Point 33: (same as Data Point 0)26/1 Data Point 34: (same as Data Point 0)26/2 Data Point 34: (same as Data Point 0)26/3 Data Point 35: (same as Data Point 0)27/1 Data Point 35: (same as Data Point 0)27/2 Data Point 36: (same as Data Point 0)27/3 Data Point 36: (same as Data Point 0)28/1 Data Point 37: (same as Data Point 0)28/2 Data Point 37: (same as Data Point 0)28/3 Data Point 38: (same as Data Point 0)29/1 Data Point 38: (same as Data Point 0)29/2 Data Point 39: (same as Data Point 0)29/3 Data Point 39: (same as Data Point 0)30/1 Data Point 40: (same as Data Point 0)30/2 Data Point 40: (same as Data Point 0)30/3 Data Point 41: (same as Data Point 0)31/1 Data Point 41: (same as Data Point 0)31/2 Data Point 42: (same as Data Point 0)31/3 Data Point 42: (same as Data Point 0)32/1 Data Point 43: (same as Data Point 0)32/2 Data Point 43: (same as Data Point 0)32/3 Data Point 44: (same as Data Point 0)33/1 Data Point 44: (same as Data Point 0)33/2 Data Point 45: (same as Data Point 0)33/3 Data Point 45: (same as Data Point 0)34/1 Data Point 46: (same as Data Point 0)34/2 Data Point 46: (same as Data Point 0)34/3 Data Point 47: (same as Data Point 0)35/1 Data Point 47: (same as Data Point 0)35/2 Data Point 48: (same as Data Point 0)35/3 Data Point 48: (same as Data Point 0)36/1 Data Point 49: (same as Data Point 0)36/2 Data Point 49: (same as Data Point 0)36/3 Data Point 50: (same as Data Point 0)37/1 Data Point 50: (same as Data Point 0)37/2 Data Point 51: (same as Data Point 0)37/3 Data Point 51: (same as Data Point 0)38/1 Data Point 52: (same as Data Point 0)38/2 Data Point 52: (same as Data Point 0)

38/3 Spare


189


13.10 Receive Next Differential Curve Data Set ( 3 13 10 )

Same format as ( 3 13 9 ).

13.11 Send Differential Curve Parameters ( 3 13 11 )

For the unit to receive the Differential curve data, the following sequence of commands must be issued.

3 13 11 (Differential Curve Parameters)3 13 12 (Operate Threshold Data Points) Block 03 13 12 (Operate Threshold Data Points) Block 13 13 12 (Operate Threshold Data Points) Block 2

Data Byte Definition 1/1 Programmable Curve Number (1, 2, or 3)

1/2 Programmable Curve Number (1, 2, or 3) 1/3 Programmable Curve Number (1, 2, or 3)

Msg Byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xdb

1/3 Total Number of Messages = 8 2/1 Coefficient A (high byte) 2/2 Coefficient A | 2/3 Coefficient A | 3/1 Coefficient A (low byte) 3/2 Coefficient B (high byte) 3/3 Coefficient B | 4/1 Coefficient B | 4/2 Coefficient B (low byte) 4/3 Coefficient C (high byte) 5/1 Coefficient C | 5/2 Coefficient C | 5/3 Coefficient C (low byte) 6/1 Spare 6/2 Spare 6/3 Spare 7/1 Spare 7/2 Spare 7/3 Spare 8/1 Spare 8/2 Checksum (high byte) 8/3 Checksum low byte)

13.12 Send Differential Curve Data Set ( 3 13 12 )

Data Byte Definition 1/1 Programmable curve number (1, 2, or 3) 1/2 Block number 1/3 Programmable curve number + Block number

Msg Byte Definition1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1)1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xdc

1/3 Total Number of Messages = 382/1 Programmable curve number (1, 2, or 3)


190

2/2 Block number2/3 Data Point 0: Operate Threshold (high byte)3/1 Data Point 0: Operate Threshold (low byte)3/2 Data Point 1: (same as Data Point 0)3/3 Data Point 1: (same as Data Point 0)4/1 Data Point 2: (same as Data Point 0)4/2 Data Point 2: (same as Data Point 0)4/3 Data Point 3: (same as Data Point 0)5/1 Data Point 3: (same as Data Point 0)5/2 Data Point 4: (same as Data Point 0)5/3 Data Point 4: (same as Data Point 0)6/1 Data Point 5: (same as Data Point 0)6/2 Data Point 5: (same as Data Point 0)6/3 Data Point 6: (same as Data Point 0)7/1 Data Point 6: (same as Data Point 0)7/2 Data Point 7: (same as Data Point 0)7/3 Data Point 7: (same as Data Point 0)8/1 Data Point 8: (same as Data Point 0)8/2 Data Point 8: (same as Data Point 0)8/3 Data Point 9: (same as Data Point 0)9/1 Data Point 9: (same as Data Point 0)9/2 Data Point 10: (same as Data Point 0)9/3 Data Point 10: (same as Data Point 0)10/1 Data Point 11: (same as Data Point 0)10/2 Data Point 11: (same as Data Point 0)10/3 Data Point 12: (same as Data Point 0)11/1 Data Point 12: (same as Data Point 0)11/2 Data Point 13: (same as Data Point 0)11/3 Data Point 13: (same as Data Point 0)12/1 Data Point 14: (same as Data Point 0)12/2 Data Point 14: (same as Data Point 0)12/3 Data Point 15: (same as Data Point 0)13/1 Data Point 15: (same as Data Point 0)13/2 Data Point 16: (same as Data Point 0)13/3 Data Point 16: (same as Data Point 0)14/1 Data Point 17: (same as Data Point 0)14/2 Data Point 17: (same as Data Point 0)14/3 Data Point 18: (same as Data Point 0)15/1 Data Point 18: (same as Data Point 0)15/2 Data Point 19: (same as Data Point 0)15/3 Data Point 19: (same as Data Point 0)16/1 Data Point 20: (same as Data Point 0)16/2 Data Point 20: (same as Data Point 0)16/3 Data Point 21: (same as Data Point 0)17/1 Data Point 21: (same as Data Point 0)17/2 Data Point 22: (same as Data Point 0)17/3 Data Point 22: (same as Data Point 0)18/1 Data Point 23: (same as Data Point 0)18/2 Data Point 23: (same as Data Point 0)18/3 Data Point 24: (same as Data Point 0)19/1 Data Point 24: (same as Data Point 0)19/2 Data Point 25: (same as Data Point 0)19/3 Data Point 25: (same as Data Point 0)20/1 Data Point 26: (same as Data Point 0)20/2 Data Point 26: (same as Data Point 0)20/3 Data Point 27: (same as Data Point 0)21/1 Data Point 27: (same as Data Point 0)21/2 Data Point 28: (same as Data Point 0)21/3 Data Point 28: (same as Data Point 0)


191

22/1 Data Point 29: (same as Data Point 0)22/2 Data Point 29: (same as Data Point 0)22/3 Data Point 30: (same as Data Point 0)23/1 Data Point 30: (same as Data Point 0)23/2 Data Point 31: (same as Data Point 0)23/3 Data Point 31: (same as Data Point 0)24/1 Data Point 32: (same as Data Point 0)24/2 Data Point 32: (same as Data Point 0)24/3 Data Point 33: (same as Data Point 0)25/1 Data Point 33: (same as Data Point 0)25/2 Data Point 34: (same as Data Point 0)25/3 Data Point 34: (same as Data Point 0)26/1 Data Point 35: (same as Data Point 0)26/2 Data Point 35: (same as Data Point 0)26/3 Data Point 36: (same as Data Point 0)27/1 Data Point 36: (same as Data Point 0)27/2 Data Point 37: (same as Data Point 0)27/3 Data Point 37: (same as Data Point 0)28/1 Data Point 38: (same as Data Point 0)28/2 Data Point 38: (same as Data Point 0)28/3 Data Point 39: (same as Data Point 0)29/1 Data Point 39: (same as Data Point 0)29/2 Data Point 40: (same as Data Point 0)29/3 Data Point 40: (same as Data Point 0)30/1 Data Point 41: (same as Data Point 0)30/2 Data Point 41: (same as Data Point 0)30/3 Data Point 42: (same as Data Point 0)31/1 Data Point 42: (same as Data Point 0)31/2 Data Point 43: (same as Data Point 0)31/3 Data Point 43: (same as Data Point 0)32/1 Data Point 44: (same as Data Point 0)32/2 Data Point 44: (same as Data Point 0)32/3 Data Point 45: (same as Data Point 0)33/1 Data Point 45: (same as Data Point 0)33/2 Data Point 46: (same as Data Point 0)33/3 Data Point 46: (same as Data Point 0)34/1 Data Point 47: (same as Data Point 0)34/2 Data Point 47: (same as Data Point 0)34/3 Data Point 48: (same as Data Point 0)35/1 Data Point 48: (same as Data Point 0)35/2 Data Point 49: (same as Data Point 0)35/3 Data Point 49: (same as Data Point 0)36/1 Data Point 50: (same as Data Point 0)36/2 Data Point 50: (same as Data Point 0)36/3 Data Point 51: (same as Data Point 0)37/1 Data Point 51: (same as Data Point 0)37/2 Data Point 52: (same as Data Point 0)37/3 Data Point 52: (same as Data Point 0)38/1 Spare38/2 Checksum (high byte)

38/3 Checksum (low byte)

14 Waveform Capture Commands ( 3 14 n )

N Definition0 Define waveform capture settings1 Show waveform capture settings2 Start waveform data accumulation3 Stop waveform data accumulation


192

4 Report waveform record data headers5 Fetch first block of a record (Part A)6 Fetch next block of a record (Part A)7 Retransmit last block of a record (Part A)8 Fetch first block of a record (Part B)9 Fetch next block of a record (Part B)10 Retransmit last block of a record (Part B)11 Fetch Acquisition Status

14.0 Define Waveform Capture Settings ( 3 14 0 )

Note the trigger sources are OR’ed together.Example: if 3/1 is Hex 07 ;trigger on 87T or 87H or 51P-1pickup. The capture is 8 cycles of waveform with 32 samples percycle. We then have 8 inputs each of 8 cycles captureThe inputs are Ia-1,Ib-1,Ic-1,In-1, Ia-2 Ib-2 Ic-2 and Ig-2 . The data is sent from the TPU in quarter cycle records, that is 32/4samples per analog variable.

Data Byte Definition 1/1 Most significant high byte of password 1/2 Most significant low byte of password 1/3 Least significant high byte of password 2/1 Least significant low byte of password 2/2 Spare 2/3 Command + Subcommand = 0xe0 3/1 Trigger source (byte 1)

Bit 0: 87TBit 1: 87HBit 2: 51P-1Bit 3: 51N-1Bit 4: 50P-1Bit 5: 50N-1Bit 6: 150P-1Bit 7: 150N-1

3/2 Trigger source (byte 2)Bit 0: 46-1Bit 1: 51P-2Bit 2: 51G-2Bit 3: 50P-2Bit 4: 50G-2Bit 5: 150P-2Bit 6: 150G-2Bit 7: 46-2

3/3 Trigger source : (byte 3) Bit 0: Through Fault

Bit 1: Harmonic RestraintBit 2: External (WCI)

4/1 Trigger source:reserved (byte 4) 4/2 Trigger position quarter cycle:

0 to 255 (for 64 qtr cycle record)0 to 128 (for 32 qtr cycle record)0 to 64 (for 16 qtr cycle record)0 to 32 (for 8 qtr cycle record)

4/3 Mode/Record Sizebit 0, 1: 00 = 8 rec of 8 qtr cycle record

01 = 4 rec of 16 qtr cycle record10 = 2 rec of 32 qtr cycle record11 = 1 rec of 64 qtr cycle record

bit 6: Single Shot Mode (0=Off, 1=On)


193

bit 7: Append Record Mode (0=Off, 1=On) 5/1 Spare 5/2 Checksum high byte 5/3 Checksum low byte

14.1 Report Waveform Capture Settings ( 3 14 1 )

Data Byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xe1 1/3 Total Number of Messages = 9 2/1 - 6/3 Unit ID Name (15 characters) 7/1 Trigger source (byte 1)

Bit 0: 87TBit 1: 87HBit 2: 51P-1Bit 3: 51N-1Bit 4: 50P-1Bit 5: 50N-1Bit 6: 150P-1Bit 7: 150N-1

7/2 Trigger source (byte 2)Bit 0: 46-1Bit 1: 51P-2Bit 2: 51G-2Bit 3: 50P-2Bit 4: 50G-2Bit 5: 150P-2Bit 6: 150G-2Bit 7: 46-2

7/3 Trigger source (byte 3) Bit 0: Through Fault

Bit 1: Harmonic RestraintBit 2: External (WCI)

8/1 Trigger source (byte 4) 8/2 Trigger position quarter cycle:

0 to 255 (for 64 qtr cycle record)0 to 128 (for 32 qtr cycle record)0 to 64 (for 16 qtr cycle record)0 to 32 (for 8 qtr cycle record)

8/3 Mode/Record Sizebit 0, 1: 00 = 8 rec of 8 qtr cycle record

01 = 4 rec of 16 qtr cycle record10 = 2 rec of 32 qtr cycle record11 = 1 rec of 64 qtr cycle record

bit 6: Single Shot Mode (0=Off, 1=On)bit 7: Append Record Mode (0=Off, 1=On)


14.2 Arm Waveform Data Accumulation ( 3 14 2 )

14.3 Disarm Waveform Data Accumulation ( 3 14 3 )


194

14.4 Report Waveform Record Data Headers ( 3 14 4 )

Msg Byte Definition 1/1 Relay Status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xe4

1/3 Total Number of Messages = 38 2/1 - 6/3 Unit ID Name (15 characters) 7/1 Record 0: Trigger position 7/2 Record 0: Year 7/3 Record 0: Month 8/1 Record 0: Date 8/2 Record 0: Hour 8/3 Record 0: Minute 9/1 Record 0: Second 9/2 Record 0: Hundredth of second 9/3 Record 0: Spare 10/1 Record 0: Spare 10/2 Record 0: Mode/Record Size

bit 0, 1: 00 = 8 rec of 8 qtr cycle record01 = 4 rec of 16 qtr cycle record10 = 2 rec of 32 qtr cycle record11 = 1 rec of 64 qtr cycle record


10/3 Record 0: Spare11/1 - 14/3 Record 1 (same as record 0)15/1 - 18/3 Record 2 ( " )


195

19/1 - 22/3 Record 3 ( " )23/1 - 26/3 Record 4 ( " )27/1 - 30/3 Record 5 ( " )31/1 - 34/3 Record 6 ( " )35/1 - 38/3 Record 7 ( " )

14.5 Fetch First Block of a Record-Part A ( 3 14 5 )

Data Byte Definition1/1 Record number (0 to 7)1/2 Record number (0 to 7)-Duplicate1/3 Record number (0 to 7)-Triplicate

Msg Byte Definition 1/1 Relay status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xe5

1/3 Total Number of Messages = 45 2/1 Record number 2/2 Block number 2/3 Sample 0: Ia-1 (high byte) 3/1 Sample 0: Ia-1 (low byte) 3/2 Sample 0: Ib-1 (high byte) 3/3 Sample 0: Ib-1 (low byte) 4/1 Sample 0: Ic-1 (high byte) 4/2 Sample 0: Ic-1 (low byte) 4/3 Sample 0: In-1 (high byte) 5/1 Sample 0: In-1 (low byte) 5/2 Sample 0: Ia-2 (high byte) 5/3 Sample 0: Ia-2 (low byte) 6/1 Sample 0: Ib-2 (high byte) 6/2 Sample 0: Ib-2 (low byte) 6/3 Sample 0: Ic-2 (high byte) 7/1 Sample 0: Ic-2 (low byte) 7/2 Sample 0: Ig-2 (high byte) 7/3 Sample 0: Ig-2 (low byte)8/1 - 13/1 Sample 1 data13/2 - 18/2 Sample 2 data18/3 - 23/3 Sample 3 data24/1 - 29/1 Sample 4 data29/2 - 34/2 Sample 5 data34/3 - 39/3 Sample 6 data40/1 - 45/1 Sample 7 data 45/2 Spare 45/3 Spare

14.6 Fetch Next Block of a Record-Part A ( 3 14 6 )

Same message format as ( 3 14 5 )

14.7 Retransmit Last Block of a Record-Part A ( 3 14 7 )


14.8 Fetch First Block of a Record-Part B ( 3 14 8 )

Msg Byte Definition 1/1 Relay status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xe8

1/3 Total Number of Messages = 9


196

2/1 Record number 2/2 Block number 2/3 Phase scale Wdg 1 (high byte) 3/1 Phase scale Wdg 1 (low byte) 3/2 Neutral scale Wdg 1 (high byte) 3/3 Neutral scale Wdg 1 (low byte) 4/1 Phase scale Wdg 2 (high byte) 4/2 Phase scale Wdg 2 (low byte) 4/3 Ground scale Wdg 2 (high byte) 5/1 Ground scale Wdg 2 (low byte) 5/2 Input status (high byte) 5/3 Input status (low byte) 6/1 Output status (high byte) 6/2 Output status (low byte)

Bit 0: Differential Trip Bit 1: Trip failure Bit 2: Through Fault

Bit 3: 2nd Harmonic Restraint Bit 4: 5th Harmonic Restraint Bit 5: All Harmonic Restraint

6/3 Pickup status (High high byte) 7/1 Pickup status (High low byte) 7/2 Pickup status (Low high byte)

Bit 0: 46-1Bit 1: 51P-2Bit 2: 51G-2Bit 3: 50P-2Bit 4: 50G-2Bit 5: 150P-2Bit 6: 150G-2Bit 7: 46-2

7/3 Pickup status (Low low byte) Bit 0: 87T

Bit 1: 87HBit 2: 51P-1Bit 3: 51N-1Bit 4: 50P-1Bit 5: 50N-1Bit 6: 150P-1Bit 7: 150N-1

8/1 Fault status (High high byte) 8/2 Fault status (High low byte) 8/3 Fault status (Low high byte)

Bit 0: 46-1Bit 1: 51P-2Bit 2: 51G-2Bit 3: 50P-2Bit 4: 50G-2Bit 5: 150P-2Bit 6: 150G-2Bit 7: 46-2

9/1 Fault status (Low low byte)Bit 0: 87TBit 1: 87HBit 2: 51P-1Bit 3: 51N-1Bit 4: 50P-1Bit 5: 50N-1Bit 6: 150P-1


197

Bit 7: 150N-1 9/2 Spare 9/3 Spare

14.9 Fetch Next Block of a Record-Part B ( 3 14 9 )


14.10 Retransmit Last Block of a Record-Part B ( 3 14 10 )


14.11 Fetch Acquisition Status ( 3 14 11 )

Msg Byte Definition

1/1 Relay status (see command 3 4 1, msg 1/1) 1/2 Command + Subcommand = 0xeb

1/3 Total Number of Messages = 2 2/1 Mode/Record Size

bit 0, 1: 00 = 8 rec of 8 qtr cycle record01 = 4 rec of 16 qtr cycle record10 = 2 rec of 32 qtr cycle record11 = 1 rec of 64 qtr cycle record


2/2 Records Remaining (Single Shot Mode Only) 2/3 State of Accumulation (0=Running, 1=Stopped)


198

Appendix C - Revision History

The following lists the DNP 3.0 history for the software history of each revision change.

Software History:

V2.3 - Base VersionV2.4 - Provides capability for communications via the Aux Comm RS232 port using switched carrier

(RTS/CTS), as needed for PECO system.- Corrected definition of User Logical Output (ULOx) points as Binary Outputs. These points now containthe status of the ULOx points not the last change-of-state message sent to the DPU.

V2.6 - Corrected handling of “spare” points when performing DNP group scans.- Added address checking for 10-Byte protocol. Previously, units with DNP responded to any 10-Bytecommands regardless of address.- Corrected problems with decoding global address (x’FFFF’) when communicating with DNP masterstation.

V2.8 - The thirty-two 16-bit User Definable (Modbus) Registers have been added as static analog points (97 to128 on the DPU and 319 to 350 on the TPU). This provides user scaleable analog points to circumventthe 32-bit processing limitations of the Harris D20 RTU. These additional points are processed as signedanalogs.- Numerous performance enhancements have reduced the worst case turnaround for DNP requests toapproximately 350 msec on the DPU. Typical response for most requests is less than 200 msec.- The control logic was revised to detect busy conditions and support multiple concurrent operations. Thisfixes the problems with ULO3.- Collection of fault records by DNP is delayed until the fault distance calculation is completed.- The processing of spare points has been corrected.- The Application Layer Headers are now properly built when all the qualifier code requests “all” objects.

V2.9 - Support added for new Auxiliary Communications Card (Type 8) with two RS485 ports.- Additional control point added for “Reset all Seal Ins”.- Additional class 3 digital event points added (see list at end of Binary Input Points).- Additional analog point for 3 phase volt-amps

V3.0 - Corrected processing of control requests as per DNP Basic 4 Document Set.- Automatically reset seal-in points after they have been reported by DNP, depending on the status ofMode Parameter 5.- Added DNP support for Forced I/O points (Logical Inputs and Physical Inputs/Outputs)- Added event masking for Binary Input events.- Prevented accumulation of Class 2 or 3 changes for points not enabled via Scan Groups or the BinaryInput Event Masking.- Performance enhancements added to reduce the turn-around time when requesting class 1, 2 or 3 data.

V3.4 - Provided Binary Event (change) reporting for most Binary Input points as indicated in documentation.Binary changes for sealed-in points are now limited to current state reporting (i.e., a seal-in must be resetbefore another “set” event will be reported).- Added capability to configure the period for requesting a time synchronization from the master viaParameter 9.- Added performance improvements secondary rear port (non-DNP port) to enhance communications withECP program.- Add support for running with the CPU clock stopped (required for final manufacturing tests).- Revise start-up processing to support revisions to Motorola processor used in Aux. Comm. boards.Removed support for Null (canceled) control requests. These are now treated as NOPs.Repeat counts (>1) are now only permitted for ULO points. Multiple controls to other points weremeaningless and did not work properly.Fixed support for Data Link Acknowledge to allow data link layer confirms to work properly.Fixed problem with control point becoming permently “active”.Fixed internal RTS problem the caused failed control requests and errors when saving changed settings.Fixed problems with handling requests for multiple “ranges” of objects.Add support for running with the CPU clock stopped (required for final manufacturing tests).


199

Document History:V2.0 - Base VersionV2.1 - 52A Closed event point changed from #80 to #11.V2.3 - Document changed to incorporate new features. Main change is definition of “scan type” for each DNP

point.V2.8 - Document changed to include additional static analog points (97 to 128) and clarify and expand on

descriptions of Parameter Settings.V2.9 - Updated to add new points as described above.V3.0 - Moved Revision History from Appendix B to Appendix C.

- Inserted new Appendix B - Event Masking- Extended point list to allow for Forced I/O points, Binary Outputs 32-137.- Added points 128 and 129 to tables.- Changed status of bits used for Event Masking in Appendix B.- Added description for Mode Parameter 5.- Indicated points unique to DPU2000 or DPU2000R.- Added description of processing for sealed-in points.

V3.4 - Added description for Parameter 9.- Revised description of Mode Parameter 1 based on changes to V3.4 DNP Software.- Revised description of Mode Parameter 5 based on changes to V3.4 DNP Software.- Expanded description of Forced I/O points (default assignments) and corrected these

assignments for points 38 thru 71.Expanded description of control processing to include types of control request allowed.Added Binary Inputs 131-168 for TPU2000R 3 windingAdded Analog Inputs 351-354 for TPU2000R 3 windingUpdated point tables to properly indicate points that are unique to the TPU2000 and TPU2000R (2 and 3winding versions).- Changed point tables to use DNP Type, ES-01-R, to indicate points that support both Binary

Static and Binary Event reporting.- Revised Appendix B to update description of Event Masking.Changed formatting of document for laser printer.Added Binary Inputs 131-168 for TPU2000R 3 winding

- Added Analog Inputs 351-354 for TPU2000R 3 winding.


200

Appendix D – Modem Connectivity

ABSTRACT: Advances in telephony switching systems and semiconductor technologies have made digitalcommunication via analog public telephone systems an affordable reality. Advances from the initial Bell 202modems operating at speeds of 300 baud to modern day V.90 modems which can theoretically operate at 56Khave made fast data transfer within a substation a reality. This paper explains the theory of modern day modemsand their use with ABB protective relays and configuration software. Although many manufacturer’s of modemequipment are available, this application note covers the theory and application of 10 bit dial-up telephonemodems. ABB does not specify specific modem vendors equipment, this application note is to be a guide toconfiguration of general vendor’s telephony equipment with various ABB products. This application note isintended to present four examples of modem connectivity between ABB products and a personal computer.

Modem Theory

Early Modems

In the beginning, telephony operated using analog signals. The legacy public telephone network required that thestandard Bell Telephone. Signals placed upon the telephone network consisted of voice communication. Thechannels were limited (which led to the creation of the party- line) and communication consisted of much deadtime in which no activity was occurring on the expensive phone connection.

When digital computers were evolving, there came a need to interconnect the various sites for a limited period oftime. Expensive digital data exchange networks were available for device interconnection. Installation of thesesystems for limited use was impractical due to installation costs but also for their operational costs. Somesystems (such as ARPA net [precursor to the internet]) were available but only to the military and selectuniversities. Another method had to be developed to allow general industries to communicate via a publicmedium.

It was widely known that Analog signals have three distinct characteristics.

a. Frequency (which may be varied and measured in communication systems).b. Amplitude (which may be increased decreased).c. Phase (which may be shifted with respect to a particular reference at any time).

Engineers at Western Electric (the R&D arm of Bell Telephone) took advantage of these characteristics of ananalog signal and created a device called a modem. MO – MODULATOR : DEM – DEMODULATOR. The publictelephone network communication channel was able to carry signals from 300 Hz to 4,000 Hz. The modemtranslated the signal from a digital waveform to an analog waveform (modulator) and transferred it to a telephoneline analog grade signal. Figure 1 illustrates this transformation. The receiving modem translated the analogsignal to a digital signal (demodulator)Thus the initial methods of communicating were developed to use theoperating analog bandwidth of the telephone systems. The physical interface employed for the digital interfacewas a recently specified RS 232 interface. For a more in depth explanation of RS 232, please reference otherapplication notes available from ABB’s FAXBACK service or WEB Site.

1 0 1 0

Figure 1 - Frequency Shift Keying Modulation


201

The first Bell 202 modems used data transmission rates from 300 Baud to 1200 baud using Frequency ShiftKeying. FSK modems used one of two methods of implementation. Half Duplex FSK and Full Duplex FSK.

Half duplex FSK: One frequency band pair is used to transmit/receive data. The one modem transmitting datauses one frequency to denote a binary “1” and another to denote a binary “0”. The other modem decodes the 1’sand 0’s for corresponding to the specific frequency. The signal is then translated from the analog encoding to thedigital encoding. Turn around time is an issue when the modems switch from transmitting data to receiving data.Less of the telephone bandwidth range is used for communications, but communications are slower in that eachmodem must signify whether it is to transmit or receive data. One cannot transmit or receive data at the sametime.

Full duplex FSK: Two frequency bands are employed. One set of frequencies represent the transmit channel(frequencies allocated to the transmitted “1”’s or “0”’s). The other set of frequencies are allocated to the receivechannel (frequencies allocated to the receivers “1”’s or “0”’s). This type of encoding has advantages in that nodelay results for channel turnaround delay results and that full duplex communications is possible. The first Bell202 modems were developed using FSK.

With these limitations, FSK technologies are not used in modern modems.

Next Developments

However innovative these FSK methods were, there was still a limitation on the bandwidth of the telephonenetwork. FSK used an entire phase in the frequency. The next innovation was to use analog to digital convertersto send/receive more information at faster data rates than the maximum frequency of 4,000 Hz that a telephonesystem may allow. New A/D or D/A converters were able to convert signals dependent upon the phase shift ofthe signal. Using fast analog to digital (A/D) and digital to analog (D/A) converters made data transfer rates inexcess of 4000 baud possible. Intermediate developments using the combination of phase and multiple bits couldbe encoded into a symbol. Four symbols could be represented by two bits. The transmission of the bits could bereferenced with relation to the frequency and phase shift. For a brief time, a method using the analog signalphase shift, frequency allowed data to be transmitted/received in excess of 4000 Hz. The method was referred toas Quad Phase Shift Keying or Differential Phase Shift Keying. However, this method was short lived due to thefact that more efficient methods of data encoding were developed.

The next development which elevated modem data transfer rates to those from 9600 to 33,600 baud. Themethod is referred to as Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM). Modern modems (such as those sold inelectronics stores) use this technique in that the amplitude, phase, and frequency encode the digital bits into asymbol. A simplified explanation is provided.

Figure 2 illustrates the possible combinations of data, which may be represented by two bits. Four possiblesymbols may be transmitted/received using this method (as was the case with QPSK methods). If, for example asine wave is split into four quadrants each part of the phase could represent each of the two bit combinations inan analog fashion. Thus the phase from 0 – 90 degrees could represent the value 00, 90-180 degrees couldrepresent the value 01, 180-270 degrees could represent the value 10, and logically 270 – 360 could representthe value 11. A rapid A/D and D/A converter could determine the phase of the conversion area and determine thevalue depending upon the amplitude of the signal being converted. Thus, four symbols could be transferred in asingle phase.


202

TWO BIT REPRESENTATION0 00 11 01 1

4 Bit Combinations

00 01

01 11

0 90 90 180

180 270 270 360DEGREES0 90 180 270 360

WAVEFORM BIT MAP ASSIGNMENT VERSUS FREQUENCY

Figure 2 - QAM Analysis 4 Bit Analysis

Expanding this concept, Figure 3 illustrates what could occur if a 16 symbols could be transferred using anextended sine wave interpretation. The proper designation for this encoding is 16-QAM. Thus 16 is the number ofsymbols which may be expressed in one waveform. Each ¼ cycle could represent a quadrature 00 –01- 10- 11.Each ¼ cycle could then be designated to two bit values depending upon the phase angle location upon thecycle. QAM modem manufacturers have a quadrature plot illustrating the phase/bit encoding which occurs intheir design. This technology allows modems to transfer data at rates of 33,600 bits per second over telephonelines designed to carry voice at 4000 hz. This is pretty impressive in that the average cost of a 10 bit synchronousmodem capable of operating at 56K bits per second (theoretically) is $100.

FOUR BIT REPRESENTATION0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 1 00 0 1 1 0 1 0 00 1 0 10 1 1 00 1 1 1

16 Bit Combinations

0 90 90 180

180 270 270 360DEGREES0 90 180 270 360

WAVEFORM BIT MAP ASSIGNMENT VERSUS FREQUENCY

1 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 0 1 01 0 1 1 1 1 0 01 1 0 11 1 1 01 1 1 1

00

01

10

11

11

10

01

00

00 01QUAD QUAD

10 QUAD 11 QUAD

Figure 3 - QAM – 16 Bit Encoding

Another new technology used in modems is one called, Trellis Encoding Technology. One of the modemspresented in this paper uses this technology which evaluates speed optimization and fast forward errordetection/correction technology. Within the present V. standards, error detection/correction and line speedbalancing improves with each technology. One modem shall be used in this paper which uses Trellis EncodingTechnology .

The Tricky Thing About Baud Rates

Baud rate is defined as the amount of changes a signal can undergo in 1 second. With FSK modems in the initialdays of the Bell 202 modem, 1 baud = 1 bit. Today, with the complexity of modem technology, one bit does notequal one baud. As illustrated in the descriptions of DPSK and QAM, one transition of signal may not equal onebaud in that two bits may represent 4 combinations, 3 bits may represent 8 combinations, 4 bits may represent 16combinations, 8 bits may represent 256 combinations, and 12 bits may represent 4,096 combinations. Thusoperation over a standard frequency 300, 600, or 2400 hertz (audio) may yield (when signals are decoded intodigital signals) baud rates of up to 33, 600 bits per second.


203

Standards

Early modems were defined as per their operating baud rate. An international committee the ITU-T (InternationalTelecommunications Union) developed standards defining the operation of modems. Today, the V. (VEE DOT)standard is recognized as the modem definition standard to which modems are designed. Some standards arelisted below:

V.29 BIS - 2,400 Baud : 9,600 Bits per second: 2 Wire Full Duplex, 4-DSPK, 16 QAMV.32 BIS - 2,400 Baud: 14,400 Bits per second: 2 Wire Full Duplex 64- QAM,V.34 + - 2,400 Baud: 33,600 Bits per second: 2 Wire Full Duplex 4,096 QAM.

With the increasing complexity of modem technology, another innovation came about increasing the acceptanceof telephone modem technology in circuits, Hayes AT command set. Hayes was one of the pre-eminentmanufacturers of modem technology in the early 70’s. They developed a command set which allowed a modemto be placed in several operational modes. Modems could be configured “on the fly” to auto-answer, changetransmission/reception speeds, enable data encoding modes, dial out phone numbers ….. as well as othercapabilities.

With the introduction of the Hayes AT command set, integration of modems into more common acceptance withina variety of applications. Configuration could occur using a commonly supplied “WINDOWS” Terminal Emulatorprogram. When the terminal connected with the modem the “AT” command could be sent to the modem with theappropriate command. Unfortunately over time there has been a deviation in the HAYES command set in thatthere is no such thing as a “STANDARD HAYES AT COMMAND” set.

10 Bit Versus 11 Bit Modems

Commercially available dial-up modems, such as those generally sold through chain electronic stores may beused with many of the protocols offered in the ABB Protective relays. Modems such as those allowing telephoneconnectivity using 10 bit protocols are generally those available inexpensively. A 10 bit telephone modem is inthe cost area of $100 (120 VAC operation) whereas 11 bit modems are in the area of cost of $1500 (120 VACoperation) [COSTS QUOTED ARE FOR YEAR 2000]. Modems using 125 VDC power sources are much moreexpensive than those quoted for 120 VAC operation.

START 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PARITY STOP

With Parity Checking

START 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 STOP STOP

Without Parity Checking

10 BIT PROTOCOL

Figure 4 - 10 Bit Protocol Packet

With Parity Checking

Without Parity Checking

START 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PARITY STOP

START 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 STOP STOP

Figure 5 - 11 Bit Protocol Packet


204

The difference in packet size is illustrated in Figures 4 and 5. An 10 bit protocol is comprised of 1 Stop Bit, 1 StopBit, 1 Parity Bit, and 7 Data Bits or in the case of no parity, a stop bit is inserted to complete the 10 bit packet.Thus the total of bits transferred is 10 bits. 10 bit protocols usually are those encoded in ASCII. The ASCIIencoding is defined to be a code from 00 to 7E (7 bits of data per character). A modem must be able toanticipate the data packet size in order to transfer the protocol bytes. A 10 bit modem is only able to reliablytransmit/receive such 10 bit data packets.

An 11 Bit protocol is one in which a byte’s worth of data may be transferred. An 11 bit protocol is comprised of 1Stop Bit, 1 Parity Bit, 1 Start Bit, and 8 Data Bits or in the case of no parity an additional stop bit is substituted..Thus byte data may be transferred using an 11 bit modem without any data encoding. This is why 11 bit datamay not be transferred/received via a 10 bit modem. It is important to match the modem with the protocol beingused.

Modem Cabling Options

Cabling is dependent upon the devices attached and modem control options enabled. Through the “AT” modemcommand set such capabilities as RTS/CTS control, CD, DTR enable is possible. However, if one requires that astandard modem setting shall not be changed from location to location, signal jumpering through the cable maybe preferable. What follows are a few diagrams illustrating cable connection between some devices. If one isunsure as to the function or emulation of RS 232 please reference one of the many fine ABB application notes onthe subject.

The Modem is generally a DCE RS232 device. It is configured via a personal computer using a terminal emulatorprogram such as:

DOS OPERATING SYSTEM – PROCOMMWINDOWS 3.1 - TERMINAL or a similar 16 bit application program commonly available.WINDOWS 95,98, or NT – Hyperterminal or similar 32 bit application programs commonly available.Such programs are available to be configured for handshake control, no handshake, XON/XOFF control. Avariety of cables are illustrated for connection of a device to the modem for AT terminal command configuration,or device operation connectivity.

Knowledge of the RS 232 port design is important when interconnecting a modem and an IED. Also ifconfiguration software is required to communicate and configure the device through the com port, knowledge ofthe software’s requirement to control the RTS/CTS, CD, DSR, or DTR RS 232 lines must be known. Table 1 liststhe variety of ABB products and the emulation of each of the ports and applicability of cable design.

Table 1 - Product Cable Guidelines For Connection To A Modem

PRODUCT RS 232 Port RS232Emulation

CTS/RTS –DSR/DTR*

Sup

NOTES FOR MODEMCONNECTION

DPU 2000(Front and Back Ports)

9 Pin Female DTE NO NO*

USE FIGURE 6 CABLE

DPU 2000R(Front and Back Ports)

9 Pin Female DTE NONO*

USE FIGURE 6 CABLE

TPU 2000(Front and Back Ports)


USE FIGURE 6 CABLE

TPU 2000R(Front and Back Ports)


USE FIGURE 6 CABLE

GPU 2000R(Front and Back Ports)


USE FIGURE 6 CABLE

PONI R 9 Pin Male DTE YESNO*

USE FIGURE 7 or 8 Cabledependent on handshake

options.REL 512 Front Port 9 Pin Female DCE NO

NO*USE FIGURE 9 CABLE


205

REL 512 Rear Port(Serial Port 1)

9 Pin Male DTE NONO

USE FIGURE 12 CABLE(Modem Handshake options

disabled).REL 512 Network Port(DNP 3.0 Card)

9 Pin Female DTE YES**NO*

USE FIGURE 10 or 11 Cabledependent on handshake

options.RCP SOFTWARE IBM “XT”

25 Pin FemaleIBM COMPAT.

9 Pin Male

USUALLYDTE

HardwareDependent

NONO*

Sample cables are illustratedin FIGURES 12 and 13.

ECP SOFTWAREORWIN ECP SOFTWARE

IBM “XT”25 Pin FemaleIBM COMPAT.

9 Pin Male

USUALLYDTE

HardwareDependent

NONO*


PONI M COMSETSOFTWARE

IBM “XT”25 Pin FemaleIBM COMPAT.

9 Pin Male

USUALLYDTE

HardwareDependent

YESNO*


** PONI – R Card does not support DTR/DSR HANDSHAKE LINES

Additionally, Figures 14 and 15 illustrate a communication cable configuration when a Modicon PLC is connectedto a Modem (as is the case when it is using a Ladder Logic XMIT block allowing the port to operate as a hostdevice).

IED Cable Male Cable Gender ( 9 Pin Connector)

Modem Cable Male Cable Gender (25 Pin Connector)

DTE

DCE

23

5

3 RCD2 TXD

7 GND8 CD *4 RTS *5 CTS *6 DSR *20 DTR *

RCDTXD

GND

(Signal Flow Direction Denoted By Arrow)

*OPTIONALDEPENDENT ONMODEM CONTROL LINE CONFIGURATION

Figure 6 - Example Cable 1: GPU 2000R, TPU 2000, TPU 2000R, DPU 2000, DPU 2000R, MSOC, orDPU 1500R. It is recommended that DSR, CD, and CTS control be disabled via modem. If

control is disabled, jumpers are optional as shown.

PONI -R Female Cable Gender ( 9 Pin Connector)


DTE DCE

23

578

3 RCD2 TXD

7 GND4 RTS5 CTS6 DSR *20 DTR *

RCDTXD

GNDRTSCTS



Figure 7 - Example Cable 2: ABB PONI R (installed in a REL 301, 302, 350, 352, 356 or MDAR),using hardware handshaking configured in the modem. Install optional jumper if modem

configured for supplying DSR signal.


206

PONI -R Female Cable Gender ( 9 Pin Connector)


DTE DCE

23

578

3 RCD2 TXD

7 GND6 DSR *20 DTR *

RCDTXD

GNDRTSCTS



Figure 8 - Example Cable 3: ABB PONI R (installed in a REL 301, 302, 350, 352, 356 or MDAR),NOT using hardware handshaking configured in the modem. Install optional jumper if modem

configured for supplying DSR signal.

REL 512 Front Port Cable Male Cable Gender ( 9 Pin Connector)


DCE

DCE

23

5

2 TXD3 RCD

7 GND8 CD *4 RTS *5 CTS *6 DSR *20 DTR *

RCDTXD

GND



Figure 9 - Example Cable 4: ABB REL 512 Connected To A Modem Through The RS 232 FrontPort. It is recommended that RTS/CTS and DSR/DTR handshaking be disabled so optional

jumpers need not be installed within the cable.

REL 512 NetworkPort Cable Male Cable Gender ( 9 Pin Connector)


DCE

DCE

23875

2 TXD3 RCD4 RTS5 CTS7 GND6 DSR *20 DTR *

RCDTXDCTSRTSGND



Figure 10 -Example Cable 5: REL 512 Network Port Cable Connection To a MODEM. It isadvisable that the DSR/DTR control be disabled in the modem so that the optional DSR/DTR

jumpers not be inserted in the cable.


207

REL 512 NetworkPort Cable Male Cable Gender ( 9 Pin Connector)


DCE

DCE

23875

2 TXD3 RCD4 RTS *5 CTS *7 GND6 DSR *20 DTR *

RCDTXDCTSRTSGND



Figure 11 - Example Cable 5: ABB REL 512 Connected To A Modem Through The RS 232Network Port With Handshaking From The REL 512 Disabled. It is recommended that RTS/CTS

and DSR/DTR handshaking be disabled in the MODEM so optional jumpers need not beinstalled within the cable.

IBM PC Female Cable Gender ( 9 Pin Connector)


DTE DCE

2364578

3 RCD2 TXD6 DSR20 DTR7 GND4 RTS5 CTS

RCDTXDDSRDTRGNDRTSCTS


NOTE: If Software does not support DSR/DTR - install hardware signal jumpers in the cable and disable the modem control for DSR/DTR. If RTS/CTS is not controlled via software Install RTS/CTS jumpers for each side of the cable. As an option, disable RTS/CTS handshaking on the modem.

Figure 12 - Cable 6: IBM PC 9 Pin Port Cable Connecting to a Modem With HandshakingEnabled. Please refer to the NOTE for optional jumpers and modem configuration options.

IBM PC “XT” Cable Male Cable Gender ( 25 Pin Connector)


DTE DCE

234567820

2 TXD3 RXD4 RTS5 CTS6 DSR7 GND8 CD20 DTR

TXDRXDRTSCTSDSRGNDCDDTR


Figure 13 - Cable 7: IBM PC 25 Pin Port Cable Connecting to a Modem With HandshakingEnabled. Please refer to the NOTE for optional jumpers and modem configuration options.NOTE CHECK SOFTWARE WITH RESPECT FOR SUPPORTED RS 232 PIN HANDSHAKING

OPTIONS.


208

PLC Cable Male Cable Gender ( 9 Pin Connector)


DTE DCE

23465789

3 RCD2 TXD

7 GND4 RTS5 CTS6 DSR20 DTR

RCDTXDDSRDTRGNDRTSCTS


Figure 14 - Cable 8: PLC Cable Connectivity To a Modicon PLC with Handshaking Enabled OnThe PLC And Modem Side.

PLC Cable Male Cable Gender ( 9 Pin Connector)


DTE DCE

23465789

3 RCD2 TXD

7 GND4 RTS *5 CTS *6 DSR *20 DTR *

RCDTXDDSRDTRGNDRTS *CTS *



Figure 15 - Cable 8: PLC Cable Connectivity To a Modicon PLC with Handshaking Disabled OnThe PLC And Modem Side.

At Command Set

Within these examples, a Hayes Compatible external telephone modem from 3Com and ZOOM is used. Thecommand sets and S Registers differ slightly based upon the chip set used. For example, the ZOOM modemuses a chipset from LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES. The description of the command set is available from theinternet web-site www.lucent.com. The 3Com modem has their command set available on the Internet web-sitewww.3com.com : The AT “&” commands are usually the same for both manufacturers, However, the definition of the AT “X” (Where X may be a letter or a “\” or && and a letter) commands vary widely between themanufacturers. Also the AT”S” (S register commands) register definitions vary widely between the twomanufacturers.

US Robotics (3COM) 56 K (V.90 or X2) Sportster Faxmodem

The Sportster FAXMODEM is an external modem. This modem allows visualization of a variety of parametersallowing for visual troubleshooting in the event of trouble. The Sportster also has a set of dipswitches allowing forquick configuration without connection of a “Terminal Emulator” to configure the unit through “AT commands.Please refer to the web-site documents for a more complete explanation of configuration strings.

Prior to configuring the modem, attach the proper cable between the terminal emulator and the modem. OneShould Type “AT” (without the quotation marks) and depress the enter key. The modem shall echo back an “OK”to acknowledge the communication. It is recommended that the dipswitches for this unit be set as follows:

1: Down – Data Terminal Ready Overriden (EXCEPT IF USING THE BIRT)2: Down – Numeric Results Code Displayed


209

3: Down – Display Results Code4: UP – Echo OFFLINE Commands5: Dependent upon application – AUTO ANSWER6 Down- Carrier Detect Override (EXCEPT IF USING THE BIRT)7: UP – Load NVRAM DEFAULTS8: Down – Smart Mode Operation

If the modem does not answer, please check the terminal emulator settings to be the following:9600 Baud7 Data Bits1 StopEven ParityHardware or No Flow Control depending upon the cable selected and configuration of modem.VT 100 Terminal EmulationInbound Communications : Carriage Return = Carriage Return and Line Feed

If the modem does connect, then the following command may be sent to initialize the modem to parameterize theRS 232 com ports to the proper mode as explained below.

AT=&F1

&F1 = Initialize the modem to Hardware Control Factory Defaults.

AT = &A3 &B1 &C1 &D0 &G0 &H1 &I0 &K1 &M4 &N0 &P0 &R2 &S0 &T5 &U0 &Y1

&A = Protocol Indicators Added (error control and data compression) (3 = Yes)&B = Serial Port Rate (0= Follows Connection Rate)&C = Carrier Detect Override (1 = Overridden)&D = Data Terminal Ready Control (0= Overridden)&G= Guard Tone (0 = USA & Canada)&H = Hardware Flow Control (1 = CTS Enabled, 0 = Disabled)& I = Software Flow Control (0 = Disabled)& K = Data Control Compression (Auto Enable Disabled =0)& M = Error Control (4 = Normal)& N = Sets Connect Speed (0 = Determined by remote modem).& P = Rotary Dial Ratio Pulse (0 = USA & Canada)& R = RD Hardware Flow Control (RTS) ( 2 = Received Data To Computer)& S = Data Set Ready Operation (0 = DSR Overridden – Always ON)& T = Test Loop Enable (5 = Inhibits Test Mode)& U = Floor Connect Speed (Determined by &N Codes 0 = Best Possible Speed)& Y = Break Handling (1 = Expedited, Destructive)

For this modem, Register S0 controls the Auto-answer feature. Autoanswer is controlled via the dip-switchposition 5 and a combination of the value in register S0. To change the value of auto answer pickup (number ofrings) send the command:

ATS0= X, where X is the number of rings which the device shall sense for phone pickup. Note if the host is to dialout the number at all times, this parameter may be set to a “0” thereby disabling the auto answer feature.

Once the commands are written to the modem, one must write them into the modem’s non-volatile memory. Thecommand should be sent as follows to the modem:

AT=&W0

OrAT=&W1

The US ROBOTICS Sportster Modem offers two NVRAM profiles. W0 places the parameters in to Profile 1,whereas W1 places the parameters in Profile 2.


210

Zoom 56Kx Dual Mode Faxmodem Configuration

The ZOOM modem offers more LED’s on their external modem than the US Robotics device. However, theZOOM modem must be configured for each parameter via a “TERMINAL EMULATOR” program. The ZOOMmodem does not offer a dipswitch for configuration of the different operation modes. AT “\” commands and AT“X” (where X is a letter) performs the setup of the device.

Prior to configuring the modem, attach the proper cable between the terminal emulator and the modem. OneShould Type “AT” (without the quotation marks) and depress the enter key.

If the modem does not answer, please check the terminal emulator settings to be the following:

9600 Baud7 Data Bits1 StopEven ParityHardware or No Flow Control depending upon the cable selected and configuration of modem.VT 100 Terminal EmulationInbound Communications : Carriage Return = Carriage Return and Line Feed

If the modem does connect, then the following command may be sent to initialize the modem to parameterize theRS 232 com ports to the proper mode as explained below.

AT=&F0

&F0 = Initialize the modem to Hardware Control Factory Defaults.

AT = &C1 &D0 &G0 &K3 &Q0 &S0

&C = Carrier Detect Override (1 = Overridden)&D = Data Terminal Ready Control (0= Overridden)&G= Guard Tone (0 = USA & Canada)& K = Local Flow Control (0 = Disabled, 3 = Hardware RTS/CTS, 4 = XON/XOFF)&Q = Asynchronous Communication Mode (0 = Asynchronous Mode Buffered)& S = Data Set Ready Operation (0 = DSR Overridden – Always ON)

For this modem, Register S0 controls the Auto-answer feature. Autoanswer is controlled via the dip-switchposition 5 and a combination of the value in register S0. To change the value of auto answer pickup (number ofrings) send the command:

ATS0= X, where X is the number of rings which the device shall sense for phone pickup. Note if the host is to dialout the number at all times, this parameter may be set to a “0” thereby disabling the auto answer feature.

To view the configuration, one may issue the following command:

AT=&V

&V = View Active Configuration and Stored Profile

This can view the programmed profiles.To store this configuration, the command AT=&W0.

Refer to the document at www.lucent.com for an explanation of the AT “L” commands where L is the defined commands for dial-up, speaker control, and other modem functions.


211

Connectivity Example 1- TPU 2000R To WINECP Configuration Software ConnectivityExample

If one was to connect a TPU 2000R to a configuration program such as WIN ECP over a long distance, a methodto accomplish this is via a telephone dialup modem. As illustrated in Figure 16, a personal computer with WINECP is at the headquarters attached to a Public Telephone Switched Network. A standard 10 bit telephonemodem is providing connection of the digital signals to the analog telephone line.

At a remote location is a TPU 2000R attached to a modem providing connectivity.

At both ends, the modem must be configured for appropriate autoanswer capabilities and RS 232 portcapabilities. The protocol used to connect is ABB’s Standard 10 Byte protocol. This is a 10 bit protocol whichmay be transmitted asynchronously via a telephone dialup modem as those discussed via this application note.The Standard 10 byte protocol is a Master-Slave protocol. The device at the PC terminal end ( WIN ECP End)sends the command dial up string whereas the DPU 2000R modem end must be configured to AUTOANSWERcapabilities. If a ZOOM Modem is placed at the Host end and a US Robotics modem is placed at the IED end,the following configuration must be configured for each.

EC

Address 19600 BaudStd 10 Byte ProtocolTPU 2000R

Public SwitchedTelephone Network

Personal Computer WithWIN ECP Installed

10 Bit Dial Up MODEM 10 Bit Dial Up MODEM

Auto- AnswerEnabled

Example Cable 1-Figure 6.Example Cable 6 or 7

Figures 12 or 13.

Figure 16 – Application Topology Diagram PC TO TPU 2000R Point To Point.

Figures 17 and 18 illustrate the WIN ECP screens required for connectivity to the device upon dial up. Uponexecution of the ABB WIN ECP program, the initial screen shown in Figure 17 appears. One should selectRemote Access which allows attachment to the remote modem if the proper AT command strings and numericdial out instructions are given.


212

Figure 17- Initial ABB WIN ECP Access Screen

If one depresses the OK button after selecting the WINDOWS RADIO button Selection for Remote Access, thescreen as illustrated in Figure 18 appears.

Figure 18 - Parameter Selection Screen For Remote Dial – Up Access

The COM PORT is that of the PC’s modem port for attachment to the phone line.The Baud Rate is that for the remote modem and must match that of the Standard 10 Byte port which the modemis attached to the TPU 2000R.The Frame is that selected for the Remote TPU 2000R.

The Unit Address is the unit address of the Remote TPU 2000R node.

If Pulse Dial is selected, then the the Modem Command for sending the Pulse command is sent when dialing thenumber, otherwise, if Tone Dial is selected the command ATDT is sent to prefix the modem dial out string. In thiscase, the Tone Dial selection is activated.The dialup string is:

ATDT ,,,,18005551212 (the substation number of the remote device)To hang up the device the WIN ECP program must be able to send the command:

ATH0


213

Additionally, one must be sure that the appropriate modem configuration strings have been accepted by themodem for correct handshake control and remote auto answer configuration.

Connectivity Example 2– REL 3XX TO RCP Configuration Software

If one wished to connect an ABB transmission relay such as a REL 300 (MDAR), REL 301, REL 302, REL 350,REL 352 or REL 356 to its configuration software (RCP – Remote Communication Program), using a dial upconfiguration as illustrated in Figure 19 is quite possible. The REL transmission relay uses a PONI R card fordirect point to point communication via a cable or a modem. Please reference Instruction Leaflet 40-603 titledRCP Communication Program Users GUIDE and Instruction Leaflet 40-610 titled RS-PONI RS 232 ProductOperated Network Interface User’s Guide.

9600 BaudStd 10 Byte ProtocolREL 350Public Switched

Telephone Network - ANALOG LINE

Personal Computer WithRCP Installed


Auto- AnswerEnabled

Example Cable 1-Figures 7 or 8..Example Cable 6 or 7

Figures 12 or 13.

��

��

��

��

Figure 19 - RCP TO REL 350 Communication Topology Example

In this example, a REL 350 shall be connected together with two US ROBOTIC Model 005686 Sportster Modemsas described previously in this application note. RCP software shall be configured to communicate to the REL350 via the aforementioned modems. Several steps are to be completed in this example.

1. Configure the PONI R dipswitches to correspond to the appropriate baud rates of the modem andRCP software.

2. Attach the correct cables as to the relay devices as indicated in Figure 19. In this examplehowever, we shall disable handshaking (RTS/CTS) in the modem, so a straight through DTE toDCE cable is necessary.

3. Configure the US ROBOTIC modems to enable/disable the appropriate features.4. Configure the RCP software to connect to the modem and enable communications.5. Execute the communication command sequence and establish communications.

STEP 1In this example, the communication baud rate selection shall be set for 9600 baud. The baud rate of the PONI Rcard is configured via dipswitches located at the rear of the card, consult the PONI R manual referenced in thisdocument. Also configure the PONI R card for NO COMMAND ISSUED mode. If one is to view the dipswitchesof the PONI R (installed in the REL 350) card, the four dipswitch positions (left to right) are upward, and therightmost dipswitch is downward. This corresponds to dipswitch positions 1 through 5 being 1 0 0 0 0 or ON,OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF. The PONI R CARD is now configured.

STEP 2As per Figure 19, connect the cables as indicated for the personal computer to modem and the REL 350 PONI Rto modem connection. In this example, the handshaking shall be disabled on the PONI R card modem. Thuseven using standard off the shelf cables (9 to 25 pin cables with each pin run straight through) shall operate inthis example.

STEP 3Now the modems shall be configured. Using the HYPERTERMINAL program supplied with Windows 95, 98, NTor 2000 can be used to configure the modems. Using hyperterminal as illustrated in Figure 20, one can issue theAT commands to configure the modem.


214

Figure 20 - Hyperterminal At Command Set Example

Each modem must be configured in this method. The modem parameters and dipswitch settings shall be coveredfor each modem location.

Dipswitch Settings For The Modem Local To RCP:

Modem Dipswitch PositionPosition 1 UP – Data TerminalPosition 2 UP – Verbal Results CodesPosition 3 DOWN – Display Results CodesPosition 4 UP-Echo Offline CommandsPosition 5 DOWN – Disable auto answerPosition 6 DOWN – Carrier Detect OverridePosition 7 UP – Load NVRAM defaultsPosition 8 DOWN – Smart Mode

Dipswitch Settings For The Modem Local To The REL 350/ PONI R card:

Modem Dipswitch PositionPosition 1 UP – Data TerminalPosition 2 UP – Verbal Results CodesPosition 3 DOWN – Display Results CodesPosition 4 UP-Echo Offline CommandsPosition 5 UP – Auto Answer on the first ring, or higher if specified in NVRAMPosition 6 DOWN – Carrier Detect OverridePosition 7 UP – Load NVRAM defaultsPosition 8 DOWN – Smart Mode

In setting the modems via the AT command set, it was determined that the modem closest to the computerexecuting the RCP program shall use the factory defaults of the modem right out of the box. If one was to viewthe USROBOTICS troubleshooting guide (available on the www.3com.com website) the factory defaults are listed in the downloadable files.

For the modem attached to the RCP program, one must change a few parameters within the modem to ensureconnectivity. Starting with the factory default settings with the modem right out of the box, one should issue theAT commands:


215

AT&H0&D0&K0&R1&S0

Which corresponds to the following definitions as designated in the USROBOTICS literature:

&H0 = Flow Control Disabled&D0 = DTR Override (Default)&K0 = DATA COMPRESSION DISABLED&R1=MODEM IGNORES RTS&S0 = DSR OVERRIDE ALWAYS ON

As stated previously, other commands could be issued to the modem to allow it to peacefully co-exist and operatewith the PONI R card. It is highly recommended to write the settings to the EEPROM in the modem by issuing theAT&W 1 or AT&W2 command

STEP 4The RCP program must now be configured to operate with the modem and issue the commands. The steps touse this are as follows:

One must start RCP and enter the standard start screen as illustrated in Figure 21.

Figure 21 – RCP Standard Setup Screen

One must configure a substation file for the REL 350 connection. Depress the Alternate key and Ssimultaneously to enter the Substation menu and depress the down arrow “↓ ” once to select “ New SubstationFile” menu selection as illustrated in Figure 22.


216

Figure 22 –New Substation Setup Screen

A file must be configured for the REL 350 connection. Since a PONI R card is not addressable, it is considered apoint to point device. As illustrated in Figure 23, one must pick an option for the configuration . In our example(as shown in the topology of Figure 19), although the REL 350 is networked through a modem, the connection isstill point to point, one must select the selection “1” to allow correct connectivity. Figure 23 illustrates the screenqueries and answers for this specific example.

As illustrated in Figure 24, the operator must supply additional configuration data. Figure 24 lists the configurationresponses for this example. Configuration data to be supplied is as such:

RELAY TYPE – in this case selection 5 (REL 350) is selected.DEVICE DESCRIPTION – This field is used only for documentation purposes.

LOGON SEQUENCE – In this example, the ATDT command is used for a pulse tone telephone system. Also inthis example, an analog system is used and an additional prefix of “9” must be dialed to access the external publictelephone system, the comma “,” is used to insert a delay before dialing the telephone number of the remotelocation (where the REL 350 resides). In this instance, the substation is located in a telephone overlay areawhere the area code must be dialed with the main number. Additionally, since the remote modem is resident atan analog extension, several commas “,” are added to create a delay for the phone line to transfer to thatextension and then synchronize with the remote modem. A query is generated to accept the configuration and arequest for the file name to store the information is then requested (without the operating system file extension).

Figure 23 – Initial Substation Configuration Screen


217

Figure 24 – Final Substation Configuration Screen Query

One must then configure the RCP program to execute the dial up sequence and configure the personal computercommunication port selected. One must depress the Alternate key and “C” key simultaneouslyto access the “COMMUNICATE” menu shown in Figure 25.

Figure 25 – Communicate Menu Selections

One should depress the down arrow key ““↓ ” once to select the settings menu to configure the port type, baudrate, and communication port selection as illustrated in Figure 26.


218

Figure 26 – RCP Settings Selection Screen

For this example, one must configure the RCP program for the same parameters as the PONI R card, in herwords, 9600 Baud. (Selection 9 in the Bit Rate Selection Submenu) shown in Figure 27.

Figure 27 – Communication Baud Rate Setting Screen

Execute the same procedure to access the RS232/MODEM Selection submenu. The selection for modem mustbe selected. By using this selection, the query for ATDT dial out command screen will be issued when issuing theconnect command prompt.

Figure 28 illustrates the screen presented for the RS 232/ MODEM prompt.


219

Figure 28 – MODEM/RS 232 Screen Prompt Selection Submenu

The COM PORT Selection menu must be used to select the PC computer port though which RCP will issuecommands. In the sample case, the PC used has only one com port port “1’” . The selections for thecommunication port parameters are shown on the bottom right hand side of the communication screen.

One must now select the previously configured file for operation. Simultaneously depress the “ALT” and ”S” keyson the keypad to select the Substation Screen as illustrated in Figure 22. Highlight the “SELECT SUBSTATION”selection. The screen as shown in Figure 29 will be presented. As illustrated, the file REL350md .sub is availablefor selection. Depress the right arrow key “→” twice to select the file (highlighted as shown) and depress the enterkey. Depress the enter key again to select the REL 350 description of the intended IED to be attached.

Finally, one must initiate communications with the relay. Depress the alternate “C” keys simultaneously to viewthe menu as illustrated in Figure 25. Highlight the “INITIATE “ selection and depress the enter key to display thedial out query shown in Figure 30.

Notice that the dial out telephone number is visible. Depress the “Y” key on the keyboard to initiatecommunications. One should notice a black screen as illustrated in Figure 31 which follows. Once the modemconnects end to end, one will be prompted to depress the enter key to return to the main screen as shown inFigure 21. One may then proceed to the “RELAY COMMANDS” menu to query the relay for information. Themodem is configured to operate the speaker (there is a volume control on the left hand side of the modem as onefaces the front of the modem) until connection occurs.


220

Figure 29 – Substation File Selection Screen

Figure 30 – Dial Out Initiation

Figure 31 – Modem Command Mode Screen Upon Device Connection


221

At the conclusion of the communication session, one must remember to “hang up” the modem and disconnect thedevice. Depressing the Alternate key and the “C” key simultaneously will display the screen as illustrated inFigure 25. Use the down arrow “↓ ” to select the “HANG UP” selection. The program will issue the AT&H0command.

Example 3 – Connection Of A REL 512 ASCII Front Port To Hyperterminal Software

PREFACE - The REL 512 differs from the other two relays presented in EXAMPLE 2 and EXAMPLE 1 above. The communication port is a master/slave port design. The configuration port uses ASCII strings in that a dumbterminal interface is able to attach and display the device settings/metering parameters. The REL 512 sends out(via its RD line) a time/date ASCII string every minute for display on the attached device. This fact is very criticalin that the modem or device attached must be able to tolerate this string. Additionally, the REL 3XX products orthe TPU/DPU 2000R , GPU 2000R or DPU 1500R communication ports are slave only in their protocol design.The port only responds to requests. The REL 512 differs in that it sends out at time string without any promptingto the attached device.

The REL 512 also uses a numeric character or alphabet character to move through its menus. The other devicesdiscussed in the other examples use protocols and do not respond to the attached device strings. The REL 512will respond to each character. As shown in this example, the attached device (in this case the modem) must beable to tolerate this operational characteristic.

The REL 512 has settings capabilities configurable and viewable via its front com port (which is a DCE RS232port) or its front panel interface. Any dumb terminal emulator is able to connect to the front port and synchronizewith the unit to allow visualization of the REL 512 parameters. Within this example, two US ROBOTIC model002806 (V.EVERYTHING modem using trellis technology encoding [which differs from the QAM encoding]). Asillustrated in Figure 32, the modems are configured via a point to point connection. The REL 512 ASCII protocolis not addressable and therefore cannot be multi-dropped unless port switch devices are added to the system.The steps to establish communications are:

1. Connect the correct cable between the REL 512 front and the modem.2. Connect the correct cable between the PC executing the HYPERTERMINAL program (in this case

the operating system used is WINDOWS 95).3. Parameterization of the REL 512 front port communication parameters.4. Parameterization of the HYPERTERMINAL settings.5. Parameterization of the USROBOTICS modems using its particular AT command set.6. Execution of the connectivity procedure to establish communications.

As illustrated in Figure 32, the topology of the REL 512 interconnection with the HYPERTERMINAL software isillustrated. Please note on the diagram, the appropriate cables used to connect the device. In this example, thecommunication handshaking cannot be used since RTS/CTS, DCD, DSR, DTR signals are not supported on theREL 512 front communication RS 232 port.


222

19200 BaudREL512 MENU ASCIIREL 512Public Switched


Personal Computer WithAn Operating SystemOffering a HYPERTERMINALUtility


Auto- AnswerEnabled

Example Cable 4-Figure 5..Example Cable 6 or 7

Figures 12 or 13.

��

��

��

�� LOCAL LOCATION

REMOTELOCATION

Figure 32 – Modem Connection Between A REL 512 Front Port And Hyperterminal ConfigurationSoftware

Step 1 And Step 2: Attach the Correct Cables to the Devices

Connect the cables as illustrated in Figure 32 above.

Step 3: Configure the REL512 Communication Port

Configure the front port interface of the REL 512 with the correct parameters. The standard configuration for theREL 512 is:

8 Data BitsNo Parity2Stop Bits9600 Baud.

Configure the font port with these parameters:

8 Data BitsNo Parity1Stop Bit19200 Baud.

The procedure to configure the front port interface is as follows:

When connecting a device to the front port of the relay, the communication parameters for the port must bechanged to reflect those of the device to which it is connecting. To change the parameters via the REL 512 frontpanel interface one could follow the procedure as follows:

1. From the screen of the Front Panel Interface viewing the meter readings, Depress the “E” key to get the menu:

E Fault Records→ Device Info← Edit SettingsC Metering

2. Depress the Left Arrow Key “←” to Display the MenuE Edit Settings→ Fault Records← View SettingsC Metering


223

3. Depress the “E” Key to display the menuE Password

********C Edit Settings

One must enter the CORRECT password to change the relay settings for this procedure. The default passwordfor the REL 512 is “ABB” (without the quotation marks). If the password has been changed, please enter thecorrect password as follows:

• Depress the up arrow “↑ ” or down arrow “↓ ” to page through the numeric and alphabet selections for thepassword.

• Depress the left arrow “←” or the right arrow ”→” to move through the different positions of the password.

4. Depress the “ E” key to accept the password selection you have entered. If the password is accepted thefollowing screen shall be visible.

E Password← AcceptedC Edit Settings

5. Depress the left arrow “←” key to accept the settings and proceed to the next menu which is shown E Sys Settings

→ Act SettingsC Edit Settings

6. Depress “E” so that the System Settings may be changed. The following menu item shall be displayed:E CHG ACTIVE GRP→ IDENTIFICATIONC System Settings

7. Depress the right arrow key “→” to display the following screen:E IDENTIFICATION→ SYSTEM PARAM← DATE & TIMEC Sys Settings

8. Depress the right arrow key “→” to display the following screen:E SYSTEM PARAM→ COMM PORTS← IDENTIFICATIONC Sys Settings

9. Depress the right arrow key “→” to display the following screen: E COMM PORTS

→ DATA RECORDING← SYSTEM PARAMSC Sys Settings

10. Depress the “E” key to display the following screen:E FRONT PORT→ REAR PORT← MODBUS IDC COM PORTS

Since this example is a guide to configuring the communication settings for the FRONT COM ASCII port, pleaserefer to step 11 for FRONT PORT CONFIGURATION INSTRUCTIONS.

11. Depress the “E” key to display the following screen:E FRNT BIT RATE→ FRNT DATA LGTH← FRNT STOP BITSC FRONT PORT


224

12. Depress the “E” key to display the following screen:E ENTER System Group← 115200C FRNT BIT RATE

By depressing the “←” left arrow key, one can view the baud rate selections for the REL 512 front port interface.The available selections are:

115200 2400960019200

Select the desired baud rate by depressing the “E” key.

13. Depress the “C” key to display the following screenE FRNT BIT RATE→ FRNT DATA LGTH← FRNT STOP BITSC FRONT PORT

14. One must then select the Front panel data length depress the “→” to reveal the following screen.E FRNT DATA LNGTH→ FRNT PARITY← FRNT BIT RATEC FRONT PORT

15. One must select the Front Port Data Length. Depressing the “E” key allows visualization of the followingmenu.

E ENTERSystem Group

← 8C FRNT DATA LNGTH

Depressing the left arrow key “←” allows the operator to select from the following data lengths:87

16 Depress “E” to accept the parameters and then depress the “C” to return to the menu:E FRNT DATA LNGTH→ FRNT PARITY← FRNT BIT RATEC FRONT PORT

1. One must set the parity by depressing the left arrow key “←” to display the following screen.E EDIT PARITY→ FRNT STOP BITS← FRNT DATA LNGTHC FRONT PORT

2. Depress “E” to display the following screenE ENTER

System Group← NONEC FRNT PARITY

By depressing the left arrow key “←” the choices for parity are displayed. The choices for selection are:NONEODDEVEN

19. Depress the “C” key to display the following screenE FRNT BIT RATE→ FRNT DATA LGTH


225

← FRNT STOP BITSC FRONT PORT

20.Depress the left arrow key “←” to select the Front Panel Stop Bit selections. The following Screen should be visible.

E ENTERSystem Group

← 1C FRNT STOP BITS

The selections for Stop Bits are 1 or 2.

21.Depress the “E” key to accept the selections. 22.Depress the “C” key to back out of the relay and accept the settings when prompted by the front panel Interface.

Step 4: Configure Hyperterminal

Configuration of HYPERTERMINAL requires a few easy steps. The same configuration of hyperterminal may beused for two tasks:

• Configuration of the MODEMS with the AT command sets.• Dial out and query of the REL 512 MENU ASCII SCREENS for device configuration and file

retrieval.

The REL 512 FRONT port as illustrated in TABLE 1 does not offer handshaking. Therefore, setup requires thatno handshaking be used for HYPERTERMINAL. HYPERTERMINAL MUST BE SET UP WITHCOMMUNICATION PARAMETERS WHICH MATCH THAT OF STEP 3 ABOVE, namely:

8 Data Bits1 Stop BitNo Parity19200 Baud

The steps to accomplish this are as follows:1. Select HYPERTERMINAL from the WINDOWS menu to reveal the following screen illustrated in

Figure 33.2. Select the icon labeled Hyperterminal.exe The screen illustrated in Figure 34 should be visible. The

operator will be prompted for a name as illustrated.

Figure 33 – Hyperterminal Selection Screen


226

Figure 34 – Hyperterminal Setup Screen

3. Once the OK icon has been depressed, the screen for port setup will be displayed. Note that theport setup menu is illustrated for display and COM 1 selection is highlighted for this example andselection. Notice that with the MODEM selection (for the built in computer internal modem)deselected, the some of the fields are “greyed out”.

4. The COM properties for the modem must be selected for this example to those selected for the REL512. In this case the same settings configured for the REL 512 in STEP 3 are selected for theinterface. Notice that the settings are selected in Figure 35 for those configured in STEP 3. Noticefor this example, hardware handshaking is enabled for RTS/CTS configuration (sinceHYPERTERMINAL TO MODEM CONFIGURATION IS OCCURING NOTE: REL 512 DOES NOTHAVE HANDSHAKING AND THE MODEM WILL BE CONFIGURED AS SUCH).

5. Once the OK pushbutton is depressed, the screen depicted in Figure 37 is presented to theoperator. AT commands can now be typed to configure the modem with the appropriate parametersfor operation in this system.

Figure 35 – Com Port Configuration For Attachment Of Hyperterminal Session


227

Figure 36 – Com Port Settings Configuration Screen

The configuration process for this step is now complete.

Step 5: Configuration Of The Modem Parameters For The Local And Remote Sites

THE USROBOTICS modems used (Model 002806- V.Everything) have commands similar to those of theprevious USROBOTIC modems. Several differences are apparent with respect to their “S” register configurationsand auto configurability. Additional sessions may be set up to allow remote configuration. However, it is stronglyadvised that remote configuration and automation dial up capabilities not be used with the REL 512 sincedifficulties may result since handshaking is not available.

Another word of caution should be issued in that the V.Everything modem may experience difficulties connectingwith the REL 512 master/slave emulation of the port during dial-up sessions. IF the MODEM is undergoing theattachment process and the REL 512 happens to send out its time ASCII string to the MODEM simultaneously,the modem will disconnect and display the prompt “NO CARRIER” at the host site. This process will take a fewminutes to occur and until this occurs, no communications will occur. If a command string is sensed via the SDline (remote modem LED will illumintate) during the dialing process, the remote modem will hang up (the remotemodem OH [On Hook]) LED will extinguish. There is no way to overcome this limitation in operation with thismodel of modem.

Some important words covering the configuration of the MODEM when used with the REL 512:

• DISABLE DTR (&D0)• USE THE DEFAULT DISABLE OF SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL (&I0)• DSR ALWAYS ON (&S0)• DISABLE CARRIER DETECT (&C0)

Thus the command string should look like this:

AT&D0&S0&I0&C0&W

Note the &W writes the current setting to the Non-Volitile RAM.

Additional tips are covered in the following tips for LOCAL modem configuration (that modem attached to theHYPERTERMINAL Personal Computer) and the REMOTE modem (that modem attached to the REL 512).Attach the cable from the PC to the modem undergoing the configuration process. It is advisable to label eachmodem location since the LOCAL modem will be configured slightly differently from the remote modem.


228

Local Modem

Local Modem parameters are illustrated in Figure 37. To display the current list of parameters, the commandstring AT&I4 should be typed in the HYPERTERMINAL environment. A list of the parameters used is shown.The LOCAL modem also may be configured via the dipswitches located underneath the relay.

Dipswitch Positions are:

POSITION 1 –UP = DTR Always ONPOSITION 2 –UP =VERBAL RESULTS CODEPOSITION 3 –DOWN = DISPLAY RESULTS CODEPOSITION 4 –UP =ECHO OFFLINE COMMANDSPOSITION 5 –DOWN =SUPPRESS AUTO ANSWERPOSITION 6 –DOWN = CARRIER DETECT OVERRIDEPOSITION 7 –UP =DISPLAY NORMAL RESULTS CODEPOSITION 8 –DOWN =ENABLE AT COMMAND SETPOSITION 9 –UP =NO DISCONNECT WITH +++POSITION 10 –UP =LOAD NVRAM DEFAULTS

NOTE this local modem is only configured for DIAL OUT capability – no auto answer. Additionally, all commandsare echo’ed back to the terminal for easy access and troubleshooting. Upon Power UP the NVRAM defaults areloaded into memory. It is also illustrates in Figure 33 that handshaking is enabled. No other parameters havebeen changed from the default settings.

Figure 37 – Local Modem Configuration Parameters

Remote Modem

The configuration requirements for the remote modem vary slightly from the local modem. The configuredcommands in the REMOTE modem are illustrated in Figure 38. The parameters configured in your remotemodem may be accessable using the command AT&I4. It is important to connect the HYPERTERMINALprogram to the modem being configured as REMOTE to accomplish this. It is also advisable to label the modemas being a REMOTE device for identification purposes only.

The remote modem should have all its handshaking requirements turned off. Additionally, the COMMAND MODEECHO and the ONLINE MODE ECHO must be disabled. Failure to disable these parameters will lockup thebuffer of the modem and the REL 512 since the connect strings, REL 512 time ASCII strings (on a 1 minute basis)will be returned to the REL 512 for response.


229

The important command strings to configure are:

• DISABLE DTR (&D0)• USE THE DEFAULT DISABLE OF SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL (&I0)• DSR ALWAYS ON (&S0)• ONLINE ECHO OFF (E0)• ONLINE LOCAL ECHO OFF (F1)• DISABLE CARRIER DETECT (&C0)• DISABLE TRANSMIT FLOW CONTROL (&H0)• DISABLE RECEIVED DATA RTS CONTROL (&R1)

The AT command set string should look like this:

AT&D0&I0&S0E0F1&C0&H0&R1&WAs with the previous example, the &W writes the command string to NVRAM.

Since this modem is configured for AUTO ANSWER, certain “S” registers should be configured for optimalperformance. In this example, sample “S “ register values are given as an example. The user should engineerappropriate values for their application:

• ATS0=3 (3 Rings before Auto Answer)• ATS41=10 ( 10 Attempts before disconnect of Auto Answer)• ATS19 = 1 (1 Minute Inactivity causes hang up).

The “S” register definitions are particular to this particular brand of modem. Refer to the website or CD ROMincluded with the modem to verify correctness. As explained previously, the command AT&W should be sent tothe device to write the parameters into NVRAM.

Figure 38 – Remote Modem Settings

As described in for the local modem, the following dipswitches could be configured for power-up auto-configuration:


POSITION 1 –UP = DTR Always ONPOSITION 2 –UP =VERBAL RESULTS CODE


230

POSITION 3 –UP = SUPPRESS RESULTS CODEPOSITION 4 –DOWN =NO ECHO OFFLINE COMMANDSPOSITION 5 –UP = AUTO ANSWER ON RINGPOSITION 6 –DOWN = CARRIER DETECT OVERRIDEPOSITION 7 –DOWN =INHIBIT DISPLAY NORMAL RESULTS CODEPOSITION 8 –DOWN =ENABLE AT COMMAND SET *** (see note that follows)POSITION 9 –UP =NO DISCONNECT WITH +++POSITION 10 –UP =LOAD NVRAM DEFAULTS

***NOTE – Once configuration is complete it may be advisable to place dipswitch 8 in the UP position to disableAT commands. In this way if an “AT” command string is contained within the modem upload or download filestrings or ASCII command strings, the modem will not respond unpredictable or disrupt communications.

Step 6: Connection And Execution Of Attachment Procedure

Attach the modem to analog lines (local and remote). Use the ATDT command string to access the modem asillustrated in Figure 39 using HYPERTERMINAL. Since the command echo is not suppressed for the localmodem, the example screen in Figure 39 shows the RING and CONNECT prompts returned upon successfulcommunication.

Figure 39 – ATDT Sample String And Successful Connection Banner

If the modem does not connect, then the REL 512 may have been sending its time string during the dial upprocedure. If this is the case, redial or modify the reconnect tries in the S19 register.

If the modem does connect, then depress the “/” key or Backspace key on the keyboard to reveal the REL 512startup screen illustrated in Figure 40.

To exit the session, depress the hang up icon located on the HYPERTERMINAL screen or the HANG UPsubmenu located on the TERMINAL screen. Also one may send the AT&H0 string for hang up.


231

Figure 40 - REL 512 Configuration Menu Screen

Example 4 – Connection Of A REL512 ASCII Serial Port 2 (Rear Port) To HyperterminalSoftware

The REL 512 has settings capabilities configurable and viewable via its rear com port (which is a DTE RS232port). Any dumb terminal emulator is able to connect to the rear port and synchronize with the unit to allowvisualization of the REL 512 parameters. Within this example, two USROBOTIC model 002806 (V.EVERYTHINGmodem using trellis technology encoding [which differs from the QAM encoding]). As illustrated in Figure 41, themodems are configured via a point to point connection. The REL 512 ASCII protocol is not addressable andtherefore cannot be multi-dropped unless port switch devices are added to the system. The steps to establishcommunications are:

1. Connect the correct cable between the REL 512 SERIAL 2 port and the modem.2. Connect the correct cable between the PC executing the HYPERTERMINAL program (in this case

the operating system used is WINDOWS 95).3. Parameterize the REL 512 rear port communication parameters.4. Set the jumpers internal to the relay for correct RS 232 port configuration5. Configure and set HYPERTERMINAL settings.6. Parameterize each USROBOTICS modem using its particular AT command set.7. Execute the connectivity procedure to establish communications.

As illustrated in Figure 41, the topology of the REL 512 interconnection with the HYPERTERMINAL software isillustrated. Please note on the diagram, the appropriate cables used to connect the device. In this example,handshaking will be used to provide coordination between the modems. The USROBOTIC modems allow CarrierLoss Redial capability along with dial back security capability. Although these features will not be configured andexamined in this rudimentary application note, the RS 232 handshaking features will be set up to its fullestcapability to allow addition (and reliability in operation) of these capabilities at a later date.


232

19200 BaudREL Menu ASCII ProtocolREL 512Public Switched


Personal Computer WithRCP Installed


Auto- AnswerEnabled

Example Cable 5-Figures 11..Example Cable 6 or 7

Figures 12 or 13.

��

��

��

�� LOCAL LOCATION

REMOTE LOCATION

Figure 41 – Modem Connection Between A REL 512 Serial Port 2 (Located At The Back Of TheRelay) And Hyperterminal Configuration Software

Step 1:

Construct and attach the cable as illustrated in Figure 41 above for the REL 512 / modem connection. (REMOTELOCATION).

Step 2:

Construct and attach the cable as illustrated in Figure 41 above for the personal computer to modem connection.(LOCAL LOCATION

Step 3:

Configure the rear port interface of the REL 512 with the correct parameters. The default parameters for all portsare 9600 baud, 8 data bits, No parity , 2 Stop bits. However, with the standard configuration, the port cannot beused with a 10 bit modem as previously explained. The Serial port 2 (located at the back side of the REL 512)must be configured following the attached procedure. Configure the font port with these parameters which arecompatible for operation with a 10 bit modem:

19200 Baud8 Data BitsNo Parity1 Stop Bit

The procedure to configure the REAR port interface is as follows:

When connecting a device to the front port of the relay, the communication parameters for the port must bechanged to reflect those of the device to which it is connecting. To change the parameters via the REL 512 frontpanel interface one could follow the procedure as follows:

1. From the screen of the Front Panel Interface viewing the meter readings, Depress the “E” key to get the menu:

E Fault Records→ Device Info← Edit SettingsC Metering

2. Depress the Left Arrow Key “←” to Display the MenuE Edit Settings→ Fault Records← View SettingsC Metering


233

3. Depress the “E” Key to display the menuE Password

********C Edit Settings

One must enter the CORRECT password to change the relay settings for this procedure. The default passwordfor the REL 512 is “ABB” (without the quotation marks). If the password has been changed, please enter thecorrect password as follows:

• Depress the up arrow “↑ ” or down arrow “↓ ” to page through the numeric and alphabet selections for thepassword.

• Depress the left arrow “←” or the right arrow ”→” to move through the different positions of the password.

4. Depress the “ E” key to accept the password selection you have entered. If the password is accepted the following screen shall be visible.

E Password← AcceptedC Edit Settings

5. Depress the left arrow “←” key to accept the settings and proceed to the next menu which is shown E Sys Settings

→ Act SettingsC Edit Settings

6. Depress “E” so that the System Settings may be changed. The following menu item shall be displayed:E CHG ACTIVE GRP→ IDENTIFICATIONC System Settings

7. Depress the right arrow key “→” to display the following screen:E IDENTIFICATION→ SYSTEM PARAM← DATE & TIMEC Sys Settings

8. Depress the right arrow key “→” to display the following screen:E SYSTEM PARAM→ COMM PORTS← IDENTIFICATIONC Sys Settings

9. Depress the right arrow key “→” to display the following screen: E COMM PORTS

→ DATA RECORDING← SYSTEM PARAMSC Sys Settings

10. Depress the “E” key to display the following screen:E FRONT PORT→ REAR PORT← MODBUS IDC COM PORTS

Since this example is a guide to configuring the communication settings for the FRONT COM ASCII port, pleaserefer to step 11 for FRONT PORT CONFIGURATION INSTRUCTIONS.

11. Depress the “→” key to display the following screen:E REAR BIT RATE→ REAR DATA LGTH← REAR STOP BITSC REAR PORT


234

12. Depress the “E” key to display the following screen:E ENTER System Group← 115200C REAR BIT RATE

By depressing the “←” left arrow key, one can view the baud rate selections for the REL 512 REAR port interface.The available selections are:

115200 2400960019200

Select the desired baud rate by depressing the “E” key.

13. Depress the “C” key to display the following screenE REAR BIT RATE→ REAR DATA LGTH← REAR STOP BITSC REAR PORT

14. One must then select the Front panel data length depress the “→” to reveal the following screen.E REAR DATA LNGTH→ REAR PARITY← REAR BIT RATEC REAR PORT

15. One must select the Front Port Data Length. Depressing the “E” key allows visualization of the followingmenu.

E ENTERSystem Group

← 8C REAR DATA LNGTH

Depressing the left arrow key “←” allows the operator to select from the following data lengths:87

16. Depress “E” to accept the parameters and then depress the “C” to return to the menu:E REAR DATA LNGTH→ REAR PARITY← REAR BIT RATEC REAR PORT

17. One must set the parity by depressing the left arrow key “←” to display the following screen.E EDIT PARITY→ REAR STOP BITS← REAR DATA LNGTHC REAR PORT

18. Depress “E” to display the following screenE ENTER

System Group← NONEC REAR PARITY

By depressing the left arrow key “←” the choices for parity are displayed. The choices for selection are:NONEODDEVEN


235

19. Depress the “C” key to display the following screenE REAR BIT RATE→ REAR DATA LGTH← REAR STOP BITSC REAR PORT

20. Depress the left arrow key “←” to select the REAR Panel Stop Bit selections. The following Screen should bevisible.

E ENTERSystem Group

← 1C REAR STOP BITS

The selections for Stop Bits are 1 or 2.

21. Depress the “E” key to accept the selections.22. Depress the “C” key to back out of the relay and accept the settings when prompted by the REAR panel

interface.

Step 4:

The REL 512 Serial Port 2 is able to be configured for RS232 or RS 485 connectivity. The configurationprocedure is achieved via jumpers located near the Serial Port 2 interface on the relay. The default configurationfor the relay is RS232. However one should verify jumper settings via the following procedure:

1. The technician performing this operation should be wearing anti-static wrist straps and work on ananti-static environment to ensure that static electricitiy is not conducted between the operator andREL 512 internal components.

2. Rotate the knurled screws to the left and right of the REL 512, which secure the front panel interfaceto the housing of the unit. The knurled screws should be turned counterclockwise (or to the left) toloosen the screws.

3. Remove the blue and red ribbon cable interconnecting the electronic signals between the front panelinterface and the REL 512 motherboard. The internal assembly of theunit should be visible.

4. While grasping the internal assembly ejectors, and cantilevering the ejectors towards you, remove theinternal assembly board from the chassis.

5. As illustrated, 5 jumpers are located near the rear serial port connector. The jumper locations for RS232 and RS 485 operation are listed in TABLE 2. Ensure that the jumpers placed in the locationscorresponding to the RS232 positions listed in the table.

6. Place the board into the REL 512 housing pressing the assembly ejectors with even force to mate theconnections within the assembly with the REL 512 motherboard.

7. Carefully reattach the blue and red ribbon cable interconnecting the electronic signals between thefront panel interface and the REL 512 motherboard.

8. With the front panel interface in the correct position, secure the front panel interface with the housingby tightening the knurled screws on the left and right side of the panel. The screws should be rotatedclockwise (or to the right).


236

Table 2 - Card Jumper Settings

Jumper Pins 1,2 2,3Mode Selection:

JP1-4 RS-232 RS-485RS-485 Configuration

JP5 Half duplex Full duplexJP6 2 wire 4 wireJP7 2 wire 4 wire

RS-485 Termination/Bias Resistors:Jp8 121 Ohms OpenJP9 523 Ohms OpenJP10 523 Ohms Open

Step 5:

The operator should configure the HYPERTERMINAL settings to match those of the configuration made for theREL 512. The procedure is as follows:

1. Select HYPERTERMINAL from the WINDOWS menu to reveal the following screen illustrated inFigure 42.

2. Select the icon labeled Hyperterminal.exe The screen illustrated in Figure 43 should be visible. Theoperator will be prompted for a name as illustrated.

Figure 42 – Hyperterminal Selection Screen


237

Figure 43 – Hyperterminal Setup Screen

3. Once the OK icon has been depressed, the screen for port setup will be displayed. Note that theport setup menu is illustrated for display and COM 1 selection is highlighted for this example andselection. Notice that with the MODEM selection (for the built in computer internal modem)deselected, the some of the fields are “greyed out”.

4. The COM properties for the modem must be selected for this example to those selected for the REL512. In this case the same settings configured for the REL 512 in STEP 3 are selected for theinterface. Notice that the settings are selected in Figure 44 for those configured in STEP 3. Noticefor this example, hardware handshaking is enabled for RTS/CTS configuration.

6. Once the OK pushbutton is depressed, the screen depicted in Figure 45 is presented to theoperator. AT commands can now be typed to configure the modem with the appropriate parametersfor operation in this system.

Figure 44 – Com Port Configuration For Attachment Of Hyperterminal Session


238

Figure 45 – Com Port Settings Configuration Screen

Figure 46 – Hyperterminal Screen For Data Communication Entry.

Steps 6 And 7: Configuration Of The Modem Parameters For The Local And RemoteSites

THE USROBOTICS modems used (Model 002806- V.Everything) have commands similar to those of theprevious USROBOTIC modems. Several differences are apparent with respect to their “S” register configurationsand auto configurability. Additional sessions may be set up to allow remote configuration. However, it is stronglyadvised that remote configuration and automation dial up capabilities not be used with the REL 512 sincedifficulties may result since handshaking is not available.

Another word of caution should be issued in that the V.Everything modem may experience difficulties connectingwith the REL 512 master/slave emulation of the port during dial-up sessions. IF the MODEM is undergoing theattachment process and the REL 512 happens to send out its time ASCII string to the MODEM simultaneously,the modem will disconnect and display the prompt “NO CARRIER” at the host site. This process will take a fewminutes to occur and until this occurs, no communications will occur. If a command string is sensed via the SDline (remote modem LED will illumintate) during the dialing process, the remote modem will hang up (he remote


239

modem OH [On Hook]) LED will extinguish. There is no way to overcome this limitation in operation with thismodel of modem.

Some important words covering the configuration of the MODEM when used with the REL 512:• DISABLE DTR (&D0)• USE THE DEFAULT DISABLE OF SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL (&I0)• DSR ALWAYS ON (&S0)• DISABLE CARRIER DETECT (&C0)

Thus the command string should look like this:

AT&D0&S0&I0&C0&W

Note the &W writes the current setting to the Non-Volitile RAM.

Additional tips are covered in the following tips for LOCAL modem configuration (that modem attached to theHYPERTERMINAL Personal Computer) and the REMOTE modem (that modem attached to the REL 512).Attach the cable from the PC to the modem undergoing the configuration process. It is advisable to label eachmodem location since the LOCAL modem will be configured slightly differently from the remote modem.

Local Modem

Local Modem parameters are illustrated in Figure 47. To display the current list of parameters, the commandstring AT&I4 should be typed in the HYPERTERMINAL environment. A list of the parameters used is shown.The LOCAL modem also may be configured via the dipswitches located underneath the relay.


POSITION 1 –UP = DTR Always ONPOSITION 2 –UP =VERBAL RESULTS CODEPOSITION 3 –DOWN = DISPLAY RESULTS CODEPOSITION 4 –UP =ECHO OFFLINE COMMANDSPOSITION 5 –DOWN =SUPPRESS AUTO ANSWERPOSITION 6 –DOWN = CARRIER DETECT OVERRIDEPOSITION 7 –UP =DISPLAY NORMAL RESULTS CODEPOSITION 8 –DOWN =ENABLE AT COMMAND SETPOSITION 9 –UP =NO DISCONNECT WITH +++POSITION 10 –UP =LOAD NVRAM DEFAULTS

NOTE this local modem is only configured for DIAL OUT capability – no auto answer. Additionally, all commandsare echo’ed back to the terminal for easy access and troubleshooting. Upon Power UP the NVRAM defaults areloaded into memory. It is also illustrates in Figure 33 that handshaking is enabled. No other parameters havebeen changed from the default settings.


240

Figure 47 – Local Modem Configuration Parameters

Remote Modem

The configuration requirements for the remote modem vary slightly from the local modem. The configuredcommands in the REMOTE modem are illustrated in Figure 48. The parameters configured in your remotemodem may be accessable using the command AT&I4. It is important to connect the HYPERTERMINALprogram to the modem being configured as REMOTE to accomplish this. It is also advisable to label the modemas being a REMOTE device for identification purposes only.

The remote modem should have all its handshaking requirements turned off. Additionally, the COMMAND MODEECHO and the ONLINE MODE ECHO must be disabled. Failure to disable these parameters will lockup thebuffer of the modem and the REL 512 since the connect strings, REL 512 time ASCII strings (on a 1 minute basis)will be returned to the REL 512 for response.

The important command strings to configure are:

• DISABLE DTR (&D0)• USE THE DEFAULT DISABLE OF SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL (&I0)• DSR ALWAYS ON (&S0)• ONLINE ECHO OFF (E0)• ONLINE LOCAL ECHO OFF (F1)• DISABLE CARRIER DETECT (&C0)• DISABLE TRANSMIT FLOW CONTROL (&H0)• DISABLE RECEIVED DATA RTS CONTROL (&R1)

The AT command set string should look like this:

AT&D0&I0&S0E0F1&C0&H0&R1&WAs with the previous example, the &W writes the command string to NVRAM.

Since this modem is configured for AUTO ANSWER, certain “S” registers should be configured for optimalperformance. In this example, sample “S “ register values are given as an example. The user should engineerappropriate values for their application:

• ATS0=3 (3 Rings before Auto Answer)• ATS41=10 (10 Attempts before disconnect of Auto Answer)• ATS19 = 1 (1 Minute Inactivity causes hang up).


241

The “S” register definitions are particular to this particular brand of modem. Refer to the website or CD ROMincluded with the modem to verify correctness. As explained previously, the command AT&W should be sent tothe device to write the parameters into NVRAM.

Figure 48 – Remote Modem Settings

As described in for the local modem, the following dipswitches could be configured for power-up auto-configuration:


POSITION 1 –UP = DTR Always ONPOSITION 2 –UP =VERBAL RESULTS CODEPOSITION 3 –UP = SUPPRESS RESULTS CODEPOSITION 4 –DOWN =NO ECHO OFFLINE COMMANDSPOSITION 5 –UP = AUTO ANSWER ON RINGPOSITION 6 –DOWN = CARRIER DETECT OVERRIDEPOSITION 7 –DOWN =INHIBIT DISPLAY NORMAL RESULTS CODEPOSITION 8 –DOWN =ENABLE AT COMMAND SET *** (see note that follows)POSITION 9 –UP =NO DISCONNECT WITH +++POSITION 10 –UP =LOAD NVRAM DEFAULTS

***NOTE – Once configuration is complete it may be advisable to place dipswitch 8 in the UP position to disableAT commands. In this way if an “AT” command string is contained within the modem upload or download filestrings or ASCII command strings, the modem will not respond unpredictable or disrupt communications.

Step 8: Connection And Execution Of Attachment Procedure

Attach the modem to analog lines (local and remote). Use the ATDT command string to access the modem asillustrated in Figure 49 using HYPERTERMINAL. Since the command echo is not suppressed for the localmodem, the example screen in Figure 49 shows the RING and CONNECT prompts returned upon successfulcommunication.


242

Figure 49 – ATDT Sample String And Successful Connection Banner

If the modem does not connect, then the REL 512 may have been sending its time string during the dial upprocedure. If this is the case, redial or modify the reconnect tries in the S19 register.

If the modem does connect, then depress the “/” key or Backspace key on the keyboard to reveal the REL 512startup screen illustrated in Figure 50.

To exit the session, depress the hang up icon located on the HYPERTERMINAL screen or the HANG UPsubmenu located on the TERMINAL screen. Also one may send the AT&H0 string for hang up.

Figure 50 - REL 512 Configuration Menu Screen


243

Conclusion

In using modems, knowledge of many communication topics is required. This brief and rudimentary applicationnote covers only a miniscule amount of information needed to successfully attach a 10 Bit Telephone Modem toan Analog Public Switch Telephone Network. Proper engineering of a communication network requires areas ofinvestigation as:

• Protocol• Modem Compatibility With The Protocol• RS 232 DTE or DCE emulation with the IED and Host.• Device Handshaking Requirements• Modem AT Command Set Configuration• S Register Configuration• Modem Save Command Commands• Cabling Options

ABB relays have been proven to operate reliably with many manufacturer’s modems. Careful systemconfiguration is the key to a successful project installation. It is hoped that this rudimentary application noteassists the user in the task of easily and flawlessly attaching a modem to ABB products.

Contributed by:John PopiakRevision 1.0, 12/7/00


244

Appendix E- TELEBYTE RS 232/485 Converter Connection ToABB Protective Relays

ABSTRACT: There are many RS 232 to RS 485 converters on the market. Although ABB cannot and does notendorser a particular manufacturer of product, it does document several manufacturers’ products with their use insystems using ABB protective relays. This application note illustrates the setup and connection of the TELEBYTEModel 245 optically isolated RS 232 to RS485 (2-wire/4wire) physical interface converter.

Typical Installation

The ABB protective relay is designed with a variety of physical communication interfaces. The ABB distributionrelays such as the MSOC, GPU 2000R, TPU 2000R, DPU 2000R, DPU 2000, DPU 2000 and DPU 1500R areavailable with an RS 232, and/or RS 485 port(s).

Other devices such as the PONI M card for the REL 356 have only an RS 485 port.

Many host devices only have an RS 232 port(s). A method to connect such a device is required. Severalconverters are available to transform the physical interface on a device from RS 232 to RS 485. The advantagesof RS 485 are that many devices may be attached to a single host in a multi-drop topology. RS 485 maycommunicate with up to 32 devices with an addressable protocol. An advantage of the Telebyte 245 converter isthat, like the ABB protective relay, it is an isolated device.

General Information

Figure 1 illustrates the packaging of the Telebyte converter. The Telebyte Converter has two sets of red LED’sindicating transmission and reception of information on its ports. One set of LED’s indicatestransmission/reception of data on its RS 232 port. The second set of LED’s indicates transmission/reception ofdata on its RS 232/RS 485 port. These LED’s are invaluable in visual troubleshooting of communications.

The Telebyte converter has two sets of dB 25 connectors. One connector is a standard RS 232 interfacewhereas the other connector is the RS 485/RS 422 interface. Switches 1 and 2 configure the RS 485 interface.A DTE/DCE (Data Terminal Emulation / Data Communication Emulation) switch configures the RS 232 pinsdetermining where the data is expected (DTE = Data is Transmitted on Pin 2 and Data is Receive on Pin 3| DCE= Data is Transmitted on Pin 3 and Data is Received on Pin 2) on the RS 232 interface. Furthermore, Switch 2configures the RS 485-control mode from the RS 232 port. In two-wire emulation, data control may occur fromthe RS 232 port’s RTS (Request To Send) line or whether the data on the TD (Transmitted Data) pin is sensed. Ifthe ABB device is a MSOC, GPU 2000R, TPU 2000R, DPU 2000R, DPU 2000, DPU 2000 and DPU 1500R, nodata handshaking is permitted, thus the RS 232/485 converter must be configured for TD (Transmitted Data)mode. However, if the device attaching to the RS 232 port is a host which utilizes RTS/CTS (Request To Send/Clear To Send) handshaking, the unit must be configured using the RTS dipswitch settings as illustrated in Figure1. Additional information on the TELEBYTE 245 Optically Isolated converter is available on their website atwww.telebyteusa.com.

There are several steps required to successfully install a communication network using a physical interfaceconverter. They are:1. Knowledge of the RS 232 interfaces. (What type of handshaking is employed?, Is the port DCE or DTE

emulation?, Does the program executing on the attached device require certain signals such as CTS [ClearTo Send], RTS [Request To Send], CD [ Carrier Detect], DTR [Data Terminal Ready])? , What is the voltageof the RS 232 interface signals?)

2. Knowledge of the available power required. (If the converter requires external power, what is the voltagerequired?)

3. Knowledge of the RS 485 devices connected (2 Wire or 4 Wire?, Biasing Required?, Length of network?,Number of Devices Attached? Are the devices isolated?)

4. Proper installation of bias resistors.


245

5. Proper installation of termination resistors.6. Proper selection and installation of the physical cable medium.7. Proper configuration of the RS 232/485 physical interface switches and dipswitches.

SW 11 2 3 4

SW 21 2 3 4

RS232TD RD

RS422/485TD RD

TELEBYTE 245 OPTICAL ISOLATOR CONVERTER

The 245 uses Pin 2 (TX/RX -) & Pin 14 (TX/RX +), Pin 7 is Ground

for its connections to the Two Wire RS-485 Relay.

RS 232 RS485/RS422

SW 1 SW 2

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 UP DOWN UP DOWN X DOWN UP Y

UP UP DOWN UP X DOWN UP Y

RS 485 SWITCH MODE (2 wire)

TRANSMIT DATA CONTROL

RTS DATA CONTROL

X = TERMINATION RESISTOR , UP = INSERTED : DOWN = OUT Y = DON’T CARE

DTE DCE

Figure 1 – Telebyte Dipswitch Settings

RS232 Configuration And Cabling

The Telebyte RS 232 section of the converter uses the following pins:

Pin 2 – Transmit DataPin 3 - Receive DataPin 7 - Ground

The RS 232 connector on the converter is a DB 25 male connector.

Depending upon the dipswitch settings, the following pins are used for transmit data control.

Pin 4 – Request To SendPin 5 – Clear To Send.

Although the TELEBYTE converter does use handshaking and control of the DTR signal (Pin 20), its use is notcovered in this application note.

The Telebyte converter is an actively powered device requiring attachment to a supplied power transformer. Thistransformer supplies power to both ports on the unit. No additional power supplies are required for this converterto operate.

The TELEBYTE converter has an additional dipswitch configuring the RS 232 port for DCE or DTE configuration.Figures 2 and 3 illustrate cable pinouts to connect a PC or ABB to connect to a device. If the converter isattached to a PC Host device or an ABB IED, a straight through cable may be used (or a 9 pin to 25 pin cable) toattach the devices. The DTE/DCE switch must be placed in the DCE position due to the nature of RS 232connections. If additional discussions of RS 232 are required, please consult the ABB Faxback System (610-877-0721) or the ABB website (www.abb.com/substationautomation). Several documents are available explaining RS 232 communication. The TELEBYTE converter has a DB 25 connector whereas the ABB IED’s and mostpersonal computers have DB 9 connectors. Figures 2 and 3 illustrate the cable connections are handshaking isused (RTS/CTS) control or if no handshaking (data control using the Transmitted Data line) is employed.Configuration of the data control handshaking mode is performed via the dipswitches located at the side of theconverter. Refer to Figure 1 of this document for dipswitch configuration.


246

TELEBYTE 245 Converter DEVICE

3 Receive Data 2 Transmit Data2 Transmit Data 3 Receive Data7 Ground 5 Ground4 Request To Send 7 Request To Send5 Clear To Send 8 Clear To Send



Cable “A”- RS 232 Cable for Connection from a NODE (DTE OR DCE) and the TELEBYTE converter configured correctly (DTE DEVICE AND TELEBYTE SWITCH IN DCE MODE --OR-- DCE DEVICE AND TELEBYTE SWITCH IN DTE MODE). DATA CONTROL RTS/CTS HANDSHAKING EMPLOYED.

Figure 2 – RS 232 Cable Pinout With Handshaking Incorporated (See Figure 1 For DipswitchSettings)

TELEBYTE 245 Converter DEVICE

3 Receive Data 2 Transmit Data2 Transmit Data 3 Receive Data7 Ground 5 Ground



Cable “A”- RS 232 Cable for Connection from a NODE (DTE OR DCE) and the TELEBYTE converter configured correctly (DTE DEVICE AND TELEBYTE SWITCH IN DCE MODE --OR-- DCE DEVICE AND TELEBYTE SWITCH IN DTE MODE). NO HANDSHAKING Data Control via the Transmitted Data (TD) line.

Figure 3 – RS 232 Cable Connections When No Handshaking Is Used. (See Figure 1 ForDipswitch Setting)

Power Requirements

The TELEBYTE converter is available using a variety of power supply options. The converter is supplied with apower converter, which attaches to which attaches to the device. For current options, please consult theTELEBYTE website.


The TELEBYTE converter supports RS 422, 4 Wire RS 485 and 2 Wire RS 485 connectivity. The ABB line ofprotective relays supports 2 Wire RS 485 connectivity. The dipswitch settings in Figure 1 are given only for theRS 485 two wire options. If additional configuration information is desired for RS 485 4 wire or RS 422configuration please consult the TELEBYTE website.

The attractive feature of the TELEBYTE converter is the isolation of the RS 232 and RS 485/422 ports fromexternal power supplies. This feature is important especially in utility applications where external noise is anissue.

RS 485 cabling is usually the source of most communication issues. Several issues must be remembered wheninstalling such a cable:

1. In attachment to ABB relays in a Utility installation, one must remember to use a cable with 3 wires and ashield. Refer to Figures 4 through 7 for ABB recommended cables.


247

2. Termination must be attached to the extreme ends of the cable. If ABB relays are at the extreme ends of thecable, internal termination resistors are available to provide termination. If the TELEBYTE converter isinserted at the end of the cable, Switch Bank 2, Dipswitch position 1 inserts or removes a 120 ohm resistor inthe circuit.

3. The cable attaching the nodes must be daisy- chained. Drops, Taps and stubs of cables are not supported.The addition of terminals, drops, taps, and cable stubs increase the signal reflections thus increasing thepossibility of communication errors.

4. The CABLE SHIELD is grounded at one place only. The cable shield is continuous through all nodes, but it isisolated from the ground potential at each device.

5. The ABB protective device RS 485 ports are optically isolated, the ground wire must be attached to the shieldground at one place only. This is required to reference the field side of the device interface to a commonreference.

RS485 Line Termination

RS 485 2 Wire connection diagrams are referenced in Figures 4 through 7. Figures 4 and 5 use the internalresistors within the DPU, GPU, TPU and MSOC units. Figures 6 and 7 illustrate an alternate method of usingexternal resistors to provide biasing and line termination.


ECEC EC


EC




+ 5 V

120 Ohms

470 Ohms

470 Ohms

Jumper J8 “IN

Jumper J 7 “IN”


TX/RX -

Topology Diagram for RS 485 Multi-drop Architecture - if jumpers are insertedon end units providing for proper termination.

* See Note A.


120 Ohms

Jumper J8 “Out”


TX/RX -


TE

LEB

YT

E 245

RS

232/ RS

422/485

BANK SW 2Dipswitch 1 = DOWN (Term Out)

Figure 4 – RS 485 2 WIRE TERMINATION WITH THE RS 232/485 Converter INLINE and ABBProtective Relays At End Of Line Locations


ECEC

EC


EC




+ 5 V

120 Ohms

470 Ohms

470 Ohms

Jumper J8 “IN

Jumper J 7 “IN”


TX/RX -

Topology Diagram for RS 485 Multi-drop Architecture - if jumpers are insertedon end units providing for proper termination and converter is at End Unit.

* See Note A.


TE

LEB

YT

E 245

RS

232/ RS

422/485

BANK SW 2Dipswitch 1 = IN (Term Resistor IN)

Figure 5 – Termination Using Internal Jumpers And Converter As An End Unit

One should recognize that termination is at both extreme ends of the cable. Also Figures 4 and 5 have the cabledaisy-chained, thus minimizing communication signal reflections.


248

Cable “A”See Attached Diagrams

ECEC EC


EC


Three-wire cable withshield. Cable “B” - see attached diagram.


Topology Diagram for RS 485 Multi-drop Architecture - if external resistors areinstalled providing proper termination. NOTE: Termination at end units.

55 56 57 58 59 60 61 -----

475 Ohms475 Ohms

120Ohms

AUX Port

* - See note A


55 56 57 58 59 60 61 -----

120Ohms

AUX Port

TE

LEB

YT

E 245

RS

232/ R

S42

2/485

BANK SW 2Dipswitch 1 = DOWN (Term Out)

Figure 6 – Termination Using External Resistors And The Telebyte Converter Being An “In-Line”Unit


ECEC

EC


EC

Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 31




55 56 57 58 59 60 61 -----

475 Ohms475 Ohms

120Ohms

AUX Port

* - See note A


TE

LEB

YT

E 245

RS

232/ RS

422/485

BANK SW 2Dipswitch 1 = UP (Term IN)Unit 3

Figure 7 - Termination Using External Resistors On The IED’s And Using The Telebyte ConverterAs An End Unit

RS485 Biasing

Figures 4 through 7 illustrate the addition of resistors between the TX/RX (+) line and +V, and TX/RX (-) line andground. These resistors are called bias resistors. Bias resistors are inserted at one node only, preferably at oneextreme end of the network.

The TELEBYTE 245 is a “passive bias” unit in that when no device is communicating on the network, the datalines float. With the addition of the Pull-Up and Pull –Down resistors, the line is biased when no device is drivingthe lines. Biasing reduces the communication lines from being saturated with RFI or EMI induced noise frombeing coupled on the line. Addition of biasing on the network reduces the induced noise on the line.

The typical utility installation is an electrically noisy environment. Addition of data line biasing is recommended.

RS485 Conductor Connectivity

The TELEBYTE unit uses the following pins for RS 485 communication:PIN 2 - TX/RX (A) or TX/RX (-) or APIN 14- TX/RX (B) or TX/RX (+) or BPIN 7 – GROUND

The TELEBYTE interface is a DB 25 FEMALE interface.


249

Figures 8 and 9 illustrate the individual conductor connectivity for attaching the ABB protective relays in theDPU/TPU/2000 and the DPU/TPU/GPU 2000R. It is important to note that Figures 8 and 9 illustrate only theattachment of each device terminal. EACH NODE MUST BE DAISY-CHAINED AS ILLUSTRATED IN FIGURES4 THROUGH 7.

3

55 56 57 58 59 60 61 -----



at one point

3

55 56 57 58 59 60 61 -----


3

55 56 57 58 59 60 61 -----



Shield Isolated

Shield isisolated


*SeeNote


TE

LEB

YT

E 245

RS

232/ RS

422/485

Pin Pin Pin 2 14 7

Figure 8 – Conductor Connectivity Diagram For The 2000R Products And The TelebyteConverter “Inline”

74 73 72 71 70 69 68 -----



at one point

74 73 72 71 70 69 68 -----


74 73 72 71 70 69 68 -----


Shield Isolated

Shield isisolated


*SeeNote


Pin Pin Pin 2 14 7

TE

LEB

YT

E 245

RS

232/ RS

422/485

Figure 9 - Conductor Connectivity Diagram For The DPU/TPU 2000 Products

If an ABB relay uses a TYPE 8 card, COM PORT 3 is actually an RS 485 port presented in a DB 9 format. ThePin designation is presented in Table 1 and lists the cross listing for the AUX COM connector present on the2000R product and 2000-product line. As illustrated in Figures 7 and 8, the AUX COM PORT connections aregiven. If one is installing RS 485 on a TYPE 8 card, both the AUX COM PORT and COM 3 have RS 485connectivity available.


250

Table 1 - RS485 Communication Card RS485 Cross-Reference List

PINDESIGNATION

COM 3 TYPE 8 COMPORT (2000R Family)

AUX COM PORT(2000R Family)

AUX COM PORT(2000 Family)

+ 5 VDC 8 60 77RS485 Common 7 57 74RS-485 (-) 2 56 73RS-485 (+) 1 55 72

Wire attachment on an RS 485 TYPE 8 card’s COM 3 DB 9 port can be tricky in an in-line installation. ABB has aspecial connector, which changes the female DB 9 port into a PHOENIX contact 9-pin connector (similar in formatto the AUX COM PORT). The ABB part number of this 9 Pin male to Phoenix Card Connector is ABB part602133-009. The same part is also available from Phoenix Contact and the part number is 27 61 50 9.

Troubleshooting

The TELEBYTE RS 232/RS485 converter Model Number 245 has the advantage of four LED’s present at the sideof the unit (as indicated in Figure 1) indicating RS232 port transmit data, RS232 port receive data, RS 485 porttransmit data and RS 485 port receive data. Visual indication of these LED’s should allow the implementor totroubleshoot a unit, which does not communicate at all.

If communication messages do not appear to be transferred from the RS 232 port to the RS 485 port, one shouldinvestigate wiring, DTE/DCE emulation switches, and the wiring on the RS 232 and RS 485 ports.If the error rate of communication message transmission and reception is high, investigate wiring in the areas of:1. Biasing of the cable in only one location.2. Installation of termination resistors at two nodes only (at both remote ends).3. Cable installation with three wires AND A SHIELD. REMEMBER SHIELD IS NOT GROUND.4. DAISY- CHAINING the RS 485 wiring so no in-line stubs, taps, and junction strips are inserted in the unit.5. Incorrect installation of the Shield (connected at in line nodes and isolated at ground).6. Incorrect lengths of RS 485 or RS 232 cables (3000 feet = RS 485 or 50 feet = RS 232).7. Incorrect selection of “handshake control” for operation with the IED or Host (ABB IED’s do not employ

handshaking. Some hosts require RTS/CTS handshaking or the CD and DTR signal must be looped back inthe cable.)

Conclusion

There are many converters available on the market. Successful communication can result in using manymanufacturers’ physical interface converters. Success in implementing a physical interface relies on theimplementor’s knowledge of the software control of the physical interface, IED physical interface operation andknowledge of the particular brand of converter.

Contributed by:John PopiakRevision 0, 03/01


251

Appendix F – B & B RS 232/485 Converter Connection to ABBRelays

ABSTRACT: There are many RS 232 to RS 485 converters on the market. Although ABB cannot and does notendorser a particular manufacturer of product, it does document several manufacturers’ products with their use insystems using ABB protective relays. This application note illustrates the setup and connection of B & B Models485HSPR and 485 OISPR optically isolated RS 232 to RS485 (2-wire) physical interface converters.

Typical Installation

The ABB protective relay is designed with a variety of physical communication interfaces. The ABB distributionrelays such as the MSOC, GPU 2000R, TPU 2000R, DPU 2000R, DPU 2000, DPU 2000 and DPU 1500R areavailable with an RS 232, and/or RS 485 port(s).

Other devices such as the PONI M card for the REL 356 have only an RS 485 port.

Many host devices only have an RS 232 port(s). A method to connect such a device is required. Severalconverters are available to transform the physical interface on a device from RS 232 to RS 485. The advantagesof RS 485 are that many devices may be attached to a single host in a multi-drop topology. RS 485 maycommunicate with up to 32 devices with an addressable protocol. An advantage of the B & B model converters485HSPR and 485 OISPR is that, like the ABB protective relay, they are isolated devices. The B & B converterslisted in this document require special configuration in order to communicate with an ABB device. Since the ABBprotective relay RS 232 com port does not use handshaking, external power must be supplied to the unit usingboth the supplied unit converter and an additional converter to assert the circuitry required for RS 232.

General Information

Figure 1 illustrates the packaging of the B& B converter. The B & B Converter has no visual indication ofcommunication capability. One should use a communication analyzer to troubleshoot during commissioning ofthe system. Specifications for the physical interface converters are available from the B & B web-site at www.bb-elec.com.

The B & B Model 485HSPR and 485OISPR converters have two sets of dB 25 connectors. One connector is astandard RS 232 interface whereas the other connector is the RS 485/RS 422 interface. The B & B convertershave a DB 25 female connector for the RS 232 physical interface. The emulation is DTE. Thus Pin 2 is TransmitData (Data shall be received from the device attached to the converter on that pin) and Pin 3 is Receive Data(Data is transmitted from the B & B converter to the device attached on that pin). NOTE that the DPU, TPU,GPU, MSOC are DTE RS 232 emulation’s at their port.

485 OISPR Converter RS 232 Interface Considerations

The 485OISPR converter is an economical device allowing transformation of RS 232 signals to a RS 485 or RS422 format. The RS 485/422 format may be configured via two jumpers located internally to the unit. JP 2provides for RS 232 Transmit data control. Data sensed on Pin 2 of the converter’s RS 232 port shall place theconverter in the transmit mode. The turnaround time is specified to be 1 mS.

If the ABB device is a MSOC, GPU 2000R, TPU 2000R, DPU 2000R, DPU 2000, DPU 2000 or DPU 1500R, nodata handshaking is permitted, thus the RS 232/485 converter must be configured for TD (Transmitted Data)mode (JP 2 inserted). Also, since no power is provided on the DTR, DSR, CD, RTS, or CTS pins from theaforementioned devices, external power must be provided on the RS 232 port at the converter end. Themanufacturer recommends that a supply of +12 VDC be provided between pins 25 and 12.

If the device attached to the 232 port is a personal computer or other device using the aforementioned pins (DTR[ pin 20 on a 25 pin connector or pin 4 on a 9 pin connector], DSR [Pin 6], CTS [Pin 4 on a 25 pin connector or pin


252

8 on a 9 pin connector], RTS [Pin 5 on a 25 pin connector or pin 7 on a 9 pin connector], It is advisable to loopthem back in the cable to enable the appropriate program to operate.

For connection to ABB protective relays and software packages using ECP for configuration via Standard 10 Byteprotocol ports, it is recommended that JP 2 be inserted for RS 232 TD mode with no data echo, and JP 4 beinserted for RS 485 2 Wire emulation Half Duplex mode.

Please refer to document 485 OISPR1997 for additional information on this converter.

485 HSPR Converter RS 232 Interface Considerations

The Model 485HSPR converter allows devices, which require handshaking. Jumpers JP 2, JP 3, and JP 4 maybe configured for handshaking. However, as stated previously, If the ABB device is a MSOC, GPU 2000R, TPU2000R, DPU 2000R, DPU 2000, DPU 2000 and DPU 1500R, no data handshaking is permitted, thus the RS232/485 converter must be configured for TD (Transmitted Data) mode. However, if the device attaching to theRS 232 port is a host which utilizes RTS/CTS (Request To Send/ Clear To Send) handshaking, the unit must beconfigured for handshaking.

For connection to ABB protective relays and software packages using ECP for configuration via Standard 10 Byteprotocol ports, it is recommended that JP 1 is removed (2 Wire RS 485 mode enabled), JP 3 shall be removedwhile JP 2 and 4 shall be inserted. The combination of jumpers allow RS 485 4 wire control using the RS 232Transmit Data Line to provide receiver turn-around and control. As stated previously, this is required since theaforementioned relays do not provide power through the aforementioned pins.

Please refer to document 485 HSPR1896 for additional information on this converter.

Converter Baud Rate Considerations

According to the manufacturer, the standard off- the shelf configuration for the B & B converters B & B Model485HSPR and 485OISPR will communicate to a variety of devices using various baud rates. However, thestandard model uses an RC (Resistive – Capacitive) circuit controlling timeout. The standard unit is configured tooperate at 9600 baud. If other baud rates are required, C9 and C 15 must be un-soldered from the circuit boardand the acceptable combinations of the device must be inserted to provide for proper communication. Pleaserefer to the appropriate B& B documentation for the correct resistor and capacitor combinations for your baud rateand application.

Successful Communication

There are several steps required to successfully install a communication network using a physical interfaceconverter. They are:

1. Knowledge of the RS 232 interfaces. (What type of handshaking is employed?, Is the port DCE or DTEemulation?, Does the program executing on the attached device require certain signals such as CTS [ClearTo Send], RTS [Request To Send], CD [Carrier Detect], DTR [Data Terminal Ready])? , What is the voltageof the RS 232 interface signals?)

2. Knowledge of the available power required. (If the converter requires external power, what is the voltagerequired?)

3. Knowledge of the RS 485 devices connected (2 Wire or 4 Wire?, Biasing Required?, Length of network?,Number of Devices Attached? Are the devices isolated?)

4. Proper installation of bias resistors.5. Proper installation of termination resistors.6. Proper selection and installation of the physical cable medium.7. Proper configuration of the RS 232/485 physical interface switches and dipswitches.


253

TELEBYTE 245 OPTICAL ISOLATOR CONVERTER

The uses Pins 2 and 5 (TX/RX - or [A]) & Pins 14 and 17 (TX/RX +

or [B]), Pin 7 is Ground for its connections to the

Two Wire RS-485 Relay.

RS 232 RS485/RS422Female Connector Male Connector

485 HSPR 485IOSPR

JP1 JP2 JP3 JP 4 JP2 JP4 X X X X

X X NA NA

Jumper for MODE (2 wire) RS 485

TRANSMIT DATA CONTROL

RTS DATA CONTROL

X = Jumper Inserted , NA = Not Applicable.

Figure 1 – B & B Jumper Settings


The B & B RS 232 section of the converter uses the following pins for connection to ABB protective relay deviceswithout handshaking:

Pin 2 – Transmit DataPin 3 - Receive DataPin 7 - Ground

The RS 232 connector on the converter is a DB 25 female connector.

Although the B & B 485HSPR converter does use handshaking and control of the DTR signal (Pin 20), its use isnot covered in this application note.

The B & B converter requires power on the unit via a DC transformer supplied with the unit. Also the B & Bconverter requires power on the RS 232 side. If ABB relays are used with this converter, additional +12 VDCmust be supplied on pins 12 and 25 as illustrated in Figures 2 and 3.

The B & B converter is designed for DTE configuration. Figures 2 and 3 illustrate cable pinouts to connect a PCor ABB to connect to a device. Cable connections are illustrated as such. If additional discussions of RS 232 arerequired, please consult the ABB Faxback System (610-877-0721) or the ABB website(www.abb.com/substationautomation). Several documents are available explaining RS 232 communication. The B & B converter has a DB 25 connector whereas the ABB IED’s and most personal computers have DB 9connectors. Figures 2, 3, 4, and 5 illustrate the cable connections are handshaking is used (RTS/CTS) control orif no handshaking (data control using the Transmitted Data line) is employed. Configuration of the data controlhandshaking mode is performed via jumpers located at the side of the converter. Refer to Figure 1 of thisdocument for jumper configuration.


254

B & B Electonics Converter DEVICE

3 Receive Data 2 Transmit Data2 Transmit Data 3 Receive Data7 Ground 5 Ground4 Request To Send 7 Request To Send5 Clear To Send 8 Clear To Send25 --------- + 12 VDC ***12 ---------- 12 VDC GROUND ***



Cable “A”- RS 232 Cable for Connection from a DCE NODE and the B & B converter. (*** NOTE POWER MUST BE SUPPLIED BY the DEVICES PINS 7 or 8 FOR DEVICE OPERTION OTHERWISE ADD POWER AS ILLUSTRATED).

Figure 2 – RS 232 Cable Pinout Handshaking Incorporated (See Figure 1 For Jumper SettingsAccording To Model. DTE To DCE Connection (9 Pin To 25 Pin RS 232 Converter Connection)

B & B Electronics Converter DEVICE

3 Receive Data 2 Transmit Data2 Transmit Data 3 Receive Data7 Ground 5 Ground25 ---- +12 VDC12 ----- 12 V GROUND



Cable “A”- RS 232 Cable for Connection from a DCE NODE and the B & B converter. NO HANDSHAKING Data Control via the Transmitted Data (TD) line.

Additional External Supply

Figure 3 – RS 232 Cable Connections When No Handshaking Is Used. See Figure 1 For JumperSettings. DTE To DCE Connection. (9 Pin To 25 Pin RS 232 Connection)

B & B Electonics Converter DEVICE

3 Receive Data 3 Receive Data2 Transmit Data 2 Transmit Data7 Ground 5 Ground4 Request To Send 7 Request To Send5 Clear To Send 8 Clear To Send25 --------- + 12 VDC ***12 ---------- 12 VDC GROUND ***



Cable “A”- RS 232 Cable for Connection from a DTE NODE and the B & B converter. (*** NOTE POWER MUST BE SUPPLIED BY the DEVICES PINS 7 or 8 FOR DEVICE OPERTION OTHERWISE ADD POWER AS ILLUSTRATED).

Figure 4 – RS 232 Cable Pinout Handshaking Incorporated (See Figure 1 For Jumper SettingsAccording To Model. DTE To DTE Connection (9 Pin To 25 Pin Rs 232 Converter Connection)


255

B & B Electronics Converter DEVICE

3 Receive Data 3 Receive Data2 Transmit Data 2 Transmit Data7 Ground 5 Ground25 ---- +12 VDC12 ----- 12 V GROUND



Cable “A”- RS 232 Cable for Connection from a DTE NODE and the B & B converter. NO HANDSHAKING Data Control via the Transmitted Data (TD) line.

Additional External Supply

Figure 5 – RS 232 Cable Connections When No Handshaking Is Used. See Figure 1 For JumperSettings. DTE To DTE Or Connection. (9 Pin To 25 Pin RS 232 Connection)


The B & B converters covered in this note support RS 422, 4 Wire RS 485 and 2 Wire RS 485 connectivity. TheABB line of protective relays supports 2 Wire RS 485 connectivity. The jumper settings in Figure 1 are given onlyfor the RS 485 two wire options. If additional configuration information is desired for RS 485 4 wire or RS 422configuration please consult the manufacturer’s documentation referenced within this note.

The attractive feature of the B & B converter is the isolation of the RS 232 and RS 485/422 ports from externalpower supplies. This feature is important especially in utility applications where external noise is an issue.

RS 485 cabling is usually the source of most communication issues. Several issues must be remembered wheninstalling such a cable:

1. In attachment to ABB relays in a Utility installation, one must remember to use a cable with 3 wires and ashield. Refer to Figures 4 through 7 for ABB recommended cables.

2. Termination must be attached to the extreme ends of the cable. If ABB relays are at the extreme ends of thecable, internal termination resistors are available to provide termination. If the B & B converter is inserted atthe end of the cable, insert a termination resistor of 120 ohms at that end as illustrated in the illustrations 6through XX.

3. The cable attaching the nodes must be daisy- chained. Drops, Taps and stubs of cables are not supported.The addition of terminals, drops, taps, and cable stubs increase the signal reflections thus increasing thepossibility of communication errors.

4. The CABLE SHIELD is grounded at one place only. The cable shield is continuous through all nodes, but it isisolated from the ground potential at each device.

5. The ABB protective device RS 485 ports are optically isolated, the ground wire must be attached to the shieldground at one place only. This is required to reference the field side of the device interface to a commonreference.

6. The manufacturer recommends that the ground be of an impedance of 100 ohms. If it is not, solder a resistorof 100 ohms in series with the signal ground as illustrated in the B & B manufacturer’s literature.


256

RS 485 Line Termination

RS 485 2 Wire connection diagrams are referenced in Figures 6 through 9. Figures 6 and 7 use the internalresistors within the DPU, GPU, TPU and MSOC units. Figures 8 and 9 illustrate an alternate method of usingexternal resistors to provide biasing and line termination.


ECEC EC


EC




+ 5 V

120 Ohms

470 Ohms

470 Ohms

Jumper J8 “IN

Jumper J 7 “IN”


TX/RX -

Topology Diagram for RS 485 Multi-drop Architecture - if jumpers are insertedon end units providing for proper termination.

* See Note A.


120 Ohms

Jumper J8 “Out”


TX/RX -


B &

B E

lelctronicsR

S 232/ R

S422/485

Figure 6 – RS 485 2 Wire Termination With The RS 232/485 Converter Inline And ABB ProtectiveRelays At End Of Line Locations


ECEC

EC


EC




+ 5 V

120 Ohms

470 Ohms

470 Ohms

Jumper J8 “IN

Jumper J 7 “IN”


TX/RX -

Topology Diagram for RS 485 Multi-drop Architecture - if jumpers are insertedon end units providing for proper termination and converter is at End Unit.

* See Note A.


B &

B E

lectronicsR

S 232/ R

S422/485

120 OhmsPin 2

Pin 14

Figure 7 – Termination Using Internal Jumpers And Converter As An End Unit

One should recognize that termination is at both extreme ends of the cable. Also Figures 4 and 5 have the cabledaisy-chained, thus minimizing communication signal reflections.


257


ECEC EC


EC





55 56 57 58 59 60 61 -----

475 Ohms475 Ohms

120Ohms

AUX Port

* - See note A


55 56 57 58 59 60 61 -----

120Ohms

AUX Port

B &

B E

lectronicsR

S 232/ R

S422/485

Figure 8 – Termination Using External Resistors And The B & B Electronics Converter Being An“In-Line” Unit


ECEC

EC


EC

Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 31




55 56 57 58 59 60 61 -----

475 Ohms475 Ohms

120Ohms

AUX Port

* - See note A


TE

LEB

YT

E 2

45R

S 2

32/ RS

422/485

Unit 3

120 OhmsPin 2

Pin 14

Figure 9 - Termination Using External Resistors On The IED’s And Using The B & B ElectronicsConverter As An End Unit

RS485 Biasing

Figures 6 through 9 illustrate the addition of resistors between the TX/RX (+) line and +V, and TX/RX (-) line andground. These resistors are called bias resistors. Bias resistors are inserted at one node only, preferably at oneextreme end of the network. Note: external resistors must be added with appropriate voltages providing fortermination as the diagrams illustrate.

The B & B ELECTRONICS 245 is a “passive bias” unit in that when no device is communicating on the network,the data lines float. With the addition of the Pull-Up and Pull –Down resistors, the line is biased when no device isdriving the lines. Biasing reduces the communication lines from being saturated with RFI or EMI induced noisefrom being coupled on the line. Addition of biasing on the network reduces the induced noise on the line.


258

The typical utility installation is an electrically noisy environment. Addition of data line biasing is recommended.

RS485 Conductor Connectivity

The B and B converters use the following pins for RS 485 communication:PINS 2 and 5 - TX/RX (A) or TX/RX (-) or APINS 14 and 17 - TX/RX (B) or TX/RX (+) or BPIN 7 – GROUND

The B & B ELECTRONICS interface is a DB 25 MALE interface.

Figures 10 and 11 illustrate the individual conductor connectivity for attaching the ABB protective relays in theDPU/TPU/2000 and the DPU/TPU/GPU 2000R. It is important to note that Figures 8 and 9 illustrate only theattachment of each device terminal. EACH NODE MUST BE DAISY-CHAINED AS ILLUSTRATED IN FIGURES6 THROUGH 9.

3

55 56 57 58 59 60 61 -----



at one point

3

55 56 57 58 59 60 61 -----


3

55 56 57 58 59 60 61 -----



Shield Isolated

Shield isisolated


*SeeNote


B &

B E

lectronicsR

S 232/ R

S422/485

Pins Pins Pin2 5 14 17 7

Figure 10 – Conductor Connectivity Diagram For The 2000R Products And The B & BElectronics Converter “Inline”

74 73 72 71 70 69 68 -----



at one point

74 73 72 71 70 69 68 -----


74 73 72 71 70 69 68 -----


Shield Isolated

Shield isisolated


*SeeNote


Pins Pins Pin2 5 14 17 7

B &

B E

lectronics

RS

232/ RS

422/485

Figure 11 - Conductor Connectivity Diagram For The DPU/TPU 2000 Products

If an ABB relay uses a TYPE 8 card, COM PORT 3 is actually an RS 485 port presented in a DB 9 format. ThePin designation is presented in Table 1 and lists the cross listing for the AUX COM connector present on the2000R product and 2000-product line. As illustrated in Figures 7 and 8, the AUX COM PORT connections aregiven. If one is installing RS 485 on a TYPE 8 card, both the AUX COM PORT and COM 3 have RS 485connectivity available.


259

Table 1 - RS485 Communication Card RS485 Cross-Reference List

PINDESIGNATION

COM 3 TYPE 8 COMPORT (2000R Family)

AUX COM PORT(2000R Family)

AUX COM PORT(2000 Family)

+ 5 VDC 8 60 77RS485 Common 7 57 74RS-485 (-) 2 56 73RS-485 (+) 1 55 72

Wire attachment on an RS 485 TYPE 8 card’s COM 3 DB 9 port can be tricky in an in-line installation. ABB has aspecial connector, which changes the female DB 9 port into a PHOENIX contact 9-pin connector (similar in formatto the AUX COM PORT). The ABB part number of this 9 Pin male to Phoenix Card Connector is ABB part602133-009. The same part is also available from Phoenix Contact and the part number is 27 61 50 9.

Troubleshooting

If communication messages do not appear to be transferred from the RS 232 port to the RS 485 port, one shouldinvestigate wiring, DTE/DCE emulation switches, and the wiring on the RS 232 and RS 485 ports.

If the error rate of communication message transmission and reception is high, investigate wiring in the areas of:

1. Biasing of the cable in only one location.2. Installation of termination resistors at two nodes only (at both remote ends).3. Cable installation with three wires AND A SHIELD. REMEMBER SHIELD IS NOT GROUND.4. DAISY- CHAINING the RS 485 wiring so no in-line stubs, taps, and junction strips are inserted in the unit.5. Incorrect installation of the Shield (connected at in line nodes and isolated at ground).6. Incorrect lengths of RS 485 or RS 232 cables (3000 feet = RS 485 or 50 feet = RS 232).7. Incorrect selection of “handshake control” for operation with the IED or Host (ABB IED’s do not employ

handshaking. Some hosts require RTS/CTS handshaking or the CD and DTR signal must be looped back inthe cable.)

8. Incorrect resistor selection for the baud rate used with the converterers. Please consult the B & B literaturefor correct C9 and R 15 component selection.

9. Power is not being supplied through the handshaking pins or the supply required for RS 232 pins 12 and 25 isabsent. Review and correct this installation.

Conclusion

There are many converters available on the market. Successful communication can result in using manymanufacturers’ physical interface converters. Success in implementing a physical interface relies on theimplementor’s knowledge of the software control of the physical interface, IED physical interface operation andknowledge of the particular brand of converter.

Contributed by:John PopiakRevision 0, 03/01

tpu dnp version 1 1 - abb group...tg 7.11.1.7-60 version 1.0 12/01 tpu2000/2000r dnp 3.0 automation...

Documents